CONTENTS

HEMMING, S. J.

Lower Murray shields: an historical perspective

HERCUS, L. A. & POTEZNY, V.

Locating Aboriginal sites: a note on J. G. Reuther and the Hillier map of 1904

HIRST, D. B.

A review of the genus Zsopeda L. Koch (Heteropodidae: Araneae) in Australasia with

descriptions of two new genera

HIRST, D. B.

Revision of Australian species of the genus Holconia Thorell (Heteropodidae: Araneae)

JONES, P. G.

The South Australian Museum’s nitrate negative copying project

KEAN, J.

Aboriginal-Acacia relationships in Central Australia

KERZHNER, I. M. & STROMMER, N. G.

Oriental and Australian species of the genus Prostemma Laporte (Heteroptera: Nabidae)

LEE, D. C. & BIRCHBY, C. M.

Ceroribatula gen. nov., Fovoribatula gen. nov. and Fovoribatulinae sf. nov. (Acarida:

Cryptostigmata: Oribatulidae) from South Australian soils

MORRELL, T.

Review of ‘Dreamings: The Art of Aboriginal Australia’

SUTTON, P. J.

The Aurukun Project

TYLER, M. J.

Amphibian type specimens in the South Australian Museum

VETH, P., HAMM, G. & LAMPERT, R. J.

The archaeological significance of the Lower Cooper Creek

WATTS, C. H. S.

Revision of Australian Hydrobiomorpha Blackburn (Coleoptera: Hydrophilidae)

Volume 24(1) was published on 21 August 1990.

Volume 24(2) was published on 24 January 1991.

ISSN 0376-2750

PAGES

125-138

139-15]

11-26

91-109

153-154

111-124

27-34

71-89

67-68

69-70

1-9

43-66

35-42

AMPHIBIAN TYPE SPECIMENS IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

MICHAEL J. TYLER

Summary

Type specimens of 95 species and sub-species of frogs (Amphibia : Anura) are housed in the South

Australian Museum. The collection includes holotypes and syntypes of 36 species. The majority of

species (55) is from Australia, and all but one of the remainder are from New Guinea and New

Britain. The total includes three fossil species.

AMPHIBIAN TYPE SPECIMENS IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

MICHAEL J. TYLER

TYLER, M.J. 1990. Amphibian type specimens in the South Australian Museum, Ree, S.Awsé,

Mus, 241); 1-9.

Type specimens of 9S species and sub-species of frogs (Aniphibia: Anura) are housed in the

Sourh Australian Museum. The collection includes holotypes and syntypes of 36 species. The

majority of species (95) is trom Australia, and all but one of the remainder are from New Guinea

and New Britain, The total inetudes three fossil species.

The significance of the type collection is demonstrated by the fact that it includes slightly

mare (han 25% of the extant frog fauna of Australia.

M.J. Tyler, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, South Australia S0QQ, Manuseripr

received & May 1989,

The first lype specimen of a frog to be lodged

inthe South Australian Museum was Crinia affinis

halmaturina Condon (1941) from Kangaroo Island.

Unfortunately the specimen involved cannot be

located, and could not be found in 1960 when the

enlire frog collection occupied only four small

shelves in a corner of the old spirit room. At that

time | asked Condon whether he could cast any

light on the whereabouts of the missing specinien,

but he was Unable to do so.

Somewhat fortuitously, the loss of the type af C

alfinis halmaturina is of historic rather than

scienulic significance, The Kangaroo Island

population cannot be distinguished from matnland

C. sieni/era Girard (1853), and at present there are

no grounds upon which subspecifie status for it can

be sustained.

It was not until 1963 that further type specimens

were added to the collection: A/y/a miicromembrana

Tyler and A. mintima Tyler. Bul in less than a

further 15 years (he collection had expanded to such

an extent that a list of type specimens was produced

(Tyler, 1976). In that list was included representatives

of 34 species and subspecies, and holotypes or

ayntypes of 2) species.

The need for an updated type list is dernonstrated

by the fact that the type collection has increased

by more than 150% since 1976. Il now includes 95

species and subspecies, including holotypes or

syntypes of 36 species. Furthermore the signilicance

of the collection is demonstrated by the presence

of the types of 55 Australian species, so representing

slightly more than 25% of the known frog fauna

of Australia,

AMPHIBIA: ANURA

Taumily Hylidae

Australobarrachus ilius Tyler, 1976

Trans, R, Soc, $. Aust. 10; 13,

Holotype: SAM PI8021, two fragments distal

portion of left ilium, Lake Palankarinna,

Etadunna Formation, S,A,, Tertiary.

Cyelorana cryptotis Tyler & Murtin, 1976

Rec. S. Aust, Mus, V7: 271.

Holotype: SAM R14716, Daly Waters, N-T., B. Low

and D.F. Gartside, 13 Dee. 197),

Cyeloruna thaculosus Tyler & Martin, 1976

Rec. 8S. Ausi, Mus, V7: 269,

Holotype: SAM R14719, Daly Waters, N/T, B. Low

and D.F, Gartside, 13 Dee. 197),

Paratypes: SAM RI4717+18 (collected with

holotype); SAM R7612, Doomadgee Mission,

Qld, G. Douglas, Feb. 1906; SAM RI4736,

Yennant Creek, N.T.. J.P. Field, April 1907.

Cyelorana maini Tyler & Martin, 1976

Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 17: 273,

Holotype: SAM R15191, Barrow Creek, NT, DLP,

Gartside and B. Low, 1! Dec. 1971,

Pararypes: SAM R15192, 10 km S Alive Springs,

NLT, 11 Nov. 1963; SAM R6311, 14715, 27 km

§ Alice Springs, N-T., M.R. Warburg, 1964; SAM

R13038 A-D, Toko Range, N-T.,'S,A. Parker, 20

Jan, 1972; SAM RI711, Well, No, 26, Canning

Stock Roule Expedition, W.A., April 1930-Aug.

1931; SAM R5979, 1534!-46, Mt Edwar, W.A.,

A.R. Main and G.M. Storr, Feb. 1961.

Cycloruna manya Van Beurden & McDonald, 1980

Trans, R. Soe, S&S. Aust. W4: 193.

Paralypes: SAM R17420-24, Airstrip, Coen, Qld,

R.G, Atherton and K.R. MeDonald, 6-8 March

1979,

Cyeloranu vagitus Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981

Ree. WE Aust. Mus. 9: 148,

Paratypes: SAM RI8008-10, junction Gt Northern

Hwy and road ta Derby, 41 km S Derby, W.A.,

A.H, Cross, M. Davies, A.A. Martin and M.).

Tyler, 14-21 Feb, 1981; SAM RI16535, Parry

Creek Road, Kununurra, W.A., ML Davies, A,A,

Martin and M.J. Tyler, 24 Feb. 1977.

Cyclorana verrucesys Tyler & Martin, (9746

Rec, S. Aust, Mus. 17: 267.

Paratype: SAM R1I4081, Sturt Ntl Pk, or Tiboo-

burra, W.SW., R. Galt, May 1974.

Hyla albolabris Wandolleck, 191)

Abh. K. 2001. Anihirap-ethn. Mus. Dresden 13(6):

12,

= Litorta albolabris (Wandolleck), vide Tyler (1971:

352).

Syntype: SAM R4947. Aitape, New Guinea, 0,

Schlaginhaufen, 1910.

Hyla bulmeri Tyler, 1968

Zool, Verh. (96): 56.

= Litoria bu/meri (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971; 352).

Holatype; SAM R5625, Glkm, Upper Aunjung

Valley, Schrader Mts, New Guinea, R.N.H.

Bulmer, 2 Jan, 1964.

Paratypes; SAM R5624, R&SI07 (same locality),

R.N.H. Bulmer, 17 Nov. 1963.

Hyla contrastens Tyler, 1968

Zool, Verh. (96): 72.

= Litoria contrastens (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971; 352).

Holotype: SAM R5845, Barabuna, nr Kundiawa,

New Guinea, F. Parker, 16 Aug, 1964.

Paratype: SAM R6450 (same data as holotype).

Hyla coplandi Tyler, 1968

Rec. S. Aust. Mus, 18(4): 716,

= Litoria coplandi (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971: 352).

Paratype: SAM R9103, Wave Hill, N.T., K.G. Buller,

8 Aug. 1960.

Hyla darsivenu Tyler, 1968

Zool. Verh. (96): 83.

= Litoria dorsivena (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971; 352),

Holotype: SAM R7901, Telefomin, New Guinea,

B, Craig, Novy. 1963.

Paratypes: SAM R7902-10 (same data as holotype).

(R7911 transferred to Museum of Narural

History, University of Kansas. Now KU 153143.)

Hyla leucova Tyler, 1968

Zool. Verh, (96); 119,

= Litaria leucova (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971: 353).

Holotype: SAM R646], Busilmin, New Guinea,

B. Craig, 1 May 1965.

Flyla meiriana Tyler, 1969

Rec, 8, Aust. Mus. 16(1): 2.

- Litoria meiriana (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971; 353).

Md. TYLER

Holotype: SAM R9082, 157 km N Mainoru, NT,

A, Fleming, R, Edwards and H, Bowshall, 19

Aug. 1967.

Paratypes: SAM R9014-32, 9034, 9074-81, 9083-85

(same data as holotype). (R9033 transferred to

Museum of Natural History, University of

Kansas. Now KU 153144,)

Hyla micramembhrana Tyler, 1963

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 86: 121,

= Litoria micramembrana (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971,

353)

Holotype: SAM R4150, Mt Podamp, nr Nonduegl_

New Guinea, M.J. Tyler, | April 1960.

Ayla miritima Tyler, 1963

Trans, R, Sow S. Aust. 86; 123.

= Litoria angiana (Boulenger), vide Tyler (197):

354).

Holotype: SAM R4ISL, Mintima, nr Kerowaghi,

New Guinea, M.J. Tyler, 1 June 1960.

Hyla modica Tyler 1968

Zool. Verh. (96): 135,

= Litoria medica (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971: 354).

Paratype: SAM R8108, Oruge, Eastern Highlands,

New Guinea, F. Parker, 18 April 1968.

Hyla multiplica Tyler, 1964

Amen Mus. Nevit. (2187): 2.

= Litoria multiplica (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971: 354).

Paratype: SMA R4946, Kassam, 4500 m, Kratke

Mts, New Guinea, H.M. Van Deusen, 8 Nov.

1959,

Ayla prora Menzies, 1969

Trans. R. Soe, §. Aust. 93° 165-

= Litoria prora (Menzies), vide Tyler (1971: 354).

Paratypes: SAM R10410-11, nr Efogi, Owen Stanley

Mts, New Guinea (9°9'S, 147°38°E), AL,

Menzies, 12 Dec, 1948.

Ayla spinifera Tyler, 1968

Zool. Verh, (96): 167.

= Litoria spinifera (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971: 354).

Paratypes: SAM R6928-31, Oruge, New Guinea,

F. Parker, 18 April 1965.

Hyla wisselensis Tyler, 1968

Zool. Verh, (96): 180.

— Litoria wissetensis (Tyler), vide Tyler (1971: 355).

Paratypes; SAM R5539-43, Enarotali, L. Paniai,

Wissel Lakes, Irian Jaya, M. Boeseman and Lb,

Holthius, 8 Jan. 1953.

Litoria brevipalmata Tyler, Martin & Watson, 1972

Proc. Linn. Soe. NSM 97): 82,

Holotype: SAM R11236, Ourimbah Creek, 8 km

NW Gosford, N,S.W,, FP. Parker, 29 Jan. 1971.

AMPHIBIAN TYPE SPECIMENS 4

Litoria exvophthalmia Tyler, Davies & Aplin, 1986

Trans. RB. Soc. S, Aust. VO: 63,

Paralypes: SAM R27831-32, Haia Village (6°42'S,

145°00'E), South Simbu Province, Paupa New

Guinea, K. Aplin, 14 June L984.

Literia glandulosa Tyler & Anstis, 1975

Rec. S, Aust. Mus. 17(5): 46.

Lileria subglandulosa Tyler & Anstis, vide Tyler

& Anstis (1983).

Holotype; SAM RI3504, Barwick Creek, Point

Lookout, ar Eboy, N.SW., M. Anstis, 24 Jan.

1973,

Paratypes: SAM R13508-10, Barwick and Bullock

Crecks, Ebor, M. Anstis, 24 Jan. 1973; R13060

(11 juveniles), Barwick Creek, M, Anstis, Jan.

1973; RI3303, Barwick Creek, M. Ansus, 10 Jan.

I97L; R13626-29, Point Lookoul, M. Anstis,

May 1973.

Literia longirostris Tyler & Davies, 1977

Copeia 1977: 620,

Pararypes; SAM RIS{90, 15221-22, Rocky River,

Mcillwraith Range, Cape York Peninsula, Old

(13°46'S, 14223" E), RS. Laverack, B. Gray and

RJ. Grimes, 26 Sept, 1975 (topotypes).

Litoria lorica Davies & MeDonald, 1979

Trans, BR. Sac. 8, Aust, V3; 170,

Paratypes: SAM R17348-S1, Alexandia Creek, mi

Thornton Peak, Qld (16°7°S, 145°20° BE), DW.

Winter and RG, Atherton, 10 Dee 1976

(topotypes).

Litoria pallida Davies, Watson & Martin, 1983

Trans. R, Sac, 8, Ause, WT: 101,

Holotype; SAM R19555, Gulungul Creek Crossing,

Arnhem Hwy, NT, G.A, Crook, 10 Dec 1978.

Paratypes: SAM R19539. 4 knot W Baralil Creek,

G.A.Crook, M. Davies anid M1. Tyler, 30 Nov,

1978; SAM R19549, 40 km N Elliot, NIL M.

Davies, A.A, Martin & M.J, Tyler, 16 Dee. 1980;

SAM RIO451-57, Sabiru Airstrip, NW, GA,

Crook, 4 Noy. 1978-7 Dee. 1979; SAM R19458,

1949]-504, 50 m N Retention Polid No, 2,

Djalkinarra Creek, Jabiru, N.T, GA. Crook, §

Dee. 1979; SAM R18459-62, Coonjimba

Billabong, N-T., G.A. Crook, 5 Dec, 1979, SAM

R19463, 19474-90, Cannon Hill, N.T., M. King,

1 Aug. 1976; SAM R19464, soak from ore body,

Jabiru, N.T,, M. Davies and M.J. Tyler, 29 Nov.

1978; SAM R19465, 4 km W Baralil Creek, N.T.,

M. Davies and MJ, Tyler, 30 Noy. 1978; SAM

R19466-69, McArthur R. Bridge on road lo

McArthur R. Sto, G.A, Crook, 24 Nov, 1979;

SAM R1947U-71, Gulungul Swarap, 150m SE

Gulungul Creek Crossing, Arqhem Hwy, GA.

Crook, | Feb, 1979; SAM R19472-73, 800 m W

Gulunyul Creek Crossing, Arnhem Hwy, G4,

Crook, J Feb. 1979; SAM R19506, Coonjimba

Billabong, NT, GA. Croak, 23 Oct. 1978; SAM

R19507, Jabiru Airstrip, ND, M. Davies and

M.L. Tyler) 29 Nov. 1978: SAM RIQS/I-13,

Collyer Lagoon, Carpentaria Hwy, NvT., GLA,

Crook and W. Acidler, 26 Sept. 1977, SAM

R195)4-33, L. Woods, NUT, G.A- Crook and W.

Zeidler, 5 Ocl. 1977; SAM R1YS40-48, Bullman

Hstd, Nt, R. Edwards, & Aug, 1966; SAM

R9602-03, 133 km N Mainoru, R. Edwards and

A, Fleming, 23 Aug. 1967; SAM R14775, 19508-

09, 16 km S Hooker, NT, A, Robinson, 5 tune

1975; SAM R19550-S1, Jabiru Airstrip, N-Y., M.

Cappo, M. Davies and M.S. Tyler, 10 Jan, 1981;

SAM R195352, 100m E Jim Jim turnoff, Arnhem

Hwy, M. Cappo, M, Davies, M.J. Tyler and G.I.

Watson, 4 Jan. 1981; SAM R195453-54, 800m

W Gulungul Crossing, Arnhem Hwy, NT, GA,

Crook, | Feb, 1979; SAM RI4774, 19510, 19 kim

N Laura, Qld, ALR. Robjnson, 23 Oct. 1974;

SAM _ R19535, Camballin, W.A., M. Davies,

A.A. Martin and M.J. Tyler, 18 Feb. 1980; SAM

R19536-38, 17% km BE Broome, W.A,, M, Davies,

A.A. Martin and M.J, Tyler, 17 Feb. 1980,

“Litoria personata Tyler, Davies & Marlin, L978

Trans. R. Soe. S. Aust. 106: 151.

Holotype: SAM R16773, Birndu, SE Cannan Hill

Stn, East Alligator River Regn, N.T. (12'32'S,

132°8'E), M. Davies, G. Miles and Mw. Tyler,

27 Nov, 1977; SAM RJ6774-75, Cannon Hill

Stn, N.f, G. Miles, Aug. 1977, SAM RILG776,

Bradshaw Creek, Cannon Hill, Nf, G. Miles,

2 Feb, 1977; SAM R16829, 16855-56, Cannon

Hill, G. Miles and M.J. Tyler, 26 April 1978;

SAM R16830-32 (topolypes), G. Miles and I.

Morris, 20 May 1978.

Literta piperala Tyler & Davies, 1985

Copeia WS: 145.

Paratypes: SAM R13887-90, Back Creck, Oakwood

Fire Trail, approx, 38 km SE Glen Innes, NSW,

(29°S0°S, 182"08°E), G, Webb and &. Mills, 27

March 19734 (lopotypes); SAM RI3884-86,

Diehard Creck, 45 km E Glen tines on Old

Gratton Road, N.SW,, G, Webb, E. Mills and

J, Barker,

Liforia guadrilineaia Tyler & Parker, 1974

Trans, R. Soc. §. Aust. 98(2): 71,

Holotype: SAM R13489, Jalan Trikora (= Trikora

Road), Merauke, Irian Java, & Parker, 4 March

1973.

Paratypes; SAM R13490-93,

holotype by F, Parker,

Litoria timita Tyler & Parker, 1972

Trans, R, Soe S, Aust, 86(3): (S87.

Holotype: SAM R11658, Menemsorac, Western

collected with

4 MI. TYLER

District, New Guinea, F. Parker, 30 March 1969,

Paratypes: SAM RI1659-6] (same data as

halatype).

Litdria tvleri Martin, Watson, Gartside, Littejoln

& Loftus-Hills, 1978

Proc, Linn Soc. NSE W030); 25,

Paratypes: SAM R12248, Lisarow, N.S.W. 1. Parker

and H. Ehmann, 25 Jan. 1971; SAM R12251-52,

| ml S, 6 ml W, Wyong, N.SMW., B Parker, H.

Ehmann und P. Krauss, 26 Jan. 1971; SAM

R12250, Ourimbah, N-SW., F Parker and H.

Ehmann, 25 Jan. 1971; SAM R1I2253, 12255,

Ourimbah, N-SW., F Parker, H, Ehmarin and

P. Krauss, 29 Jan, 1971,

Litoria umbonata Tyler & Davies, 1983

Copeia 1983; 803.

Paralypes: SAM R21529-32, Baliem Valley, 1600 m.

Irian Jaya, P.. Mathiessen, 8-10 June J961.

Litoria xanthomerd Davies, McDonald & Adams,

1986

Proc. R. Soc, Viet. 98: 66,

Paralypess SAM R24529-39, Hentierta Creek,

Palmerston NU Pk, Old (17°37'S, 14540 °R),

K_R. McDonald, 13 Feb, 1980 (topatypes); SAM

R16794-98, 24524-25, Oadgarra S.A. Old

(17°16'30"S, 145°40°E), K-R. MeDonald and

R.G. Atherton, 14 Feb. 1977; SAM R2426, Milaa

Milaa Falls, 2 km from Milaa Milaa, Qld

(17°30°S, 145°37°E), KR. MeDonald and R.G,

Zweifel, 16 Jan. 1981; SAM R24528, Kuranda

SE, 2.6 km along Black Mit Road from

Kuranda, Qld (16°48'S, 145°3'30"B), 24 Oct.

1981, K.R. McDonald, RG. Zweitel and W.

Hosmer; SAM R24529, nr Peeramon, Qld

(17°|9"S, 145°27°30"B), K.R. McDonald and

RG. Zweilel, [8 Jan. 1981; SAM R25736—40,

Lannereost S.P, nr Wallamin Falls, Qld, K-R-

MeDonald and P. Minton, 16 Feb, 1984,

Nvetimystes montana Parker, 1936

Ann. Mag. nat, Hist, 17: 80,

= Nyclinstes cheesmant (namen novam) Tyler

(1965: 268).

Paratype: SAM R9424, Mondo, New Guinea, Lb,

Cheesman, Formerly British Museum (Natural

History) 1947.2.10.93,.

Nyelimysies trachyvdermis Zweilel, 1983

Amer. Mus. Navit, (2759): 12.

Paratype: SAM R24079, ca 4000", Gapaia Creek,

berween Garaina and Saureli, Morabe Provinue,

Papua New Guinea, R.G. Zweifel, | Sept, 1969,

Nvetinuates sweifeli Tyler, 1967

Trans, R. Soe. S, Aust, 91; 191,

Holotype: SAM R5426, Telefomin, Wester High-

lands, New Guinea, B. Craig, 24 Nov. 1963.

Paratypes: SAM R&812-13, 8815-19 (same data as

holotype). (R8814 translerred to Museum of

Natural History, University of Kansas. Now KU

15345,)

Family Leptodactylidae

Arenophrvne rotunda Tyler, 1976

Rec. Wo Alust. Mus, 4: 45,

Paratype: SAM R14521, 100 m from False Entrance

Well Tank, Carrarang Stn, Shark Bay, WA.

(26°23'S, 11318 E) A, Baynes aiid TA. Smith,

24 Aug. 1970,

Crinta affinis halmaturina Condon, 194)

Ree. 5S. Aust, Mus, 7: U4.

— Crinia signifera Girard, vide Moore (1961: 234).

Holotype: SAM R2165, Flinders Chase, Kangaroa

Id, S.A., Tate Society, Jan. 1940, (Specimen

missing. Note; this specimen could not be found

when a specific search for i) was undertaken by

M.J. Tyler in 1960,)

Crinia riparia Littlejohn & Marlin, 1965

Copeia WE6S(3): 319.

Paraiypes: SAM R9LOI-02, Alligator Gorge,

Flinders Ranges, S.A.. M,J, Litthejohn, AA,

Martin and P. Rawlinson.

Glavertiu russell’ Loveridge, 1933

Ove, Pap. Boston Sov, Nat. Hist. 8: 89.

= Uperoaleiu rusyelli (Loveridge), vide Tyler etal.

(1981).

Paratype: SAM R9723, Creek flowing into

Gasvoyne R., ne Landor Stn, W.A,, L. Glauert,

Kyarranus kunddgungan iigram & Corben, 1975

Mein. Gld Mus, 17(2); 335.

Paralypes: SAM R13921-22, Mistake Mrs, ea 800

m, 83 km SW. Brisbane, Qld (27'53'S,

152°21'6), CAL Corben and ALK. Smyth, 3 Jaw.

1974,

Lechrivdus intergerivus Tyler, 1989

Trans. R. Soe. S. Aust, W3: 16.

Paralypes (lia) SAM P29742, Henk’s Hollow Sire;

SAM P29764-65, Last Minute Site; SAM

P29768 Gag Site; SAM P29734, 29743-44,

29757-62. Upper Site, SAM P29746-50, C,S.

Site: SAM P2975h, 297h6-67, Wayne's Wok Site;

SAM. P29729, 29751-55, Outasite Site; SAM

P29735-41, 29745, 29771, R.S.O, Site, (All sites

at Riversleigh Sm, Queenslard, Tertiary.)

Limnodruastes archeri Wher, 1982

Alcheringa 6: 101,

Holotype; SAM P23054, distal portion of left iliwin,

AMPIUBIAN TYPE SPECIMENS

fedford Locality on west side of Lake Palan-

kurinna, Etadunna Kormation, S.A., Tertiary.

Paratype: SAM P23055, distal portion of left jlium.

Datla as above.

Limnodynastes dimerili variewatus Martin, 1972

ust, J Zool. W: 181,

Paratypes: SAM R13174-75, 6 km N Cape Otway,

Vic, AJA. Martin, & Dec, 1976,

Mevisrolotis lignarius Tyler, Martin & Davies, 1979

Anst. J. Zo0l. 27: 137.

Paratypes: SAM R16228-29, L. Areyle-Kununurra

Road, 6.5 kni S Lake Areyle Tourist Village, L.

Argyle, W.A,, AVA, Martin and MJ, Tyler, 19

Feb. 1977 (topatypes); SAM RI6316 (type

locality), M. Davies, A.A. Martin and M.S. Tyler,

2| Feb, 1977; SAM _ R16317-21 (I'l progeny of

topoty pes); SAM R1G66U8, Gt Northern Hwy, 4.1

ki N Maguie Creek, W.A., M. Davies, ALA.

Martin and M.J. Tyler, 3 Feb. 1978; SAM

R1AA609, Cit Northern Hwy, 5.2 km S Beta Creck,

W.A., M. Davies, A.A, Martin and MJ, Tyler,

3 Feb. 1978; SAM R16322, 16377, Cannon Hill,

NT, G. Miles, 1977; SAM R16324-25, Rirndu

i Cannon Hill, Nw, M. Davies, G. Miles and

MJ. Tyler; SAM R16323, Mt Brockman Range,

NLT, R. Penawilley, 1973.

Mixophyes fleayi Corben & Ingram, 1987

Mem. Qld Mus, 25: 233..

Paratype: SAM R31036. No data.

Neobatrachus aguilorius Tyler, Davies & Martin,

198]

Ree. Wo Aust. Mus. 9. 155.

Pararypes: SAM R18012-14, 18032-33, L&i01-02,

10-4] km & Derby, W.A., M. Davies, AVA.

Martin and MJ. Tyler, 13-19 Feb. 1980,

Ranidelld bilingua Martin, Wher & Davies, L980

~ Crinia bilingua, vide Heyer ef al, (1982).

Copeia WSO: 94.

Paratypes: SAM R16837-39, Dead Horse Spring,

14 km NE Lake Areyle Tourist Village, L.

Argyle, WA. M. Davies, AJA. Marrin and ML.

ler, 19 Feb. 1977; SAM RI6S40-41, Spillway

Bridge, 11.5 kin N Lake Argyle Tourist Village,

W,A,, M. Davies, A.A. Martin und M.J. Tyler,

20 Feb. 1977; SAM Ri6842, 20 km NE Lake

Aveyle Tourist Village, L. Argyle, M. Davies,

A.A. Martin and M.). Tyler, 20 Feb. 1977; SAM

R16833, Ivanhoe Crossing, 11.5 km N

Kununurra, W.A., M. Davies, A.A, Martinand

M.J. Tyler, 25 Jan, 1978; SAM R16834-36),

Mitehell Plateau, W.A., M. Davies, W.E.

Duellmuan, A.A. Martin and M.J. Tyler, 26 Jani

Feb, 1978.

Ranidella remota Tyler & Patker 1974

Trans: Ro Sue. 8. Aust Y8(2)- 74,

— Crinfa reniota (Tyler & Parker), vide Hever ev

ul. ({982),

Holotype: SAM R13524, Morehead, Papua New

Guinea, F Parker, 18 June 1973.

Paratypes: SAM R13527-28, Gubam, 16.April 1972;

R13525-26, RIZ6KI-82, Morehead, [ Parker, 19

May 1969,

Rheobatrachus vilellinus Mahony, Tyler & Davies,

J984

Trans. R. Soe S. Aust, 18: 155,

Paralypes: SAM R25446-47, Bungella Nil Pk, Old,

KR. McDonald and G. Chester 10-12 Jan. 1984,

Uperoleiy urenicola Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981

Aust A Zool, Suppl. (78% 26.

Holotype: SAM R1I6991, Birndu, Gast Alligator

River Reen, NT. (12'28'S, 132°56°E), GA,

Crook, M. Davies, A.A. Martin and M.J. Tyler,

30 Nov. 1978.

Paratypes: SAM R16992-96, 17347, taken with the

holotype,

Uneroleia aspera ‘Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981

Ree. Wo Aust. Mus, 9 159.

Paralypes: SAM R18093-97, 28 km S Derby, WA.

(17°30'S, 123°43°E), M. Davies, A.A, Martin

and M.J. ler, 14 Feb. 1980 (rapotypes), SAM

RISO9S, Gt Northern Hwy, § km NE Broome,

M, Davies, AVA. Martin and MJ. Tyler, 15 Feb,

1980,

Uperaleia borealis Wher, Davies & Martin, (98!

Ausl J Zovl, Suppl (79): 30,

Paratypes: SAM R1I7077-78, 17083-84, Dead Horse

Spring, 3.7 km NE of Lake Argyle Tourist

Village, 1. Argyle, W.A,, M, Davies, A.A,

Martin aud M.J. Tyler, 19 Feb. 1977, SAM

RI7082, Stonewall Creek, 20 km NE L, Argyle,

W.A., M. Davies, A.A, Martin und M,.. Tyler,

2! Feb. 1977.

Uperbdleia capitulata Dayies, McDonald & Corben,

19K6

Proc. R. Soc. Viel. 98: 163.

Paralypes: SAM R29586-87, 64 km SW Bullow

Bowns Hstd, Qld, BG. McGreevy and 5,

Pickler, 2 Ovt. 1976; SAM R29588, Noccundra

Hotel, Qld, K.R. McDonald and DG, McGreevy,

30 Nev. 1975; SAM R29590, Boorara Stn, 32 km

N Hungerford, Qld, 8S. May, late 1976; SAM

R29589, Boorara Stn, DG. MeGreevy, 12 Jan,

1977; SAM R29591, Kine Tank, Ambathala

Nature Reltrence Sile, Qld (26700°S, 145°00'E),

KR. McDonald and DG. MeGreevy, 3 May

1979; SAM R29592-95, D.P. Swamp, Charleville,

Qld, P.D. MeRae, 10 Feb. 1976,

6 MI. TYLER

Uperoleia crassa Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981

Aust. £ Zool, Suppl. (79); 34.

Paratypes: SAM RI6904-18, 17079-80, Amax

Campsite, Mitchell Plateau, W.A.. M. Davies,

W.E. Ducllman, A.A. Martin and M.I Tyler,

26-31 Jan, 1978.

Uperovleia fusca Davies, MeDonald & Corben, 1986

Prog, R. Sec. Viet 88s 167,

Holotype: SAM R29596, S boundary Euneclla Nu

Pk, 1.2 km along Crediion Rd from Broken R.

crossing, Qld (21°10 1S"S, 148°30°10"B), MoT.

Tyler and K.R. McDonald, 26 Jun. L984.

Paratypes: SAM R1I2S90(12), Wyong, 16 kin S, 9.6

km W Ulong, N.SMW,, F Parker, H. Ehmann and

P. Krauss, 26 Jan. 1971; SAM R29S97-98,

Ourimbah Creek, N.SW., M, Mahony, 3 Noy,

1981; SAM R29599-607 (topelypes); SAM

R29608-13, Bellthorpe S.F, Qld (6°44'S,

152-3676), K.R. MeDonald, JS. McEvoy and

DG. Crossman, 27 Feb, 1976; SAM R29614-16,

Crows Nest NU Pk, Qld, KR. MeDonald, 14

Jan. 1974; SAM R29617, Mt Glorious, Qld, C.J).

Limpus and K.R, McDonald, 20 Feb, 1974, SAM

R29618, 2 km from Sunday Creek turnoff along

Jimna/Bellthorpe Rd, Qld (2642'S, 152°29°E),

K.R. MeDonald, 13 Dee, 1978: SAM R29619, or

Blue Lagoon Swamp, Moreton Id, Qld, K.R.

McDonald, 16 Nov, 1976.

Uperoleia glandulosa Davies, Mahony & Roberts,

(985

Trans, R. Soc, S, Aust, Wr 103.

Paralypes: SAM R27081-82, 3.2 km NE Winenoom

turnofl on Pr Hedland-Broome Rd, W.A., M.

Mahony and J.D. Roberts, 10 fan, 1983,

Uperoleta inundate Tyler, Davies. & Martin, 1981

Aust. £ Zool, Suppl. (79). 39.

Holotype: SAM RI7I82, Jabiru, East Alligator

River Rean, Nit, GA. Crook, 30.1.79.

Paratypes: SAM R16997, nr Mt Brovkman, N/E,

GA. Crook, M. Davies, A.A. Martin and M.I.

Tyler, 2 Dec. 1978; SAM R16999-17002, Jabiru

Airstrip, N-T,, G.A. Crook, 4 Dee, 1978; SAM

RI7182-90, 17216, Jabiru, N.T., G.A, Crook, 30

Jan, 1979, SAM RI7I91-92, Gulungul Swanip,

nv Jabiru, No. GiauA. Crook, 8 Jan. 1979 SAM

RI7193-94, 17217, Leanyer Swamp, Darwin,

NT., Le Morris, 31 Jan. 19797 SAM RI7195-96,,

5.7 km W Mary River Crossing, Arnhem Hwy,

GA. Crook, M. Davies, A.A. Martin and M.J.

Tyler, 21 Feb. 1979.

Uperaleia lithunoda Wher, Davies & Marlin, 1981

Aust, JE Zool, Suppl. (79): 43.

Paratypes: SAM R17008-10, Spillway Bridwe, 11.5

km NE Lake Argyle Tourist Village, L. Areyle,

W.A. (16°02"S, 128"47'E), M. Davies, A.A,

Martin and MJ. Tyler, 20 Feb, 1977 (topotypes);

SAM RI70I2, Kununurra, W.A., M, Davies,

A.A, Martin and M.J. Tyler, 23 Feb. 1977; SAM

RITON, Gt Northern Fwy, 8b km S Dunean

Hwy jutictton, W.A., M. Davies, A.A. Martin

and M.J, Tyler, 24 Jan. 1978; SAM R17220,

Granite Creek, 4.1 km NE Lake Argyle Tourist

Village, L. Argyle, WA. M. Davies, A.A.

Martin. and M.J, Tyler, 22 Feb. 1977; SAM

R17179-80, 17278, Arnhem Hwy at Fogg Dam

wwrnoft, NE, 24 km ESE Darwin, tL, Morris, 31

Jan, 1979; SAM RI7I81, 7 km W Mary R,

Bridge, Arnhem Hwy, No, GA. Crook, M.

Davies, A.A. Martin and M.J, Tyler, 21 Feb.

|979,

Uperoleia littlejahni Davies, McDonald & Corben,

1986

Prac. R. Soe. Vier, 9B: 174.

Paratypes; SAM R29620-21, Genre Creek, Qld

(19°33'S, 143°56'B), A, Taplin, 18 March 1984;

SAM R29622. Caerphilly Stn, Old (2103'S,

146°08'E), Bic. Lawrie, 3 March 1981; SAM

R29623, Strathtay, Qld (20°57'S, |44°12°B),

BC. Lawrie, 24 Aug. 1984; SAM R29624, Amber

Stn ca 1.6 kin from Frefch’s Crossing on Lynd

R., Old. K.R. McDonald and SK. Reardon, 15

Jan. 1980; SAM R29625-26, Walsh R.,

Watsonville, Qld (i7"2°S, Id4s-18"E), JW,

Winter, 24 Dec. 1973.

Uperoleia martini Davies & Liltlejahn, 1986

Trans. &. Sac, 8. Aust. Wr 129.

Parulypes: SAM R29648-50, 6 km NNE Yarra,

Vie, MJ, Littlejohn and TG, Littlejohn, 1 Bee,

1980; G.F. Watson and M.J, Littlejohn, 7 Oct.

1976,

Uperoleia mucrameles Tyler, Davies & Martin, 198!

Aust, 2 Zool, Suppl. (79); 46.

Holotype: SAM RI7I75, Tanami Desert, NJ

(28 38'S, 130/25"), M. Gillamand L. Andrews,

18 Jan. 1978.

Paratypes: SAM RI7176-78, 17221 (toporypes),

Uperoleia miniula Davies, McDonald & Corben,

1986

Prac, R. Soe. Vict, 88: 178.

Paratypes: SAM R29627, Lannercost'S.F., Olu, KR.

MeDonald and P. Minton, 16 Feb, 1984; SAM

R29628-40, Townsville Common, Townsville,

Old, BJ. Lyon, 9 March 1977, Cu). Limpus, KAR.

McDonald, 10 Feb. 1977, K.R, McDonald, 25

Nov, 1985; SAM R29641, Bazant Outstation.

Lakefield Nil Pk, KOR, MeDonald and Bu. Lyon,

23 Feb. 1981; SAM R29642, Weipa, Qld, KR.

MeDonald, 3 March J981; SAM R29643,

Bamaga, Qld, B.J. Lyon and C.J. Limpus, 14

Dey 1976; SAM R29644-45, Battery Sta, nr

AMPHIBIAN TYPE SPECIMENS 7

Snake Creek, Qld (19°27'S, 14§°39'BR), BC,

Lawrie, 3 Dee. 1981; SAM R29646, base of

Bluewater Range, K.R. McDonald, 3 Oct. 1983;

SAM R29647, L, Louisa, Qld (19"54'S,

144°15°B), S, Garnett, 18 Aug. 1984.

Uperoleia minima Tyler, Davies & Martin, 198]

Aust £ Zool, Suppl. (79 49.

Paratypes: SAM R1L7081, }7088-89, Amax Crusher

Site, 5km SW Mining Camp, Mitchell Plateau,

W.A. (1450'S, 125°50'E), M. Davies, A.A.

Martin and M.. Tyler, 31 Jan. [978 (topotypes);

SAM RI7085-87, M, Davies, A.A, Marlin and

M.S. Tyler, 14-18 Feb. 1979 (topotypes),

Uperoleia talpa Tyler, Davies & Martin, 198]

Aust, J Zool, Suppl (79): §2.

Paratype: SAM R17174, 24-41 km S Derby, W.A.,

M, Davies, A.A. Martin and M.J. Tyler, 13 Feb.

1979,

Uperoleia trachyderma Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981

Trans, R, Sac, S, Aust, WS: 149,

Holotype. SAM R20374, Gearge Redman

Causeway, 37 km N Elliot, NT (17°14'S,

133°28'B), M. Davies, A.A. Martin and M.J,

Tler, 16 Dec. L980.

Paratypes: SAM R20375-76 (topotypes).

Uperaleia tvleri Davies & Littiejohn, 1986

Trans, R. Soe, 8. Aust, (WO: 132

Paratypes: SAM R29653-58, Narrabarba, A.CT,,

M.J, Littlejohn and G.F, Watson, 24 Sept. 1985,

SAM R29659, Cape Conran, Vie. MJ.

Liulejolin and G.F. Watson, 26 Sept. 1985; SAM

R29652, 7 km ENE Marla, Vic, BoC. Gerhardt,

27 Nov. 198].

Uperoleia variegata Tyler, Davies & Marlin, 1981

Aust. 4. Zool, Suppl, (79); 5S,

= Uperolei lithomoda vide Tyler, Davies & Watson

(1987)

Paratypes: SAM R17197-215, 17219, Gibb River Stn,

WA. (16°26'S, (26°26'E), A.R. Lee, 10 June

1965 (topotypes).

Family Mierohylidae

Aphantophryne sabini Zweifel & Parker, 1989

Amer. Mus, Novit, (2954); 4.

Paralypes: SAM R33505-6, Myola Guest House,

2080 m, 7km S,6km W Mt Bellamy, Northeri

Province, Papua New Guinea, F. Parker, R,G.

Zweifel and LT. Penny, & Aug, 1987

Barygenys cheesmuanae Parker, 1936

Ann, Mag, nal. Hist, V7: 74.

Paratype: SAM R9423, Mt Tafa, New Guinea, L.E.

Cheesman, Feb. 1934,

Barygenys maculata Menzies & Tyler, 1977

J Zool, Land. 183: 447,

Paratype: SAM RI4001, within | km of type

locality: approx. 3 km NW Agaun, 1500 m,

Milne Bay Province, Papua New Guinea, JI,

Menzies, & Nov, 1974,

Caphixalus concinnus Tyler, 1979

Copeia 1979; 119.

Paratypes: SAM R16375-76, Thornton Peake, 1250

m, Qld (16°12'S, 145°20'E), JW. Winter, 14

Nov, 1973.

Cophixalus crenitans Zweite}, |985

Bull. Amer. Mus. nat, Fist, 182: 315.

Paratypes: SAM R23873, Rocky Scrub, 28 km NE

Coen, §20-540 m, Qld (13°44°30"S,

143°20'30°E), SW, Winter and R.G. Atherton,

15 May. [978; SAM R23874, Rocky Scrub, 29 km

NE Coen, 520-540 m, Qld (13°44'30"S,

143°21'30"E), IW. Winter and RG, Atherton,

16 Nov. 1978; SAM R23875, Weather Stn, 19 km

ENE Mt Croll, Qld (13°42'30"S, 143°18'30"B),

R,G, Atherton, K.R. McDonald, RA. Mathew

and JW. Winter, 16 March 1979.

Cophixalus exiguus Zweifel & Parker, 1969

Amer. Mus. Novir. (2390): 2.

Holotype: SAM RIO311, Mt Hartley, 1800-2000 ft,

Qld, F. Parker, 10 June 1968,

Paratypes! SAM R9796, 10035-40 (same data as

holotype). (R9723 transferred to Museum of

Natural History, University of Kansas, Now KL)

153146.)

Cophixalus infacetus Zweifel, |98S

Bull. Amer. Mus, nat, Hist, 182: 324,

Paratynes: SAM R23872, Henrietla Creek,

Palmerston Nil Pk, 360 m, Old, K.R. McDonald

and R.G. Atherton, 11 Feb. 1977; SAM R24080,

Palmerston Nr! Pk, Old, K-R. McDonald, 16

Feb. 1977.

Copiulw fistulans Menzies & Tyler, 1977

J. Zool, Land. V83; 435.

Holotype: SAM R14497, approx, 11 km N Lae,

Papua New Guinea, J.1. Menzies, 24 Sept. 1973

Paratypes: SAM R5879, 6382-83, 14239-50, 14646,

Martyr's Memarjal School, Agenahambo nr

Popondetta, BJ, Brock, 7 Oct, 1964; SAM

R9443-48 (same locality), B. Kirke, 15 Feb. 1968,

Copiula minor Menzies & Tyler, 1977

J Zool, Lond. 183 441.

8 M.J. TYLER

Paratype: SAM RI15245, Oirdamawa’s Peak,

Goodenough Id, Milne Bay Province, Papua

New Guinea, J.1. Menzies, 29 Dec. 1975.

Copiula pipiens Burton & Stocks, 1986

Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust. 110; 155,

Holotype: SAM R29779, Wirui, 1 km from Wewak,

Papua New Guinea (3°35’S, 143°35’E), R.

Stocks, 29 March 1983.

Paratypes: SAM R29780-82,

holotype.

taken with the

Copiula tyleri Burton, 1990

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 114: 87.

Paratype: SAM R33774, Mt Hunstein, 1220 m

(4931'S, 142°39’EB), East Sepik Province, Papua

New Guinea, R. Hoogland, 15 July 1966.

Aylophorbus rufescens extimus Zweifel, 1972

Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist. 148: 454.

Paratype: SAM R25315, Mt Riu, Sudest Id,

Louisiade Archipelago, Milne Bay District,

Papua New Guinea, Fifth Archbold Expedition,

23 Aug.-5 Sept. 1956.

Hylophorbus rufescens myopicus Zweifel, 1972

Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist. 148: 455.

Paratype: SAM R12534, Kulumadau, Woodlark

Id, Milne Bay District, Papua New Guinea, Fifth

Archbold Expedition, 1-22 Nov. 1956.

Phrynomantis humicola humicola Zweifel, 1972

Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist. 148: 471.

Paratypes: SAM R25303-04, South slope, Kotuni,

7000-8000 ft, Eastern Highlands, Papua New

Guinea, H.M. Van Deusen, Sixth Archbold

Expedition, 18 Aug. 1959,

Phrynomantis infulata Zweifel, 1972

Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist. 148: 476.

= Mantophryne infulata (Zweifel), vide Burton

(1986: 415).

Paratype: SAM R25312, Arau, 1400 m, Kratke Mts,

Eastern Highlands District, Papua New Guinea,

H.M. Van Deusen, 13 Oct.-8 Nov. 1959.

(Formerly AMNH 66685.)

Phrynomantis personata Zweifel, 1972

Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist. 148: 489.

Paratypes: SAM R5888, Jama, East Sepik District,

Papua New Guinea, W. Ewers, 18 Oct. 1964;

SAM R25313, Lumi, Sepik Province, 1750 ft, M.

Loram, July-Aug. 1966.

Sphenophryne adelphe Zweifel, 1985

Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist. 182: 280.

Holotype: SAM R17344, Back Jungle, Croker Id,

N-T., I. Morris, 23 Jan. 1979,

Paratypes: SAM

holotype).

R17345-46 (same data as

Sphenophryne dentata Tyler & Menzies, 1971

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust, 95(2): 79.

Holotype: SAM R12063, Alotau, Milne Bay, New

Guinea, J.J. Menzies, 11 Nov. 1970.

Paratypes: SAM R11819-20 (same data as

holotype), J.1. Menzies, 6-12 Nov. 1970,

Xenobatrachus multisica Blum & Menzies, 1989

Alvtes 7(4): 150.

Paratypes: SAM R31822-23, Eipomale, Irian Jaya,

1800 m, J.P. Blum, April-June 1976.

Xenobatrachus subcroceus Menzies & Tyler, 1977

J. Zool, Lond. 183: 450.

Paratype: SAM R14002, approx. 11 km N Lae,

Papua New Guinea, J.1. Menzies, 9 March 1974.

Xenorhina parkerorum Zweifel, 1972

Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist. 148: 539.

Paratypes: SAM R6404-05, Okfekaman, nr

Telefomin, West Sepik District, Papua New

Guinea, 5500 ft, B. Craig, 29 Nov. 1964.

Xenorhina similis Zweifel, 1972

Bull. Amer. Mus, nat. Hist, 148: 541.

Paratype: SAM R25311, L. Habbema, Papua New

Guinea, W.B. Richardson, 9 Nov. 1938.

Family Ranidae

Cornufer ingeri Brown & Alcala, 1963

Copeia 1963(4): 672.

= Platymantis ingeri (Brown & Alcala), vide

Zweifel (1967: 120).

Paratypes: SAM R8808, Cantaub area, Bohol Id,

Philippines, A.C. Alcala, 4 May 1962; SAM

R13606, Dusita area, Bohol Id., Philippines, A.

Alcala, 28 April 1961.

Platymantis akarithymus Brown & Tyler, 1968

Proc. biol. Soc. Wash. 81: 76.

Holotype: SAM R7073, Pomogu, 11 km NW

Kandrian, New Britain, M.J. Tyler, 31 Jan. 1966,

Paratypes: SAM R6982 (same data as holotype);

SAM R7066, R7082, near Malassait, approx. 65

km W Rabaul, New Britain, M.J. Tyler, Jan.

1966.

Platymantis mimicus Brown & Tyler, 1968

Proe. biol. Soc, Wash, 81: 74.

Holotype: SAM R6868, Numundo Plantation,

Willaumez Peninsula, New Britain, M.J. Tyler, 19

Jan. 1966.

Paratypes: SAM R7064 (same data as holotype);

SAM R7069, Pomugu 11 km NW Kandrian,

AMPHIBIAN TYPE SPECIMENS y

New Britain, M.J, Tyler, 29 Jan, 1966; SAM

R6864, Gazelle Peninsula, New Britain, M.J.

Tyler, 25 Jan. 1966.

Platvmantis rhipiphalcus Brown & Tyler, 1968

Prac, biol, Soc. Wash, 81: 77.

Holotype: SAM R707], nr Pomogu, approx, 11 km

NW Kandrian, New Britain, M.J. Tyler, 31 Jan.

1966,

Paratype: SAM R7078, San Remo Plantation,

Willaumez Peninsula, New Britain, M.J. Tyler,

20 Jan, 1966.

Platymantis papuensis schmidti Brown & Tyler,

1968

Proc. biol. Soc. Wash. 81: 85,

= Platymantis schmidti Brown & Tyler, vide

Menzies (1982).

Holotype: SAM R76I8, Talasea, Willaumez

Peninsula, New Britain, M.J. Tyler, 11 Jan, 1966.

Paratypes: SAM R6762-68, 6772-93, 6795, 6801,

6803-07, 6809-13, 6815-16, 6858-60, 6862, 6869,

6912-13, 6915, 6922-28, 7061, 7070, 7080, 7085,

7088, 7089, 7093, 7095, 7097, 7101-04, 7106,

7109, 7115, Willaumez Peninsula, New Britain,

M.J. Tyler, Jan. 1966; SAM R7615, 7617-23,

7625-37, 7639-47, 7649-74, 7677-78, Baining

Ranges, Gazelle Peninsula, New Britain, M.J,

Tyler, 11 Jan. 1966; SAM R7043, 7045, 7099,

7132, 7134-37, 7139, 7147-48, 7151, Kerevat,

Gazelle Peninsula, New Britain, M.J, Tyler,

Jan-Feb. 1966. (R7616, 7638, 7648 transferred

to Museum of Natural History, University of

Kansas. Now KU 153147-49,)

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

iam deeply indebted to Adrienne Edwards for access

to records und lo specimens, and to Lorna Lucas for typing

the manuscript,

RERERENCES

BURTON, T.c. 1986. A reassessment of the Papuan

subfamily Asterophryinae (Anura: Microhylidae). Ree.

5S. Aust, Mus. 19019): 405-450,

CONDON, ELT, 1941. Further records of lizards and frogs

from Kangaroo Island, Ree, S. Aust. Mus. 7: 11116.

GIRARD, C, 1853, Descriptions of new species of reptiles

collected by the U.S, Exploring expedition, under the

command of Capt, Charles Wilkes, U.S.N. Second Part.

Including the species of batrachians exotic to North

America. Proc. dead, Nat. Sei. Philad. 6; 420-424.

HEYER, W.R., DAUGHERTY, C.H. & MAXSON, L.R.

1982. Systematic resolution of the genera of the Crinia

complex (Amphibia: Anura: Myobatrachidae). Proe.

biol. Soc, Wash, 95; 423-427.

MENZIES, JL. 1982. Systematics of Platymantis

pupuensis (Amphibia; Randidae |sic]) and related

species of the New Guinea region. Brit, J. Herpetol.

6: 1-4,

MOORE, JA, 1961. The frogs of eastern New South

Wales. Bali Amen Mus. nat. Hist, 1243): 153-385,

TYLER, MS, 1965, An investigation of the systematic

position and synonymy of Avla montana Peters and

Doria (Anura: Hylidae), AbA. Zool. Mus. Dresden

27(10): 265-270.

TYLER, M.J. 1971. The phylogenetic significance of vocil

sac structure in hylid frogs, Univ, Kansas Publ, Mus.

Nat. Hist. 19(4): 319-360.

TYLER, M.J. 1976. Vertebrate type-specimens in the

South Australian Museum, 1] Amphibians. Ree, 8.

Aust. Mus, 17(7-12): 177-180.

TYLER, M.J..& ANSTIS, M. 1983. Replacement name

for Litoria glandulosa Tyler & Anstis, 1975 (Anura:

Hylidae), Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 107; 130.

TYLER, M.J., DAVIES, M. & MARTIN, A.A. 1981.

Australian frogs of the leptodactylid genus Uperoleia

Gray. Aust, J. Zool, Suppl. (79): 1-64.

TYLER, M.J., DAVIES, M. & WATSON, G.F. 1987. Frogs

of the Gibb River Road, Kimberley Division, Western

Australia. Rec. West, Aust, Mus, 13: 541-552.

ZWEIFEL, R.G, 1967. Identity of the frog Cornufer

nnicolor and application of the generic name Cornuser.

Copeia 19671): 117-121.

A REVIEW OF THE GENUS ISOPEDA L. KOCH (HETEROPODIDAE :

ARANEAE) IN AUSTRALASIA WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW

GENERA

D. B. HIRST

Summary

The genus Isopeda L. Koch is redefined. Holconia Thorell is reinstated. Type species of those

genera are redescribed. Two new genera, Isopedella and Beregama are described and a valid taxon

for each is selected as type species and redescribed. All nominal Australasian species are allocated

to their respective genera and synonyms of type species noted. Three species are excluded from the

above genera. A further four are considered nomina dubia. Distribution of the genera is discusssed

briefly.

A REVIEW OF THE GENUS ISOPEDA L. KOCH (HETEROPODIDAE: ARANEAE) IN

AUSTRALASIA WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW GENERA

D.B. HIRST

HIRST, D.B. 1990. A review ol’ the genus /sopeda |. Koch (Heieropodidae: Araneae) in Australasia

with descriptions of two new genera. Aev, S. Ause. Mug, 2401): 11-26.

The genus /sopeda L, Koch is redefined. Halcania Thorell is reinstated. Type species of those

genera are redeseribed. Two new genera, (sopedelia and Beregama are described and a valid taxon

for cach 15 selected as type species and cedeseribed. All nominal Australasian species are allocatecl

{o their respective genera and synonyms of type species noted, Three species are excluded tram

wie above genera. A further four are considered nomina dubia, Distribution of the genera is

cliscussed briefly.

D.B, Hirst, South Austcalian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, South Australia $000, Manuscript

received 13 June 1989.

The broad definition by Koch (1875) of the gents

fsopeda has never been questianed. The similar

appearance of included species combined with a

lack of any detailed study of the penitalia and

corresponding morphology resulted in a

heterogeneous assembly of taxa and allowed the

inclusion of Holeoriia Thoreil by Hogg (1903) to

be readily accepted, The present paper is a

preliminary work on the genus /sopeda with the

recagnition as genera of four major species groups

currently contained within it. Itis the third part of

a4 revision of the Australian Heleropodidae

excluding AMereropoda Latreille, 1804, and provides

clarificalion of the taxa included in the genus

fsapeda in the interim, until species involved are

revised.

L. Koch (1867) described Ocypele vasia and

Delena iramanis. Thorell (1870) deseribed a new

Benus and species, Foconia insignis, und also the

species Heleropodd pessteri. L, Kock (1875) added

Ko dolasa avd transterred Delena immanis to

Foconia, Kach alsa transferred MH. pess/eri and O.

vasta tO his new genus /soneda selecting vasta as

type specres. Eight new species, area, consperse,

cordate, flavibarbis, flavida, hirsuta, robusta and

villosa Were also deseribed. Thorell (1877) found

Vovonia pre-occupied and replaced that name with

Fiolcona. Thorell (1881) desenbed /sapeda deianira,

t, herculea and Holeonia subdela, Hoge, (1896)

described 7 horn which he subsequently (Hogg,

1903) Uanslerred to Pediana Simon, !880, Hogg

(1903) in his revision of the Australasian

Heteropodidae synonymised Halconia with Isoneda

and described eleven few species, a@rérossena,

JSrenchi, leai, teisimanni, montana, pensellva,

pococki, saundersi, tepperi, tierzi and woodward.

Strand (1907) described [- meculigastra and I.

vas/ata. Simon (1908) deseribed cana, cerussuta,

nierigularis and woedwardi. As the latter was a

lornenym, the species was renamed /. simoni by

Rainbow (1911). Strand (1911) described / rerangani

and later Strand (1913) added & conspersula, J,

immigrans, £, inala and 7, hereuleana. Rainbow

(L917) deseribed /, glariose, Lastly Chrysanthus

(1963) described £ goliath and £ mteraukensis.

Thus, 41 nominal species are considered here

from (he Australasian region (Table 1) excluding /.

horn’ which was previously (see above) transferred

to Pediana. A further eight species outside this

region dre nat considered in this review and it is

likely that many, if mov all, belopig to other genera.

MATERIALS AND MESlions

Only the pominated type species is treated for

each genus, New synonymies and lists of material

examined, ather than for material mentianed here,

will be given in revisions of the genera which are

in. preparation. Non-type material is used where

types are unavailable and for drawings of the

internal female genitalia, which are dissected and

cleared in lactic acid. Setae are generally atmitted

from illustrations. Descriptive format follows Hirst

(19891, 1989b). Leg ratio is the lee lenath divided

by carapace length, Other lez compansons are made

with those legs held together al right angles to the

body, Descriptions of tibial apophysis shape are

wiven from the retrolateral aspect. Median ocular

quadrat (MOQ) measurements are abbreviated to

aw (anterior width), pw (posterior width) and |

(length), Measurements are given in millimetres.

Localities are abbreviated as ACT, Australian

Capital Territory; NSW, New South Wales; Q,

Queensland; SA, South Australias V. Victoria; WA,

Western Australia, Further acronyms are AM,

Australian) Museum, Sydney; BMNH, British

Museum (Natural History), Londan; NHMW,

\2 DE PULRST

TABLE |.

Noniinal species Revised siatus, iis work

Qeypéte vasta L. Roch, 1807 = tyoptda vasta TL Kae]

Delena intmanis L, Koch, (867 = Hult rminitttiy (1, Koel)

Lovoniw insigms Thorell, (R70 » Holcones insu (Chore!)

Heterapodea pessler Mevell, 1870 Kapedolier pesstert (Thorelly

Vavonia dalosa L. Koch, (R75 nomen dubivay

fsopeda aurea L. Koel, 1878 > Beresama aurea (Le Koch)

Isopeda cunsperae LoKaeh, ITS - Isepedelle eonspeesa (IL. Kool)

Isepeda vardaty | Koh, (RTS Bereguiie vardate (Koel)

fsopeda flavibarbis L, Koeh, 1875 = Herewama qurea tL, Kou)

Wwoperla flavida lL, Koch, 1478 Vsnpedetia fia wda (L. Kock)

Isopeda hirswia L. Koehy 1875 ~ Hulvonia hirsuta (Ly Koch)

Isopeda robusta L, Kock 1875 narmen dubhrn

Tsopeda viltosu L. Koch, 1875 > Wapeda ville L. Rach

isaprda dewnira Thorell, (RR ? Olas deiunpa (Thorell)

Isopeda hereuiea Thorell, IRR) Avrewoia heroulea (Vhorell)

Holounia subdola Thorell, b81 Holtonia sibdola Thovell

Isopeda ardrossana Hogy,, 190% (sapedetia urtrassana (Maye)

Ixapeda fronchi Hoge, Ys Tsqpedolla french! (Hoge)

tyapeda teal Hoge, 08 Isopeddtollr teué (Hoge)

isoprda lershmuant Hoy, 1903 ~ (sopeda leishmutnnt Moge

Isapeca monianw Hoge, 1903 = lsopeda montana Hoge

Tyuoperla pengellba Hoge, (908 Isopeda pengediva Hoge

feopedu povacki Hogy, 190% ~ nomen dubiun

‘

Isopeda saunders! Hogg, 1903 = fsopeduila suundersi (Hoge)

Tsoperla tepperi Hoge, W90X Isepedella rapper’ (Wage)

Isopede eit: Hoge, 190% — Isupedella teizr (Hope)

Jsapeda woodward) Hox, (903 = fsopeda woodward] Hone

Tsupede muculiuistra Strand, (907 = fsdpedelta maculigasina (Strand)

Isapeda Vastare Strand, 1X07 ~ nomen dubiun

Ixopeda cana Simon, (908 = fsopedella cana (Simon)

Jyupeda cerussaia Simon, 1908 = Isupedelly verussala (Simon)

isopedd Aigeigidaris Simon, 08 ~ Helo igi fewer (Siman)

(sopeda wondwarrdi Simon, (908 — - Holeania sitnani (Rambow,

Wit)

(yopedla terangand Sirand, (9 Isnpedella Wranyana (Stunt)

tsapeda canspersula Strand, A= fsapeda vasa 1. Kowh)

Isapeda (mmigrons Strand, 1913 ~ Polyberes py laporlons:

Holmberg, bi4

fsopedetla inate (Strandy

Bereverna aurea () Koch)

~ Delena gloriase (Rainbow)

hoy, comnb,

» Berexaina gallant

(Chirysaattias)

Jsopeda meraukensis Chrysanthus, = [sopedetla meraukensis

190% (Chrysanthas)

Wsapeda inate Strand, WO

tsapeda herevfeana Strand, (913

(sapeda gloriasa Rainbow, 1917

Teopeda goliath Civysauthas, 1965

Naturhistorisches Museum, Wien, Austria; NHRM,

Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet, Stockholm, Sweden;

QM, Qucensland Museum, Brisbane; SAMA,

South Australian Museum, Adelaide; SMF, Natur-

Museum Senckenburg, Franfurt-am-Main,

Germany: SMNS, Stadtliches Museum fir

Naturkunde, Stuttgart, Germany; 2ME,

Zoologisches Museum, Hamburg, Germany,

DISCUSSION OF

Di 4canestic MOKPHOLOGICAL FEATURES

The generic diagnosis given for Jsopeda by Koeh

(1875) contained few characters or charaeter

cambinations, which are found only in that genus.

That diagnosis includes genera found in New

Guinea which are not deal with here, Apart from

the reference ro the flattish carapace it could equally

include Neosparassus Hoge, 1903. Also characters

used by early workers, lez spines, number of

cheliceral teeth, and lo soine extent, eye position,

have been found in this study to be either subject

to bilareral variabiliiy or to variation, Sternum

colour is useful al species level and will be dealt with

fully in future revisions,

Although represented by two differenr genitalia

forms, the congeneric relationship of the twe species

groups of Pediana was supported by ather

characters. (Hirst, 1989b). However, Lhe species

groups of dsopeda (sensu lato) have conflicting

character states in addilion to those of the genitalia.

Two ‘outlying” groups are easily remaved from

fsopeda and raised to generic level, These are

Holconia and Beregama. Using, characters whieh

enable reinstating the genus Ho/conia and erection

of the new genus Beregamna, a furiher new genus,

Tsopedella, can be removed Irom /sopeda leaving

three minor species groups which feasibly belong.

in the falter genus.

Table 2 summarises the characters for each genus

in cladistic forin using apomorphic characters but

without the aid of computer analysis. The embolus,

eonductor and embolar base, which is basically an

extension af the tegulum, largely obscure the

teeulum. The latter partly extends pro-distally inte

the distal half of the cymbium and except in

Holconia, is ventrally modified to form a tezular

apophysis. The ventral edpe of the tezular apoplhysis

of /sopeda (Fig. 3) is usually clase to the embolar

base and has.a flaltish posterior face. The tegular

apophysis of /sopedella alten has the ventral edge

spaced further from (he embolar base with the

posterior face cancave (Fig. 13). Also, the apophysis

often extends further mesally, Beregama has a

weakly modified or rounded tegular apophysis (Fig.

18), The tegulum of Helvonia is not modified to

form an apophysis, this being replaced hy a

Subembalic apophysi¢ at the junction of rhe

ltegulum and embolar base (Fig. 8).

Adjacent ia the junction of theembolar base and

the embolus proper a sclerite occurs in fsepeda (Fis,

1) which presumably has its homology in the

median apophysis of Pediane (Hirst, 1989b), but

as it is not truly representative af an apophysis it

is here termed the embolie selerite. The embalic

gelerite js reduced in several species of fsopeda

whiere it is paralleled by one species of Hofeoria.

In other Aelconia species and also Beregarhd vie

REVIEW OF ISOPEDA G

TABLE 2. Summary of diagnostic ¢haracters.

Apomorphic character state

Beregama lsopeda Holeonia lsopedella

} Tegular apophysis extends mesally

2 Tibial apophysis narrow doubly curved

3 Legs | and I subequal

4 2nd embolic coil larger than 3rd

5 Embolar base large retrolaterally

6 Leg spination relatively greater

7 Chelicerae never enlarged distally

&§ Embolar base without granulartions

9 Ejnbolar base with mesal ridue

10 Epigynal sclerite present

{1 Subembolic apophysis present

12 Embolar flange mesal, short, low

13 Spermathecal sacs shortish, curved

i4 Tibial apophysis lanceolate

15 Tibial apophysis angled to venter

16 Spermathecal sacs shortish, straight

17 Epigynum narrow anteriorly, broad posteriorly

1% Embolic sclerite adjacent granulate area

19 Embolus constricted sy to ' turn from fip

20 Anterior eye spacings equal

21 Carapace low, fattish above

22 Recuryed posterior eye row

23 Spermathecal sacs not arced to anterior

24 Clypeus 2 diameter of AME or less

25 Embolar base connects embolus more proximally

26 Emboliec flange low prodistal or absent

27 AME-ALE width '2.20 width of AME-AME

28 Spermathecal sacs, when present, (ubular

29 Embolus in single stack of 6 to 15 coils

30 Conductor originates from retro-proximal

3} Fossa lacks setae

2 Fossa with sclerotised lateral rims

33 Canduetor fills ‘gap’ left by last embolus coil

“** * + *

x>4eeetBe

sree et He HH

os ee 2 €

”

+e eee ee HE

+e ew

see bee

renee He

(The combination of characters 20-33 diagnose the above genera from other closely related Australian heteropodid

genera.)

sclerite is recessed to unite with the embolus more

proximally (Fig. 6) and is not distinct as a separate

selerite. The embolic sclerite is obscured or absence

in /sepedella,

The embolar base is largest in Jsopedella where

it overhangs part of the embolus retrolaterally (Fig.

11), Holconia species have a reduced embolar base

with a prominent mesal ridge (Fig. 6). The embolar

base is least developed in Beregama. Small

granulations (Fig. 1) are present on the embolar

base of lsopede and Berezama. Granulations are

also found in Neasparassus (unpublished data),

Their significance is unknown. One species of

Holcoenia, which has (the embolic sclerite similar to

lsapeda (see above), has ridwes on the embolar base

apparently derived from the granulations but

further discussion is withheld for a paper on

Holcania (in prep,), A flange is present on the distal

margin of the embolar base (Figs 1, 3) but absent

or low in some species of /sopedella and Beregama.

A low, short Mange in Holvonia is positianed more

mesally having been displaced by rhe subembolice

apophysis.

The embolus rises from the embolar base and

tegulum retro-distally, arcing around the tegulum

proximally before continuing prolaterally into the

distal half of the cymbium. Here the embolus forms

a single conical stack of six to fifteen coils. The

conductor originates within the embolar base and

emerges proximally, running adjacent to the inner

side of the embolus prolaterally then under the first

coil of the embolar stack. Here it spirals tightly in

cylindrical form, with the number of turns

somewhat corresponding to that of the embolus,

before expanding to fill the gap left by the last

embolar coil and supporting the embolus tip. The

embolus tapers gradually to the tip in /sepedella

and Beregama but is often vonstrieted '4 to '4 turn

from the tip in Jsopeda (Pig, i) and some Holconia.

In all genera except /sopedella the first and second

embolic coils are srialler than the third and the first

coil is not easily seen in ventral view:

The distal retrolateral tibial apophysis is subequal

in length to the tibia and supported by a mesul

membranous thickening atrached to the base which

in Holconia and some Isopeda forms a smooth,

\4 4, HIRS|

somewhal Continuous hne with the apophysis. In

fsapeda the tbial apophysis turns towards the

venter above the base and is aligular in Shape (Fig.

2), lt ts laterally Matlened and alten serrated on its

dorsal edge, /sopedella has a more rounded bial

apophysis narrower at the base and gradually

tapered with an additional forward curve (Figs

11-12). Holeonia has a lanceolate shaped apophysis

(Fig, 7), somewhat Jaterally flaltened and direcled

ta the anteriar The relatively shorter tibial

apaphysis io Beregamea ts straight of more usually,

curved much as in Jsopedelle, but then broader

midlength (Fig. 17) or, throughout.

The Jateral rim and fossa of the epigynum lack

serac. The large fossa is overhung laterally by a

sclerotised rim which is narrowly divided anteriorly.

The rim is relatively flat and the fossa not deeply

recessed except in & wuréd, in Which the rim slopes

steeply towards a sunken fossa, The broader

posterior margin (narrower in some Beregama)

turns mesally against the epigastric furrow. Isopeda

has an ovoid shaped epigynum (Fig. 4) offen with

the fossa bulged at the adterior margin, that of

fsapedella is somewhat narrower, bell-shaped or

ovate (Fig. 14). The epigynum of Holeania is bell-

shaped (Fig. 9), or in one species rounded, but in

both cases, broader anteriorly than other genera

except A. immanisin which the epigynum may be

relatively smaller. Beregama species have a rounded

or horseshoe shaped epigynum accentuated by the

continuation of sclerotisation across the anterior

margin except B avreu which has a bell-shaped

epigynum (Fig. 19), A sclerile, termed the epigynal

selerite, on the posterolateral corner of the

epigynum extends partly over the fossa in Halconia

(Figs 9-10),

Internally the vulya comprises paired

insemination ducts coiled around central

spermathecal ducts which lead back acljacent to

anterior par of fossa. Here there are usually tubular

spermathecal sacs, exteuding medially under fossa,

moderately long to short and oveasionally ‘elbow-

like’ in /sapeda (Fig. 5), shortish and curved in

Halconia (fig, 10), long and areed forward to the

anterior in Beregama (Fig, 20) but absent (Fiz, 15)

or ‘elbow-like’ in /sopedella, The spermathecae loop

to anterior of fossa then continue under the

§clerotised rim as fertilization duets to posterior of

epigynum.

Relative lengths of anterior legs vary both

intraspecilically and from bilateral variability, but

in most fsepeda and Halconia leg U is much longer

than tee P with the Jatter reaching about mid-length

along metatarsus Ef or at least not reaching the

distal endl of the metatarsus, Beregema generally

have leg | reaching almost to, or to the distal end

of metatarsus HW while Jeg 1 of fsapedella reaches

beyond metatarsus [| 10 midength of tarsus I.

Jsapedella fernnales have relatively shorter lees tian

fermales of other genera, Spmation af legs is lowest

in sowne fsopeda and greatest in tseperdella.

The Carapace js generally law and flapish in

tsopeda and Halconia but higher and convex in

fsepedella and Beregama, The clypews width of

Beregama is offen subequal to the diameter of jin

AME but hall’ the width or less of an ANTE in other

genera, Anterior eye spacings are rather equal in

isopeda and Helconia, subequal in Berezanta while

fsopedella have the AME-ALE width about half

that between the AME, A line drawn behind the

posterior eve cow is slightly to distinerly recurved

in Jsopeda atid Halcaniv but telatively straight in

the other genera. Males of /sepeda and Beregama

often fave the chelicerae retro-disially clonvaled

with the distal tooth largest, angled tore anteriorly

and well spaced Jrom the subdistal roorh and fang

base, The remaming genera lack modilied cheliverae

and the distal retromarginal tooth is usually smaller

than the subdistal toath,

The darsal pattern of the abdomen is relatively

constant in each genus. /sopeda usually have three

or four pairs of blackish spots with the middle pairs

elongated and often: joined, Juveniles of some

species have pairs of spots which are often lacking

in adults. Jsapedella may be similar to fsopeda but

With usually two unjorned pairs of spats. This may

be supplemented or replaced by a posterior folium,

or by irregular spots formed by clusters of brownish

selae, Holconia has a pattern of targe brownish

patches and often a yellow-brown or black anterior

streak, Two or three pairs of spois may be present,

Beresama is withoul-a well defined patrern except

for a lolium in B, cordata,

The genera fsopede and Beregame appear to

contain relict species. Bereguma is closely relared

to Typestola and Zachria, ti has likely evalved [rom

that stock rather than from within Jsupeda. This

is supported by the female spermathecae shape, the

recessed fossa of B aurea and by two unnamed

species of uncertain generic placement haying a

male pulp structure intermediate belween T}pusiola

and Berezama (unpubl data). fsepeda is considered

tO have given rise to the mare derived genera,

tsopedella and Holcania following xeric events.

These derived genera have sugeessfully invaded the

arid areas of Australia, The genera are nol kiiown

io occur in Tasmama while Beregama and

fsopedella are found m New Guinea-

KEY to tHE GENERA

PREVIOUSLY INCEUGED in fSOPEDA

| — Curupace flattened, or low and Mattish medially.

Anterior eves equally spaced. ,

— Carapaee convex. Anteriar eves nat equally spaced

REVIEW OF ISOPEDA IF

2 — Dorsal abdomen with J or 4 pairs of blackish spots,

occasionally indistinct but usually withaat additional

patiern. Male palpal tibial apuphysis angled towards

Venter Frorg above base and angular in shape (Fig.

2). Embolic selerite present with adjacent granulated

area on embolar base. Female epigynum ovoid, fossa

narrow anteriorly, usually al least twice as broad

posteriorly (Pig. 4). Spermathecal sacs shortish and

straight but may be ‘elbow-lke’ (Fig. 5}.....—..

ciety brettion IH tts Jsopeda L. Koch

— Dorsal abdomen with, large dark brown or blackish

patches in addition to Zor 3 pairs of indistinet spots.

Male palpal tibial apophysis lanceolate, anteriorly

directed (Fig. 7). Subembolic apophysis between

tegulun) and embalar. base (Fig. 8), tegular apophysis

absent. Female with epigynal sclerite (Fig. 9).

Spermathecal sacs shortish, usually curved (Pig, 10),

VA be Oe nip bebe ee eae ..... Holeonia Thoreil

= Clypeus less than half width of AME. Male palpal

Nbial apophysis narrow, doubly curved, gradually

tapered (Fig. 12). Embolar buse broad, produced

over embolus retrolaterally. Tegular apophysis

extended distally. and mesally usually with concave

posterior face. Female epigynum relatively narrow,

bell-shaped or ovate (Fig, 14). Spermathecal sacs

absent (Fig. 15), rarely ‘elbow-like’.. 2.222... 2. -

a¥. .-/sapedella gen. noy.

= Clypeus preter ‘than half “width of AME. Male

palpal tibial apophysis straight ane thin or doubly

curved and, at least, broadest mid-length (Fig, 17).

‘egular apophysis reduced or obscured. Female

epigynum heavily sclerotised anteriorly. horse-shoe

shaped of With broadly rounded posterior corners

(Fig. 19) and fossa recessed. Spermathecal sacs long,

curved to anlerior (Jig, 20). . Beregama gen. nov:

Isopeda L. Koch

isopeda L. Koch, 1875; 678.

fsopoda; Thorell, 1881; 295.

Type species:

Oeypete vaste L. Koch,

designation.

1867 by original

Diagnosis

Male palpal tibial apophysis angled towards

venter abave base and angular in shape, often

serrated on dorsal edge, Female fossa anteriorly

narrow, usually at least iWice as broad posteriorly,

Spermathecal sacs moderately long to short or

‘elbow-like’,

Deseriptian

Carapace low, Matiish medially to very flattened,

length equals 45-8 times height. Anterior eyes

rather equally spaced. Distance between PME

subequal of preater than between PME-PLE, Line

drawn behind posterior eyes recurved. rarely

straight. Clypeus about half diameter or less of

AME, Chelicerae may be ovoid, glabrous with same

short blunt or swollen-tipped selac. or with

relatively straight retrolateral side and lang tapered

setae. In the latler case the male may have chelicerae

modified, extended retro-distally with distal tooth

often angled to anterior, large and well spaced fram

others, Leg 1, when outstretched alongside leg tt,

reaches from mid-length of metatarsus £1 to rowareds

distal end of metatarsus. Distal margin of coxa |

occasionally with a comb-like arrangement of short

blunt-tipped setae, Palp femur and coxa | may have

ventral stout brisues. Abdomen usually marked

dorsally with tour pairs of black spots, median pairs

joined or narrowly separated. Male palpal tibia with

large. often broad, laterally flattened retrolateral

apophysis angled towards venter just above base,

angular in shape, dorsal edge often serrared.

Embolus coiled seven to eleven times, canstrictcct

“4 fa 1 turn from tip. Embolar base with large

distal flange. Embolic sclerite large and prominent

or smallish and partly overhung by the granulate

area of the embolar base, Teeular apophysis with

flattish posterior (ace, ventral edge extending to

adjacent flange on embolar base. Female epigynum

ovoid, lateral rims often relatively straight, diverging

gradually from narrow emarginale and occasionally

bulged anterior, usually at least twice as broad

posteriorly. Fossa usually well separated from lateral

rim al corvave posterior corners. Spertiatheeal sacs

maderately long, relatively straight ta short and

‘elbow’ shaped, rarely absent, most often shortish.

Species included

Isopeda leishinanni Hogg, 1903, f, montana

Hogg, 1903, /. pengellya Hoge, 1903, f, vasia (Li

Koch, 1867), #. willose L, Koch, (875 and

woodward? Hogg; 1903. Several unnamed species

are known, Distribution of fsopeda is trom south-

eastern Queensland along the east coast to soulth-

eastern SA and south-western WA. [t is found

inland in areas With over 400 mm annual rainfall

in NSW and Y. Two species may be relict with one

confined to alpine areas of V and NSW, the other

to the Lamington Plateau in Q,

Isopeda Yasta (L., Kuch)

(Figs. 1-5, Table 3)

Ocypele vasta L. Koch, 1867: 207. Koch described

a female from Brisbane CL, deposited in NHMW.

One female (Nr L882,11,6), examined, in the

collection of NHMW, was apparenitiy brought fram

the Godeffroy Museum, Hamburg, as was the

holotype, Although not labelled as ctype, ily

measurements are nearer to that of the holatype as

Stated by Koch (1867) than the following *syntypes"

in regard to leg lengths and if the carapace length

is taken to include the forward extension of the

chelicerae.

D.B, HIRST

FIGURES 1-5. Isopeda vusta (L. Koch). 1-2, left palpal tibia and tarsus of male QM $15567: 1, ventral; 2, retrolateral.

3, tegular apophysis and embolar base, prolateral, distal part of conductor not drawn. 4, epigynum of female NHMW

1882.11.6. 5, vulva of female OM S15568, ventral. Scale lines 0.5 mm. c, conductor; e, embolus; eb, embolar base;

es, embolic sclerite; f, flange; 2, granulations; ta, legular apophysis.

REVIEW OF ISOPEDA i7

fsopeda vasia: |. Koch, (875° 679. Two females

labelled ‘Syntypes', Brisbane, Queensland, 2MH

(Mus. Godeftray Nr 298a and Nr 10299), examined,

probably formed the basis af Koch's redescription

in 1875, and the syntype designation is invalid. A

male described by Koch (1875) bas not been located.

It also is not a valid type.

Isopeda conspersula Strand, 1913: 610, Holotype

9, Queensland, SMF 4644, examined, New

synonymy,

Female NHMW 1882,)1,6

CL 9.2, CW 8.6. AL 13.5, AW 10.7.

Colour in alcohal; Carapace orange-red, caput

reddish. Chelicerae red, darker retrolaterally.

Anterior legs with orange-red femora and patellae,

distal segments reddish, posterior pairs yellow-

orange, Femur t with basal prolateral blackish

patch. Coxae yellowish. Maxillac and labium red-

brown, maxillae with blackish retromargin. Stemum

red-brown, long yellow-brown setae, Abdomen

creamish-grey, with brown setae forming 2 pairs of

spols, Venter yellowish with thin transverse patch

of brown setae posterior to epigastric groove.

Carapace: low, sides rounded, Matiish above. Eyes:

AME 0.54. AME: ALE; PME; PLE = }: 5.22; 0.66:

0.98, Interspaces: AMEB-AME (0,66, AME-ALE

0.70, PME-PME 1.85, PME-PLE 1.89, AME-PME

0,96, ALE-PLE 1,19, MOQ, aw: pw: | = 2,69; 3,19;

2.67. Width of clypeus 0.55. Chelicerae glabrous,

geniculate at base, swollen on retrolateral side Some

short blunt-tipped setae near base, promargit and

around fang base, Retrolateral teeth 4, proximal

tooth small, others sub-equal, closely spaced.

Sternum 1.4.6, W 3.8. Legs: (Table 3} Leg 1 longer

than leg |, ratios 3.9, 3,5 respectively, Trochanter

[ apically with short setae (ea 0.4) reserabling a

comb, Spination; Legs land II, fe d2 p3 rd, pa pi

ri, tid2 p2r2 v6, me p2 r2 v4. Leg Jl, same, but

lidl. Leg 1V, fe d2 3 rl, pa pl, ti p2 rl v6, me pd

r4 vd, Palp, fe dl + 4 apically in transverse row,

pa pl rl, Udi p3 12, ta p3 12. Epigynum: (Figs 4-5)

Lateral rim narrowly rounded anteriorly then

diverging to near posterior before curving mesally,

Anterior part of fossa emarginate, raised,

Spermathecal sacs of OM $15568 (Browns Plains,

Q) ‘elbow-like’.

Male QM. $15567 (Boondall, Q.) as female except

ws follows:

CL 8,8, CW 8.2. AL 9.2, AW 6.4.

Colour in alcohol; Carapace and legs yellow-

brown, Maxillae and labium brown. Sternum

brown. Abdomen yellow-brown with brown anterior

streak. Eyes: AME 0.58. AME: ALE: PME: PLE

= 1: 1.03; 0,66; 0.96, Interspaces: AME-AME 0,52,

AME-ALE 0.52, PME-PME 1.52, PME-PLE 1.38,

AME-PME 6,69, ALE-PLE 0.79, MOO, aw: pw:

1 = 241: 2.79; 2.2t. Width of elypeus 0.48.

Chelicerae glabrous, geniculate. Few short blunt-

ended setae around fang base, Retromargin of fang

groove With 5 teeth, distal tooth barely larger than

subdistal toath, Sternum L.4.6, W 3,9, Legs; (Table

3) Leg U longer than leg J, ratios $.1, 4.3 respectively.

Trochanter of leg J apically with comb of short setae

{ca 0,3), Spination: Leg 1V, ti dl r0 (on left), me

£2 (3-on left) v4, Palp, ti rl, Palp: (Figs 1-3) Tibial

apophysis equal in length lo tibia. Broad at base,

angled towards yenter just above base, angular in

form to apex, laterally flattened, serrated on dorsal

edge. Embolus with 74% coils, sharply constricted

then thinly tapered for the final half turn to tip.

Embolar base with elongate embolic sclerite,

adjacent to which are numerous granules. Tegular

apophysis with well defined ridge, almost touching

flange on embolar base for part af its length,

Distribution

f, vasta occurs in south-east Queensland and

north-east NSW,

Hotconia Thorell

Foconia Thorell, 1870: 382.

Hialconia Thorell, (877: 485 (nom. nov, for

Voconia, preoccupied).

fsapeda: Hogg, 1903; 429,

Tvpe species

Voconia insignis Thorell, 1870 by original

designation and monotypy.

Diagnosis

Male palpal bulb with subembalic apophysis

TABLE 3. Ley measurements of Lsopeda vasta (L. Koch), female NHMW 1882.16 with male QM 815567 in parentheses:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Melatarsus Tarsus ‘Total

| 9.0 (10.5) 4,7 (4.5) 7.7 (10.0) 8.4 (10.3) 2.6 (2.8) 32.4 (38.1)

i 10.3 (12.6) 5.0 (5.0) 9.0 (12.3) 9.2 (11.9) 2.6 (3.0) 36.1 (44.8)

Wl 7.6 ( 9.3) 3:5 (3.8) 6.0 ( &4) §.8 ( 7.4) 2.2: (2.1) 25.1 (31.0)

Vv 8.0 ( 9.7) 3.3 (3.5) 6.3 ( 8.0) 6.8 ( 8,7) 2.3 (2,3) 26,7 (32.2)

Pa 3.2 ( 3.2) 1.6 (1.5) 1.9 ¢ 1.5) -_ =

3.6 (4.3) 10.3 (10.5)

1s DB, HIRST

between tegulum and embolar base, Tegular

apophysis absent. Female epigymum broad with

postero-lateral convex epigynal sclerite extending

partly over fossa. Spermathecal sacs shortish,

curved,

Description

Carapiace low, flattened, length equals 6-8 times

height, often with a pattern. Anterior eyes equally

spaced. Distance between PME subequal to greater

than that between PME-PLE, PME almost balf of

ALE, low. Line drawn behind posterior cye row is

recurved, Narrow clypeus about }4 to les¢ than 4

diameter of AME. Chelicerae of male utimodified,

4-5 retromargin teeth closely spaced, distal tooth

subequal to subdistal tooth except in AL immanis-

Leg |, when outstretched alongside leg 1, reaches

from midway along metatarsus Il to towards distal

end of metatarsus. Abdomen flattened dorso-

ventrally offen with mottled dorsal pattern of large

brownisl-black patches and occasionally two or

three pairs of blackish spots, Male palpal tibial

apophysis equal in length to tibia, directed

anteriorly, lanceolate with short curved apex

Subembolic apophysis on embolar base adjacent its

junchon with tegulum. Tegular apophysis absent.

Short, low flange on embolar base displaced

mesally by subembolic apophysis. Embolar base

small with mesal ridge. Embolic sclerite modified,

recessed and connecting to embolus except in AL

nigrigularis. Embalus coiled seven to eleven times,

often slightly constricted \) turn from tip. Female

epizgynum with postero-lateral epigynal sclente

extending partly over Tossa, Fossa somewhat

truncate posteriorly. Spermathceal sacs shortish,

curved.

Species inchided

Holeenia hirsuta (L, Koch, 1875), H. insignis

(Thorell, 1870), A. pninanis (L. Koch, 1867), 4.

nivrigilaris (Simon, 1908), AL simieni (Rainbow,

1911) and AL subdola Thorell, 1881. Undescribed

species are known. Distribution is over much of the

Australian mainland, Where they occur in more

xeric or arid areas they are usually found on large

trees or along watercourses,

Holconia insignis (Tharell)

(Figs 6-10, Table 4)

bovonia insignis Thorell, R70: 383, Syntypes o

and ©, Australia, NHRM (Thorell collection),

examined.

Ffalconia insignis: Thorell, 1877: 485,

fsepeda insignis; Hogg, 1903, 432.

Syappe female

CL 14.3, CW 13.8. AL 22.5, AW 14,5.

Colour in alcohol: Carapace grey-brown with

brown-black markings. Chelicerae brown-black.

Mavxillae and labium blackish. Sternum brown. Lees

dark brown with white and black patches on venter

of patellae and tibiae, Abdomen greyish with darker

markings and an anterior median streak of pale

brown. Caripace: low, Mlattish, slightly concave

anterior of fovea; thinly vovered with short setae,

long bristles on lateral edges and anterior half of

capul. Eyes: AME 0.7. AME: ALE; PME; PLE -

tr 1.28: 0.71: 1,00, Interspaces: AME-AME, (0,57,

AME-ALE 0.71, PME-PME 1.71, PME-PLE 2.14.

AME-PME 1.00, ALB-PLE 1.43. MOQ, aw: pw:

1 = 286: 3.14: 3.40, Width of elypeus 0,40,

Chelicerae! retrolateral teeth 5, Sreraum L 7.8, W

6.1, Legs: (Table 4) leg IL longer than leg 1, ratios

4.6, 3.9 respectively. Spination: Leg L, fe d2 p3 U

on left) 63, pa pl rl, ti d2 p2r2 v4, me p2 r2 v4.

Leg Il, fe d2 p3r3, pa pl rl, ti d2 (Non left) p2

12 V6, me p2 r2 v4, Leg IIL, fe d2 p3 (2 (on left),

pa pl rl, ti p2 r2 v6, me p2 12 v6, Leg LV, fe d2

p3 rl, ti pl (0 on left) v6, me p4 r2 v4, Palp, fe dl

+ 4 apically in transverse row, pa pl rl, vi dl p2

r2, ta p3 r2. Abdomen: [lattened dorso-ventrally,

broad, Epigynum; (Figs 9-10) Convex epigynal

sclerite extending trom lateral rim postenarly, Fossa

with humps in posterior half. somewhat truncate

posteriorly. Vulva of SAMA NJ988520 (Eidsvold,

Q) with shortish, curved spermathecal sacs.

Svatvpe male as female except as follows:

Cl. 11,0, CW 10,9, AL 11.0, AW 8,2,

Eyes! AME 0.8, AME: ALE: PME; PLE - I:

1.13; 0,63: 0,89, Inlerspaces; AME-AME 0,25,

AME-ALE 0.25, PME-PME 1.25, PME-PLE 1.25,

TABLE 4 Leg measurements of Halconia ins/enis (Thorell), syniype female wilh syntype male in parentheses,

Lew Femur Palella Tibia Metialarsus Farsus ‘Votal

i 14.4 (15.9) 7.7 16.9) 14.4 (15.0) 16.0 (16.6) 3.6 (3.7) 56.2. (58.1)

MH 17.6 (18.9) 8.3 (7.5) 18.0 (19.4) 18,6 (19,2) 36 (3.7) 66.1 (66-1)

wt 13.0 (13,3) #0 (5.3) 12.4) (11.9) 11.2 (11.2) 2,9 (3.0) 45.1 (44,7)

lV 13,8 (13.4) 5.7 (4.8) 12.0 (12.1) 13.2 (12.3) 3.1 (3.4) 46.8 (45.7)

Pa 5.0 ( 4.4) 2.5 (2.0) 2.8 ( 2.2) == 5.0) (6.0) 15,2 (14,6)

REVIEW OF ISOPEDA 19

FIGURES 6-10. Holeonia insignis (Thorell). 6-7, right palpal tibia and tarsus of syntype male (reversed drawing):

6, ventral; 7, retrolateral, 8, subembolic apophysis, prolateral, SAMA N1988522, embolus and conductor removed.

9, epigynum of syntype female. 10, vulva of female SAMA N1I988520, ventral. Scale lines 0.5 mm. sa, subembolic

apophysis; ep. s, epigynal sclerite,

a0) Db. HLAST

AME-PME 6.75, ALE-PLE 1.00, MOQ, aw: pw:

| ~ 2,13; 2.44; 2,25. Width of clypeus 0.25. Sternum

L 4.2, W 5.0. Legs: (Table 4) lez I] longer than leg

1, rauos 6.0, 5.3 respectively. Spination: Leg 1, fe

pl, Leg UI}, fer, Leg 1V, fe p2, ti p2, rl on left,

me r3. Palp, i rl, ta O. Palp: (Figs 6-7) Left palp

abnormal, stunted, Tibial apophysis equal in length

to tibia. lanceolate, laterally fattened, apex curved

mhesally. Embolus with 914 coils, weakly constricted

'’ turn from tip. Embalar base with shart low

flange mid-distal position. Subemtholie apophysis

at junction of tegulum and embolar base (Fig, &

shows the prolareral. aspect of the apophysis of

SAMA NI1988522, Pilliga Scrub, NSW),

Distribution

A, insignis oveurs in south-east Queensland and

eastern NSW.

Isopedelia gen. nov.

Diagnosis

Male with doubly curved palpal tibial apophysis

gradually tapered, Broad embolar base partly

projecting over embalus retrolaterally. Female with

somewhat narrow epigynum not much broader

posteriorly. Spermathecal sacs absent but may be

represented by short ‘elbows’.

Descriptian

Carapace convex, length equals 3-4 rimes height,

Distance between AME-ALE about half that

beiween AME, Distance Between PME subequal to

that between PME-PLE. Line drawn behind

posienor eycs barely recurved ro straight. Clypeus

about half diameter of AME or Jess. Chelicerac of

male unmodified, retromargin teeth closely spaced,

relatively close to fang base, distal tooth subequal

to subdistal tooth, Leg | subequal in length to leg

Ul, leg | of female about 314 times carapace length

or less. Abdomen rounded with 2-3 pairs of black

spots, with or without a posterior falium or with

pairs of spots indistinct and whitish patches

combined with a folium or with scattered brown

spots. Venter usually with narrow to broad

transverse band of black setae posterior to epigastric

furrow, Male palpal tibia with gradually tapered,

somewhat rounded retrolateral apophysis angled to

venter near base before turning aeain to point

anteriorly, curving again near apex. Embolus coiled

six to nitie times, gradually tapered to up, second

coil larger than third, first coil easily seen in ventral

view. Embolar base broad, projecting over embolus

on retrolateral side, ridge and granulations absent.

Occasionally with short pro-distal flange on

embolar base. Embolic sclerite absent or small and

obscured by embolar base. Tegular apophysis large,

ventral edge extended distally and mesully, usually

with concave posterior face, most often well

separated from embolar base, Epigynum relatively

narrow, bell-shaped or ovate, broadest posteriorly.

Area between fossa and lateral rim concave at

posterior corner. Fossa may have humps,

pigmentation and granulate area posteriorly.

Spermattiecal sacs usually absent, rarely represented

as short ‘elbows’,

Type species

Heterapada pesster! Tharell, 1870,

Etymology

fsopedella refers to the generally smaller

preporlions of the species compared to their

counterparts in /sapeda.

Species included

Jsopedelia pessleri(Thorell, 1870), 1. ardrossana

(Hogg, 1903), f cana (Simon, 1908), [. cerussater

(Simon, 1908), 7. conspersa (L, Koch, 1875),

Jlavida (L, Koch, 1875), /. frenchi (Hoge, 1903),

inola (Strand, 1933), /. leai (Hogg, 1903), L

maculigastra (Strand, 1907), L meraukerists

(Chrysanthus, 1965), J, fepperi (Hogg, 1903), 7. uetzt

(Hogg, 1903), 2 saundersi (Hogg, 1903) and £

rerangana (Strand, 1911), Several unnamed species

are known and many synonymies are likely. The

genus is widespread over the Australian mainlarid

and parts of New Guinea. Mosi species frequent

areas of low trees or mallee serub.

Isopedella pessleri (Thorell)

(Figs 11-15, Table 4)

Heterapada pessleri Thorell, 1870: 387. Holotype

9, Australia, NHRM 1209 {Thorell Collection),

examined,

fsaopeda pessleri: L.. Koch, 1875: 679,

Halotype female

CL 9.0, CW 8.8. AL 9.8, AW 7.8.

Colour in alcohol; Carapace and appendages red-

brown. Sternuim with thick covering of long black

setae, Coxae with long black setae on basal half.

Abdomen grey-brown with two pairs of black spots.

Venter yellaw-brown with narrow transverse band

of black setae behind epigastric furrow, Carapaces

moderately high, convex, covered with short setae,

whitish-grey in ocular region. Eyes: AME = 0.6.

AME: ALE: PME: PLE = I: 1,16: 0.78: 3.00.

Interspaces! AMEB-AME 0,50, AME-ALE 0.42,

PME-PME 1.50, PME-PLE 1.66, AME-PME. 0.91,

ALE-PLE 1,15, MOQ, aw; pw; | = 2.50: 3,00; 2.50.

Width of clypeus 0.40. Chelicerae: Long pointed

setae around fang base. Retrolateral teeth 5, rather

REVIEW OF ISOPEDA 2)

FIGURES I-15, /sopedella pessleri (Thorell). 11-12, right palpal tibia and tarsus of male SAMA NI989111 (reversed

drawing): U1, veritral; 12, retrolateral. 13, tegular apophysis, prolateral, SAMA N1989111, embolus and conductor removed.

14, epigynum of holotype female. 15, vulva of female SAMA N1989112, ventral. Scale lines 0.5 mm.

22 DB, HIRST

TABLE 5. Leg measurements of /sopedella pessleri (Thorell), holotype female with inale SAMA. NI9R891/1 in parentheses.

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Mectatatrous Tarsus Total

i 8.1 1 8.5) 4.5 (3.8) 7.2 ¢ 7.4) 8.0 ( 8.5) 2.5 (2.5) 30,3 (30.9)

i 9.0 ( 9.4) 447 (3.8) 79( 84) 83 1 8.6) 2,5 (2,5) 32.3 (32,0)

Ml 7.2 ( 7.3) 3.6 (29) 5.8 ( $.7) 5.7 | 5.73 2.0 (2,0) 24.3 (23.6)

IV 7.8(—J 3.4(—) 63 (—) &8 ( —) 2,21—) 26.5 (—)

Pa 2.6 ( 2.7) 1.6 41.2) 201 LL) —- > 3.5 (3,7) 9.7 ( 8,7)

closely spaced, subdistal tooth largest, Sternum L. Distribution

4,9, W 4,0, Legs; (Table 5) leg Il longer than leg

1, ratiog 3.5, 3.3 respectively. Spination: Leg | and

II, fe d2 p3 r3, pa plod, ti d2 p22 v6, me p2 e2

v4. Leg IIL, same but r2 on fe. Leg 1V, fe d2 p3 rl,

pa pl, G dl p2 rl (r2 on left leg) vA, me p4 r4 va.

Palp, fe dl + 4 apically in transverse row, pa pl

ri ti dl p2, ta p2 rl. Abdomen: clumps of short

black setae form paired dorsal spots. Epigynum:

(Figs 14-15) Ovate, rounded anteriorly, lateral rims

diverging slightly for hall their length then gently

urced outwards to posterior, Posterior of fossa

raised, granulated and darkly pigmented. Vulva of

SAMA N1989112 (Kaleen, Canberra. ACT) lacks

spermathecal sacs.

Male SAMA NI9S9ITT (Nowra, NSW), as female

except as follows:

CL 6.8, CW 63. AL 7.0, AW 5,0.

Colour in alcohok Caraupace and legs oranpe-

brown, Capul and chelicerae dark red. Maxillae and

labium brown. Sternum red-brown with a covering

of long brown-black setae, Coxae yellow-brown with

few black setae, mainly on ley 1. Abdomen with

narrow dark brown folium along ils entire length.

Venter with brawn spots. Eyes: AME 0.45. AME:

ALE; PME; PLE, = |: 1.13: 0.76: 1.1L. Interspaces:

AME-AME 0.49, AME-ALE 0.22, PME-PME 1.33,

PME-PLE 1.33, AME-PME 1.07, ALE-PLE 1.07.

MOQ, aw: pwr | = 2.58:.2.89: 2.76. Clypeus width

0.67. Chelicerae with numerous short adpressed and

long upright setae. Sternum 1. 3.4, W 3], Legs:

(Table 5) leg 11 longer than leg 1, ratios 4.8, 4.5

respectively. Spination; Leg II, fe rl on right. Leg

1V, not available, both missing. Palp, ti p3rl, ta 0.

Palp: (Figs 11-13) Tibial apophysis equal in length

to cibia, angled ventrally just above base, turning

again to original direction before curving mesally

al apex. Slightly rounded in form. Embolus with

8 coils, gradually tapered (o lip. Embolar base large,

extending partly over embolus retrolaterally (Vig-

11). Short pro-distal Mange. Tegular apophysis large,

concave, extended mesally, well separated from

embolar Mange.

J pessleri is found in southern NSW and north.

eastern V.

Beregama gen. nov.

Diagnosis

Male palpal tibial apophysis straight and thin or

doubly curved and, at least, broadest mid-length,

Tegular apophysis weakly modilied. Embolar hase

small, often reduced on proximal side, Female with

heavily sclerotised epigynum margin. Spermathecal!

sacs long and looping to anterior,

Description

Carapace convex, length equals 3-4 times height.

Distance between AME-ALE subequal to half that

between AME, Distance between PME much less

than or subequal that between PME-PLE. Line

drawn behind posterior eyes usually straight, PME

dome-shaped. Clypeus width equal or subequal

diameter of AME. Chelicerae of male occasionally

modified, swollen retro-clistally with distal tooth of

retromargin well separated from subdistal tooth,

larger and angled anteriorly, Leg [often reaches to

distal end of metatarsus of leg Il, Lee f of female

up to 414 tines carapace length, Abdomen without

dorsal pattern except in cordatd which hag a tolium.

Male palpal tibial apophysis length shorter than

tibia, relatively straight to eurved much as in

fsapedella but then broader mid-length or

throughout, Embolus coiled from nine to fifteen

times in a stack equal in width to eymbium.

Embolus gradually tapered to tip, Prodistal flange

on embolar base, if present, short and low, Tegular

apophysis swollen, weak ridge projecting ventrally,

flattish beneath, otter largely obscured by embolar

base. Epigynum horse-shoe shaped or in aurea,

lateral rim broadly rounded posteriorly, both with

heavily selerotised lateral rim often appearing to be

continuous anlenorly. Lateral rim of aurea slopes

iowards recessed fossa, Spermathecal sacs jong,

looping to anterior,

REVIEW OF ISOPEDA 33

Type species

Isopeda aurea L. Koch, 1875,

Etymology

The name 8eregamu is derived from the Aborig-

inal word beregegama, meaning lagoon shaped like

a horse-shoe, and used in reference to the shape of

(he epigynum margin surrounding the fossa of most

species,

Species included

RBerezama aurea (L. Koch, 1875), B cordata (L,

Koch, 1875), & hercu/ea (Thorell, 1881) and B

goliath (Chrysanthus, 1965). Distribution is lrom

north-eastern NSW along the vast coast and Great

Dividing Range of Q to New Guinea where it

appears to be common, Unnamed species occur in

north-east NSW to south-east O and N.G, These

apecies may belong to a yet undeseribed genus as

the males have between 2 to‘3' embolus coils. They

appear to be more primitive species closely related

10 Tepostola Simon, 1897 and Zachria L. Koch,

1875

Beregama aurea (L, Koch)

(Figs 16-20, Table 6)

lsapeda aurea L. Koch, 1875: 696. Syntypes

immature 9 and oc, MacKay, Queensland, ZMH,

whereabouts unknown, possibly lost. Doubtful 9

aynitype trom Rockhampton, Queensland, ni ZMA

(Mus, Godelfroy Nr 6517), in poor condition,

measured and drawn by G. Pajak.

(sopeda flavibarbis L, Koch, 1875: 698, Holotype

immature, Sydney, New South Wales, ZMH (Mus.

Godellroy Nr 1015), examined. New synonymy.

lsopeda herculeana Strand, 1913: 610, Holotype >,

Queensland, SMP 5020, examined. New synonymy,

1 haye chosen to give ihe following descripuion Irom

the holotype /) hercu/eana as | have not personally

exarnined the doubtful syntype from Rockhampton.

11s fragile condition excludes availability for loan.

Female SMP 5020

CL. 17.2, CW 17.4. Ab, 24.0, AW 21.0.

Colour in aleahol: Carapace red-brown with

darker flecks, whitish setae in ocular region.

Chelicerac dark brawn, long yellowish setae, Legs

light red-brown with clumps of White setae on

femora, mostly veritealily, long yellowish setae.

Manillae and labium black-brown, tipped anteriorly

with orange. Sternum orange-red with long

yellowish setae. Coxae orangish. Abdomen yellowish

with numerous concolorous long setae. Venter with

faint ‘V' marking, Carapace; moderately high,

convex, caput slightly raised. Eyes: AME 1,00.

AME: ALE: PME: PLE -» ft: 1,30; 0,80: 1,00,

Interspaces: AME-AME 0,50, AME-ALE 0.50,

PME-PME 1.50, PME-PLE 1.80, AME-PME 0.90,

ALE-PLE 1,20. MOO, aw: pw: | = 2.60: 3.00: 2.90.

Width of clypeus 1.00. Chelicerae with numerous

long stout setae. Retrolaferal teeth 4, distal tooth

well spaced from larger subdistal tooth. Maxillae

rounded, Sternum £, 9.5, W 7.5, Legs; (Table 6) leg

Il longer than leg J, ratios 4.5, 4.3 respeetively.

Spination: Leg |, fe d2 p23, pa pl rl, 0 d2 p2 2

v6, mic p2 12 v4. Leg Wl, fe d2 p33, pa pl rl, ti

p22 v6, me p2r2 v4, Leg LIL, same but fe r2. Lee

1V, fed2 p3 rl, pa pl, ti p2r2 v6, me p4 3 v4. Palp,

tedl + 4uapically in transverse row, pa pl ri, ti dl

p3 r2, la p2r2, Epigynum: (Figs 19-20) Lateral rim

heavily sclerotised anteriorly, sloping towards

recessed fossa. Posteriorly rim rounded and

concave, Vulva of AM KS16683 (Inverell, NSW)

With long spermathecal sacs looping to anterion

Male AM KS16662 (Emmiaville, NSW) as female

except as follows:

CL 14.5, CW 13,5, AL 13.8, AW 10.2.

Colour jn aleohiol. Carapace reddish, caput dark

red, both with blackish reticulations, Chelicerve

blaekish-brawn, Maxillae and labium dark brown.

Eyes: AME 0.88. AME: ALE: PME; PLE <= I: [.14:

0.73: 1.14, Interspaces: AME-AME 0,43, AME-ALE

0.34, PME-PME 1.20, PME-PLE 1.59, AME-PME

0.95, ALE-PLE 0,95, MOQ, aw: pw: | = 2,30; 2.64;

2.73, Width of clypeus 0,73, Sternum L 7.0, W 6.2.

Legs: (Table 6) leg Il longer than leg 1, ratios 4.7,

.2 respectively. Spination: Lew 11, ti dd. Leg IV, ti

Q (Lon left). Palp, pa r2,tirl, ca 0), Palp: (Figs 16-18)

TABLE &. Lew measurements of Berezame aurea (L. Koch), holotype female Isepeda hereuleana with male AM KS16662

ift parentheses

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tatsus Tolal

] OL (16.3) 10.0 (7.7) 19.0 (16.2) 21.0 (16.8) 45.0 (4.2) 75,0 (61.2)

ll 22,0 (IN) 10.5 (7.9) 20,5 (18.9) 23.0 (18.5) 6.5 (4.2) 77.5 (67.8)

Wi 18.5 (124) 7.5 (5.7) 14.0 (1.5) 12,5 (1,3) 4.0) (3.1) 33.5 (43.2)

lV WOW 7.0 (5.4) 14-7 (12.5) 15.7 (12.6) 4.2 (3.2) A9,6 (47.5)

Pa 6.6 ( §,2) 3.8 (2,5) 4.6 ( 2.5) - — 7.4 (7.1) 22.4 (17.3)

24 D.B, HIRST

FIGURES 16-20. Beregama aurea (L. Koch). 16-17, left palpal tibia and tarsus of male AM KS!6662: 16, ventral;

17, retrolateral. 18, tegular apophysis, prolateral, distal part of conductor not drawn. 19, epigynum of holotype female

Isapeda herculeana Strand, SMF 5020. 20, vulva of female AM KS16683, ventral. Scale lines 0.5 mm.

REVIEW OF ISOPEDA 25

Tibial apophysis leneth shorter than tibia, angled

above base to verter then curving back towards the

anterior, broad mid-length. Embolus with 15 coils,

last coil gradually tapered to lip, Embolar base

small with short, low Mange prodistally. Tegular

apophysis a rounded protrusion barely cistinet trom

teguluim, with weak ridge at apex,

Distribution

# atirea occurs in eastern Q and north-eastern

NSW.

MISPLACED SPECIES

Tsapeda gloriosa Rainbow, 1917 is transferred to

Delena gloriosa (Rainbow), new combination,

fsopeda immizrans Strand, 1913 js transferred to

Polybetes pylhagoricus Holmberg, 1874, new

synonymy. The type loeality of 4 inunigrans,

‘Australia’, is cousidered in error, Although recorded

as arriving in England ‘On cowhide from Australia’,

if probably entered the ship elsewhere.

Jsopeda deianira Thorell, 1881 does not belong to

any ol the above genera~ The vulva of dissected

material and the embolus of males seen, lack spirals,

A temale of this species from New Guinea was

described and ligured by Chrysanthus (1965) as

Olias fimbriatus. The male, as yer undescribed, has

a large pulpal tibia apophysis with large ventrally

directed basal swellings and a curved, Crivngulur

embolic process Which rests on a spoon shaped

conductor. The tegulum has a prolateral Mange

NOMINA THIBIA

Vaconia dolosa L. Koch, U875; 648, Syntypes, rwo

dry specimens from Australia, presumed lost (pers.

comm. Dr F. Renner, SM.INS)-

lsapeda pococki Hogg, 1903: 440, The dry syntypes,

male and female, from Australia without exact

locality, are not in BMNH (pers, comm, P. Hillyard)

and are probably lost. Although Hogg gives an

adequate description this cannot be matched with

known Australian species. The sternum colour

excludes it ram Sereeuina aurea with whieh it

comes closest.

Isopeda robusta L. Koch, |875. From Australia

without exact locality, this species was described

from a dry specimen which has most likely sinee

been reduced to dust by dermestid beetles (pers.

comm. Dr J. Gruber, NHMW), No further material

revognisable from the original description has come

to hand thus making this species very doubtful.

Isapeda vasiuta Strand, 1907. The female holotype

without locality, has not been lacated, nor is its

depository institution known. Th is also nol

recognisable from the original deseription.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

| wish to thank the following, who made available rype

and other specimens or gave assistance lo make possible

this paper Dr M. Grasshotf, SMP; Dr ML. Citay and C.

Horseman, AM; Dr J. Gruber, SEIMW: Mr PL Hillyare.

BM(NH); rl, Kronested, NHRM; Dr BY, Main, BYM,

Zoology Departinent, Universivy of Western Australia; Dr

G, Rack, ZMH: DrR, Raven, QM: Dr F Renner, SMNS:

and MrG, Pajak who obtained the data from (he syalype

ferale of Jsopeéda aurea Whilst touring Germany, Special

(hanks goto Me LN. Nicolson and De DC, Lee who gave

helpful comments on the manuscript. [alsa thank tye

Australia) Biological Resources Stady far suppart.

REPERENCES

CHRYSANTHUS, P1965. Spiders from South New

Guinew, 7. Nove Guinea Zagl. 34: 345-369,

HOGG, H.R. 1896. Araneidae. 7h ‘Rep. Horn Expedition

ro Central Ausinia, Pi 2 Zoolagy) Dolan & Co.

London,

HOGG, H.R. 1903. On the Australasian apiders of the

sublamily Sparassinae. Proc, Zool Soe. Lond. 19022):

414-406,

HIRST, DB. 19kva A new genus of bunrsnan spider

(Heleropadidac: Araneae) from south-eastern Australia.

Trans, R. Soe. §, olusi. tt: 7-13.

HIRST, D.B. 1989b. A revision of the genus Perdiane

(Heterspodidac: Aranese) in Australia, Ree. 8. Anse

Mus, 23(2)2 113-126,

HOLMBERG, bu. TS74. Descriptions cl notices

caniehnides de la Republique Argentine. Perive, Zool.

1: 283-302,

KOCH, 1. 1867. Reselirvibtivgen never Anichniden und

Myriapoden, ber, sool-bart, Ges. Wen UT: 173-250.

KOCH, L. 1875. ‘Die Aracliniden Austratiens, nach der

Natur beschriebern ind abgebilder. Bauer and Raspe,

Nitriberg.

LATREILLE, PA. 1804. lableau mel todidque des insectes

Nouv, Diet. Hist. Nat. 24: 129 200,

RAINBOW, WL). 1901. A census of Australian Aringidae

Rec. Aude. Mus. % 107-391.

RAINBOW, WJ. 1917, Results of the South Australian

Museum Expedition to Streelecki and Cooper Creeks.

M. Araneidae. Jraits. KR. Soc So lua. abl 4826484.

SIMON, FE. 1880, Revision de Ia famille des Sparassidae

(Arachnides). den Soc. tlnn. Bord. 34: 223-351.

SIMON, FB. (892. “Histoire Naturelle des Araivnees’, Vol.

21). Paris.

SIMON, E. (903. ‘Histoire Naturelle des Araignees*’. Val.

2 (4), Paris.

SIMON, E. 1908. Arancac. Premiere partic Ja W,

Michaelsen ancl R, Hartmever (Eels). ‘Die Fauna

Stldwest-Austrticis’ Vol 7 12). kischer Tena.

D.B. HIRST

STRAND, E. 1907. Einige Spinnen aus Kamerun, Java

und Australien. Jahrb. nassau. Ver. Naturk. 60:

177-219.

STRAND, E. 1911. Araneae von die Aru-und Kei-Inseln.

Abh. Senck. naturf. ges. 34: 129-199.

STRAND, E. 1913. Uber einige australische Spinnen des

senckenbergischen Museums. Zool. Jb., (Syst.) 35:

599-624.

THORELL, T. 1870. Araneae nonnullae Novae

Hollandiae, descriptae. Ofvers. Kong. Vet-Akad. Férh.

27(4): 367-389.

THORELL, T. 1877. Studi sui ragni malesi e papuani.

I. Ragni di Selebes raccolti nel 1874 dal Dott. O. Beccari.

Ann. Mus. civ. stor. nat. Genova. 10: 341-634.

THORELL, T. 1881. Studi sui ragni malesi e papuani. Part

III. Ragni dell’ Austro-Malesia e del Capo York,

conservati nel Museo Civico di Storia Naturale di

Genova. Ann. Mus. civ. stor. nat. Genova. 17: vii-xxvii,

1-720.

ORIENTAL AND AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS PROSTEMMA

LAPORTE (HETEROPTERA: NABIDAE)

I. M. KERZHNER & N. G. STROMMER

Summary

Two new species, P. walkeri (Sri Lanka, south-west India) and P. australicum (Australia), and a

new subspecies P. fasciatum sulawesiense (Sulawesi I.) are established. A key to species and

revised data on distribution are given. Lectotypes of P. cardeulis Dohrn, of its junior synonym P.

placens Walker, and of P. fasciatum (Stal) are designated.

ORIENTAL AND AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS

LAPORTE (HETEROPTERA: NABIDAE)

LM. KRERZHNER & N.G. STROMMER

PROSTEMMA

KERZHNER, ILM. & STROMMER, NG. 1990, Oriental and Australian species of the genus

Prosiemma Laporte (Heteroptera: Nabidae), Ree, S. Aust Mus. 24(1): 27-34.

Two new species, & welkeri (Sri Lanka, south-west India) and & aus/ralicum (Australia), and

a new subspecies & faxeratiin sulawesiense (Sulawesi |.) are established. A key to species and

revised data on distribution are given, Lectorypes of A carduelis Dobra, of (ts junior synonym

FP. placens Walker, and of PB fasciatum (Stal) are desienated,

1.M. Korzhiner, Zoologival Institate, Academy of Scienves of the USSR, Leningrad, 199034 USSR.

NG. Scrommer, 190 Canterbury Road, Heathmont, Melbourne, Victoria 3135,

Manuscript received 13 Tine 1989.

The genus Prosientme Laporte, 1832 is widely

distributed in the Old World. The last revision of

the genus was published by Reuter & Poppius

(1909), A review of palearctic species is given by

Kerzhner (1981), a review of Afrotropical species by

the same author is in press.

Australia,

KEY TO THE ORIENTAL AND

AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF PROSTEMM A

Hind lobe of pronolum, seulellum and clavus

(eXeept somerimes a spot ar base of ourer margin)

black... .--20., -2

: re — Hind lobe of pronotum, ‘scutellum ‘and clavus

The following abbreviations are used for (excep! its EXtieme apes) red 2... 3

(Dre L.

institutions in which the material is preserved = 241) — Corium black with 2 yellowish white spots: at base

(curators who lent material are in parentheses): AM and near the middle; the last spot is connected

~ Australian Museum, Sydney (Dr'C.N. Smithers): wilh (he inner margin Of corium by a nacrew

AMNH - American Museum of Natural History, stripe. Membrane black with a spot in inner

New York (the late Prof, P. Wygodzinsky); ANIC corner and apical 1/5 white. Hemelytra covering

~ Australian National Insect Collection, CSIRO, at Rast 4/5 of abdomen Ienatt, Lehath 5,6-6.7

Canberra (Dr J.A.1,. Watson); AUW - Agricultural Co Se tae pects bias Slalant Lebhiertat

: 4 ‘ — Corium yellow wid wo small black spots: near

University, Wageningen (the late Dr R.H, Cobben), the middle of outer margin and al apex,

BMNH — British Museum (Natural History), Membrane black with a white spot in outer

London (Dr W.R. Dolling); CU - Connecticut corner, Hemelytra reaching about hall of

University, Storrs, Conn, (Prof. J.A. Slater); EQU abdomen length only. Length 6.5........ 0.

~ Entomology Department, Queensland University, (ep eee aes P. siamense Noualhier

St Lucia (the late Dr TLE, Woodward); IB - Institut = 30) — Underside of meso- and metattioray black or dark

Royal de l'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Bruxelles brown (Sometimes mesothorax reddish jn Whe

(DEA. Cupar NMP NarodatMuscum, Frage ‘illo Ins corer of menbran iho

7 Hoberlandi), NRS - Naturhistoriska with a brownish vein. Length 7.898.002...

Riksmuseet, Stockholm (Dr P. Lindskog); QM mtv cuias “P. curduelis. Dorn

Queensland Museum, Brisbane (Dr G.B, Monteith); — Underside of *e60- and Motarlroray red or yellow

SAMA - South Australian Museum, Adelaide (Dr red, Innec corner of membrane without whi

G.F. Gross); USNM - U.S. National Museum of spot. Base of corium red, with a vein of the same

Natural History, Washington, DC. (Dr Th. J. colour, Length a a rule less (han 7.5-.-. 4

4(3) — White spot al ouler corner of membrane and apex

Henry); VPG -V.P. Gapud's collection, College,

Laguna, Philippines; ZIL - Zoological Institute,

Academy of Sciences of the USSR, Leningrad;

ZMB — Zoologisches Museum der Humboldt-

Universitat, Berlin, GDR (Dr U, Gollner-Scheiding);

ZMH - Zoological Museum, University of Helsinki

(Dr A, Jansson).

The sign ‘!" is used for specimens examined,

All measurements are in mm.

of vorjurn (riangular, part lyingon corium lorms

about 1/10 of its length (measured at outer margin

of hemetyrran), White spot ar apex. of membrane

with fore marin deeply invaginated, hind margin

touching the apex of membrane, luteral corners

nol rounded and (the outer of (hem connecting

by a narrow whitish stripe with white spot at outer

comer of inembrane, Mid and hind femora browi

fora least half their length, Length 6.57.5, width

28 LM. KERZHNER & Mc) STROMMER

20-24. -- aee eae teh P. ausiralicum spa,

~ While spetal outer eorner of membrane and apes

of corium more or less quadrangular!, the part

wing on corn forms about bu tot: oF its

len(h?, White spot on apex ol membrane as a

rule with fare margin straight or feehly

inyvaginated, Hind margin usually separated fram

apex of membrane by a more or less distiniet

érevish stripe, lateral corners usually rounded,

tHiever connecting with white spor at ourer corner

of membrane, Mid aod bind femora brows less

tharcone hall, usually no more than one-third of

their lent... 5, i)

Sid) — Whiie stripe of vorium with dubparuilet Syn" sud

Hind margins. White spot on apes af menibrane

uUbouL iWwiee ds wide ws long, White spot on outer

corner of membrane usually ties on corium by

halt its sie Length 6.5+7.6, width 2.0-2.5.

hcoapnted ees P fasciatum (Stal), 6

— While si stripe of corium distinetly widened atthe

middle, sfripes of Oppasile hemelyira widely

sepuraied., White spol on apes of membrane pe

more (in 15 limes as wide as long. White spot

on outer corner oF membratie Hes on coruny by

a thinber fourh of its length. Red volour at base

of hemelytra not changing bain the black stripe

Length 6.1-6:8, width LIS-L95 oe

seer anenee css Mil es conbteede ot St A walker? $p.0

(5) — Ww hite stripe of corium nore or less subequal in

width to black stripes behind and before it, atien

While stripes Gf opposite heme4ly ia are connected

hy a white spor ar buse of menibrane, Front

tuargin of anterior black stripe of eorium straight

or Wavy, Red volourat base of hemelyi usually

uridually turning inte yellow or white before rhe

black Stripes. ce PO Jusederui (Sib

While stripe of corn much narrower, twa lo

three limes narrower than black stripes behind

and especially. before ji, white siripes of oppasite

henmelvinn nol vonpected. Pront miargin of

wnterior black stripe af voritim angulate, Ree

colour at base of hemelvind practically aot

changing hefore the black stripe, occ... cay,

bb Dene lca nseaceincle Pf sulawesiense ssp.

‘The form of the spat should be examined caretutly.

Its inner margin is often masked by black margin of the

Opposite membrane lving-over or Under Me spot, (herelore

Homay look at first glanee Cinwular, as in the figure of

Ff fasciaivin in Reuter & Poppius (1909),

“ty is sonietimes dilficuli to determine rhe border

between membrine and apex ol corium, Phe apes of

coriiim can be distinguished by presence of Waits; besides,

itis (hicker than the membrane and mostly somewhat

yellowish,

Prostemona Havomaculatum Lethierry, 1883

(Fins 2a, 3)

Prosrennne Jlavernaculatunr Lethierry, 1883; 649;

Distant, 1904; 393.

Nuthis flavomaculatus: Reuter & Poppius, 1909: 10,

17; Bergroth, 1915: 178.

Svatvpe(s)

Male(s) (according to Reuter & Poppius, 1909),

BURMA, Minhla, leg. Comotto, stated to be in

Museo Civico di Storia Naturale in Genova, not

examined.

Distribution and inaterial examined

INDIA: Bombay! (Reuter & Poppitis, 1909

Bergroth, 1915; ZMH), Chick Ballapur! (BMNH),

W. Almora, Kumaon, U.P. (BMNH, Dolling i (ir),

Padang and Gopaldhara near Darjecling! (BMNH),

NEPAL: between Kathmandu and Everest (Prof.

R. Remane in /irt.). BURMA: Minhla (Lethierry,

1883), Carin, Asciuti Gheeu (BMNH, Dolling in

ditt,). We examined 14. imagos and | larva.

Note, The species is very closely related to the

Atratropical 2 concinnum Walker (eva Kirkaldy),

which is in the main larger (length 64-80), with

relatively broader pronotum (proporbon width to

length of pronotum in 2? flavamaculaium 110-116,

in P eoncinnun 1A8-1.23) and usually with more

disinel brown rings on the femora, while the

paramere in FP corcinmuin is lotiger, with more

broadly rounded outer corner and some other

differences,

Prostentna siamense Noualhier, 1896

Prosiemma stamense Nouathier, 1896: 253;

Noualhier & Martin, 1904; 176, pl 10, fig. 2;

Distant, 1919: 285.

Nabis siamensis: Reuter & Poppitis, 1909: 10, 15

Svatype

Female, now withow head, apparently the only

specimen used far description, CAMPUCHEA

(Siam), Battambang (aceording to Reuter &

Poppius, 1909), leg. A. Pavie, iy Museum National

d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris (Dr J. Perigart, i ditt),

ot examined by us.

The species is Known from the (ype only. Tt was

examined and redeseribed by Reuter & Poppins

(1909),

Prostemma ¢arduelis Dohrn, 1858

(Figs la, 2b, 3)

Prostemme carduelis Dohrn,

&; Distant, 1903: 253; Distant,

(part).

1858: 229, pl. 1, lig.

1904: 392, fig, 249

GENUS PROSTEMMA zu

} black

FIGURE L. Prosremimy, Jet hemelyiron; a

sulawesiense Subsp.n., d - Bo owalkeri spn, ©

Nabis (Poecilia) carduelis: Stl, (873: 108.

Prosteninia placens Walker, 1873: 137 (syn. by

Distant, 1903).

Nabis carduelis: Reuter & Poppius, 10%: 11, 18

(part,).

Nabis carduelis. var. plucens; Reuter & Poppius,

1909: 19

Types

Lectotypes: of can/uelis, male, hereby designated,

labelled 3259", ‘Type’, turduelis Dohrn, Ceylon,

[legd Nieinfer]', ‘Nedis carduclis Dolirn, &

| i

\ \ a =- m+)

4 a \ '

| | yy at \ {

\ i \ \ | N

| [ | | \ |

On a) ha ey

- ar a C & ~ vd je Nog

ja No Nb se = J

PiciiRE 2. Prostentimud, lett patamere: a P

Jluvemacuiarain Letherry, Chick Ballanus, b- 7? cardyedis

Dota, Coimbatare, ¢ FE fasciatiinn Jusclanin (Stal,

Blhumo, d- 2 fuseratiim sidawesiense subsp.,, holarype,

e P walkers spn. holotype, | - PB oausrelicun spn,

Tawiisville.

|) grey or

ny brown

red

La] white

P carduelix Dohrn, bP) faseiadtin fuscia (Stall, ¢

Pe fasciaian

RP ausiralicuad spa

Schumacher rev.) in ZMB. Syotypes from Colombe

in Dohrn’s collection (now in Warsaw), probably

lost,

OF placens, female, hereby designaled, labelled

‘Type’, ‘Saunders 65.13" ‘Ind’, ‘27. Prestemma

placens’, in BMNH. Paralectorype: male (not

lemale as stated in the original deseription) labelled

‘LE. Ind.’ (hand-written eireularlabel), ‘Prasteiinta

nlacens, Walker's Catal’, ui BMNE, examined,

Disiribulion and material examined

SRL LANKA: Colombo (Dohrn, 1858), alse

specimens labelled ‘Ceylon’ and colleeted by

Nietner! (ZMB), by Gieen! (BMNH) and by

unknown person! (NRS), INDIA: Coimbatore!

(AMNH, CU, USNM, ZIL), Nileiri Hills! (CL),

Chick Buallapur! (BMNH). Secunderabad!

(BMNH), Pooua! (BMH), Mile 4 Winunvan to

Kharagoda, Bombay! (BMNIHM), Mandar! (1B),

Janjeir, Bilaspur’ (BMNH), Pusal (BMNE),

Pumea Diste! (BM NEL, Balasore (Reuter &

Poppius, 1909), alsa specimens withone exaer

lociries! (BMNH) NEPAL: ferart (BMNH),

Indrawati Khrola, Sarerar! (NMP). We examined 23

specinrens.

Nates, The species is. closely pelared to the

Afrotropical P felkenseind Stein, fram whieh it

differs in the less denise puneruatian of the hind lohe

of pronotiin and sinaller paramere. Desteanc’s 1904)

30 I.M, KERZHNER & N.G. STROMMER

record from Burma, judging from specimens in

BMNH and ZIL collected by L. Fea, refers to PR

fasciatum, Reuter & Poppius (1909), judging from

their data on the colour of thorax (‘meso- et

metapleuris nigris vel rufo-testaceis’) and the length

of the ‘typical form’ (6 mm), apparently confused

under P. carduelis 3 species: their specimens of ‘var.

placens’ from India belong to PR carduelis, whereas

specimens identified as the typical form of PR

carduelis belong in fact to P fasciatum (Burma,

Vietnam) and P walkeri (Sri Lanka), Philippine

specimens recorded as PR carduelis by Stal (1871)

were later described by him as a new species PR

Jasciatum,.

Prostemma fasciatum fasciatum (Stal, 1873)

(Figs 1b, 2c, 4)

Nabis (Poecilta) fasciata Stal, 1873: 108.

Nabis fasciatus: Kirkaldy, 1901: 220; Reuter &

Poppius, 1909: 11, 19, fig 3; Poppius, 1914: 135;

Gross, 1963: 390.

Prostemma Jasciatum: Takara, 1957: 52; Hasegawa,

1962: 20, fig. 21; Miyamoto & Hidaka, 1963: 80;

Miyamoto, 1964: 275; Kerzhner, 1970: 357; Hsiao

& Ren, 1981: 544 (not pl. 82, fig. 804 representing

a species of Rhamphocoris!).

Metastemma carduelis (misidentification): Stal,

1871: 675.

FIGURE 3. Distribution of Prostemma flavomaculatum Lethierry (squares), P carduelis Dohrn (circles) and PR walkeri

sp.n, (triangles).

GENUS PROSTEMMA 3

Prastemina carduelis (misidentification): Distant,

1904: 392 (part),

Nabis carduglis (visidentitication):

Poppius, 190%: 18 (part.).

Reuter &

Type

Lectotype: female (nat male .as stated in the

original descriprion!), hereby designated, labelled

Yasciuta (Stal" (apparently in (Stal’s handwriting),

NRS. The species was described from the

Philippines.

Distribulion and material examined

INDIA: Purnea Distr! (BMNH). BURMA:

Bhamo! (Distant, 1904, as cardwelis, BMNH, 711),

Pegu, Palon (Kirkaldy, (90); Distant, 1904, as

carduelis, Reuter & Poppius, 1909, as curduclis),

Tikekee (Reuter & Popptus, 1909, as carduelis),

THALLAND: Bangkok! (BMNH), Racburi!

(USNM), Chieng Mai (Hasegawa, 1962). LAOS:

Vientiane! (BMNH, ZIL) CAMPUCHEA;

Karnpong Cham and Siem Reap (Hasegawa, 1962),

VIETNAM: Chiem Hoa (Reuter & Poppius, 1909,

as cardeulis}, Hanoi! (ZL), Tam Dao! (Z1L), Dong

Hail! (ZIL), Prov Gia Lai- Cong Tum! (ZIL). 5,

CHINA: Guangxi: Yanshan (Hsiao & Ren, 1981);

Guongdone: Guanuzhou (Hsiao & Ren, 198)), Lin-

hsien (Linchow) (= Lianxian)! (BMNH) Fujian: Gu

Shan nr Fuzhou! (ZIL), TAIWAN (Hasegawa,

1962; Miyamoto, 1964; Hsiao & Ren, 1981). JAPAN;

Amami-Oshima, Okinawa and Iriomote Islands

(Takara, 1957; Miyamoto & Hidaka, 1963;

Miyamoto, 1964), PHILIPPINES: no exact locality,

lectotype! (Stal, 1873; NRS); Lucan: Alabang, Rizal

Prov.! (USNM), Mt Makiling! (VPG); Mindanao:

Davao! (ZMH), Momungan! (BMNH).

MALAYSIA: Selangor: Kuala Lumpur! (BMNB);

Sabah; NO Borneo’ (Pappius, 1914), Mt Kinabalu,

Tenom Kinangau! (BMNH), Beiloian nr Sandakan

(BMNH); Serntwak: Ban! (BMNH), Kuching

(BMNB). INDONESIA; Sumatra (Reuter &

Poppius, 1909): Tebingtinggi! (Poppius, 1914;

ZMH), Medan! (NRS), Tjinta Radja! (NRS),

Tanjungmorawa!t (AUW, ZIL), Paggar Barban!

(ALW), Labuan Bilik! (2MH), Fort de Koek

(~ Bukittingi)! (BMNH); Jave: Chandoe (Reuter &

Poppius, 1909), Sukabumi (Poppius, 1914), nr

Banyumas! (BMNH), Banyuwangi! (ZIL), We

exumined 43 specimens. Many of them were

collected at light.

Prostemima faseiatum sulawesiense subsp.n.

(Figs le, 2d, 4)

Diagnosis

Differs from ibe nominerypical subspecies by the

colour af the hemelytra, as indicated in the key. The

paramere is slightly smaller, but does not differ in

form,

Types

Holotype: male (badly damaged, without head

and some legs), INDONESIA, south af Sulawesi

Island, Macassar (now Ujung Pandang), leg. W

Doherty, 1903-31 (BMNBR).

Paratype: female, INDONESIA, south of Sula-

wesi Island, ‘Lompoh Batang’ (Lompobattang M1),

200 m leg. H. Lucht (AU W).

Prostemma walkeri sp.0.

(Figs Id, 2e, 3)

Prostemma carduelis var.2": Walker, 1873: 137.

Descriplion

Body covered by long black hairs, Head,

pronolum, a narrow stripe at outer margin of

corium, legs, underside of pro- and mesotherax and

of abdomen shining, the remaining parts dull. Hind

lobe oF pronotum with few scattered punerures,

Hemelytra reaching or slightly surpassing the apex

of abdomen, Fore femora strongly thickened, bul

without angular projection near the middle.

Head and rostrum black or blackish brown,

segnient 1V of rastrum yellow. Antennae yellow to

brown, Fore lobe of pronotum black, hind lobe red.

Scutelluim red to yellowish red. Clavus red, its

extreme apex with black margins and usually with

a very small yellowish spar. Base of conum (about

a third of its length) red, remaining part black, with

a transverse spol in the middle and apex. white, The

white spot is distinctly narrowed to ourer margin

of corium, its inner margin is rounded. Membrane

black, ouler corner with a sub-quadrare white spot

partly (by '4 to 4 of its length) lying at apex of

corium. Inner corner af membrane without white

spot. Apex of membrane With a white spor

separated trom hind margin of membrane by a

greyish stripe, Fore margio of this white spot nearly

straight, outer comers broadly rounded, width of

spot about 1,5 times its length. Hypocostal lamina

red, blackish at extreme apex, Underside af bady

black or dark brown, except hind part of

propleurae, meso- and metathoray red or yellowish

red, Fore coxae dark brown, mid and hind caxas

light brown. Trochanters pale yellow, Fore femora

dark brown, apical fourth pale yellow. Mid and nnd

femora yellow with the middle third brown, Tibiae

and tarsi yellow to brown.

Paramere as in PB fasciaiumr, bul smaller.

Length co 61-68, 9 6,5, width o |.75-1.95, ¢

1.9,

Measurements: Head length (except neck ani

base of rostrum) o 0.71-0.79, 9 0.71, width o

0.73-0.83, 9 0.79, inrerocular distance o 0.31-0.34,

? 0.33, antennal segments length 0.37 (11 1 0,79)

- (0.14 + 0,93), 0.81, 0.79, pronotum length o

32 ILM. RERZHNER & NG, STROMMER

FIGURE 4. Distribution of Prosremma fasciatim fasciatum (Stal) (circles) and P fasciatum sulawesiense subsp.n.

(squares).

1.36-1.54, 9 1.41, width o 1.79-1,96, 9 1.80, hind

tibia length 1.80-2.15.

Types

Holotype: male, SRI LANKA, Nat. Park Wil-

pattu, Talawila, 13 km W. of Maradanmaduwa, 7-9

Oct. 1982, V. Zaitzev (ZIL).

Paratypes: INDIA: 1a, Hoshangabad, at light,

14-19 Oct, 1911, TBP. (BMNH); 19 labelled

‘E.Ind.’ (on circular label), with explanatory label

of Dr W.R. Dolling ‘Wooley/Hewitson, probably

Bombay, Walker’s “carduelis var.?”, (BMNH).

Notes. The new species is closely related to P

Jasciatum, but differs in somewhat more slender

body as well as in the form of the white markings

as indicated in the key. It is named in honour of

Fk. Walker, who published its first description.

Prostemma australicum sp.n.

(Figs le, 2P, 5)

Description

Body covered with long black hairs. Head,

pronotum, a narrow stripe at outer margin of

corium, legs, underside of pro- and mesothorax and

of abdomen shining, the remaining parts dull, Hind

lobe of pronotum with few seattered punctures.

Hemelytra reaching or slightly surpassing apex of

GENUS PROSTEMMA 4

abdomen, Fore femora strongly (hickened, bul

without angular projection near middle.

Head and rostrum black or blackish brown,

sezmen! 1V of rostrum yellow. Antennae yellow to

brown, Fore lobe of pronotum black, bind lobe red.

Scutellum red, Clayus red, its extreme apex black

or with blaek margins. Base of vorium (about a

third of its length) red, remaining part black with

u fransverse spot near middle and extreme apex

White, White spot is distinctly narrowed to outer

margin of corium, is miner margin is rounded or

angular, Membrane blavk, ourer corner with a

triangular while spot, oveupying also extreme apical

margin of corium. Inner corner of membrane

without White spor, bur otten with @ greyish white

margin. Apex of membrane with a white spot not

separated from hind margin of membrane by a

greyish stripe. Fore margin of this white spot deeply

concave, ouler corners prolonged along the margins

of the membrane in form of greyish or while seripes

reaching the while spot af outer corner of

membrane and often the inner corner of membrane,

Hypovostal lamina red, blaekisl al extreme apex.

Underside of body black or dark brown, except

hind part of propleurag, meso- and metathoras red

or yellow, Fore coxae dark brown, mid and hind

coxue deep yellow lo brownish yellow, Trochanters

pale yellow. Fore femera dark brown, pale yellow

apically; nod and hind femora dark brown, abaut

“4 basal yellow, sometimes yellow apically on the

ventral side, brown part occupies more than a hall

lengih of femur, Tibiae and tarsi brownish yellow,

Paramere relatively broader than in P foseiatum

and B walkert, with less invaginated inner margin.

Length o 65-7.1, 9 6.3-7.45, width ct 2,0-2,35,

Y 2.0-2.4.

Measurements: Head length (except neck and

base of rostrum) about 0.75-0.80, width 0.80-0.85,

interocular distance 0.34-0.40, aennal seemens

length 0.95-0.45, (0.10 + 0.95) - (O72 + 1.13),

1.00-1.07,, 0.80-0.95, pronotum length 1.45-1.65,

width. 1.85-2.20.

TVpey

Holotype: male, AUSTRALIA, Queensland,

Leichhardt Falls, 33 ml SE of Burketown, 24 May

1972, OB, apd SR. Monteith (EQU),

Paratypes; AUSTRALIA: Queenslund: lor, 29,

sume labels as in hololype (EQU); 1a", Camoovweal,

19 Sept, 1968, K, Armstrong (AM): Tor, 12,

Townsville, Jan. and Feb, 1945, B. Malkin (USNM);

ly, 3) km NW by WN of Longreach, 23 °13'S,

I44 Q4°E, 10 May 1973, M.S. Upton (ANIC): 1p,

FIGURE 5. Distribution of Prostemma ausiraticquny spn.

Cunnamulla, Nov, 1941, N. Geary (AM): 19,

Wallaville, LL. Banerotf; Western Australia: 1,

Kimberley Distr, March 1911, Mjobers (NRS);

Northern Territory: 19, Coastal Plains Research

Station, C.8.1.R.0., or Darwin, at light, 6 June 1966,

E. Langfield (ANIC); 19, 5 kim NNW of Cahills

Crossing, East Alligator Riv., 12°23'S, 132°57'E,

§ June 1973, R, Kitching (ANIC); 29, 4 km W ol

Coolibah H§,. 1534'S, 130°54’R, 13 June 1968,

M. Mendum (ANIC); Lo, 1G, Tindal, 14°31'S,

132°22'E, 1-20 Dee. 1967, light trap, WLM.

Vestiens (ANIC); 19, Katherine Riv., 25 km NE

of Katherine, 3 Oct. 1977, G.B& Gross and JA.

Forrest (SAMA); 79, Lake Woods, (5 km SW of

Elliot, ar light, 5 Oct. 1977, G.F Grass (SAMA);

12,22 mls S of Alice Springs, 15 Feb. 1966, JA,

Grant, BM/CSIRO Expedition (BMNH); New

South Wales: tot, Bogan Riv, Jan, 1932, J,

Armstrong (AM); 29, ‘The Cubas’, via Booligal,

21 Feb-l March 1965, A. Forbes (AM); Senshs

Australia: 29, Madigan Gull, Lake Eyre, at light,

3 Noy. 1955, ET. Giles (SAMA).

Notes

This species represents the first record of rhe genus

Prostemma from Australia, and was mentioned by

Woodward & Strommer (1982), when they referred

toa genus of Nabidae, not recorded fron) Australia.

Characters differentiating PR ausiralicum {rom the

closely related oriental PR fasciatum and P walkeri

are indicated in the key:

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The authors ackiowledge the heip of all euratars fisted

with their instituions inthe intraduebon, whoa provided

miterial for this stucly,

REFERENCES:

REROROTIL § 1905, Flemiptent from the Bombay

Presidency, J Burtby nae Hise See 24r V70- 079

notes, MV.

(continued),

DISTANT. W.L.

Heleroprera;

03, Rhynchotel

Family Reduvyiidwe

34 ILM. KERZHNER & N.G. STROMMER

Apiomerinae, Harpactorinae and Nabinae. Ann. Mug.

nat. Hist. (7) Wy; 245-248.

DISTANT, W.L. 1904. ‘The Fauna of British India,

including Ceylon and Burma’. Vol. 2 (2). Taylor and

Francis, London.

DISTANT, W.L. 1919. Heétéropteres, /n R. Vitalis de

Salvaza. ‘Essai d’un Traité d'Entomologie Indochinoise’.

Minsang, Hanoi.

DOHRN, A. 1858. Synonymische Bemerkungen iiber

Hemipteren und eine neue Art der Gattung Prostemimia.

Stert. ent. Ztg. 19(7/9): 228-230.

GROSS, G.F. 1963. Coreidae (Alydini by J.C, Schaffner),

Neididae and Nabidae. /h ‘Insects of Micronesia’. Vol

7 (7). B.P. Bishop Mus,, Honolulu.

HASEGAWA, H. 1962. Heteroptera of Southeast Asia

collected by the Osaka City University Biological

Expedition to Southeast Asia 1957-58. /n T. Kirst & T.

Umesao (Eds). ‘Nature and Life in Southeast Asia’, Vol.

2. Fauna a. Flora Res. Soc., Kyoto,

HSIAO Tsai-yu & REN Shu-zhi. 1981, Nabidae. /n Hsiau

Tkai-yu et al. ‘A Handbook for the Determination of

the Chinese Hemiptera-Heteroptera’. Vol, 2. Acad.

Sinica, Beijing.

KERZHNER, LL.M. 1970, Neue und wenig bekannte

Nabidae (Heteroptera) aus den tropischen Gebieten der

Alten Welt. Acra Mus. natn. Prague 38(1969): 279-359.

KERZHNER, I.M. 1981. Hemiptera family Nabidae. /#

OA. Scarlato (Chief Ed.) and G.S. Medvedey (Ed),

‘Fauna SSSR’ (N.S., No. 124), Vol. 13(2), Nauka,

Leningrad, (In Russian).

KIRKALDY, GW. 1901, Anmerkiingen iber

bemerkenswerle Nabinen (Rhynchota). Wien. ent Zig.

20(10): 219-225,

LETHIERRY, L, 1883. Insecta Hemiptera in Birmania

(Minhla) a D, Comotto lecta. Ann, Mus. ery, Stor. nut.

Genova 18: 649-650.

MIYAMOTO, S. 1964. Tingidae and Nabidae of the South-

West islands, lying between Kyushu and Formosa.

Kontytt 32(2): 271-280,

MIYAMOTO, S. & HIDAKA, T, 1963. Heteroptera

collected by the Kyushu University Expedition to the

Yaeyama Group, 1962. Reports Commitiee foreign sei.

Res. Kyushu Univ. 1: 75-82.

NOUALHIER, M. 1896. Note sur les Hémiptéres récoltés

en Indo-Chine et offerts au Muséum par M. Pavie. Bull.

Mus, Hist. nat. 2(6): 251-259.

NOUALHIER, M. & MARTIN, J. 1904. Hémiptéres

recueillis par M.A. Pavie. Jn ‘Mission Payie Indo-Chine

1879-1895, Etudes Diverses. 3. Recherches sur I’Histoire

Naturelle de I'Indo-Chine Orientale’, Paris.

POPPIUS, B. 1914, Zur Kenntnis der Nabiden (Hemiptera-

Heteroptera). Anau. Mus. Zool. Acad. Sci. St-

Pétersbourg 19(1): 134-140,

REUTER, O.M. & POPPIUS B. 1909. Monographia

Nabidarum orbis terrestris. Pars 1. Acta Soc. Sci. Fenn.

37(2): 1-62.

STAL, C, 1871. Hemiptera Insularium Philippinarum.

Ofv. kel. VetenskAkad. Forhandl. (1870) 27(7):

607-776.

STAL, C, 1873. Enumeratio Hemipterorum, 3. Kgl, sy.

betenskaAdad. Handl. 11(2): 1-167.

TAKARA, T. 1957, Provisional lst of Hemiptera

(Heteroptera) in the Ryukyu Islands. Sei. Bull. Agric.

Hame Econ, Div, Univ, Ryukyus 4; 1-90 (not seen,

cil, from Miyamoto, 1964).

WALKER, F. 1873. ‘Catalogue of the Specimens of

Hemiptera-Heleroptera in the British Museum’, Vol, 7.

Brit. Mus., London.

WOODWARD, TLE, & STROMMER, N.G, 1982, Nabis

kinbergii Reuter, the current fame for Trapiconabis

nigrolineatus (Distant), and its Australian distribution

(Hemiptera: Nabidae). 4. Aust. ent. Soe, 21(4): 306.

REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN HYDROBIOMORPHIA BLACKBURN

(COLEOPTERA: HYDROPHILIDAE)

C. H. S. WATTS

Summary

The Australian members of the hydrophilid genus Hydrobiomorpha Blackburn are revised and

redescribed and a key to the species is given. Five species are recognised; H. troxi sp. nov., H.

microspina sp. nov., H. helenae Blackburn, H. bovilli Blackburn and H. debbae sp. nov., H. tepperi

Blackburn is synonymised with H. bovilli with H. bovilli Blackburn.

REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN HYDROBIOMORPHA BLACKBUKN

(COLEOPTERA: HYDROPHILIDAE)

C.H.S. WATTS

WATTS, C.H.S. (990. Revision of Australian Ayvdrobiomarpha Bs. (Coleoptera: Hydrophilidae).

Ree. S. Aust. Mus, 24(1)2 93-42.

the Australian members of the hydrophilid genus //vdrebiomorpha Blackburn are revised

and redescribed and a key 1a the species is given. Five species are recognised; 4, (rexi sp, nov.,

FA. micraspine sp. nov., H. helenae Blackburn, A. bovilli Blackburn and A. deblae sp. nov.

Hi reppert Blackburn is synonymised with A. bevilli Blackburn.

C.H.S, Walls, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, South Australia S000,

Manuscript received 41 July 1989,

The tive Australian species of Hydrobiomorpha

Blackburn, I888, are restricted to coastal areas of

northern Australia, H. bevilli Blackburn and H.

helenae Blackburn are by far the commonest,

sometimes being collected in large numbers at light.

The other species, all new, are widespread but

infrequently collected) Nothing is known of their

life history,

The genus of about 30 species, which is widely

distributed in tropical Asia, Africa, Australia and

South America, was revised by Mouchamps (1959)

who briefly redescribed the three Australian species

then recounised and figured the male genitalia of

H. helenae and A. tepperi (~ Hy, bovilli).

The collections from which specimens were ex-

amined are listed under the following abbreviations;

AM Australian Museum, Sydney

ANIC Australian National Insect Collection,

Canberra

BMNH_ British Museum (Natural History),

London

CW Private Collection of Author

EUQ University of Queensland, Brisbane

NMYV Museum of Victoria, Melbourne

NTM Northern ‘Territory Museum and Art

Gallery, Darwin

QDPIM Queensland Department of Primury

Industries, Mareeba

QM Queensland Museum, Brisbane

SAMA — South Australian Museum, Adelaide

WAM Western Australian Museum, Perth

SYSTFMATICS

Hydrobiomorpha Blackburn, 1888

Avdrobiomoarpha Blackburn, 1888, p. 814.

Neohydrophilus W'Orchymont, 1912, p. 59, syn,

aller Mouchamps, 1959,

Type species: Hydrobiomorpha bovillf Blackburn,

I888, subsequent designation of Kniseh, 1924.

Neohydraphilus deplanatus d'‘Orchymont from East

Attica, by original designation of d’Orehymont,

1919,

The genus belongs to the sub-family

Hydrophilinae, characterised by a continuous

median longitudinal keel on the underside which

is prolonged into a spine between the hind coxae

(Figs |, 2). Within the Australasian members of the

sub-family, Hyvdrabiomorpha is characterised by

having the front of the ven(ral keel notched, the

prosternal pillar not hooded to receive the front end

of the ventral keel and with a backward pointing

spine in most species (Figs 16-23), the basal portion

of only the profemora rugose, five rows of serial

punctures on the elytra including a sub-lateral row,

and the front margin of (the clypeus widely

emarginate exposing an extensive membranous area

except in H, troxi.

Males differ from females by having the claws

on all legs more sharply bent than in the females

and with a bulbous basal partion which is lacking

in the females. Compared with females the protarsi

are slightly more expanded, The maxillary palpi are

simple in the female but variously expanded in

males, particularly the second joint.

Key to Australian Hydrobiomorpha

Membranous areas on frons reduced to small

shallow area in centre (Fig. 9); head strongly

punctured; bare area at apex of last

abdominal segment large. . ./roxi sp. nov,

— Membranous area on frons extensive (Figs

8 and |0); punctures on head variable; bare

urea al apex of last abdominal segment

variable, usually lacking or small.......2

3 CALS. WATTS

Spine on pronotal pillar lacking (Fig. 16);

aedeagus without dorsal neteh (Fig. 19)...

mse ate et ee da Oe microspina sp. nov.

— Spine on pronotal pillar well developed (Fig,

22); aedeapus with deep dorsal noich (Figs

3 and 4).. 2..... Preis CLL. ifere¥ tued

Back portion of keel less than twice width

of front portion, front portion dipping

virtually at right angles beyond notch, ,4

— Back portion of keel more than twice the

width of front portion, from portion gently

dipping in front of noteh.....2...0.-..

en Eee ee, helenue Blackburn

Spine on pronotal pillar long (Figs. 22 and

23); central portion of membranous area at

front of frons relatively wide (Fig, 8);

maxillary palpi of male weakly expanded

(Fig, 3); groove along front edge of

pronotum usually teaching past inner edge

OF BVBe eh a ea Pale’ bovill’ Blackburn

— Spine oo pronotal pillar short; cenrral

portion of membranous area ar fron) of

frons. relatively small (Fig. 10); maxillary

palpi of male strongly expanded (Fie. 7);

groove along front edee af pronotum usually

not reaching 10 middle of eye,.......-.-

tah arm tl ae alae tn oon aie met rte debbae sp. nov.

Hydrobiamorpha troxi sp, nov,

Description (number examined 10). (Figs 4,9, 11, 21)

Length 15-17 mm. Broadly oval. Predominantly

black; elytron with about ten thin lighter lines

visible in some lights; ends of legs and appendages

lighter. Head densely covered with strong, variably

sized punerures, the largest about twice size of

smallest; row of very large punctures alang inner

edge oF eye; a rough semicircle of very large

punctures forward from each eye; a few large

punctures alang rear edge of clypeus and a short

row af large punctures in middle of clypeus; finely

reticulate; membranous area belween [rons and

elypeus black, reduced to small narrow atea in

middle half (Fig. 9), Pronotum with somewhat

sparser and weaker punctures than on head; linely

reticulate; two oblique lines of large punctures and

a short line or palch of punctures in front of them

on each side; groove along front edge reaching to

about level of inner edge of eye. Elytron finely

reticulate; punctures sparser and liner than on

pronoium with five rows of large serial punctures

all but the auter in well marked single row, rhase

in third row sparser than in others, Sternal keel

widely expanded in posterior half which is weakly

srooved in midline, produced backwards. into a

short spine. Front portion of keel curving slowly

upwards in front of noteh, notch at or litrle below

plarie of rest of keel. Pronotal pillar narrow in

lateral view, broad in ventral view with long setae,’

bulbous in front, small soul spine behimd (Fig. 21).

Mesa- and metasterna and abdomen excep! keel,

legs and large apical patch on last abdominal

sternite, rugase-punctate. Non-rugose portion on

apical sternite finely reticulate and with seat tered

very line punctures. Lateral wings of meposternuim

with extra portion on fron| edge, Front portion of

gula lightly covered with moderate sized punctures

of varying sizes, basal portion with a few similar

punctures at each side only, Spines on apical edge

of protibia enlarged, robust, both approximately

same length and spatulate but outer a little larger,

Male

Protarsi slightly expanded, spine on apex of

protibia larger, claws on all legs mare sharply bent

than in female with bulbous basal portion.

Maxillary palpi with second joint expanded with

shallow groove on ventral surface, apical joint much

shorter (han Others (Fig. 4). Aedeagus asin Fig, tI.

Distribution

Kiowa only trom coastal Northern Territory.

Tipes

Holotyper M. 12°52°S 132°47°E, Noulangie

Creek, NTL, 8 km EB. of Me Cahill, 22.v.1973, ar

light, E.G. Marthews, SAMA.

Paratypes; |, same data as Holatype, ANIC; 1,

Australia, SJ. Humpry Doo 6 km E. 941-411. 1987,

RI. Storey, ODPLIM; 4, King R. NO, 24.12.15, one

with additional label, King R. No Coll’d W.

Metennan, 24.12.15. Pres. HL. White 17.106,

NMY; 1, King Ro NIT, 24.1215, CW; Lt, Port

Darwin NT, SAMA; I, N-T. Australia, Groote

Eylandt 17,111,1925. GM, Wilkins, BMNH.

Remarks

H. troxiis a distinctive species (reminding me of

the trogid genus Trox), and isrcadily separated from

other Australian Avdrebiomorpha by whe lack af

an exlensive membrangus area al the front of the

Irons, the strong even punctatian on the frons, the

large shiny area at the apex of the apical sterniie;

and the short apical segment of the male palpi.

FIGURES 1-10. |, keel of (1 helenae: 2, keel of #7. bovillf: 1 ventral view al male maxillary palpus of Al bowilly:

4, dine, HM tran 5, ditito, /. niicraspina; 6, ditto, //, debbae; 7, ditto, /. helenae; §%, trans area of head of HH, Aelenae;

9, iG AD trax; 10, dillo A, debbee

AUSTRALIAN HYDROBIOMORPHA 37

38 CLS. WATTS

Hydrobiomorpha microspina sp. o0v.

Description (umber examined 21). (Figs §, 15, 16,

17)

Length 11-16 mm. Oval, Predominantly blacks

front and sides of clypeus testaceous, border of

colour a birtle broader in niluline; appendages and

mitch of underside testaceous. Head, Jinely

reticulate, quite densely covered in quite large (for

genus) pimetures; a patch of much langer puncrures

on inner edge of eve; a rough, broken semicirele of

similar punctures forward from eye; rear margin of

clypeus with several large punctures; front portian

of gula covered in yery strong punctures, mulch

sparser and smaller on hind portion almost lacking

in midline; membranous area between [rons and

clypeus broad, broadest part resificted to nar much

more than central half Elytra sculptured as an

pronotum, with five uneven (particularly laveral

ones) rows of large serial punctures, Pronotum, with

tine reticulation, covered with punctures noticeably

weaker than those on head; sides with Iwo shor!

abliquc lines of large punctures and one line parallel

to edge; grooves along tront edge variable in length,

from virtually non-existant to nearly joining in

centre. Sternal keel weakly expanded in posterior

half, produced behind into 4 broad blunt spine.

Meso- and metasternum and abdomen ruyosely

purictate except sternal keel and appendages. Apical

abdominal sternite without, or with only a trace of,

bare area at apex, Lateral wing of metasternom with

narrow extra portion on front edge. Front portion

of sternal keel curving upwards rapidly, notch at

or a jittle above level of rest of keel. Pronotal pillar

moderately narrow in veniral view, front edge

bulbous, spine on hind edge lacking or very small

(Figs 16, 17)

Male

Protarsi slightly expanded, claws on all legs more

sharply bent than in female with bulbous hind

portion, Maxillary and labial palps stout,

particularly second segments of maxillary palpi

(Fig. 5). Acdeagus as in Pig, 13.

Distribution

Restricted 10 wetter coastal areas of the Northern

Territory and Cape York. Known only trom ype

lacalities.

Types

Holotype: M. NT. Atlight. 10 mi E. Daly River,

28 June 1972. Buk. Head, SAMA.

Paralypes: 2, At MV lamp. Mornington Is,

Mission Qid,, 1S May 1963, N_B. Tindale and P.

Aitken; 1, Mornington ts. Mission Qld, 15 May

1963, P. Aitken, N. Tindale, SAMA; 3, Mataranka,

NT, | March 1967 MLS. Upton, ANIC, CW; I, Daly

R, Mission N-T. 19 km E, by S. of Mt Barradaile,

3iv.74, al light. EG, Matthews, SAMA; I, Dillo

5¥i.73, M.S. Upton, SAMA; 2. Brock Creek

Burnside N. Aust. ¢ May 1929 T1G. Campbell,

ANIC; |, 100m). E, of Kununurra W.A,, light trap

27.35.66 JA. Mahon, ANIC; 1, Austrahia, NOT,

Muirella Park, Kakady [8.1987 Fay and Halfpapp

at lizht, ODPIM: 2, Rowanyama, N. Qld., 91.1977,

D.L. Hanvock, QM; 1, at light Normanton QlL,

3 May, 1963 N.8. Tindale and P Aitken, SAMA;

3, Hann Riv., N.Q. 100 mis. af Coen, 23.vi1970,

Lele Souel, NMY; 2, 12°17'S 133°93 °F. Rirraduk

Creek, NoT. is km BE. of N. of Oenpelli 41973,

Upton and Feehan, ANIC-

Remarks

Separated most readily trom other Australian

species by the lack al, or virjual lack of, a spine

on pronoral pillar, The aedeagus lacks or virtually

lacks any trace of (re deep dorsal notel present in

the other Australian species.

Hydrobiomerpha helenae Blackburn

fivdrobiomorpha helenae Blackburn, 1890, p. 7415

Knisch, 1924, p. 234: Mouchamps, 1959, p. 303.

Description (Wuimber exaniined 141). (Pies 1, 7, 8,

13, 18, 19)

Length tl-l6 mm. Broadly oval. Predominantly

black, fron} hall of clypens and appendages rufous

yellow, elytra usually with alternating dark ane liptic

longitudinal stripes of wreen-grey separated by

narrow black lines. This colour patiern of variable

distinctiveness and sometimes lacking in which case

elytra black. Head with evenly spaced, small,

variably sized, sharply impressed, punctures and

very fine reticulation; patches of much larger

punctures inwards from eyes und in a rough semi-

circle forward from each eye; hind margin of labium

with 4 few large puncttires; membranolis area

between clypeus and frans broad, wide, little

restricted laterally; front portion of gula quite

densely covered with strong punctures, back portion

with fewer, particularly in midline, similar or smaller

Punclures. Pronotum punctured as on head with

three obliquely slanted fields of large punetures on

cach side, groove along front edge reaching well

beyond inner border of eve, Elytra cavered in very

small sharply impressed punctures, very finely

reticulate and with five ineven rows of large setac-

hearing puncture lines, the laleral ones with

scallered, poorly aligned punctures. Slernal keel

widely expanded in posterior hall, sharply resiricted

between posteoxae co a short thin catinate points

front pertion curving Sharply upwards with notch

well above plane of mesosternum. Meso- and

metastérnum and abdomen rugose-punctate except

sternal keel, appendages and 4 smal) triangular bare

AUSTRALIAN HYDROBIOMORPHA 39

17 23

FIGURES 11-23. 11, dorsal view of aedeagus and left paramere and lateral view of aedeagus of H. troxi; 12, ditto,

H. debbae; 13, ditto, H. helenae; 14, ditto, H. bovilli; 15, ditto, H. microspina; 16 and 17, lateral views of different

pronotal pillars of H. microspina; 18 and 19, ditto, H. helenae; 20, ditto, H. debbae; 21, ditto, H. troxi; 22 and 23,

ditto, H. bovilli.

40 CHS. WATTS

parch at apex of apical abdominal sternite, Lateral

Wing of metasternum with narrow additional

portion on front edge Pronotal pillar broad in

ventral view, with well developed backward pointing

spine (Figs 18, 19).

Male

Protarsi slightly expanded, claws ofall legs more

sharply bent with bulbous basal portion, Joints of

maxillary palpi expanded, robust, second join!

greatly expanded and concave on ventral surface

(Fig. 7). Aedeagus ds in Fig. 13.

Distribution

Restricted to wet coastal areas from Derby to

Bundaberg. Also in Papua New Guinea.

Types

Lectotype: M. 3030 N/T Ty) Hydrobiomorpha

Helenae, Blackb; Blackburn coll. 1910-236,

BMNH, herein designated.

Paralectotypes: F. 3030 NT 8. Aust. 90,11;

Hydrebiomerpha Helenae, Blackb,, BMNH; ? sex

3030; N. Territory, Hydrobiomorpha Helenae,

Blackb, Co-type, SAMA, herein designated.

Additional localities

W.A, — Barradle, ANIC; Derby, WAM, SAMA;

90 ml. E. Derby, SAMA; Fitzroy Crossing, ANIC;

LOOMI. E. Kununurra, ANIC, Mitchell Plateau,

ANIC; Ord River, WAM; Windjana Gorge; ANIC;

Wyandotte, ANIC; Wyndham, NM.

NT — Adelaide River, ANIC; 31 km W.SM.

Borroloola, ANIC; Brock Ck Burnside, ANIC;

Daly River Mission, ANIC; Darwin, NWV, SAMA,

Groate Is., SAMA, Hori Islet, Sir Ed, Pellew Gp,

EUQ; Howard Springs, ANIC; 17 ml. N.N-LE.

Borroloola, ANIC; Humply Doo, QDPIM;

Kallterine, ANIC, UQIC; King River, NMY;

Kaongarra, ANIC; Oenpelli, NMY, Wessel Isl.,

ANIC,

OLD — Bloomfield River, EUQ; Bundaberg,

ANIC; Cairns, SAMA; Cape York, QM;

Cooktown, QM; Ingham, ANIC, Kowanyama, QM;

Mornington Isl. Mission, SAMA; Mutchilha, NMV;

Normanton, ANIC, SAMA: Saibai Isl, EUQ,

PNG — Morehead River, ANIC.

Remarks

Apart from AL troxi, which lacks the

membranous portion berween the frous and

clypeus, Al helenae is the only Australian

Aydrobiomorpha with alternating dark and heh

stripes on the elyira of most specimens atid a widely

expanded posterior portion of the keel, Some

specimens, particularly large females lack (he elytral

stripes.

Hydrohiomorpha bovilli Blackburn

Hedrobiomerpha bovilli Blackburn, 1888, p, 816;

Knisch, 1924, p, 234; Mouchamps, 1959, p. 305,

Hydrobiomorpha /epper! Blackburn 1888, p. 8175

Kisch 1924, p. 234; Mouchanmips 1959, p. 305. Syn.

nov.

Description (number examined 118), (Figs 2, 3, 14,

22, 23)

‘Length 1-17 mm. Narrowly oval, black; lrent al

clypeus. membranous area on bead and much at

underside testaceous, stall circular patelies of grey

around punctures on head, pronotum and elytra.

Head finely reticulate, moderarely densely covered

with small fine punctures. A field of laree purictures

along inuer border of eye, a rough semicircle in rant

of eye, a few large punctures along rear edge of

elypeus and a couple in middle of clypeus

Membranous area between frons and elypeus broad,

angularly restricted in lateral quarter, Pronotum

sculptured as head, with oblique lield of punctures

in middle on each side and.an oblique broken row

towards the fronton each side, groove along front

edge of pronotum reaghing beyond edge of eye.

Blytron punctured as on pronotum, with five rows

of relatively small serial punetures, the lateral three

rows With sparser punetures, a few linear rows of

small punctures visthle in some lights Lowards apex.

Sternal keel virtually same Width throughout,

produced into short sharp bhint point behind.

Meso- and metasiernunt aud abdominal sternites

rugosé-punctate except kecl and quite large

triangular to semicircular bare area at apex of apical

S§terhile, bare area offen longitudinally wrinkled.

Pronolal pillar narrow in ventral view with strong

slightly downward pointed spine (bigs 22, 23). Front

portion of keel dipping sharply upwards in front

of notch which ison sane plane as pest of keel,

Pront area ol gular region moderulely covered will

moderately sized punctures, rear poriion with some

much larger punclures on lateral portions, midline

impuncruate.

Male

All claws sharply bent with bulbous area at base.

Maxillary palps slouter particularly second joilir

which is expanded to about twice width of apical

joint (fig. 3). Aedeagus as in big, 14.

Distribution

A dorthern coastal species which is relatively

common from the Northern Territory around to the

Townsville — Home Hill revion of Queensland, Also

known Irom New Cuinea,

Tepes

H. bovill’ Blackburn. Holotype: F 2310 N20 Tr.

AUSTRALIAN EDV DROBIOMNORPIULA 4

Hydrobiomorpha Bovilli, Blackb.; Blaekburn coll.

1910-236. Mounted on cutaway card, in BMNH.

Locality given as Palmerston N-T. by Blaekburn

(18838).

/1. tepperi Blackburn, Lectotype: F. 2356 NLT. T

Hydrobiomorpha Tepperi, Blackb; Blackburn voll,

1910-236, On card, Card anve comained two

specunens, Ure ight hand one labelled “T' remains.

In BMNH. Locality given by Blackburn (1888) as

Palmerston N.T. Herein designated, Paralectotype:

M._N, Territory J.P. Tepper Hydrobiomarpha

Tepperi Blackb,, in SAMA; N, Territory, Tepneri,

Blackb., in SAMA. Herein designated.

Addimenal localities

OLD — Cairns, SAMA; 21 k NW. Cooktown,

ANIC: Home Hill, CW; 14 k NW, Hoye Vale

Missioh, ANIC, Ingham, QDPIMs [ran Range,

ANIC, EUQ: Kowanyanta, QM, Laura, ANIC,

QDPIM; Mornington Ist, SAMA; Mt Baird,

ANIC; Mt Webb Nar. Pk, ANIC; 38 k S. Musprave,

ANIC; Normanton, SAMA: Rovinided Hill 1S 17S

I45-13'E, ANIC; 40k S. Weipa, QDPIM.

NT — Adelaide River, ANIC! Bentinck Isl,

SAMA, Cooper Crick, ANIC; Darwin, CW;

Dirraduk Ck, SAMA; Howard Springs, ANIC;

King River, NMYV; 16k Nu, MI Cahill, ANIC, 18

k N.E, Qenpelli, Sire Edward Pellew Gp, ELIO: 6

k SM. Denpelli, SAMA: Rimbija Isl, ANIC.

PNG — Morehead, ANIC; Rouku, Morehead

River, ANIC; Weam, ANIC.

Remarks

The strong spine on pronotal pillar, relatively even

width of keel and long groove on the front of the

pronolum separate this conuTion species (rom other

Australian Hydrebiomorpha. The male oraxillary

palpi are not as expanded as in the related, but

rather larger species, H. debhae.

Hydrobiomorpha debbae sp. nav.

Description (Mumber cxamined 3). (Figs 6, 10, 12.

20)

Length 15-18 mm, Qval, Predominantly black;

trons of clypeus, membranous area on head, tarsi

und appendages (estaceous, punetures on elytra,

particularly serial ones, are in the centre of small

wrey spots. Head with seanered fine punctures of

varying size; very finely retivulate; row of serifenous

punctures along inner border of cye, a held of

cXtremely large punctures in front of eye, a lew large

punenires along rear edge of clypeus and a lew

scattered ones in middie; membranous area between

lrons and clypeus broad, hacrowing yather slowly

in Jarcral quarters (Piz, 10), Pronotum with very fine

weak reticulation sparsely covered in fine punctures;

three oblique lines of moderately Jarge punctures

on each side; groove along front edge reaching to

level of middle of eve. Elytron with reticulation and

punctures somewhat sceonger and denser than on

pronotum, with five pows of moderately lirae serial

punctures, sparser in {hird row and lateral two close

together. Sternal keel with hind partion a little

broader than front portion, produced into a blunt

point between hind coxaey front portion slopes

sharply upwards in front of notch which is on

approximately same plane as rest of Keel, Pronotal

pillar quite broad in ventral view, botlom edge

produced baek wards io short stour spine (Fig. 20),

Vront portion of gular urea well covered in strong

punctures, back portion similarly puneture except

for small imptiictate area in midline, Wings of

mesosternum without additional portion on tront

edve. Meso- and metasternum and sternites rugose-

punctate except for keel and trianularly shaped

bare pateh at apex of apical sterrive

Male

Profarsi a little expanded, all claws sharply curved

and with a small bulbous portion af base, Secoud

joint of maxillary palpus broadly expanded,

concave beneath (Fig. 6). Aedcupus as in big. 12.

Distribution

Known only trom jhe lype localides on the

eastern coast of Cape York

pes

Holowpe: M, Cairns dist. A.M, Lea, SAMA,

Paratypes, 1, Cape York Pen. Lockerbie N.O.,

9-15 April 1975, Coll. M. Walford-Muggins, CW;

1, Cairns, SAMA; |, same data as Holorype

SAMA; |, ‘Bald Hills’ Stn, 44 kim N. of Tsbella

Falls, Qld, 15°15°S 145°00'E, 29 Dee 1984 my

lainp, Gand A, Daniels, EUQ,

Remarks

H, debbae ean be separated from He hayilli by

tHe short pronolal spine and shori length of groove

alony front of pronoun, which seldom reaches to

level of the inner edge of eve and is usually much

shorter, the relatively shore width of wide porrion

of membranous area at front of frons (big. 10) and

The more strongly expanded seeand seyment of nrale

maxillary palpus (Fig. 6). A debbae is eenerally

longer and broader than AL bevill.

AC KNOW CE EOEMERS 0S

The elirutars of the collections listed earher are thanked

for the Iree and rapid access ro specimens in their care,

Dr L.. Matthews kindly read und improved rhe manuscript.

Mrs De Lowery pyymd suceessive versions. Miss 1 Thur

drew the Wustrations and the Librarian of phe S.A.

Muscuin, Mrs Mo Anthony helped wirh eelerences. Albot

these peonle ure thanked for their suppert ariel fwelp-

C.H.S. WATTS

REFERENCES

BLACKBURN, T. 1888. Notes on Australian Coleoptera,

with descriptions of new species. Proc. Linn. Soc.

N.S.W. (2) 3: 805-875.

BLACKBURN, T. 1890. Notes on Australian Coleoptera,

with descriptions of new species. Part IV. Proc. Linn.

Soc. N.S.W. (2)4: 707-746.

KNISCH, A. 1924. Hydrophilidae. /n S. Schenkling (Ed.).

Coleopterorum Catalogus. Vol. XIV. W. Junk, Berlin.

MOUCHAMPS, R. 1959. Remarques concernant les

genres Hydrobiomorpha Blackburn et Neohydrophilus

Orchymont (Coléoptéres Hydrophilides). Bull. Ann.

Soc. R. ent. Belg. 95: 295-335.

d’ORCHYMONT, A. 1912. Contribution a l’étude des

genres Sternolophus Solier, Hydrophilus Leach,

Hydrous Leach (Fam. Hydrophilidae). Mem. Soc. Ent.

Belg. 19: 53-72.

d’ORCHYMONT, A. 1919. Contribution a l’étude des

sous-familes des Sphaeridiinae et des Hydrophilinae

(col. Hydrophilidae). Ann. Soc. Ent. 88: 105-168.

THE ARCHAEOLOGICAL SIGNIFICANCE OF THE LOWER COOPER

CREEK

P. VETH, G. HAMM & R. J. LAMPERT

Summary

A systematic survey of the Lower Cooper Creek has revealed an exceptionally rich record of

prehistoric occupation, trade and subsistence strategies. Preliminary analysis of Holocene

assemblages suggests significant differences in settlement/subsistence strategies between the

floodplain unit and the dunefields proper, to the west. The location and dating of two hearths

incorporated within dune cores clearly establishes a human presence in the central Lake Eyre Basin

during the late Pleistocene.

THE ARCHAEOLOGICAL, SIGNIFICANCE OF THE LOWER COOPER CREEK

P. VETH, G. HAMM & R.J. LAMPERT

VETH, P., HAMM, G. & LAMPERT, R-I. 1990. The archacolovical significance of the | ower

Cooper Creek. Ree. S. Aust, Mus 24(1): 43-66.

A systematic survey of the Lower Cooper Creek fas revealed an caceptionally rich record of

prehistoric occupation, trade and subsistence strategies. Preliminary analysis of Holocene

assemblages suggests significant differences in setrlement/subsislence strategies between the

floodplain unit and the dunefields proper, to che west. The location and dating of two hearths

incorporated within dune cores clearly establishes a human presence in the central Lake Eyre

Basin during the late Pleistocene.

P. Veth, Centre for Prehistory. The University of Western Australia, Nedlands, Western Ausfralia

6009; G. Hamm, Consultant Archaeologist, c/Anthropology Division, South Australian Museum,

North Terrace, Adelaide, South Australia 500). and R. Lampert, Research Associale, The Australian

Museum, College Street, Sydney, New Sourh Wales 2000, Manuscript received 15 November |9K9.

INTRODUCTION

It is. something of a paradox chat the Lower

Cooper Creek, lying in the driest region of the

Australian continent, should have an extraordinarily

rich and diverse record of prehistoric human

occupation. This apparent anomaly, however, can

be explained largely by the periodic supply of huge

volumes of water from a catchment originating in

the eastern Highlands of central Queensland,

Although the catehment is 306 000 square

kilometres the Lower Cooper only Hows into Lake

Eyre about once in every 10 years. To reach Lake

Fyre the Lower Cooper passes through extensive

dunefields of the Tirari Desert, an area receiving

less (han 125 mm ol rain annually, Here the Cooper

channel provides a siring of pools and soakages

which are differentially rejuvenated by both

Hoodwaters and local rainfall, thus acting as a

relatively well watered conduit through an intensely

arid landscape (Bonython 1963).

Diting a six-week field season by Veth and

Hamm, ona section of the Lower Cooper between

(he Birdsville Track and the eastern shore of Lake

Eyre, 204 sites were recorded, the majority al which

appear to date fram the mid- ta late Holocene. They

include lithic scatters of varying complexity,

stratified and deflated burials and hearths with ant-

bed feat retainers, Stone arrangements and a

number of quarries with associated reduction areas,

OF interest on (he Lower Cooper are frequent

exposures of ancient Mood plain sediments which

contain a wide range of megafauna. The sediments

date from Miocene to late Pleistocene times.

Frequent exposures through these sediments have

brought to light the remains of such aquatic species

as lungfish and crocodile as well as such megafauna

as diprotodontids, macropods and Srhenuris, fauna

that provide evidence for previous lacustral phases

when Iresh water was abundant along the creekline

(Wells 1986),

Climatic events witnessed in these sequences

reflect global glacial cycles. Phases of high stream

discharge and lake-full conditions are succeeded by

dune building pernods with aridity increasing

towards the glacial maximum at 18 000 B.P. The

periodic reactivation of this arid heartland has been

summarised by Wells (1986: 101):

The present desert landscape is one of ephemeral rivers,

saline lakes and extensive dune fields. A sparse

woodland survives along the ancestral river valleys.

Beyond the valleys rhe wreat duneficlds of che Tirari

and Simpson Deserts sweep away to the north, In years

of tigh rainfall the streams are rejuvenated, Lake Eyre

floods and leems with fish and birdlife much as it has

throughout the Pleistocene, only the crocodiles scent

to be missing.

Three floodplain sedimentary units are exposed

along different sections of the Lower Cooper

channel. The oldest of these, the Tirari Formation,

dates from the laté Pliocetie, and an inyermediate

unit, the Kutjitara, dates from the Middle

Pleistocene. Only the youngest unit, the Katipin

Formation, could have relevance for the potential

presence of early humans. although a terminal date

around 80 OOO B.P. is indicated (Tedford er al. L985:

Callen & Nanson 1989). Mammals represented in

the Katipiri Formation on Cooper Creek include

the now extinct Sarcophilus, Thylacoleo,

136°

P. VETH, G. HAMM & R.J T AMPFRT

26°

ee Se TIRARI

: cia \

D =>

oe, Cron :

So S A

FIGURE 1. Regional context of Lower Cooper survey area. Map insets comprise Figs 2 and 3.

FIGURE 2. Location of archaeological sites, Lower Cooper Creek (inset 2).

LOWER COOPER CREEK

U See ae () (2 98SU1) 490I9 Jadoog 4eM07

Dy os wef bo ‘says jexBojoaeyqe jo uoijes07: z¢ a1nB)4

aInew “iW a UBOL S 0

YVESY PaEAROXy LH

Syuiod ajdwes sem LSM

Aueng O

580310 GO0'00L< @

sa2810 QOO'0OL-O000L ©

sa0a!5 QOOI-dL ©

PULUPYLIEJEg;

aye 1H4S30 IHYVHIL

Slai8a8 1ejaye

wie|dpoo)) Gursjenes}

™ saunp jgulpny/Buo} 4

P ~ ) —_—

Dat 73

— oe 7 ~

"HM EBUEAM HMPMI XQ

aiog f\¢ ) “oN Mel) aN eRe 1M

Buupuiede { HM OTR = ay ae SI —

o . 2 ry EN BN

aes a uG \ y Si \ cH ise ts a SY

eas \ \ a sm a)

N co } _- ‘HM BUUEUNWUED ,

ry \\ seis ule|dpooy) Buissenes] \ at

me Puasa \guorsswy euuedyeny UMP Ieuyprarauoy TS,

| ~ =- “ty

! ( \ UU|URCIE|I1 Pea i HM

Ny ayeq og fale) HM BIL BILL cay,

Ms _ EOS BLUPLid oy Q “0 Hm) ;

ans BESS) puuninyiy

gs ednyeyey FF i) .

ies HH ewan" ae & od

_e- yes 4 .

of ee euuBiye? SP

SOUNP JBuINN BUG) YINoS—yoR) an|suayxy \ at

LH3S30 IdVHIL °

Suyg-eL euojoMeyung

in xin Lo axe i /\

P. VETH, G. HAMM & RJ, LAMPERT

S@UNDp |PBUIPNy!BUO) YNOS — 4} ION aAlsUa}xy |

41H3S30 IYVHIL

Bindejnw

ayeq

S@UNP |BUIPN}IBUO] YjNOS—YJJON aAlsua}xy

1H3S30 IYVHIL

WHOL S te)

zainBiy se Aey awes

HLYON SHAR SXVT

(1 }@8U]) 42019 Jedo0D 49M07

‘says jeo)Bojoaeyse yo uoj}e907 :¢ aunByy

FIGURE 3. Location of archaeological sites, Lower Cooper Creek (inset 1).

LOWER COOPER CREEK ay

Diprotaden, Protemnadon, Sthenurus and

Procoptodon (Stirton ef af 1961), As Lampert ef

a/, (1Y88) noted for Katipiri exposures along the

Warburton, Our systematic survey of these

sediments along the Cooper did nor reveal any

cultural material if sity.

OF greater relevanve to the generally accepted

time for human occupation inthe Lake Eyre Basin

are widespread occurrences af calereted dune cores,

well exposed along the Lower Cooper channel

through the deflation of overlying Holocene sands

caused by stoek and rabbits. The calerere units can

vontain rhizo¢oncretians and nodules of valerete as

well as maimmal remains andl egg shell. While

calcreted dune cores have been dated jn twa places

to 34700 BP and 40.000 BP, on eee shell

carbonates, their formational histories ape still

poorly understood (Wassan, pers. comm.,). Finally,

many deflated areas within the Holocene sands of

the present dunefield expose lower, indurated levels.

which overlie the calerete unit,

To date we have recorded three probable hearths

and three burials clearly within Pleislocene calcrete

units. Two of che hearths, located five kilometres

apar) (Fig. 2, HL and H2), were tested and have

returned dates of 11 830+320 BP, (WK-1509) and

1). 7704-180 B.P. (WK-1510). Both flaked and edge-

ground artefacls,.as well as burials, haye also been

recorded within the larer and presumably Holocene

indurated dune uit. The results of this systematic

archaeological survey of the Lower Cooper Creek

provide substantial evidence for the presence of

humans during che late Pleistocene in the interior

af the Lake Eyre Basin.

Recent research in different areas of the arid zone,

ineluding both regional survey and excavation, has

provided new perspectives on both the timing and

the variability of arid zone adaptations, These stand

in stark contrast to the previous archaeological

assumpuons (ef Gould 1977) for canservative and

unchanging cultural, economic and demographic

behaviour within Australia’s deserts (Hiscock 1989,

Lampert & Hughes 1988; Smith 1986, 1988; Veth

1987, 19849a, T98%b; Williams 1988), The nolion of

uw conservative desert culture is now, from an

orchacolovical point of view, well and truly dead.

There are a nuniber o! relevant research questions

which may be addressed by the data collected from

the archaeological survey of the Lower Cooper

Creek and these ure outlined below,

With a reliable near basal date of approximately

21 9504270 B.P. at Puritjarra Rockshelter (Smith

198%: table 4.3) there is concrete eviderice (or

Pleisioeene occupation, albeit ephemeral, on the

nm of the Lake Eyre Basin. A further date for

human occupation of 152704210 BE. has also been

obtajned from 4 rovkshelter, Cuckadow 1, lovated

some 20 km south of Cloncurry in semi-arid

Queensland (S, Sutton, pers. comm.). Further cates

from Puriijarra, between a vertical gap separating

the 21 950 B.P. near basal level and a higher level

dated to 12: 020+240 BP, of 17 460-840 BLP and

13 0804260 KP, (Smith 1989), suggest some

continuity of oecupation ti the permanently

walered ‘refuge’ of the Cleland Hills. When the

interior of the Lake Eyre Basin was actually

colonised is currently a matter for debate, especially

given the relative dates of greater than 40.000 B.P,

claimed for an unstratified fragment of eranial vaule

trom the Warburton River, east of Lake Eyre (Webb

1988), Clearly, a sequence of absolute dates on

cultural assemblages from the interier of the Basin

is needed before inferences can be made about

human behaviour in the region during the late

Pleis(ocene,

{{ the minimum enc of Webb's relative dates lor

humans is accepted it is appropriate fo ask whether

this Oecupalion represents 4 specialised adaptation

to the relatively well watered drainage systems

feeding the Lake Eyre megalake, or if prehistoric

economics would bave been generalised allowing

widespread use of all land systems, including the

extensive dunefields, sandsbeets and margins of the

saline playas’? Lf there was. early occupation, did i

continue during earlier dune building phases

through to the height of the elacial maximum and

especially between 20 000 and 16 000 BLP, (c7,

Bowler & Wasson 1984)? The mobilisalion of

dunefields, lowering of regional water tables and

local restriction or extinction of potentially

economic plant and animal species during. the

vlacial maximum Would have caused severe stress,

even la small and highly mabile groups, The

recently proposed biogeographic model for the

colonisation of the interior of Australia views the

occupation of the anid zone as a dynamic provess

with significant changes in the climate and

hydrology of the interior, [rom after 40 000 B.P.,

forming a backdrop avainsi which changes in

demography, economy and social orgarusation

occur (Veth 19895}.

These changes essentially cesule in some regtons

being permanently oceupied before and during the

height of the glacial maximum while others, such

as the lowland sandsheets surrounding Lake Eyre,

are predicted jo have been abandoned during the

period from 20 000 to 16 000 BLP, It is significant

that sediments spanning both Jacustral and arid

phases are well represented alony the Lower Cooper

Creek and that spatially, these units might be

logically vorrelated with former occupation loci.

That the terminal Pleistocene series are less well

expressed than overlying sediments is Tully

acknowledged, ax are the limitations inherent in

making quantitative comparisons of cultural

assemblages between these units. [tis scill extremely

4s PVETH, G. HAMM & RJ LAMPERT

productive, however, 10 Hate such obvious Crenus as

the total absence of maternal in some tus and is

presence in olliers, especially [Pthis is repesiied over

a wide geographic area.

ii terms of Holocene occupation patterns.

previous work in the Lake Eyre Basin wihin the

Simpson Desert (Hereus & Clarke 1986, Smith

198K), (he Strzelecki Desert (Lampert & Huphes

1980, 1987, 1¥88), the Cooper Creek Moodoul cone

(Williams 1988), che Warburton River (Lampert

1988) und che mound spring camplexes (Florek

1987; Hughes & Lampert 1985) has documented a

plethora OF sites assigned ro the mid- ta late

Holocene. Only a few, low density assemblages lave

been dated ro the terminal Plestocenecedrly

Holocene (Lampert & Hughes 1988; Wasson 1983).

The apparent increase in the number af occupation

sles within tle Lake Eyre Basin during the late

Holocene correlates with sigiitigat ingreases i the

tare of artefact ciseard nated from orher stratified

rockshelter und cave sires within the aril zone.

Three stratified sites within the Lite Sandy Desert,

for Which depriivage curves were constructed, all

show a@ consistent! trend tn inereasine rales of

artelaer discand, accelerating during (he periad! 1400

ro B00 BLP. (Verh 1989b: figure 6.12). This pacer is

almost identical fo thar nored by Smirk (1988: 415)

from cemtrol Australian sites, where a significant

iycredse jn the density of Naked srone artefacts,

grindsiones, charcoal und bone is noted between

1400 and 600 BLP OU is therefore relevant to ask

whether the same puirern af relanively intense late

Holocene cecupation oecirs along the Lower

Coaper especially geen the better than Usual

visibility of older sediments.

It was noted by Lampert (Lampen er af 1988)

that Uhere was variution in che proportions of formal

implement rypes between hiybitation sites an the

Warburton River, Such yariabiliry between

assemblages mizht be expected due ly differences

in (he fumetions of siles. it is assumed Chat the

procurement ane we of resources, be they lfhic,

plant or animal, ure embedded within an overall

eeonomic system, chen the fuuctionally specific

mitre of sites cant be gecepted (ef Bintord 1980).

Here, the function of sites is seen to refleet che

tenealed presence of different eetivily sels thal

might be associted wih encampments of varying

numbers af people and of varying residential

permanency. An extreme csample would be the

dj Werenves that mjeht be expected between mayor

aupregation and redistribution sites (for tlade

foods) as Oppascd fH epliemeral habilanoil camps.

Assembhiges from the Lower Cooper cum be

constructively examined Tor posstble differences in

reduction serategics us these cetleer differences i

suvial and economic behaviour (ey Hiscock 1989).

Alko Structuring the archaeological ussemblases,

although prabably of lesser importance, are various

beliaviuutal responses to increasing, distance from

raw Maternal sources; Le. decreasing procurement

elficiency, These hehavioural responses may include

more stringent criteria for discard (Byrne 1980),

rationing (CHiseock 1984), ise of alternative

materials (O'Connell 1977) und more efficien|

reduction stratevies (Bind (9&5), These issues may

beactively pursucd alony Ute Lower Coaperas there

are well proveniineed supply zones for many of the

raw taterials from which artefacts found on

oecupation sites have been manulactured. “4 range

of oehres, bivalves, axes and sculptured stone

objects Found on the open sites are also known 10

havé sources well outside the study area (McBryde

1989, pers, comm., MeConnell 1976).

Relevant qnestions for the Holocene might

include, to What extent are habitation base-camps

tethered to the more reliable Water sources along

the creek and to What extent do these differ fron

habitation sites lovated away from drainage lines

in the dunefields and adjacent intermittent claypans

and playas? ts habitation focused along a riverine

‘conduit’ through an otherwise harsh landscape or

is there evidence for widespread use of all land

systems withii the Tirari Desert? Are these

settlement patterns tikely lo have changed through

time? 1s there evidence for different settlement

partercns with movement west along the Cooper

Crovk towards the shores of Lake Eyre and away

from extensive swamp and floodplain systems?

Whal are the significunt changes in tte structure

of artefact assemblages with movement further west

away from raw material supply zones? What is the

urchacological evidence for Jong distance trade and

exchange and what does this imply about social

relations between the resident dialectal group, (he

Diyan, and adjoining language groups? Is it

possible ro identify a ‘vore' territory for the Diyari

[ram the archaeological record and how does this

relate to clhnopraphic and cthnohistorical accounts

ol demography and economy? Is there evidence in

the archaeological record, from predominantly open

sites, for ay increase in population in the late

Holocene? What are the likely mechanisnis for an

assumed lace Holovene invrease in population and

how is this related to the extensive trade und

exchange networks known to have operated through

the Lowey Coaper al contact? These and oiler

questions cal all be viewed within the broader

lramework of humans gradually recolonising the

arid sandy lowlands Tham the refuges of the glacial

maximum) refuges such as the Flinders Ranges and

the ceninil Australian Ranves (after Veth 19894).

Its possibly only by the repminal Pleistocene hal

eroups colonising areas such as eastern Lake Byre

would have became truly adapted ro arid conditens

and developed regionally unique ceonomies and

LOWER COOPER CREEK a9

sGcial Structures which eventually produced the

diversity of ethnographic desert culvures.

Seilenent and Subsistence Modelling

tor the Lower Cooper

The Lower Cooper passes through the boundaries

of the Diyari and Thirrari language/dialectal groups

(Hercus 1987, 1988; OCirady e7 al. 1966) Tindale

1974), While Thirrari has been ar@ued to represent

both a ‘horde’ (Plowitt 1904) and a dialectal variant

of Diyari (Austin 1981) the faci that the lerritory

flanking the eastern shore of Lake Eyre and ease

alone Cooper's Creek was part ol a Diyart emic

geomorphic distinction (Karling-alpa, ef) Wilson

198]: Sl) suggesrs that at least a different pattern

of seltlement may have operated in this less watered

country. Indeed, the boundary ‘separating’ Divari

territory fron that of Thirrari marks the boundary

between gibber pluin and sandhill geomorphic units

(Wilson 1981; Heuire 4). In simple terms, the section

of the Lower Coaper channel and ils (loodplain,

east from White Crossing and lying, within Diyari

territory, is relatively well watered aud contains

several large swamp systems, a string of semi-

permanen! pools and an extremely broad system of

claypang aiid Flogdplain (Mats (Pig. 2).

Both Lake Killalpaninna and Lake

Kopperunaona oveur within this zone. By contrast,

the Western sevlion of the channel, from White

Crossing toa Lake Eyre, has a nevligihle floodplain

and the waterhioles rend to be smaller, more diserete

and of increased Salinity (Fig, 3), IL is significant

that Cooper Creck and ils Moodout lakes, further

Hort and east into Diyari territory, are seen

historivally to have been the main focus for regional

settlemen(, on the basis of sightings of large

nunibers of people and semi-permanent camps (ef.

Williams 198%: 56) and the highest density of nanred

plaves ot) the Hillier map (Reuther 198) in Wilson

198}: 87). The swamplands.and lakes of the eastern

portion of the Lower Cooper are seen |o be most

analogous Lo these ‘core’ Diyari areas.

A number of conelusfons about seulement and

subsistence beliaviour from the Lakes area. have

been mude by Jones (1979) and, on the basis of

these, several archacolagical predictions have been

offered by Williams (1988), In summary, Jones

argues for eroups closely tellered fo Lhe rivers and

lakes, penerrating somewhat opportunistically ite

the dunefields- after rain. The sandhill unit is argued

io be more productive, for plant foods and small

mianimals, than the Jakes and rivers and these, m

tim, are seen to be more faveured than the stony

country, Affer viewing Jones’ model, Williams

(1988; 57) predicts thal:

... the largest sires will be found in areas Which Have

PeEMANeN! UF someperiianent water saurees, Sure

campsite material will be found in the dumefields bul

sites Will be smaller than those on the margins of lakes

and perimianent waterhoales,

While ata general Jevel these predictions appear to

be supported by Williams” survey of Coongie Lakes,

it Seems. useful (a prediet in more detail what some

of the differences In artefact assemblages between

landform wnits might be, other than just size, as

a result of different structuring of ecanomie plant

and water resources. Such assemblage dilferences

misht inchice variation in both formal implement

and detitave classes as a reflection of different

reduction strategies; strategies indigative af the site’s

role within @ specific settlement system and its

spatial relarionship to key ceanomic resources such

as water, lithics and economic plants.

Hydrological and Rainfall Data

The precipitation patterns around Lake Eyre have

been elaracterised in detail by Tetzlaff (1976). Over

a 90 year period the long term precipitation is the

lowest for (he continent.at approximately 120 min

per yean Althotwsh frequent shifts tm mean

circulation pallerms cause variability in rainfall, a

irend is nored in which maximum rainfall oeeurs

in February with the minimum in late winter (July

und August). A second weak maximum is noted in

spring with another period of little or no

precipitation in December, Most importantly, the

rainfall in the Lake Eyre region only contributes a

small amount to each Ploaoding of the lake.

Intermittent waterhales along the Cooper channel

are vlearly rejuvenated by local rainfall, however,

eitlier by direct run-off or by slow circulation of

freshwater fram saturated source-bordering dune

and alluvial sediments. The importance of these

saturated sediments im providing potable water

through soakages, when the free-standing water

becomes saline, 15 stressed in historical accounts (cf

Gregary 1906).

To characterise the quality of both surface and

sublerranean waler sources along the Lower Cooper

in, more detail, we arranged fora series of controlled

hydro-geglogical measurements to be taken at both

pools and freshly dug soakages at intervals between

the Birdsville Track and the shores of Lake Eyre;

Locatians WSI to WS/3 (Figs 2 and 3), The results

of chemical analyses. and eleetrical eonductivily

readiiigsat both waterholes and saakages (made by

John Noonan at the School of Earth Science,

Flinders University) are shown in Table I, The

known upper lalerance for humans ts 2-5 ma. Al

the cime of our survey potable water could only be

obtained from the three easternmost water sample

points, sienificantly all located to the east of White

Crossing within the broad flaodplain uni.

Interestinely, much lower readies were obtained

SU PB. VETH, G. HAMM & BR.) LAMPERYT

from soakages than trom directly adjacent pools

at all water sample locations. The consistently lower

readings for soakage water support the notion of

relatively fresh sub-surface water supplies, A

mechanism for the replenishment of subsurface

waters has been proposed (Noonan, pers, comm.)

in which floodwaters, having scoured the creek bed

of salts, saturate (he remaining clean quartz levels

as water velocily drops, and become entrapped

under a slowly setting silt/clay blanket, Many of

the saline pools af the Cooper Creek probably post-

date flooding and actually lie on top of this

impermeable skin, Water falling on source-

bordering dunes could seep under the clay horizon,

rejuvenating the entrapped waters,

Limited bore hole data, from the South

Australian Department of Engineering and Water

Supply, also provide evidence for an extremely high

local water table at the important occupation site

of Unkumilka Waterhole within the eastern [lood-

plain unit (see Fig, 2),

A range of sources (Bonython 1955, 1963;

Litchfield 1983; Madigan 1946, Mason 1955) note

that between 1885 and 1984 at leas! one portion of

th Lower Cooper probably flowed some 25 times.

These waters probably reached Lake Eyre at least

five and possibly as many as 20 times, Many of the

accounts note that (he floodwaters coming down

as far as the Lower Cooper often only reached Lakes

Kopperamanna and Killalpaninna in the vicinity of

the Birdsville Track (see also Mollemans e/ w/. 1984,

Appendix 2), As Gregory (1906; 59) notes of Lake

Rillalpaninna:

[It) is a veritable oasis in the wilderness. The lake,

unlike mose of the so-called lakes in this country,

Actually contains some waler,., When full, the lake

water is fresh and. photographs taker of [he mission

al such periods show that the situation is then quite

PIcCTUFesque,

Bonython (1963) has documented the progress of

a lypical llaod which reaches {he shores of Lake

Eyre, At the end of March, heavy rains occurred

ut the headwaters of the Cooper and Diamantina,

following on from minor falls in January, By April

19th the Cooper food had reached Linamineka in

South Australia, The fload then reached (he

Coongie Lakes (already holding water from an

earlier (lood) and went to Kanowana by May 9th,

The flood was halted for a period of 10 days here

and then by May 20ih was moving again lo reach

Lake Hope, After being held here for two weeks it

finally reached the Birdsville Track at

Kopperamanna on July 10th, By July 15th, the

flood had reached Lake Killalpaninna, where it was

held up lor two further weeks while tilling (he

Noodout area (e.g Toolerinna Swamp, see Fig, 2),

Around July 28th the Cooper appeared to burst

through a veritable dam, reaching the shores of

Lake Fyre by August 8th.

This, and other accounts, suggest that the

Kopperamanna and Killalpaninna floodout zone

Was reached more often thar the western half of

the Lower Cooper Creek, and in Lurn that the Lower

Cooper as a whole flooded Jess often than the

Coongie/Kanowana region, On the busis of the

hydrological data there appears to be further reason

for delineating a ‘boundary’ between Thirrari and

Diyari territory along the central portion of the

Lower Cooper.

TABLE |. Chlorine conteim and electrical conductivity of water samples taken from waterhole and soakage sample

points (WS! to WS13), Lower Cooper Creck (Figs 2 and 3).

Lovalion Dist, Downs. CI-WHEL (mes)

(km)

j 0 337

2 22 4970

4 27 2272

4 62 46150

mal 76 92300

6 82 33250

7 MY 194900

& OW 67450

9 105 51650

tt] ti 13600

1) 3

2 121 184600

Wa 128 )ORROO

Cl-Soaks (my/l) EC-WH (ms) beC-Soaks (mS)

1.630

1278 13.300 3.200

78) 13,000 2.600

(04,200

126.000

ATA 110,300 56,300

450 131-4600 39.300

126.400

125,800

23430 124.900 2U.800

8165 16.800

117.600 13.000

115.400

LOWER COOPER CREEK 31

Economic Plant Species

A wide fange of economic plants are likely to

have been available to the prehistoric occupants of

the Lower Cooper Creek. Notwithstanding the

recent changes in the ecology of the area, a nuinber

of sources, including ethnohistorical and

ethnographic records (ef) Gason 1879; Cleland &

Johnston 43a, 1%43b6), recent vegetation surveys

af the Lower Cooper (Badman, n.d,) and adjacent

ateas (Mollemans er a/. 1984) und comparative

ethnobotanical data frony similar desertlands

(Clarke n.d., Walsh 19874, 1987b), iMustrate that al

least 30 seed and fruit-hearing species were available

in addition te five roo(stocks and a variety of feshy-

leafed herbs, Contrary ta Jones’ (1979) assumptions

about the comparatively high productivity of the

sundhill country of rhe Couper Lakes districts, ibe

distribution of economic foad species in the Lower

Cooper region appears to be fairly even between the

sandhill and floodplain land units, Indeed il the

quantilative ethnobotanical dala available from the

central and northwestern arid zone is examined

(O'Connell & Mlawkes 1984; Walsh 19874, Kaloras,

pers. comn\.), in relation to the compurative

productivity of different landform units, it is clear

thal tis al the ecotone between the draahage line

and sandpluin units that the grealest nchness and

diversity of economic plant foods accurn The

arguably greater productivicy of these

environmentally fince-erained riverine vondutts',

however, in no Way diminishes the importance of

the extensive and easily aveessible seed slands of

the dunefields which are well documented as lraving

comprised niajor groups of staples (cf Veth &

Walsh 1988),

On the available evidence, the majorily of

economic plane species are likely to have yielded

edible eomponents between March to November

with che period of lowest producuyily assunted to

coincide with the intensely hot summer period, The

period of gieales| economic plant productivity

follows several months alter the highest average

monthly tainfall. From March on, a number of

seed-bearing species Would be available with the

larer (winter) addition of further seeds, fruits, herbs

and acacias. While ravistuvk dre available all year,

they are documented to be most palatable during

and aller periods of high local rainfall. Acacia seed

are likely lo be available well towards and tato

summer. hott on the plant and as seedfall, The

deliberate storage of bard coared species for the lean

summer monchs may also have aceurred (ef Verh

& Walsh 1988)

Faunal Resources

Large faunaappears to have been yirlyally absent

from Diyari and Thirrari country (Gason 1879: 278;

Johnston 1943: Jung 1877: 70). Instead. medium

and small marsupials which could survive without

permanent surlace Water Were commonly exploited.

These included the bilby (Maerolis lagotis) and

lesser bilby (M0 leucura), the desert tal kangzarou

(Calopryinnus campestris), the hopping mouse

(Notomys cervinus), the native cat (Dasyurus

geaffroi) and the marsupial mouse (Saiinthopsis

crassicaudara centralis). Quail (Coturnix

noveerclandiae pectoralis), a range of ducks (Anas

superciliosa, Chenonetia jubata, Dendrocvgne

evioni, ladorea tedornaides and Aytive australis)

und Leal (Altes gracilis) are also. noted 10 have been

a food source, in addition to the plumage being used

jn ceremony (cf. Gason 1879; Howitt 1891). Reptiles

exploited included the woma python /Aspidiles

ramsavl), the death adder and brown snake

(Acunthoaphis uatarcticus and Psevaechis ausiralls),

the bearded dragon and sleepy lizard (Pogona

barbata and Trachydosaurus ruzosus), (he perentte

(Faranuy xigantéus) and Gould's goanita ( Varanies

gouldii) (c/- Gason 1879: Berndt & Yogelsang 194)

Johnston 1943), The water holding frog (Cyeforana

platveephala) is noved as a Tood souree, being alsa

a totem for some Diyari groups (cf. Gason 1879

Hawjtt 1904). Numerous other smaller frogs and

lizards are also recorded in the ethnohistorical

SOUTCEeS,

Apart from rhe majority of the binds, which

would only be seasonally abundant on the Lowe!

Cooper, the medium and small marsupials, repriles

and amphibians (while fluctuating in numbers)

would be generally syailable across most landtorn

types in the study area. There is no sound reason

for viewing the sandhills as being depauperate int

fauna after local rains in comparison to the

floodplam Mats (cf Jones 1979: 151-154). The

riverine/sandhill interphase is sill likely ta have hac

the greatest diversity and richness of economic

fauna.

Distribution of Lithie Resources

There are sources for three classes of lithic

material represented in (he artelact assemblages ot

the Lower Cooper. These sources are spatially

discrete and it js therefore possible ta define ‘supply

zones”. The dominant lithie material at most sites

comprises fine to mediumegrained silerele. Large

exposures of Tertiary sileretés outcrop on extensive

gibber surfaces at the easlern margin of the study

area (Forbes 1974). The westernmost extension of

the silcreles approximates [he route of the Birdsville

‘Track (see Fip. 2). The silcrere conmmonty takes the

form of Jarge gibber nodules up to 20 em in

diameter. Flaked pibber nodules, reduction areas

and decortification flakes were nored in numerots

places over the Tertiary Silerete unit, There are oo

exposures of silerete alone the Lower Cooper

between this unit aid the shores of Lake Eyre.

§2 & VETH, G, HAMM & RL LAMPERT

Another stone material found on sites, and

dominant at a few, 18 a white siliceaus calcareaus

Mmucdstone ouleropping as part of the Eradunna

formation, Only several ourcrops are documented

in the Lower Cooper region; one at White Crossing

on the channel itself and several others on the

margins of lakes. such as Palankarinna (see Fig, 2).

The exposure al White Crossing has clearly been

quarried and reduction areas are visible on the

upper slopes of adjacent banks.

Finally, there is a variety of Cretaceous and

Terhiary sandstones which are also located on lake

margins in the region and which appear as whole

and fragmented grinding saterial on open siles.

Otherraw materials found on sites, yet which have

no known local source, include chaleedony, a range

of cherts and Ipnamincka-qualiry red-brown

sandstone. The trade of the high quality

Innamincka sandstone into the Lower Cooper area

is discussed below.

Trude

Wilson notes that the Diyari, and (1 can also be

assurned here, the Thirrari, had |o procure many

raw malerials from outside their lerritory (Wilson

198t: 69). The most notable of those traded into

their territory included large boomerangs, stone

axes, grinding stones, softwood shields, various

ochres, pituri and gui (of Jones 1984; McConnell

1976; McBryde 1989). These were also obtained

through expeditions to the sources af these

materials. lt appears that the Diyart were

intermediaries in a large trade network which

focused on the Middle Cooper Creek region

(Howitt 1904), Grindstones and ted ochre are

known to have been procured Irom the western

flanks of the Flinders Ranges at Parachilna (Howitt

1904: 711-12; Jones 1984) and millstanes to have

been obtained from Innamincka amongst oer

regional sources (see McConnell 1976; figure 19).

The characteristic red-oxide sandstone grinding

blanks which have been recorded at the Innamineka

quarries (Luebbers, pers. comm.) are often found

a§ partial and tragimented grinding bases on many

of the Lower Cooper habitation sites. Their

fnineralogical similarity has been canfirmed by

recenl petralovical analysis (McBryde, pers. comm.).

This grinding material was highly prized, as Reuther

(quoted in Wilson 1981. 70) ores:

These millstones are brough( from Jidniminka

(Innamincka) lor the puirposes of tride. The

Jandrawanco and Jauraworka peaple are owners of this

stoneé-pit, Which is af great importance to them tor

the barterinw trade:

A good millstone passes for a considerable fortune

in the first place, one has to pay heavily for i; what

iS thoarciLis nara ceifling matte: focarry such a (large

und heavy) stone on (he lead. Many an older brother

has traded his sister for a good millstone.

Two achre samples collected [rom open sites

located west Irom White Crossing have been

analysed by a-ray diffraction in order to characterise

their mineralogy and assess regional quarry sources,

One of these, a red ochre fragment (CC61)

coniprises major quartz (Si02) and hematite, trace

feldspar and kaolinite. The other, a yellow achre

fragment (CC66) is deseribed as major goethite

(FeQOH) with minor quariz and kaolinite. A

sample of red ovhre [rom the famous Parachilna

quarry of the northern Flinders Ranges

demonstrated a major dolomite [CaMg (CO3)]

phase with minor hematite (Fe203) and trace calcite

(CaCO3) (Raven, pers. comm.). Clearly rhe regional

sources are unneralogically diverse and more

sampling at the Known quarries {¢/) McConnell

1976: figure 14) is required before meaningful

statements about exchange routes. fov ochre can be

mate,

Other trade items found on some of the Lower

Cooper sites, In addition to ochre and grinding

material, include cdge-ground axes, valves of the

freshwater mussel (Felesunio wilserii) anda eyleat.

Several of (he axes have been thin-seclioned and

comprise dolerite, probably fram a major quarry

source, such as at Mr Jsa, Queensland (McBryde,

pers, comm.). The mussel valves are likely to have

Originated Upstream from an area such as (he

Coongie Lakes, while (he source of the cyleon,

manufactured from calcareous sandstone, is

unknown.

The exchange networks af the Lake Eyre Basin

linked the two extremes of the Australian contineril,

from Spencer Gull in the south ro the Gulf of

Carpentaria io the nor. Cerernonies, sang and

both sacred and mundane knowledge also moved

along these trade routes (¢7, McConnell 1976), The

adaptive significance of these massive reciprocity

networks has been elegantly sunimarised by

McBryde (1989: 174), who notes:

oe SOME anthropologists have seen the long-disiance

desert Wading networks ay adaptive, social mechanisms

for desert survival rather than economic mechanisnys

for coping With environments where cesolirees are

sparse and Jack diversity,

PROPOSED SEIT) bMiwT/SUBSISTENCE

STRATEGY FOR THE LOWER COUPER

Here, we propose a Jand-use model which aims

ro predivt landform associations which would have

provided access 10 reliable water and plant resources

and which are likely to have been targeted mosi

often for both residence and foraging, In other

words, predictions are mace for those areas whieh

LOWER COOPER CREEK 5}

are likely to fave been the site of relatively large

and/or long term occupation atid which are likely

to reflect more complex and varied economic/social

behaviour Other areas are also identitied which are

likely to have been used in a transient mode and,

finally, those portions of the landscape which would

only have beer used for task-specific activities (ic.

Hot lor residence) are predicted. This model

ultimately aims to make general predictions about

the complexiry of economic dnd social behaviour

that inight be expected in different parts of the

Diyari/Thirrari landscape. The model is only

applicable ta the period after climatic amelioration

following the glacial maximum, that is after T4 000

BP Although climatic oscillations are recorded lor

this periad, (hey are miner compared wilh those

preceding it (cf. Tedlord ef w/. 1985). Ir is assumed

that the area would have been abandoned by

Niuinans, as Would many sandy lowland plains of

the arid zone, during thé height of the glacial

maxinurn, Le. 20-16 000 BP. (cf Smith 1988; Veth

1984, 1989b), The possibility of human oceupation

in his area belore 25 O00 BP, the tune of the onset

of intensified aridity, is raised only by Caldwell and

Webb's claim for relative fluorine dating ol) a

fragment of |iurnan eranial vault fo greater than

40 OUU years (Caldwell & Webb 1988: 10).

The provisional settlement/subsistence model for

the Lower Cooper region may be sumniarised, as

follows:

The ecotone between the dunefields, floodplains

(including the few freshwater lakes and swamps) and

drainage course of the Lower Cooper represents. the

most productive habitat for plant food staples and

for structural materials forshelter, slorage and the

manufacture OF mundane and non-secular wooden

artefacts, It is also the site of the largest and mast

reliable water sources, both in the form of free

standing pools and as subterranean soakage, Where

the floodplain is widest.and the dunes either abut

or partially traverse al, the widest range of staple

planis with lhe most evenly staggered fruiting and

seeding times will be accessible to resident groups,

These associations are found along the Lower

Cooper course from approximately Toolerinna

Swanip, west, to the vicinity of White Crossing (see

Fig. 2).

The ecolone between the duneljeids and drainage

course, iy the absetice of a sienilicant Floodplain,

will be less productive for plani-lood staples and

cerlainly for structural materials. Potable water

sources are more sporadic with a trend towards

higher salinity. Permanent soakages are rare. This

association is found along the Lower Cooper from

approximately White Crossing, west, to rhe share

of Lake Eyre (see Figs 2 and 3).

The loniogeneous dunefield landscape unit, in

ilself, is Seen lo be the feast productive. Altfiough

ihe dunefields provide a wide range of sraples

(particularly sceds) some lime alter local rains, thes

djstribytion will be sporadic. Both (ephemeral)

water sources and fauna may also be assumed to

be widely distributed within this landform.

Although more permanent inrerdunal soaks may

oecur at a distanee from the Lower Cooper, it 14

unlikely they were common, given the lack of

reference (o them in historical records aud (he fact

that none were inlersecied during suryey transects

thraugh the dunefields,

ir is predicted that iv is at the ecotone of the

dunefields, Noodplain and drainage courses thal the

most ‘intensive’ occupation will have occtirred.

These areas would faye been the Joci for major

aperegalions o! people and also of continual use

throughout the emic resource calendar. Aggregation

eycles may have followed a loosely seasonal pattern,

peaking with the local abundance of water and

plant staples from March to August, These localities

should reflect more complex and varied economic

and social behaviour. The eeotone between the

dunefields and the drainage line of the western

section will sometimes have been the site af large

basecamps, however these will be strongly focused

on more iniermillently spaced walter sources, Less

intensive oecupation might be expected along

adjoining portions of the creck lacking reliable

Water sources. Finally, habitation sites will only be

jocated in the homogeneous dunefields where

ephemeral water sources oevur and these sites will

reflect less intense and variable economic and social

behaviour than these on the drainage lines. All

other sites locared within the dinetields, away from

waler sources, are gssunred lo be task-specilic and

to reflect either resource procurement or main-

Tenancve acrivinies. Many ol these predictions can

be tested, as demonstrated later in this paper,

through an analysis of assemblage variability.

SURVEY STRATEGY

Given thal the survey aimed to characterise

occupation patterns berh at and away from the

Cooper drainage course, a nuoiber of complemen

Lary survey strategics were employed, A corridor of

approximately S00 m each side of rhe Creek fron)

Toolerinna Swamp to the shore of Lake Eyre was

surveyed intensively. Linear (taverses were made on

tool at intervals of up to 100 m- apart, these being

parallel to the drainage course.

Transeets at a remove trom the Cooper Creck

were usually aligned along scismiic tracks, which run

approximately casi/west from the Birdsville Track

to Lake Eyre. While not always running parallel to

(he ereekline, they offered controlled samples inter:

secting the extensive norrh-south oriented dunes,

54 PB YETIL G, NAMM & RWS, LAMPERT

Those surveyed were located up to 5 kms tron the

creekline, with an average distance of 3 km. These

transects were 100 m jn width (maior seismic routes

are shown in Fig, 2), Several 100 m wide transects

were also made at right angles to the creek down

interdunal corridors. These were made to the north

ol the creek terminating at Lake Tarlakupa and to

the south of the creek at Unkumilka Waterhole and

at Malgoona Waterhole.

Ll is estimated that approximately 125 km? (125

km » | ket) of (he riverine conduil was suryeyed.

A total of approximately 50 km? of ihe sandhill

landform was surveyed. Further transeets through

the dunes and around the large saline lakes ore

planned.

Discriprins AND PATTERNING SITES

Introduction:

A total of 104 archaeological sites were recorded

during the 1989 field season on the Lower Cooper

Creek. These are all open sites, the majority of

which are lithic Scalters of varying size and

complexity, The locarion of these sites is shown in

Figs 2 and 3, and rhe estimated number of artefacts

in cach is broker into three size ranges (see key).

The study area is divided inty four analytical units:

(i) lhe western drainage system (uo. of sites -

101:

(i) the Western dunetields, all west of White

Crossing (io. of sites ~— 3);

(iii) the eastern drainage sysiem (no, of sites =

86) (inclusive of Moodplain); and

(iv) the eastern dunefields (no. of sires = 13),

all east of White Crossing.

A quarry at Mulka Hill (Fig. 2) does nat tall into

any af these areas, The majority of sites in both

the western und eastern half of the Lower Cooper

(94.239) and 87.8849:,)consist only of stone artefact

seatters. but others also cantain burials, hearths ane

quarries. Importantly, a higher proportion of sites

containing more (han one of these components

ovcurs within the eastern sectoi, Where there 1s also

a higher proportion of sites with evidence for

stratifieauion (ie. 7.78% as compared ta 0,967).

As the artefact population coding in Figs 2 and

3 illustrates, the majority of open surface svatters

comprise fewer than 1000 pieces. While

intermediate-sized scatters, containing from 1000 to

100 000 pieces, occur both to the west and east of

White Crossing, none are recorded west [rom

Warremandaona Waterhole for approximately the

75 km stretch down the Lower Cooper ta Lake Eyre.

No large scatters, comprising more than 100 000

picces, are located outside the eastern floodplain

zone, Le, none occur west of White Crossing.

Silerete quarries Were located near Toolerinna

Swamp esst of Lake Palankarinna, near Btadunna

Station and ar Mulka Hill (see Fig, 2), These large

complexes are all ocaled on gibber outcrops ot

Terliary sifcrele al [he eastern edge of the survey

grea. Uhe silerete varices trom extremely fine-graincel,

which appears to liave been selectively utilised for

the production of unilacial points, geometric

microliths and blade endserapers, ta medium to

coarse-prained: the latter usually represented in (he

tula adze, retouched/utilised and ‘chopper’

calegones, Only decortification and low intensity

gibber reduction has occurred at the quarries with

implement manufacture occurring af ather

localities. As is common at such sources, the

proportions of retouched/urilised pieces and of

other lithologies are low; ie < O5% (ef Clark

1987; Verh 1982). Intensive survey.and sampling of

the Tertiary silerere quarries will be undertaken by

one of us (GH. as part of a posteraduate project

starting in 19%) on the Lower Cooper, Ji 4s worth

noting that stone arrangements ocgur in the vicinity

ol the quarries, usually in the form af eireular to

oval alignments of flaked and thermally (ractured

silcrele gibber boulders.

Burials and hearths usually oceur within site

complexes that also contain stone artefacts, only

one isolated burial being located. Most lie within

major basecanips, usually containing numerous

grinding bases, several lhousand pieces af flaked

stone, and such trade items as-ovhre and uxes, often

in stravified contexts. Hearths characteristically

contain mixtures of burnt ant bed, charcoal and

oxidised sediments.

There ure no geological fealures with the study

area that might provide rocksheltecs ar caves with

stratified oveupation deposits. The only known

cave, a mythological site located on a creek draining

ito Lake Palankarinoa (Ditji-tnircka) las collapsed

and, in wry event, would nol be an appropriate place

to excayale given ils continuing religious

associations ta the Diyari (HMereus 1987),

Preliminary observations on variability in debitage,

cores and japlements on the Lower Cooper:

Debitage was divided into four mutually exclusive

classe) based on [he hierarchical key proposed by

Sullivan and Rozen (1985: 758), The classes are

complete Makes, broken Makes, Hake fragments and

debris. While the characterisation af “disriner

assemblages of debitage’ must await detailed

sumipling of individual sites, it is possible ta make

several general comments on variation in debiraye

proportions, Whole and broken flakes (i.e. those

with bulbs) .are proportionally dominant at major

sites within the western section oF the Lower Cooper

in the silerele and silicified sandstone categories,

Conversely, the propartion of flake fragments and

LOWER COOPER CREEK 44

debris is hiwher al the larger sites within the eastern

zone in the same material calegories, Predictably,

silerete decortification flakes appear lo make up a

higher proportion of debitage assemblages within

the casiern floodplain zone, closer to the Tertiary

silcrete Outeraps.

Mean flake size i both silerete and silicitied

Mudstone also appears to decrease in the western

zone, While blades are found on sites in both zones,

almost always in fine-grained silerete and chert, they

represent a much lower proportion of debitage

within the western gone, There is a concomitant

scarcity of blade cores in the western zone OF

interest is the lack af heavily redueed aud exhausted

cores in the western Aone, given the devreased

plocurentent efficiency here for the silcreres, The

highest proportion of such cores is found al what

are assumed to be Major averegation sites within

the floodplain unit. ie. dhase with ever 100 000

pieces, Interestingly, larger gibber boulders with

only cores removed Were found at sites fram near

the Birdsville Track to almost the shores of Lake

Eyre, although (hese did represent og grearer

proportion af cores found at sites in the eastern

zone than in the west. A recently deflated vache

of such cores was recorded at the major occupation

site of Unkumilka, located some 50 kim west of the

Tertiary sileretes.

A wile range of retouched/urilised flakes occur

an the sites whieh do not conform to the

Technolagieal erireria for tila adzes, unitacial

points, backed pieces and praying implements,

These include pieces often referred ja in the

literature as core scrapers, sleep sided surapers,

concaye scrapers, notched and denticulate pieves (e/"

Isaue (977; Lampert J98]; MeCarthy 1976), The

differences in morphology of the working edge of

the impletients if seen to be largely the result of

the degree of their reduction and edge rejuvenation

and the raw material on whieh they were

manulaetured (ef Hiscock 1982; Witter n.d.) A

commonly recorring form comprises blades and

Gongated flakes, distally retouched onto the dorsal

surface lo produce a medium to steep-angled step

and sealar retouched working edge which is convex

in plan (Pig. 4, m0, 1), Mose robust Flakes typically

show greater variabiliry in edge Shape,

demoustratiny steep angled, step terminated or

notched edges (Fiz, 4, nos 2-5),

The majority of tulas irom the sites are in slug

shige, exhibiting some variation in both platform

and orientation of retouch to rhe platform. A

namber of obliquely (tupeated slugs Sumeest thal

the implements have been consistently applied to

the worked material at an angle nat parallel jo the

striking platform (Fig. 4, nos 4-9). Whole tulas were

found in same numbers al the majer lithie sevatrers

within the floodplain unic. Clusters of hetween 15

and 35 unutilised tulas, all in medium ground

silerete, were lovated at three sites and it is Likely

thar these standardised itenis had beer cached and

exposed on recenily deflated surfaces, Sites with tuka

clusters are located between 20 ta 35 km west from

che sierete supply zone. Most cula flakes and slugs

on the open sites have been fashioned from

medium-grained silerete, although a miner

proportion oceur in chert and chalcedony (Fig. 4,

nos 0 and 11),

Backed implements, although never in large

humbers, occur at a variety Of siles within the

eastern PMloodpigin zone, As mored from Central

Ausiralian samples (Smith 1988: 90) weometric

forms, such as segments, are dominant over nun-

geametnc forms, such as asymmetric and obliquely

truncated points (Pig. 5, nos 1-5), Backed

implements are predominantly fashioned from fine-

grained silcretes, allhough oceasional examples in

chert and chalcedony were noted. Unifacial (pirri)

points are relatively abundant at same of the larger

sites on the floodplain zone. In contrast, they are

Virtually absen| from the weslern drainage unit,

They are almost exclusively fashioned from fine-

grained sileretes and display little variatian nr size

attributes, although a few notched’ specimens were

noted, These points, with few exceptions, have had

their platforms removed by retouch onto the ventral

surface (Fig, 5, nos 6-9). Where the ratio of formal

to orher retouched/utilised pieees at sites was

estimated to be greater than one, there appeared to

be an inverse relarionshij between the proportion

of tinifactal points and the proportion of cula adzes.

Hahed engraving implements located on the open

sifes are represented by two formal types, the narni

adna and pirn graver (Fig. 6, |-2, 3-4) (Kamminga

1985) Only a total of seven specimens (four and

three, respectively) were recorded, and rhese all ow

larger siles on the eastern floadplain umt. The crass

seclions through these archaeological specimens

clearly show the different wood gouging profiles;

v-shaped versus concave,

Bdge-grouind axes were recorded from major sites

at Unkumilka, Lake Killalpaninna and north-west

jrom Toolerinna Swamp (Fiz, 2). All of the axes

are symmetrical in section and confonn to items

traded from the northyas deseribed by McConnell

(1976). Two of the axex have had thin sections made

and are identified as dolerite, with a petrology

identical to that of the Mount Isa axe quarry

(MeBryde, pers. comm.) (fiz, 7).

As noted, partially Mlaked silerete gibber occurs

on sites across all weperaphic zones, Sometimes,

when bidirectionally Flaked, the boulders have

margins with evidence for step Fracturing and

crushing, suggesting their use as implements. Given

the evidence for similar edve damage on cores

Without microscopic evidence of use-wear

P. VETH, G. HAMM & R.J. LAMPER]

7 Pee a nf

FIGURE 4, 1

2-5

6-9

10-11

Distally retouched blade.

Retouched utilised flakes.

Tula adze slugs.

Tula flakes (Field site nos CC 89, 66, 66, 126, 126, 57, 57, 54, 56, 65, 97).

LOWER COOPER CREEK 37

FIGURE §, I-5 Backed pieces (segment and point).

6-9 —Unifacial points (CC 140, 118, 105, 105, 133, 66, 159, 88, 129).

FIGURE 6. 1 Marni wadna.

2 Marni wadna (laterally snapped).

3-4 Pirri gravers (CC 65, 93, 139, 54).

P. VETH, G. HAMM & R.J. LAMPERT

FIGURE 7. J-2 Edege-ground axes (CC 65, 65).

LOWER COOPER CREEK oy)

FIGURE &. |

Bi-directionally llaked gibber.

2 Pilted/fraclured quartzite pebble (CC 6¥, 115).

(Kamminga 1978: 310-314, 1982; 85-91), however,

(hese are best treated as equivocal implements (Fig.

Bono. 1),

Rounded to sub-rounded quartzite boulders were

olten located at the major sites or as isolated

artefacts, usually near large stands of acacia (eg.

Acacia salicina) on the backs of drainage courses,

These inevitably have pitting, crushing and

fracturing on their opposing laces and extensive

crushing on their raunded margins (Fig, 8, no, 2

and Fiz. 9, no. 2). These are assumed ca be

multifunctional items probably serving as

Ppreparauion platforms for processing seeds and

vegetable und animal foods, for grinding achre, for

implement Manufacture and also as hammerstones,

(ef, Smith 1988: 98).

Several cylindrical-sectioned quartzite ‘pestles’

were also recorded, all with crushing on opposing

ends (Fig. 9, no. 3). One heavily weathered cyleon

(cf. Hamm 1987) manufactured from calcareous

sandstone was recorded from a site located | km

north of Unkumilka Waterhole (Fig, 9, no. 1).

Finally millstones, fragments of these and mulers

(after Smith 1986) were located [rom sites within

all zones, Significant differences in the number and

in the lithology of these millstones were noted,

however, between environmental zones on the Lower

Couper (see below).

TESTING THE ARCHAEOLOGICAL

PREDICTIONS OF THE PROPOSED

SETTLEMENT/SUBSISTENCE MODEL

Prelimipary assemblape data recorded during the

survey allows a number of afchaeological pre-

diciions ta be addressed here.

Prediction |:

Mean assemblage population and artefact density

will be significantly higher within the eastern Hoad-

plain unit of the survey area in comparison with

the western unil. Figures Jor the Moodplain sites will

be significantly larger than those recorded from sites

within the adjacent dunefields, while those from

the drainage line of the western half and adjacent

dunes will be ofa similar order,

The null hypothesis thal assemblage population

and artefact density will be the same berween

floodplain and drainage zones is rejected. Mean

number of artefacts for the floodplain sites (N =

86) is substantially greater al 25 464 pieces comi-

pared with 339 pieces (N = 01) for the western

drainage sites, These differences are significant at

an alpha level of 0.05 (1 = -2.383, p = 0182).

Mean density of artefacts, expressed here as square

metres per single artefact, is also significantly higher

al 12 m? artefact for the floodplain sites compared

with 45 ni? artefact for the western drainage zone

(t » 2,743, p = 40067). Mean assemblage populat-

ions are not significantly different from the drainage

unils in Comparison to sites. from the adjacent dune-

fields (t{ = .843, p = 4013 andt = .412, p =

6809), Interestingly, the density of artelacts [rom

the Hoodplain sites is significantly higher than chat

of adjacent dunelield sites (t= — 2.659, p = .0092)

while the density of artefacts [ram the western

drainage sires is statistically similar to that of the

adjacent dunefields (t = .212, p » .8328).

There is general support for the nation of larver

and more dense sites being associated with the

floodplain unit of the Lower Cooper in comparisan

with the drainage unit, west of White Crossing.

There is limited suppart for homogeneity of lithic

scatters located on the wesrern drainage line and

adjacent dunefields and for differences in scatiers

located within the floodplain unit and adjacent

duneticlds,

Predicnioen 2:

Mean site density, per survey unit.area, will be

significantly higher within the floodplain unit in

comparison with the western drainage unit.

An area of approximately 45 km? was actually

surveyed within the eastern floodplain unit as

campared to 120 km* in the weslern drainage unit,

giving site densities of 1.91/km? versus 0.92/km-.

Sure density on the Moodplain unit, therefore, is

P VETH, G. HAMM & Rl. LAMPERT

double that on the western section, The arguably

vreater productivity of the floodplain unit reeeives

further support. Further survey work 1s required

within the dunefields before comparisons of site

density between these and the riverine ‘conduits’ can

be made,

Prediction 3:

Lithic diversity will be higher jn sites within the

eastern section in comparison to the western section

and both will have higher values (han the dunefield

sites.

A camparison of the proportional distribution

of sites with varying muumbers of lithic materials

between the different environmental units. is

presenied in Table 2, There is a clear trend towards

fewer sites with foun or more, taw material types

wilh movement west from the Noodplain unit down

the Lower Cooper. The lower lithic diversity of the

dunefield sites is evident in that 86% have three,

or fewer, raw materials present, A breakdown of the

proportional distribution of different stone

materials found wt sites within the different

environmental units is given in Table 3, Interestingly,

there are few major differences In the proportions

oF raw material utilised between the riverine units

ar hetween these and adjacent dunefield sites. The

decreasing proportion of silerere, the dominant raw

material, with movement west and the increasing

réliance on some alternative malerialy can be

explained simply in terms of (he decreasing

procurement efficiency of silcrete. Silivified

mudstane appears to be only found in significant

quantines at open sites within a5 km radius of the

large local quarry at White Crossing.

Prediction 4;

The mean number of whole seed-zrinding bases

per site will be signifeantly higher for the castern

section in comparison to the western section and

hoth will have similar values to sites it adjacent

duneticlds,

The thean number of basal grinding stones per

sile is significantly higher tor (he Moodplain unit

in comparison to the western drainage unit; ie. 10,74

versus 0.29 (tL « ~ 3.046, p — .0027), Prediction

J demonstrated that the floodplain sites had

TABLE 2. Proportion of sites with different numbers of stone raw materials for environmental units.

No. sites { 2

Eastern Moodplain unit uO 14 u)

Western drainage unit 1Ol 7 33

Dunefield units 16 48 23

No. of stone material types

3 4 5 6 q 8 9

26 23 9 a 1 2

28 7 2 3 0 0 D

15 7 7 0 0 0

FIGURE 9,

LOWER COOPER CREEK

Cyleon,

Pitted/edge-abraded quartzite pebble.

Pestle (CC 134, 54, 151).

62 P. VETH, G. HAMM & RJ. LAMPERT

TABLE 3. Proportion of different stone materials comprising assemblages between environmental units.

Eastern

floodplain unit

No. of sites 86

Silerete 88

Chert ]

Chalcedony 0.50

Red/brown. Sandstone 0.39

Ferruginised Sandstone 0,30

White Sandstone 0.87

Silicified Mudstone 7.94

Quartzite 1.00

significantly larger artefact populations, however,

and when the ratio of basal grinding stones to other

flaked artefacts within assemblages is compared, the

relative differences appear much smaller; ie. 121172

versus 1:2359, There is no significant difference in

the mean number of grinding bases between the

floodplain unit and adjacent dunefield (t = .789,

p ~ .4322). No grinding bases were recorded [rom

the (small) sample of three sites in the western dune

uni.

Prediction 5:

The proportion of formal implements to other

retouched/utilised items will be higher in (the

floodplain unil than in the western drainage unit.

The proportion of formal implements to other

retouched/utilised items was, on field estimates,

divided into four categories: Nil, 0-33%, 34-66%

and > 67%. Formal implements, here, include tula

adzes (and slugs), unifacial points, backed segments

and asymmetrical points, pirri gravers, the marni

wadna and edge-ground axes, The breakdown of

sites for these categories between the eastern and

western sections is given in Table 4. There is a

substantially greater number of sites without formal

implements in the western drainage unit in

comparison to the eastern Moodplain unit (34.62%,

N = 36 versus 2.02%, N = 2), The noticeably

reduced proportion of morphologically and/or

technologically standardised iniplements at sites on

the western section of the Lower Cooper is of

interest as it probably relates to real differences in

manufacture, curation and discard behaviour. This

is seen to occur in a more environmentally

homogeneous land system which lacks alternative

stone supplies.

Eastern Western Western

dunes drainage unit dunes

13 101 3

% different raw materials

96 86 12

2 3 |

0,39 3.00 3.00)

0.45 0.10 0.00)

0,23 0.12 0,00

0.38 0.95 0.00

0.77 6.19 40)

0,08 0.64 0,00

TABLE 4. Proportion of sites in different formal/non-

formal implement categories.

Proportion of formal to non formal implements

Nil 0-33% 34-66% >66% No. Sites

Eastern. units 2.02 80.81 15.15 2.02 99

Western units 34.62 60.58 1.92 2.88 104

Prediction 6:

Trade goods such as ochre, exotic seed-grinding

bases, edge-ground axes, mussel shell fragments and

cylcons will be more numerous on assumed

aggregation and redistribution sites within the

eastern seclion in comparison to sites of the western

section:

The number of different categories of trade items

represented at sites was tabulated and the siles are

subsequently divided as those with one or less

categories of trade items and those with more than

one. These tabulations are presented in Table §,

TABLE 5. Proportion of sites with trade items between

western and eastern section.

No. of trade categories

=1 > |

70 (70.70%)

94 (90,384)

Eastern floodplain unit

Western drainage unil

29 (29.3007)

LO (9,624)

There is clearly a higher proportion of sites with

one, or more, categories of trade items within the

LOWER COOPER CREEK x

gaslern Moodplain unit, and iis is sigalticant at the

AS levelicht — 12.389, p = .0004), A general trend

was mated In tus unit thatthe sites whieh had the

largest number of trade categories and the largest

oumber of vfade ltems were alsa the sites with the

largest lilhic seatlers, [he highes! propartiols of

erinding material, the greatest diversity of lithic

materials, the highest ratios of formal to non-formal

implements and Were those containing the mast

spatially discrete aeriviry areas. Although the major

sites recorded so far lie lo the west of the major

trade and exchanve route documented to the east

of Lake Eyre (McBryde 1989), iL is significant that

they are part of the same floodplain land system.

They ure sugvesied, here, to lave served as major

aggregation and redistribution points within the

floodplaitt unit. In cerns of their size and ovaterial

complexity they are distinet fron any sites located

west ftom White Crossing to Lake Eyre

The suggestion that the eastern floodplain unit,

and specifically [he ecotone between it and the

dunefields, would provide archaeological evidence

for the most complex and varied economic and

social behaviour finds general support trom an

examination of preliminary assemblage data along

the Lower Cooper Creek. Significant differences are

noted between sites in the eastern and western unils

in respeet of debitage assemblages, assemblage size

and density, site density, diversity of lithte materials,

proportion Gf formal implements and number of

trade ites. Gyeater fiomegencity was noted

berween siles On the western drainage unit and

adjacent clunes in comparison lothe floodplain unit

wid its adjacent dunefield.

We argue that horiogeneity of sites in the western

section, collectively, reflects a ‘dunefield adaptation’

in which the function (ef, Bintord 1980) of sites

varies little avross drainave and dunefield units, In

vontrast, there is cansistenit variation in sites

between the eastern floodplain unit and adjacent

dunefields anc this is argued to reflect differences

in seasonality aad duration of site oceupation,

group size and residential mobility between these

unis. This is seen to reflect a ‘riverine-tethered’

adapiitior.

Daren HEARTH FEATURES

Two shallow depressions, saucer-shaped m1 profile

and containing charred woud and burnt ant-bed

material, are almost certainty hearths, though

further investigation is needed to verily this beyond

doubr, They are clearly in situ within ealerered dune

vores lovared 3 kin apart along the Lower Cooper

(Field numbers ©C'77 and CC19 Ht avd H2 in

Fix 2). Both are surrounded by artefacts lying ou

deflationary surfaces and at H2, artefacts appear

{o be within, and eroding from, the same horizon

as (he hearth, At each site the hearth inself was

excavated to examine its relationship will (he

calereted sediment unic, 1 teste its vertival

development and to gather charcoal from its burr

and consolidaled matrix for radiocarbon dating.

The dates obtained are shawn in Table 6.

TABLE 6, Radioembon dates from charcoal in hearths

(Hl and H2, bia. 2)

Simple so, Pidld Ste So Quantiny Cam Ave Mew Aye

(ms BE) tyre AP}

Wh-1S0Y Co77 iH) We Hai 4200 pip 290

Wh-5 0 COM INZ) = 1he WT EM JSG tsa

Both hearths have late Pleistocene dates which

statistically overlap at one standard deviation. With

stratified artefacts appearing both at hearth level

and in more recent horizons, field site CCI39 has

the potential to yield cultural assemblages spanning

the terminal Pleistovene/early Flolocene period,

which is poorly represented in the present

population af excavated arid zone sites (ef Smith

1988),

As noled above, the other major site with clearly

strutitied cultural material, al Unkumilka Walerhole

(CC65; infilled circle in Fig. 2), is likely to -yield

cullural material from the mid- to late Holoeene

period, Both flaked and ground artefacts, as well

asal least two burials, were hoted to be within, and

eroding from, vertical sections of the weakly

indurated sediments of a leeside dune series. In

combination, this site and C'C139 have the potential,

through excavation, ta yield dateable cultural

assemblages spanuing the rerminal Pleistocene to

the contact period.

CONCIESION

Systemaric arehaeological survey of the Lowel

Cooper Creek las revealed probable evidence lor

human oecupation by approximately 12 000 BLP,

antha possible eflorescenve i the numbers of sites

which can be assigned to the late Holocene,

witnessed in the extraordinurily rich record of sites

containing Small Tool components, Thar sueh an

increase in assumed late Holocene vecupalion may

be related to differen! factors such as regional

changes in hydrolaes, mare intensive yse of eashnie

resources, fee. Ce advent of halted woodworking

implements and formal grindstones (ef Smith (988;

Veth 1989b)], uitensificd social relations

(Lourandos 1985), exponential population growth

64 & VETH, G. HAMM & RL). LAMPERT

follawing colonisation (cf. Beaton 1985), or simply

differential site preservation must await excavaljon

and dacing of che stratified sires and

geomorphological work on both source-bardering

and linear dunes. This is likely to include

thermoluminescence dating of various dune series.

Significant differences in site densities and

assemblage Slructure noted between the

enviranmentally finer-grained and expansive

floodplain unlit and the sinuous drainage unit, west

to Lake Eyre, are argued lo reflect real variations

in Holocene settlement/subsisrence strategies. This

analytical division was based on hydrological,

botanical and emic criteria,

The Lower Cooper is argued to have excellent

research potential at a number of levels, Broader

questions relating to the liming of colonisation and

nature of human adaptation in ihe dunefield

habitats of Sahul's pulsating arid care during the

late Quaternary may be addressed, given the unique

suites of fluviatile and aeolian sediments associated

with che Lower Cooper's modern drainage course.

Stratified open sites potentially spanning the

terminal Pleistocene to Contact, through excavat-

ion, may provide data on local technologival

industries, general ceanomie behaviour within the

floodplain unit and address the issue of intensity

of gccupalion [through time. The presence of

numerous trade goods, particularly al major siles

within the fleadplain unit, suggests that 1bese loci

(lying outside the major trade routes) have wcted

as places for secondary exchange and/or

redistribution. Detailed analysis of these assumed

‘ageregation' sites and comparison of assemblage

Structure and reduction strategies with satellite

accupation sites is likely to illuminate the

relationships between social organisation and

resource distribution. Given chat there are wWell-

defined stone supply zones, particularly for the

sileretes, rhe Lower Cooper provides an ideal natural

[ratisect to examine both trade in stone materials

as. well as behavioural phenomena such as rationing,

discard criteria and use of alternative materials,

For a wide range of interrelated theoretical and

methodological issues, the Lower Cooper provides

an optimum focus for future problem-oriented

archaeological work-

REFERENCES

AUSTIN, B L981, ‘A Grammar of Diyari, South Australia’.

Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

BADMAN, F, ad. Plane lists from the middle and lower

Cooper Creek region. Unpublished notes, Division of

Anthropology, South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

BEATON, 1M, 1985. Evidence for a coastal oceuparion

Ume-lag at Prinvess Charlotte Bay (North Queensland)

and implications for coastal colonization and

population growth theories for Aboriginal Australia.

Arehueal. Oceania 20: t-20,

BERNDT, R.M..& VOGELSANG, T. 1941. The initiation

o! native doctors, Dieri tribe, South Australia, Rec. S.

Aust. Mus, 6: 369-380,

BINFORD, LR. 1980. Willow smoke and dog's fails:

hunier-gatherer settlement systems and archaeological

site information, Aw, Aatigiuity 45> 4-20,

BIRD, CEM. 1985. Prebistone lithit resource utilisauon:

a case sludy from the southwest of Western Ausinalia.

Unpublished Ph, thesis, Cenire for Prehisiory,

University of Western Australia, Nedlands.

BONYTHON, CW. 1955. "The filling and drying up —

Lake Eyre, South Australia. The great flooding of

1949-50", Royal Geographical Society of Australasia,

South Australian Branch, Adelaide.

BONYTHON, CW. 1963. Further beht on river floods

reachmg Lake Byre. Prov, R. Geog. Soc. Aust, S. Aust.

Brot, 61; 9-22.

BOWLER, J.M. & WASSON, R.J. 1984. Glacial age

environments of Inland Australia, da JC, Vowel (Ed.).

‘Laie Caindzoic Palaeoclimates of the Southern

Hemisphere. A.A, Balkema, Rotterdam,

BYRNE, D. 1980. Dynamics of dispersion: the place of

silerele in urchacological assemblages from the lowe;

Murchison, Western Australia, Arehaeo!,

Anthrapol. Oceania V5: 110-119,

CALDWELL, J, & WEBR, 3. 1988. Fluorine analysis, J

R. Lampert, 8. Webb, J, Magee, D. Fergie, P, Clark and

J. Klaver (Co-authors).. "The Lake Eyre Basin Project:

archagology and palaeoenvironments’, Unpublished

repor|, Division of Anthropology, Souih Australian

Museum, Adelaide.

CALLEN, R.A. & NANSON, E.C. 1989, Discussion —

formation and age of dunes in the Lake Eyre

depocentres, by H, Wopfner and C.R, Twidale. Geol.

Rdsch. 17(3): 815-834.

CLARK, A, 1987, Slariing at phe squrce: the Yaritiua

quarry sile, Shark Bay, Western Australia. Unpublished

B.A_ Honours thesis, Lintversity of Western Australia,

Nedlands.

CLARKE, PA. na. Ethinobotaty of Lake Eyre notes

(ms). Anthropology Division, South Austratlag

Museum, Adelaide.

CLELAND, 1B. & JOHNSTON, TH. 19a3a. Native

names and uses of plants in the north-ease corner of

South Australia. Trans &. Sac, S Ase. G7; 149-173,

CLELAND, J.B. & IOHNSTON, TH. 1943b. Aboriginal

names and the ufilization of fauna in the Byrean region.

Trins, R. Soe. S. Alisé, 67: 244.411,

FLGREK, S.M. 1987. The archacologival varjabilily of

mound springs at Lake Eyre South, South Australin:

work in progress. 4a, Arehoeo), 24; 27-431,

FORBES, G.8. 1974. Kopperamanna Map Sheet.

‘Geological Atlas of South Australia’, 1250 O00 series,

Geological Survey of Sourh Austraha, Adelaide.

GASON, S. 1879. The Dieyerie tribe of Australian

PAYS.

LOWER COOPER CREEK 3

Aborigines. 7n 3.0, Woods (Ed.). “The Native Tribes ot

South Australia. Bos. Wige, Adelaide.

HOULBD, R.AW 1977 Puntutjarpa rovkshelter and the

Austmalian desert cullure. ithrop, Pup, Am. Mus. Nal.

Hist, No, 54.

GREGORY, JW, 1906. ‘The Dead Heart. John Murray,

London.

HAMM, G. 1987. In scarch of cylcons, Unpublished B.A.

Honours thesis, Australian National University,

Canberra,

HERCUS, L.A. 1987. Looking for Ditji-mingka. Ree. 8,

vlusl, Mus. 2h: 149-156,

HERCUS, L.A. 1988. Notcs on Aboriginal background

to fhe Thinari Gesert National Park. Unpublished

document, Division af Antirapology, South Australian

Moseum, Adelaide.

HERCUS, L.& CLARKE, P. 1986, Nine Simpson Desert

wells. Archaeol, Qeeani 2b §1-02.

HISCOCK, P, 1982. A technological analysis of quartz

assemblages from the south coast. /nS. Bawealer (Ed.),

‘Coastal Archacology in Eastern Australias proceedings

of the t¥80 Yalla conference an Ausiralian prehistory’,

Deparrment of Prehistory, Research School of Pacific

Studics, Australian National Universicy, Canberra.

HISCOCk, P. 1984 Preliminary report on the stone

artelacts from Colless Creek cave, northwest

Queensland. Queensland Archaeal, Res, 12 120-131.

HISCOCK, P. 1986. Technologival change in the Hunter

River Valley and che interpretation of late Holocene

change in Australia. 2trehaeol, Oceania 24: 40-50_

HISCOCK, & 1989. Prehistoric settlement patterns and

arivfuce manufacture of Lawn Hill, northwest

Queensland. Linpubtished Ph D, thesis, Department of

Anthropology, University of Queensland, St Lucia.

HOWITT. AW. 1891. The Dieri and ojher kindred (mbes

of Central Australia, R. Anthrop, Inst. 202 30-104.

HOWITT, AW, 1904, ‘The Nulive Tribes of South-East

Austraha’, Macmillan, London.

HUGHES, BJ. & LAMPERT, BR. 1985. Cultural ancl

natural heritage survey of mound springs in South

Australia: assessment of Aboriginal archaeological

significance. Unpoblished report. Kinhil Stearns,

Adelaide.

ISAAC, G.L- 1977. ‘Olorgesailie: archaeological sludies

of 4 Middle Pleistocene Lake Basin in Kenya’, University

of Chicago Press, Chicago.

IOHNSTON, TH, 1943 Aboriginal nares and unlization

ol the fauna in the Eyrean reehou, Truss R, See, S.

elusn O7(2): 244-411.

TONES, PG. 1984, Rect ochre expeditions. .. Anihrap.

Soc, S Aust, ZL 3-106 28): 10-19,

JONES, W. 1979. Up the creek: huntergatherers in the

Couper Basi Unpublished BAdHons) Thesis,

University of New England, Atmidale.

JUNG, ROB. 1877, Land und Leule im Seenyebiele,

Ausrraliens dos iillen Welttheilen, Translated

inanuserimt, Divsion of Anbhropology, South Australian

Museu, Adelaide,

KAMMINGA, 1. YTS, Joumey into The ticroeosits, &

functional woalysiy ol contain elasses of preliisgeric

Austratian sipne yools, Unpublished PhO. thesis,

University of Sydney, Camperdown,

KAMMINGA, J, 1982. Over the edge: (unerianal analysis

of Australian stane tools. Gee. Pap. Alnthrep, Univ

Queensland No. 12.

KAMMINGA, J. 1985. The Pirri Graver. Aust. Aberiginal

Studies. 19858: 2-24,

LAMPERT, R.J, 1981. ‘The Greal Kartan Mystery: Terra

Australis 5. Deparment af Prehistory, Australian

National University, Canberra.

LAMPERT, RJ. & HUGHES, PJ. 1980. Pleistocene

archacology in the Flinders Runpes: research praspects.

Anst Archueal. Wr 1-20,

LAMPERT, RB. & HUGHES, PJ. 1987, The Flinders

Ranges: a Pleistocene outpost in the arid zone? Ree.

S. Aust. Mus. 20: 29-34,

LAMPERT, B.J, & HUGHES, PJ. 1988, Early human

occupation of the Flinders Ranges. Rec. 8. Aust. Mus,

22: 139-168,

LAMFERT, R.1., WEBB, S., MAGEE, 1, FERGIE, D,

CLARK, P. & KLAVER, J. 1988. The Lake Eyre Basin

Project: urchaeolagy and palaevenvirpnments.

Unpublished Report, Division of Anthmpology, South

Australian Musetim, Adelaide.

LITCHFIELD, L. 1983. ‘Marree and the tracks beyond

in black and while. Commemorating the Centenary of

Marree 1888-1983", L. Litchfield, Marree.

LOURANDOS, M. 1985. Intensification and Australian

prehistory. /n T, Price and J. Brown (Eds). "Prehistoric

hunters and gatherers: the emergence of social and

cultural coniplexity’. Academe Press, New York,

MADIGAN, CX. 1946. ‘Crossing the Dead Heart’.

Georgian House, Melbourne.

MASON, B. 1955. Rainfall in the Lake Eyre eatehment

In ‘Lake Eyre, South Australia, the Great Flooding of

1949.50", Royal Society of South Australia, Adelaide.

MCBRYDE, 1. 1989... to establish a commerce of thts

sort’ — cross-cultural exchange at the Port Jackson

Settlemenr. /# J. Hardy and A. Prose (Eds). ‘Studies

[rom ‘Terra Australis to Australia’) Highland Press,

Canberra.

MCCARTHY, FD, 1976, ‘Australiam Abonyjnal Stang

Implements.’ 2nd eciviun, The Australian Moseunt

Trust, Sydney,

MCCONNELL, A. 1978. Aborivinal trade in the Lake

Eyre Region. Unpublished M.A. qual. thesis,

Department of Prehistory and Anthropology,

Australian National University, Canberra.

MOLLEMANS, ¥-FL, RETEL 2B, THOMPSON, M.B,,

ALEXANDER, L, & PEDLER, L,,P. 1984. Biuloyics!

Survey. ol the Cooper Creek envinanmental association

8.4.4. Norih-eastern Australia, Unpublished repert,

South Australian National Parks and Wildiile Servies

Advlaide

O'CONNELL, J 1977. Aspects of variahon iq central

Australian Jithic assemblages. Jn RV.S. Wright (Ed.

‘Stone Toals as Cultural Markers: change, evolution and

complexity) Australian Unstilute of Aboriginal Studies,

Canberra.

C’UCONNELL, J. & HAWKES, K. 1984. Pood choice and

loraging rites among the Alyawara. A Alarop. Res,

Ay 504-335,

QO’GRADY, GN, O'GRADY, C.F. & VOGELIN, TM,

1966. .anguages of the World: Indo-Pavilic Anfarap.

Linguists &(2); 1-197,

SMI'TH, MLA. 1986. The antiquity of seed-goinding ia and

Australia. elreeeal Oceania 21: 29-39,

66 P VETH, G, HAMM & R.J. LAMPERT

SMITH, M.A, 1988. The pattern and timing of prehistoric

settlement in central Australia. Unpublished Ph.D.

thesis, University of New England, Arinidale.

SMITH, M.A. 1989, The case for a resident human

population in the central Australian Ranges during (ull

glacial aridity. Archaeol. Oceania 24: 93-105,

STIRTON, R.A., TEDFORD, R.H, & MILLER, A.H.

1961. Cenozoic stratigraphy and vertebrate

palaeontology of the Tirari Desert, South Australia.

Ree, S. Aust. Mus, 14: 19-61.

SULLIVAN, AP. & ROZEN, K.C. 1985. Debilage analysis

and archaeological interpretation. Am. Antig. 50:

755-779.

TEDFORD, R.H., WELLS, R7., WILLIAMS, D.L.G.,

LAWSON, P.F, & BARGHOORN, §.F, 1985, Late

Cenozoic stratigraphy, Eastern Lake Eyre Basin, South

Australia. Reports of the National Geographic Society,

Washington.

TETZLAFF, G. 1976. ‘The Precipitation Patterns Around

and Including Flooded Lake Eyre’. Flinders University,

Adelaide.

TINDALE, N.B. 1974, ‘Aboriginal Tribes of Australia’.

University of California Press, Berkeley.

VETH, P.M, 1982. Testing the behavioural model: the use

of open site data, Unpublished B.A, Honours thesis,

Department of Anthropology, University of Western

Australia, Nedlands.

VETH, P.M. 1987, Martujarra prehistory: variation in arid

zone adaplions, Aust, Archueol. 25; 102-111.

VETH, P.M. 1989a. Islands in the interior: a model for

the colonisation of the arid zone of Australia, 47chaenl.

Oveania, 24: 81-92.

VETH, P.M. 1989b. The prehistory of the sandy deserts:

spatial and temporal variation in settlement and

subsistence behaviour within the aricl zone of Australia.

Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, The University of Western

Australia, Nedlands.

VETH, P.M. & WALSH, F.J. 1988. The concept of ‘staple’

plani foods in the Western Desert region of Western

Australia. Aust. Aboriginal Suidies. 1988(2): 19-25,

WALSH, F.J. 1987a. Patterns of plant resource used by

Martujarra Aborigines. Unpublished M.Sc. preliminary,

Department of Botany, University of Western Australia,

Nedlands.

WALSH, F.J. 1987b. The influence of the spatial and

temporal distribution of plant food resources on

traditional Martujarra subsistence strategies. Aus.

Archaeal. 25: 88-101.

WASSON, RJ. 1983, The Cainozoic history of the

Strzelecki and Simpson Desert dunefields (Australia)

and the origin of the desert dunes. 2. Geomorph. 45:

85-115.

WEBB, S. 1988. Human remains. /n R, Lampert et al,

The Lake Eyre Basin Project: archaeology and

paleoenyironments, Unpublished report, Division of

Anthropology, South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

WELLS, RT. 1986. Palaeogeography — an overview. /#

RT, Wells and R.A. Callen (Eds). ‘The Lake Eyre Basin

— Cainozoic Sediments, Fossil Vertebrates and Plants,

Landforms, Silcretes and Climatic Implications.’

Australian Sedimentologists Group Field Guide Series,

No. 4. Geological Society of Australia, Sydney.

WILLIAMS, E. 1988, The archaeology of the Cooper

Basin: report on fieldwork. Rec, S. Aust. Mus. 22:

§3-62.

WILSON, R.S. 1981. Geography and the totemic

landscape — the Dieri case: a study of Dieri social

organizalion including territorial organization,

Unpublished B.A. Honours thesis, Department of

Anthropology, University of Queenlsand, St Lucia,

WITTER, D. n.d. The reduction chart. Unpublished notes.

REVIEW

T. MORRELL

Summary

Dreamings : the art of Aboriginal Australia edited by P. J. Sutton, Christopher Anderson, Philip

Jones, Francoise Dussart, Steven Hemming. Viking, published in association with the Asia Society

Galleries, New York, 1988. 266 pp., 260 numbered figs (155 in colour). Hardback $A65.00,

paperbound $A35.00. Reviewed together with the exhibition ‘Dreamings. The art of Aboriginal

Australia’, organised by the Asia Society Galleries, New York and the South Australian Museum.

REVIEW

Dreamings: The Art of Aboriginal Australia edited

by PJ. Sutton, with contributions by Peter Suiton,

Christopher Anderson, Philip Jones, Francoise

Dussat(, Steven Hemming. Viking, published in

association with the Asia Society Galleries, New

York, 1988, 26fpp., 260 numbered fivs (155 in

colour). Hardback $465.00, paperbound $A35,00.

Reviewed tayether with the exhibitian ‘Dreamijnas.

The Art of Aboriginal Australia’, organised by the

Asia Society Galleries, New York and the South

Australian Museum,

The exhibition Dreampras, organiwed by the

South Australian Museum and (he Asia Society in

New York, will probably be remembered for having

amplified white Australia’s ‘discovery’ (after 200

years) of Abonvinal art, and broadeast it to the

United States Although nat the first exported

exhibition of Aboriginal art, it has been the most

sigtificant Mmstoneally, because of ils size and

quality and because of various factors which made

the oming ideal. The exhibition reflected a major

resurgence in) Aboriginal painting, and coincided

with a perjad of strong overseas interest in

Australia,

The exhibition will begome an imporrant niarker

inthe cultural history of Austrilia. The book which

accompanies the exhibition however will continue

to live pot just in the memory, but ta the active

discourse of people who concern themselves with

how. we should go about understanding Aboriginal

culture in general.

First and foremost the baok Dreantings is a

record of the exhibition, which was on the whole

very well received when it opened in New York, This

is particularly impressive considering it is nothing

like a kuvack-down-drug-our bloek-buster, alrhough

it includes many abjeets of great beauty and rarity.

It would have been easier to cater (o several

romanti¢ notions of Aboriginal Australia, For

example the organisers could have offered an

exhibition about a mysterious ancient race of artists

creating earthy, but spiritual objeers our of wood,

bark and ochre: or alternatively, untulored modern

masiers producing an extravapant feast af biz,

visually powerful Western Desert paintings, Instead

a gteal amount of work and thought was pur into

cansiructing a view of Aboriginal Australia whieh

conveys problematic complexity rather than

dramativ unity.

Dreamings is not the kind of exhibition which

saturares the viewer with a sense of familiariny anid

understanding of one particular kind of art. Ie

leaves (he viewer sull asking questions, mast of

which can be answered by the book. The

publication Dreunines is large, extensively

illustrated with unages from the exhibition or

relevant to it, and contains material for three

different books; one abour the history and

development of Aboriginal art, ane about how to

interpret and respond io yarious Aboriginal

artfarms, and ane tracing the way nan-Aboriginal

interpretation of the arr has evolved, It is essential

to the character of (his book, however, that these

(and other) seemingly disparate strands of study are

combined asd often closely interwoven. As Peter

‘Suttan, curator of he exhibition and the book's

editor, explains on pate 14 of the book:

A central message of this book is thar while the lireral

incanings, the Visual devices, Ne aestherte potenrial

and the sovial-contextual siznificance of Aboriginal

art may ech be distinguished jn theory, they all jmieracr

In practice to consuitute the colal Meanings of (he works

for Aborigines, Thase who seek an understanding of

the art need to approach ii on all fronts.

The book carclully salisties several needs in the

field of literature on Aborivinal art, and avoids

vovering ground which has been eovered already.

Certain artefacts (for example shields) are given

detailed discussion in terms of meaning or history

without actually explaining what they were for

while elsewhere the social uses of paintings are dealt

with. Artefacts which cannor be discussed in terms

of ivonography are excluded. With its subject matter

and this fresh approach the book naturally reads

asa highly innoyalory study. The meihodotogies

of the spel histarian, the econontist and the

political scientist come inte play from time ro time,

enhancing the more conventional tactics of study,

The surprising combinations af illustrations reflect

the unconventional approach. Across one double

page spread, painting on aluminium ts juxtaposed

wilh painting on bark and painting on canvas (but

inthis case the canvas of a pair of sandshoes). The

Uirve chapters by Peter Sutton are 9 detailed lesson

in ‘reading’ Aboriginal art, objectively explaining

terms which have acquired a misleading sentimental

mythology in white Australian culture and using

diagrams to explore individual works. The chapter

by Chnstopher Anderson and Francoise Dussart

Provides a much-needed, substantial introduction

to the Western Desert paintings which have attracted

such a blinding furry of popular interest over the

past several years. The historiography of Aboriginal

art contributed by Philip Jones provides a necessary

reminder thal deus change, and vives a context into

which we can fil the current interprerarians which

the book offers. The last chapter by Surton, Sones

and Steven Hemming explains the responses of

Aboriginal art to the imported culture and society

which has threatened ir,

Implicit in the stance taken by this book is an

argument against the preconceived distinction

between art and anthropology which has for so long

distorted the way Aboriginal art has been viewed.

This comes at a time when the figure most

influential (indirectly) on contemporary art writing

is an anthropologist, the late Claude Levi-Strauss.

The need for a structured understanding of the

social and intellectual context of artists in the

intelligent study of what has conventionally been

called art, and the importance of a visual response

in the field of anthropology have made it

increasingly difficult for any specialist to claim an

artefact (or art object) for his or her particular

discipline. This book demonstrates that it is our

ways of looking at and thinking about Aboriginal

art that need to be redefined, for the exhibition has

demonstrated that the objects themselves exist

splendidly independent of ways in which viewers

may wish to categorize them. The thoroughness of

scholarship and care in looking at works which

Dreamings combines is an example to everyone who

writes about material culture, whether as an art

critic/historian or anthropologist.

T. MORRELL, Director, The College Gallery, South Australian College of Advanced Education,

Holbrooks Road, Underdale, South Australia 5032. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 24(1): 67-68, 1990.

THE AURUKUN PROJECT

P. J. SUTTON

Summary

Over the last five years the Division of Anthropology of the South Australian Museum has hosted a

research project focused on Aboriginal relationships with the land in western Cape York Peninsula.

Most of the land in this case lies within the the Aurukun Shire.

THE AURUKUN PROJECT

Over the pasr five years the Division of

Anthropology of the South Australian Museum has

hosted a research project focused on Aboriginal

relationstiips with the land in western Cape York

Peninsula, Most of the land in this ease lies within

the Aurukun Shire.

Peter Sulton, mattager of the project, has worked

in the Cape York Peninsula region as an

aithropologist and linguist over a period of twenty

years, Detailed cullural landscape mapping has been

a major feature of this work. This involves visiting

the homelands of Aboriginal people whose intimate

knowledge af local geography, mythology, history

and natual history is recorded, usually on site.

Analysis of these systems of knowledge is integrated

wilh udjoined studies of local languages, social

structure, religion, politics, and social change, for

example. This research has been funded by the

Australian Institute of Abonginal Studies, Aurukun

Shue Council and Aurukun Community

Incorporated (both using Departmen of Aboriginal

Alfairs funds), the Australian Research Council, the

Australian Heritage Commission, and the South

Australian Museum.

Since the mid 1980s Dr Roger Cribb has been

employed from time to time Lo collaborate on the

integraion of this detgiled jnformation in a

computer database, He has also carfied out

archacological survey: work in the region, and has

assisted wilh ethnographic site recording, Together

wilh) David Martin of the Australian National

University, who las very extensive research

cxpellence of the samie region, he recently worked

with Peter Sutton to produce a report combining

the Western Cape York Peninsula Aboriginal site

data of several researchers, including rhac of von

Sturmer, Sutton, Martin, Cribb and Chase. The

November 1989 draft af this report, which covers

a narrow coastal strip between the Embley and

Edward Rivers, contained 2085 site records and

spanned 1050 pages.

The immediate rationale lar the production of

this particular version of the data was that the

Aurukuo clan leaders had requested supporting

evidence for their Oppasition to seismic survey Work

iw their area by the mining company Comalco,

Comaleo Wished to bulldoze seismic lines over much

of the Shire in tts search for oil,and the traditional

landowners appealed to the Federal Minister for

Aboriginal Affairs to niake an cmergency

devlaration of the Shire as a significant area under

the [984 Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islatider

Heritage Protection Act as amended. At the ume

ol writing Comaleo hus suspended ils exploration

activity and has nor announced its exploration

intentions for the 1990 dry season_ No emergency

declaration has been made, bul preparation of the

relevant documentation is proceeding nonetheless.

There js another reason for the construction of

this database in the complex Form it has naw taken,

It can produce map graphics us well as tabulated

versions and reworkings of the various site records

and their many fields, and is a fully-fledged if rather

mechanical research tool in the field of peopletand

ecological and socio-cultural relationships.

[n essence, the academic dimension of the project

aims to marry the rich insights of a cultural

anthropological perspective with the quantification

and systematic detail made possible by a yery large

and powerful machine-readable body of

observations and stalements, A great deal is now

known, for example, abour the particular

Knowledge system that in this region traditionally

integrated social and political groupings, religious

symbolism, land ownership, the demographic

pattern, landforms, vegetation zones, seasonality

and economic resources. Using the projects

database 11 is now possible to quantity, for example,

the relationship between site density, ail type, and

vegetation or landltorm zone,

The database manager, IBM PC-FOCUS, thus

allows us to test for statistically significant degrees

of spatial association or segregation between kinds

of places. We can quantify degrees of association

between cultural and physical properties of diles and

the ecological zones (Aboriginal or seientist-

defined) in which they accur, We can provide a

precise fest forthe hypothesis thar clan estates tend

To be so vonstrucied as lo maximise thejr ecological

diversity, Gr that cremation mounds and ritually

dangerous. places are closely associated with clan

estate boundaries. The vitally important cultural

categories of clan totemism, local culr ceremonies,

environmental ‘nickname* groupings and broad

regional political groupings, all Well understood

from social anthropological studies of the Iasi 15

years, can now be given far greater definition at the

level of their geovraphical content. And we can now

provide the kind ef hard data on so-called ethno.

graphic sites rhat is of direct relevance to the work

of archacologisis.

Complemented by rich interpretative material

linking the sites together under historical, religious,

political and ather local cultural perspectives, aud

by a detailed ethnobotanical srudy carried our by

Peter Surton and ecologist Dermot Smyth in

1978-9, linked to a micro-leyel vegetation zene

‘survey by Smyth, this study is now ready for a major

publication,

There is probably no other regiou of Australia

that has been so thoroughly researched in this way,

although rhe wark of Nevillé White and his

10 PY, SUTTON

associates in eastern Arnhem Land, albeit with a

different focus, is probably the nearest parallel. I

is unlikely that a project of similar depth, detail,

length and expense will ever be replicated in

Australia, if only because of the lass of intimate

traditional landscape knowledge among Aboriginal

people; Without publication, however, the

considerable impact of in-depth studies such as this

cannot be realised.

The theoretical significance of this work is at two

main levels: that of generalisations about Australian

Aboriginal land relauonships, and that of the

broader issue of the relaiionship between cultures

and the environments in which they are reproduced.

Our essential theoretical contribution in this context

has been to integrate the analysis of land relations

With the shifting dynamics of political life rather

than to present them as if they were a relaliyely static

and self-contained backdrop to action.

At a broader level, this study will seek to build

on contemporary anthropological theory, with its

phenomenological strengths, while avoiding the

extreme subjectivist stance under which all forms

of knowledge appear to belong to the same

phenomenal order. Formal or systemic knowledge,

for example, does not have the same epistemological

status as conscious and substantive knowledge, and

is culturally constituted in a different way, | look

at this issue by focusing on the constitution of

Aboriginal geographical knowledge. Perhaps

definable as ‘neo-objectivist’, my approach is also

to try to improve the theoretical status of the notion

of evidence in the anthropological enterprise. The

operational metatheories of many current

anthropological paradigms rest overmuch on

criteria such as internal coherence and completeness

of scope, and insufficiently on those such as degrees

of testability and degrees of fit with the available

ethnography, My critique of this kind of theoretical

value-system arises in pare out of the problem of

describing how Aboriginal environmental

knowledge is related to Aboriginal environmental

experience,

In most of Cape York Peninsula an cra of relative

stability has followed the initial catastrophic impact

of colonisation, That era may soon be at an end.

The region has suddenly become a focus of

atlention by major development interests, conser-

vation groups, and governments charged with

responsibility nor only for tourism and other

infrastructure but alsa for major aspects of

Aboriginal welfare, Proposed and planned

developrients, including a commercial space base,

a large lourist resort al [ron Range, the sealing of

the Peninsula road, sand mining, gas and oil

exploration, and many other new activities, are

ominous signs as far as the Aboriginal population

is concerned, since Aborigines are still the region’s

majority, constituting two-thirds of all people in the

Peninsula. If this balance is radically shifted in

favour of non-Aboriginal outsiders, experience

elsewhere suggests that further social and cultural

decline and disintegration will occur among the

Aborigines.

This project has had very keen support from the

Aurukun Aboriginal people, who have at times

raised their own funds to assist its field programme,

and who hold a key interest in the data, The clan

leaders in 1985 gave (heir support in principle ro

the proposal for a publication containing this

representation of their knowledge, pending final

consultation over contents. They are deeply

concerned that their land-based traditions be

recognised and respecied by a wider public.

PJ. SUTTON, Research Associate, Anthropology Division, South Australian Museum, North

‘Terrace, Adelaide, South Australia 5000. Ree. 5. lust Mus. 24(1): 69-70, 1990,

RECORDS

THE

SOUTH

AUSTRALIAN

MUSEUM

VOLUME 24 PART 1

MAY 1990

ISSN 0081-2676

CONTENTS:

ARTICLES

IM. JE EER

Amphibian type specimens in the South Australian Museum

11 Bb. B. HIRST

A review of the genus /sopeda L. Koch (Heteropodidae: Araneae) in Australasia

with descriptions of two new genera

27 I. M. KERZHNER & N. G. STROMMER

Oriental and Australian species of the genus Prostemma Laporte (Heteroptera:

Nabidae)

35 C. H. S. WATTS

Revision of Australian Hydrobiomorpha Blackburn (Coleoptera:

Hydrophilidae)

43 P. VETH, G. HAMM & R. J. LAMPERT

The archaeological significance of the Lower Cooper Creek

NOTES

67 T. MORRELL

Review of ‘Dreamings: The Art of Aboriginal Australia’

69 P. J. SUTTON

The Aurukun Project

Published by the South Australian Museum,

North Terrace, Adelaide, South Australia 5000.

RECORDS

THE

SOUTH

AUSTRALIAN

MUSEUM

VOLUME 24 PART 2

NOVEMBER 1990

CERORIBATULA GEN. NOV., FOVORIBATULA GEN. NOV. AND

FOVORIBATULINAE SF. NOV. (ACARIDA: CRYTOSTIGMATA:

ORIBATULIDAE) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN SOILS

D.C. LEE & C. M. BIRCHBY

Summary

Ceroribatula gen. nov. (including two species-complexes) and Fovoribatula gen. nov. are

established, with seven new species as follows: Ceroribatula incrustata-complex, C. incrustata

(type-species), C. bizygata, C. monozygata, C. trirostrata; C. megaforamina-complex, C.

megaforamina; Fovoribatula brevisetosa (type-species), F. mesosetosa. They are grouped in the

Fovoribatulinae, a new subfamily in the Oribatulidae, with four other genera. The new species are

from plant litter, moss or soil at the four drier (arid, semi-arid, mallee-broombush, mallee-heath)

sites of the nine florally diverse South Australian sites sampled. Four species carry a conspicuous

cerotegument, which in C. incrustata forms patches of thick wax. The leg chaetotaxy of the

Oripodoidea is briefly discussed and the absence of setae on femora I and II is given taxonomic

significance, There is a key to adults of Australian species of Fovoribatulinae.

CERORIBATULA GEN. NOV., FOVORIBATULA GEN, NOY, AND FOVORIBATULINAE 5B, NOY,

(ACARIDA: CRYPTOSTIGMATA: ORIBATULIDAF) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN SOILS

D.C, LEE & C, M, BIRCHBY

LEE. D, C, & BIRCHBY, ©. M., 1991. Ceroribatula gen, nov., Fovoribatu/a gen, nov. and

Fovoribatulinae sf. nov, (Acarida: Cryptostigmata: Oribatulidac) fram South Australian sails.

Ree. S. Aust. Mus. 24 (2): 71-89

Ceroribatusa gen. nov. (including two species-complexes) and Fovoriburula pen, nov. are

established, with seven new species as follows: Cerariharula incrustata-complex, €. incrustala

(type-species), C bizygata, ©. monozygata, C. trirostrata; C. megafuramina-complex, C.

meevaloramina; Fovoributula brevisetosa (type-species), fh mesosetosa. They are grouped in the

Fovoribatulinae, a tew subfamily in the Oribatulidae, with four other genera. The new species

are fram plant litter, mioss or sail at che four drier (arid, semi-arid, mallee-broombush, mallee

heath) siles of the nine Florally diverse South Australian sites sampled. Four species carry a

conspicuous cerotegument, which in C. fnerastara forms patches of thick wax. The leg chactotaxy

of che Oripodoidea is briefly discussed and the absence of setae on lemora | and IL is given

taxonomic significance. There is a key to adults of Australian species of Povoribatulinae.

D.C. Lee and C. M. Birchby, Sourlt Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, South Australia

5000. Manuscript recerved | November 1989,

This is a further part of an ongoing study of

sarcoptiform mites in South Australian soils,

sampled from nine florally diverse sites, and for

which an introduction to the relevant work on the

advanced oribate mites (Planofissurae) has been

published (Lee 1987), The mites cousidered here

have been referred to a& ‘seven species of Orihatula-

like mites’ in the publication describing

Decoribatula Lee & Birchby, 1989, They are grouped

here in two new genera. With Brassiel/a Balogh,

1970, Decoribanula, Retieuloppia Balogh &

Mahunka, 1966.and Romanobares Feider, Vasiliu

& Calugar, 1970, they make up the Fovoribatulinae,

a new subfamily within the Oribatulidae Thor, 1929.

The Fovoribatulinae has a deficient chaetataxy

on femora | and LI, whieh is unusual amongst the

Oripodoides. This has had some consideranon with

the description of Decoribatula Lee & Birchby,

1989, but is further commented on here. Also the

sejugal apodeme notation and the terms used to

deseribe sculpturing of the integument are briefly

reconsidered,

The notum is illustrated (or all seven species, but

the idiosterna are so similar for some pairs of

spevies that they are only illustrated for four species:

The only complete set of legs illustrated is for

Ceroribatula incrusiata (Fig. 4), where, because of

the variations in leg chaetotaxy, the setae are drawn

on femora f and 11, Some legs are illustrated for

a further four species, mainly to represent the

yarialions in chaetotaxy on femora | and I, but

also the relative sizes of the tarsi and pretarsal claws.

Measurements are in micrometres (um), The mites

examined were all collected by one of us (D.C.L.)

and are mainly deposited in the South Australian

Museum (SAMA), bul also in the Natural History

Museum, London (BMNH), the Field Museum of

Natural History, Chicago (FMNH) and the New

Zealand Arthropod Collection, DSIR, Auckland

(NZAC).

NOTATION AND LEG CHAETOTANY

The modifications in morphological notation

presented in papers an Se/obates (Lee & Pajak 1988)

and Scheloribates (Lee & Pajak in press) are

followed here, but elaborations are made in defining

apodemes and describing the integumental

sculpturing, whilst the relevent leg chaetotaxy is

discussed.

Three types of apodemes are associated with the

sejugal somal division: dorsasejugal apodeme ( ~

dorsophragmatic apophysis of Norton 1983);

pleurosejugal apodeme (= bothridial apodeme of

Lee 1987, which merges dorsally with the

integument near the bothndiucn of sensory seta 22);

ventrosejugal apodeme (= sejugal apodeme of the

podosternum), Also, two further thickenings in the

podosternal integument. other than apodemes I, II

and III associated with (he coxites, are apparent in

the largest species (C Irirostrata, Fig. 9), mtidsternal

upodeme dorsal ta seta #1), and the postpodal

apodeme abaxial to seta #2 (not homologous with

72 LC. LEE AC

apodeme 1, which i§ absent in the mites considered

here).

fv is charaeteristi¢ of Fovoribatulinae that ihe

injegument is Sculptured and inerusied with a

substantial and sometimes conspicuous

eeralegument.. The sculpturing often consists of

many small pits, cach in the centre of a shailow

depression, The depression may be circular or, if

bounded hy reticulate ridges, hexagonal. The

reticulate ridges probably consist partly of the

cerolegument (ihe superficial layer of the

integument developed by eXudation (hroueh pores

i the cuticle), since they are conspicuous and more

raised around the patches of thick wax on

Ceraribatule inerustara (Pig. 3). The thick wax is

columuar, white and strongly refractile, the

hexagonal columns.growing out at cieht angles to

ihe mlegument surface, both in this species and

Rediculoppia reliculata Balogh & Mahunka, 1946-

On the other band, the wax may form a thinner

layer, uniformly covering the integument, and

sometines containiys senall, relractile wax granules

making i either generally dirty white in colour as

on Ceroribatula bizvgaia or forming white patches

as an Ceroritbatula trirastraia aid Favoribatyle

mesoseiosd, The microsculpturing varies, (he

diflerent stales merging intoa continuunt, bur they

ure categorized as follows: faveaie, pitted; rericvlate-

Joveate, pitted, with each pil in a hexagonal space

delineated by reticulate ridges: rericulare, reticulate

lines or ridges without pils; w/en/ale, depressions

that may be separated by indistinet reticulation.

The chaetotaxy of five setae on both temora I

and His the same for most members of the

Oripadoidea, Using only the four major files of

sciac on a leg segment (see bee 1981, fig. 19), this

chactotaxy is represented by (he number of setac

{hat are antertor, dersal/ventral, posterior and \s

given as follows; -L -— O.2/2; WI - 0,242,1-

Exceptionally some setae are absent, cither just the

postenor seta asi Symbianbaudae Aoki, L966 and

a few genera of Oripodidae tacor, 1925, or always

ihe chsioventral seta (v2) on femur tl and some

ather vetitral or posterior setac.on femora J and I,

as in Lamellareidaé Balogh, 1972, Crassoribatulinae

Balogh & Balogh, 1984, and the genera grouped

here in the Fovoributulinae sf noy, The absence of

such setae, at least within the latter two subfamilies

of Oribatulidae, 1s considered primitive beeause they

wre also absent in the Licneremacoidea, regarded

as the most primitive group within the Poropota

and a sister apoup to the Oripodoidea. But irshould

be noled thal the Galumnoidea, regarded as the

most derived superfamily within the Poranolta,

always lacks seta v2 on femur II.

The relevant femoral chaetotaxy in the

Oribatulidae has a number of forms when it is

déelicrent as in the Voveribatulinae and

. M, BIRCHBY

Crassoribatulinae. These are listed, with the mist

deficient Jirst, as Follows;

I ~ 0,2/1,0; 11 - 0,2/1,0 some Cereribaiula

1 - 0,2/2,0; [1 — 0,210 Some Ceroribaiula

and Reliculappia

1 - 0,2/1,; 1b - 0.2/0) Brassiella

1- 02/1; Th - 0,2/1,L Fovaribarula and

Devoribatula

1—0,2/2,1) Lb - 0,2/1,1 Romanobates and

Crasserifatula,

The chaetotaxy of Brasstella and Crassoribatule

is Gol given in the literature, but is newly recorded

here after examining the holotypes of Brassiella

penicillifer Hammer, 1973 and Crassoribatula

maculosa Hammer, 1967. Not all variations are

reflected in the above presemtation of chaectataxy,

for example, in Fovaribatula the ventral seta on

femur 1 is distoventral (v2 - see Fig. 13), whilst in

Decorlbatyla it is proximoventrai (vl - see Lee &

Birchby £989, fig, 2), Also iNustrations sometimes

suggest a different setal position because of the

orientation of leg segments, as for femur [ of

Ceroribatule monozygata (Fig. 5), Where V1 appears

lo be in position pl. Such possibilities far confusion

are grealer when [fre grealest number of setae are

absent compared with the usual complement for the

Oripodoidea, since the seta present may be located

in an intermediate positian between its usual place

and the expected position of the absent seta, In

previous papers on the Planofissurae by one of us

(ey. Lee 1987) only a seta ‘v' has been shawn on

femur I, in order to indicate its relationship to a

ventral flange that is sometimes present; more

apecifically this 1s seta v2,

SYSTEMATICS

Sublamily BOVORIBATULINAE sf. mov.

Nominotype genus: Foveriharele pen. nov.

Diagnosis

Oribatulidae. Hystcranotum with [4 pairs of

short, medium length or long setae. Translamella

cither absent, lineate or costate; if laminar jt is

confined La the lateral par! and nol presen| across

midline. Lateral proteronotal foramen (F1) small but

eleanly multiporose. Sensory seta (72) clavate with

subglobose eapul. Integuiment usually with

extensive toveate and/or reticulate sculpturing, often

with substantial ceroleguinent, sometimes forming

thick, while, relractile, columnar wax. Anterior

margin of hysieronotum eillrer convex wilh

dorsosejuval furrow curving around lenticulus or

truneated with straight dorsosejugal furrow and no

lenticulus.. Femur tf with fewer than normal sive

setae, at least seta v2 absent (0, 2/1, L)- Legs slit,

meditum length or lone, lee 1V (femur-tarsus)

FOVORIBATULINE MITES 3

usually longest, sometimes subequal in length to leg,

General Morphology and Character State

Polarization

On the basis of rhe absence of lemoral setae, both

Fovoribatulinue and Crassortbatulinae are rewarded

as a primitive group within the Oribarulidae (see

section on ‘Nojation and Leg Chactotaay"). The

Oribatulidae in turn 15 regarded as a primitive

family within the Oripodoidea because of its

muluporose hysteronotal foramina and a lack of

pteromorphs. The Fovoribatulinae is, therefore,

recognised by ihe absence of derived character

states, The Crassoribatulinae, which also lacks seta

v2 on femur Il, is distinguishable from the

Fovoribatulinae by three derived character states:

fen pairs of hysteronotal setae, six pairs of genital

sclae and a midsternal gap in the ventrosejugal

apodente.

The classification established here for genera

Within the Fovoribatulinae is based of the prennse

of a polarization of the increasing number of setae

on femur 1 and If being more derived. There are

considered to be two lineages, 4 primitive one in

which there is no posterior seta on femur 11,

including Cerurthatula and Reliculoppia, and a

derived lineage in which this posterior seta is

present. On the basis of his, che similarities between

Reticuloppia and Decoribatula, although due to

derived characters (long hysteronotal setae and

divided hysteronotal foramen 3), are convergent.

The same is true for Ceroribetula megafararnina

and Fovaribarula mesosetosa,

On the basis of this polarization, the states of

other possibly important characters are polarized

as follows. The seta 91 on [he proteronotum, seta

v on trochanter | and the hysleronotal setae are

regarded as primitive if they are shorter and as

derived if they are longer. For the proteronotal

ridges, the presenve of weakly laminar, complete

lamellae or the presence of one or Wyo translamellae

(as Ceroribaiula hizygaia, Fig, 6) is cansidered to

be primitive, whilst the absence of lamellae and

translame)lue (as. Reficuloppia reticulata Balogh &

Mahunka, 1966) is considered derived. For the

hysteronotum, the presence of w lenticulus

associated with a mnid-dorsal, forward pointing

protruberanee and an undivided aplerior

multiporose foramen (F3) is regarded as primitive,

Whilst a straight anterior hysleronotal margin with

no lenticulus and a divided anterior multiperose

foramen (FP3a and F3b), as for Decoribatula

pustulosa, is derived. For the pretarsal claws,

relatively short (cf. tarsus) claws with slim lateral

claws (Fig, 4, leg LI) is regarded as primitive, whilst

Jong claws with stout lateral claws (Fig. 12) is

derived,

Distribution

The Fovaribatulinae appears to be endemic to the

Oriental and Australasian Regions, Within these

regions il has mol yet been found in cooler remperate

southern Australia and New Zealand, This is based

on few data, but from the South Australian

sampling, Ceroribafu/la and FoVveribalula are

represented by seven species (substantial species

diversity) which are confined to the four drier,

hotter sites. The previous records are of Srassielly

from Ceylon, New Guinca, Samnaa, New Caledonia

and Tonga, Decorjharu/e from Singapore,

Reticulappia (rom tropical Queensland and

Romanobaies from southern Roumania. This

suggests that the relevant faunas of the mallee anu

arid regions are derived from tropical faunas ejther

as relicts fram tertiary tropical climates in the region

of as. invaders from recent tropical climates to the

north. As viewed here, the most primitive species

occur in the mallee and arid region faunas,

suggesting that they are the relicts.

Remarks

The Fovoribarulinae |neludes Oribatulid genera

(hat haye a lack ol certain femoral setae, and

compared with the oribatulid Crassaribatulinae

with a similar lack of setae, they have fewer genital

Sselae, an entire rather than an incomplete

ventrosejugal apodeme, and mare ‘hysteranotal

setae, These latter three character states they share

with Oribatulinae. The Fovoribatulinae are very

different from the Lamellareidae, which also has

a primitive lack of the same femoral selac. Without

the recognition of the reduced chaetotaxy, members

ol a parligular fovoribatuline group would be

included in the Oribatulinae with species in either

Oribatula Berlese, 1895 or Zrveeribatila Berlese,

1916. There has, therefore, been a copsiderable

reweighting of the importance of particular

characters. The relationships between the six

included genera, as presented here based on the

femoral chaetoraxy rhices chem in two. sister

groups: the prymitiv: Cererthati/a and

Reticulappia, and the derived Brassielia,

Decoributula, Faverihatula and Ramanohates. On

the other hand, Cera/ibuluiy js superficially most

similar to Fovoribatulis,

The nature and possib!: adaptive significance of

the incrustation say cnly be piven preliminary

eousideration. What ‘ts probably a similar

incrusiation is deseribed on the humeral

hvsteronatal region of Oriharila exudans Trave,

1961, but it is a homogencaus wax and not made

up of columns. Wax blooms, although not so

substantial, have also been described on an Oppia

species (Brody 1970). The temporary presence af

wax filaments making an arid region cenebrionid

beetle white rather than black has been observed

74 D.C, LEE & C, M. BIRCHBY

as an adaption to control water loss (Louw & Seely

1982). This possible relevance of wax inerustations

to waler conservalion could be true for Reticu/oppia

and Ceroribatula, but it is also possible that it ts

an excretory product.

The following six genera ure included in the

Fovoribatulinae: Srassfel/a Balogh, 1970,

Ceroributula gen. noy., Decaribatila Lee & Birchby,

1989, Fovoribatula gen. novy,, Reliculoppia Balogh

& Mahunka, 1966 and Romanabares Feider, Vasiliu

& Calugar, 1970. A key is provided for the eight

Australian species included in the subfamily.

Key TO AUSTRALIAN POVORIBATULINAE (ADULTS)

| — Hysteronotal setae lonwer (han distance between

their bases. Lamella absent of incomplete, mot

reaching bothridiom lo sela 22, which is Lurret-like

(height subequal to diameter of pore). Five pairs

of hysteronoral multiporose foramina...) . 0.

Reliculoppia reticulata Balogh & Mahunka

_ Hysteronotal setae shorter than distance between

their bases, Lamella present, reachine berhridium

to sela 2, which has low profile (heiwht less than

0.5 « diameter of pore). hour pairs of hysteronotal

tmultiporase foramina. ----.)-....)-----)--2

2 — femora | and IL lack posterior setae (Fig. 4).

Pretarsal claws smaller central claw less thai 0.3 +

length of tarsus 1... Cereribalula wen. nov. 3

— Femara Pand HW with a posterior seta (Pig. 14).

Pretarsal claws larger, central claw greater Than

4x femptt of tarsus UT. cic eee een er ’

vegorted Mes tehrsra! Favoribatulg gen, 0ov,, 7

3) — Lone proteronoral seta sl (subequal ro distanee /2

~ 3h, Fig 10) and trochanter | seta v (able to reach

seta 2 on femur 1)..0. megafarumina sp. nov.

— Short proteronotal seta sl (0.66 or less distance

j2- <i, Fig. 0) and trochanter Tseta v (only able

to reach seta vi on femur | or shorter)... 0.4

bemaur | with seta v2 present (Fig. 4). Translamella

firesent OF ABSENT. «yy. 0-- een ’

— Ferour | without seta v2 (Pig ‘).

POSE eee ee,

Translanicla atisent Rasteum without incisions,

Hysteronotl foramen #3 with lornwudingl axis less

than 2» breadth (Fig. ).C. inerastala sp, nov.

Translametla present. Restrun divided by iva

incisions ince three points. Mysteronoetal foramen

Fo with longitudinal axis more ial I~ breadth

(Fig, 8), -----, -2. --0 rrirwsrrata sp. nov.

6 — No fidge between proteranotal setae /2./2, Setae

J2and 2) viliate ane clavate (Pip. 7), Mid-sternal

and fiysteromotal tegumental sculpture

foveolaw. 2.2 en C. monuzyeata sp. nov.

~ Lametlaike ridge present belween proivronotal

setae (2-/2- Setae /2 and 2) smooth and lorate (Fig.

6), Midsternal and hysteronotal integumental

sculpluring reticulate...,.,C bizygala sp. nov.

7 — Translametla present. Hysteronotal setae short (/2

length less than 0.5» distance from setal base J3)

(Fig. 14), Lateral pretarsal claws depth more than

O.5s depth of central claw (Fig. 12)... 0.0...

Dentes pitries -F brevisetosa sp. nov.

— Transla melia absent. Hysteronotal setac medium

length (/2 length 0.5-1.0» distance from setal base

J3) (Fig, 16). Lateral pretarsal claws depth less than

O.5~ depth of central chaw (Pig. 13),.

peal ae cones al loose F mesoasetasa sp. nev.

Wididic's' 3

Cienus Ceroribatuta yen, nov,

Type-xpecies: Cerorthatula incrustata sp. nov.

Diagnosis

Fovorihatulinae. Hysteronotal setae short or

medium-length (shorter than distance between their

bases). Lenticulus present, associated with mid-

dorsal forward pointing protruberance of

hysteronotum. Lamellae presenl, laminar and

complete (belween zl-z2), Translamella present

(may be second vostate ridge) or absent. Rim of

bothriditim (base of seta 22) low, not turret-like.

Four pairs of hysteronotal multiporose foramina.

Discidium present as costate ridge. Femora | and

I] without posterior setae usually three setae (0, 2/1,

0) but femur | may have four setae (0, 2/2, 0).

Pretarsal claws short (central claw II less than 0.3x

length of tarsus (1).

Remarks

Ceroribatula js superficially similar to

Fovorihatile wen. Noy., bul il is regarded as more

closely allied lo Reficulappia Lee & Birchby, 1989,

because of the chaetotaxy on femora | and Ll. The

name is derived from the Latin ‘cera’ meaning wax,

as used in the term ‘cerotegument’, The

cerotegument is sometimes particularly conspicuous

and comprises contiguous fnerged Vertical columns

of was as on © incrustata (also is present on

Reviculoppia), The genus includes two species-

complexes: the inerustata-complex and

megafuremina-complex,

incrustata-complex

Diagnosis

Cerorihatula, Hysteronotal setae (shorter than

(.5% distance between bases), proteronoral seta sl

(shorter than diameter of bothridial aperture) and

trochanter | seta y (Shorter than distance between

selae /)-/2) shark. Translamella presen| or absent.

Femur | cipher with (0,2/2,0) or without (0,2/1,0)

seta 2,

TOVORIBATULISE MITES *

Remarks

The inerustata-complex is regarded as the more

primitive group within Ceraribaiula, having same

species with only three setae on femora | and Il and

short somal (except for proteronotal setae /], j2and

zl) and trochanter | setae, [t is diverse, comprising

four new species as follow: 2 incrusiata (type-

species), C bigveata, C. monozveata, C trirastrata.

Ceroribatula inerustata sp. nov.

Figs 1-4

Feriale

Dorsal profile of hysleranotum subcircular,

colour dark brown, cerotegument substantial

posteriorly and pleurally around legs, white

incrustation of wax always on proteronotum, rarely

on hysteronotal humeral region (Fig. 3), somennies

on venter of femora | and I, Idiosomal length, 468

(mallee-heath, mn = 9, 406-504) and 497 (matllee-

broombush, n = 3, 488-509). Leg Jengths (femur

tarsus for idiosomal length 488, mallee-heath): | -

239, I~ 224, I -— 222, VV - 270. Tibial maximum

heights (for 488) 1 - 26, 11 - 18, I= 18, 1V - 16,

Proteronorum with weakly laminar lamellae and

costate sublamellae, translamella absent. Seta /2

shorter (less than 0.75») than zl, both ciliate and

clavale, cerolegument may increase size OF caput.

Dersolateral aspect illustration (Fig, 3) represents

the right seta j2 as Shorter due ro parallax.

Conspicuous ceroteguument anterior to seta zl is

undivided (Fig. 3) or may be bilobar, with the lateral

subhexagenal wax colunmms being longer and

curving outwards. Posterior to thick cerotegument,

integument conspicuously reticulate-foveate and

may have smal! vertical tubercles at angles of

hexagons, and no incrustation further back where

integument foveate or weakly alveolate with well-

spaced circular Shallow depressions. Lamella usually

carries highly refractive segmented strip of

cerotegument, Sensory seta 22 clavate with globose

capot and many tine pointed cilia, smaller and more

vumerous than represented (Figs | and 3),

Hysteronatal setae subequal in length, with lwo

longitudinal distal files of cilia (usually only one

file visible when viewed from above). Lenriculus

smooth, pale, surrounding integument weakly

alveolate, further laterally cerotegument

conspicuous, either reticulate-foyeate or forming

columns in places (Fie. 3}, posteradorsally mainly

foveate, Multiporose foramina subequal in size and

oval, posinon of #5 and #6 usually as iNustrated

(Fig. 1), sometimes closer to mid-line, when #3 an

adaxial side of seta 55.

Podosternum with circumpedal ridge merged

with rest of subpedal ridge; extending to weak

custodial ridge lading just antenor to pedotectun

1], Two adaxial setae an conite | similar in length

Wand /2 subequal), Central region with foveolare

sculpturing similar to thal Mustrated (Fig. 2) around

posterior margin of genital orifive,

Opisthosternum with setae of fairly Unitorrn

length, Sal subequal to Sa3. Adanal pore Saf nearly

longitudinal, further from anal orifice than its

length. Egps oval, 370 © 75 (mean of It

horizontally aligned eggs, 40% af mean lemale

length), smooth or wrinkled exochorion. Number

of eggs in fernale (number of females) as follows:

four (2), six (2), eighe (4).

Legs mediam-length (mean femur-tarsus: 49% of

soma), slim (mean maximum fibial height: 30% of

mean length), Dorsal porose areas and weak

alveolate abaxial sculpturing, usually with retioulate

cerotegument on. all femora and trochanters Iland

IV, Only three setae on femur I] (0,2/1,0) and four

setue On femur [ (0,2/1,0).

Male

As for female except gerital orifice not or only

tarrowly abutting Onto ventoosejugal apodeme.

White proteronotal incrustation present an I6 of

20 males ex mallee-heath and all 5 males.ex mallee-

broombush, Soma smaller, idiosamal length 425

(mallcee-heath, n = 20, 398-475) and 429 (mallee-

broombush, n — 5, 416-445),

Material Examined

Holotype: Q (NIYS9I64), sand, lifter, under

banksia shrubs (Sanksia ornata, Tamboare

Homestead (3557'S, 140° 29'B), 4viti.1974,

Paratypes: 69 9 (NIY89165-NI1989169), 16 oo

(NIS89170-NI989183h 1G, 2 co - BMNES 1 @,

2 oct -FMNH;1 9,2 c¢¢ - NZAC) same data

as holorype,

Undesignated: 3 9 @ (NIDR9IS4-NI989TNG), &

oot (NI989IR7-N1989191), sand, lirter, sparse

moss, under ridge-truited mallee (Eucalvpiis

jncrassata) amongst broombush shiubs UWelalevce

uncinaia), Ferries-McDonald Reserve (35°15'S,

1349-09" EB), 20411974

Distribution

Australia (Aa), Soul Australia Mallee

broombush, open scrubland (FernesMeDonald

Reserve). Mureay-Darling basin, 36 9, Sutes 4

of 8 « 25cm*. Mallee-heach. call open shrubland

(lamboote Homestead. eur Mr Resoue

Conservation Park), Murray-Darling basin, Yo 4

Meroay Gor ® « Asem.

Remarks

Cerorthatula incrustate is the type-species ol the

genus and the species-complex. The name 1 derived

from the Latin Ynerustatio’ meaning ‘erust’ or hard

coating’, relerring to the wan ierusiaven often

D, C. LEE & C. M, BIRCHBY

| Quay

1 Dog

I s oP a QO;

Seg SF

FIGURES 1 and 2. Ceroribatula incrustata sp. noy., female soma. 1, notum without incrustation; 2, idiosternum,

FOVORIBATULINE MITES

100um

FIGURE 3. Ceruribatula imerusiata sp. nov., female

anterior soma, dorsolateral aspect showing proteronotal

alid fiystéronotal imerustation of Wax,

present on the proteronotum and sometimes on the

humeral region of the hysteronotum (Fig. 3). The

hysteronotum is circular in horizontal aspect, bul

otherwise specimens without an inerustation are

sinmlar lo C monozygara, because of the size and

the form af the notal setae. On the other hand, the

presence of a distoyentral seta (v2) on femur |

means that © incrusiaia is similar to ©, (rirostrata

in its chactotaxy; The wax incrustation, hysteronotal

shape and femoral chuetotaxy are similar to those

of Reticuloppia reticulata Balogh & Mahunka,

1966, and this is regarded as reflecting a close

relationship between these genera, as opposed to

what are regarded as convergent similarities between

Ceroribatula and Favoributula.

Cerorihatula hizygata sp, nov,

Fig. 6

kemale

Dorsal profile of hysteronotum ovoid, colour

dark brown, cerotezument forms continuous notal

(except over lenticulus) and pleural layer, substantial

thickness (greater than diameter of setal bases)

including, abutting refractile wax granules and

vegetable detritus, giving translucent dirty white

appearance and obscuring setae. Idiosomal length

617 (n = 2, 609-625). Leg lengths (femur-Larsus for

625); | ~ 319, Tl - 301, IIT - 280, TV - 334. Tibial

-1

maximum heights (for 625); 1 - 31, 1 - 26, IE -

21, 1V - 21,

Proteronolum with costate tainslamella, laminar

lumellae, coslate sublamellae (not merging

anteriorly with lamellae). Seta /2 shorter (about

0.75) than zl, both hyaline and lorate, weakly

ciliate (not illustrated in Fig. 6). Integuiment mainly

weakly reticulate, Costate ridge belween setae

22-/2-/2-<2 appearing as second ‘translamella’.

Short curved subtutorium. Sensory seta 22 with

slobose caput, smooth, without cilia,

Hysteronotal setae subequal in length, larale,

weakly ciliate distally (not illustrated in Fig. 6), rank

5 (J5, 25, $5) curved upwards. Anterior margin

extends forward to lie close to seta /2, Lenticulus

smooth, pale, otherwise mtegument with reticulate

sculpturing. Anterior foramen (F3) as illustrated

(Fig. 6) or may encompass adaxial margin of 22

setal base and be attenuated anteriorly, posterior

foramina (#4, #5, #6) less than US» size of #3.

Pore to hysteronatal gland (AG) opens inte

refractile sac.

Podosternum with deep cavity behind

acetabulum LV, forms cireumpedal ridge level with

seta /¥2, which does not merge with discidial ridge

so subpedal ridge pot continuous (ie as C

trirostrala, Fig. 9, nal as C. iacrustaia, Vig. 2), Setae

on coxile | differ in size, 1 O.5* 7/2. Integurment

reticulate.

Opisthostertum with setae of differing form and

lengths: JZg, Sg and /Za short and setose (sirnllay

to € incrustata, Fig. 2); Sal lanceolate length about

0.33« distance JZu\-/2a2; Sa2 and Sa3 lorate,

similar to hysteronotal setae, length subequal to

distance /Zal-/Za2. Most of integument reticulate,

genital shield smooth, anal shield mainly reticulale-

foveate, just foveate near lateral margins. Eggs

subcylindrical with convex ends, 202 « 79 (mean

of 7 horizontally aligned eggs, 32% of mean female

length), smooth exochorion, Number of eggs in

female (number of females) as follows; four (1), six

(L).

Legs medium-length (mean femur-tarsus: 49%

soma), shim (mean maximum tibial height: 30% of

mean length), Dorsal porose ureas and strong

reticulate abaxial sculpturing on all femora and

trachanters [1] and I'V. Only 3 setae on femora |

and I (Q-2/1-0),

Male

Unknown

Material exennined

Holotype: @ (N1989192), soil, litter, moss and

other low growth plants-under bladder saltbush

(Atriplex vesicarid) amongst sparse false

sandlewood (Myoporum plalycarpunt), Koonamare

Vegetation Reserve (32°07'S, 139°21‘E), 27.vi,1974,

Paratype: 1 9(N1989193) same data as holotype.

78 D, C. LEE & C. M. BIRCHBY

100.um 4

POVORIBATULINE MITES Ww

Distribution

Australia (Aa), South Australia. Semi-and low

shrubland (Koonamore Vegelatian Resetve), Lake

Eyre Basin, 2 9 9/20f 8 x 25cm*.

Remarks

Cervribatula bizygata is regarded, along with C

monozveata, as the most primilive species in the

genus, havirig the lowest number of femoral scrae.

It is the second largest Species, and is strongly

sclerotized, with the result that some characters are

clear, but the thick dirty cerotegument and weakly

refractile lorate setae make the chaetotaxy difficult

to assess, The pretin ol ils fame is derived from

the Latin ‘bis’ meaning wa’, whilst the rest is based

on the Greek ‘yygon' meariing ‘yoke’ or ‘pair’,

relerring to the translamella as in Zygorihaiula

Berlese, 1916 (Oribatulidae), and so to the presence

of a second 4ranslamelia’, Ve. the costale ndge

between the lamellae and setae y2-/2,

Ceroribatula monozygata sp. Nov.

Figs 5 and 7

Female

Dorsal profile of hysteronotum ovoid, usually

brown with some siraw coloured specimens

regarded as teneral, verotegument lorrns continuous

notal (except over lenticulus) and pleural layer, thin,

foveale indentations matching those of integument,

either hyaline or finely granulate; some attached

plant detritus, but little effect on mite’s appearance.

idiosomal length 495 (semi-arid shrubland, n = 6,

465-5|9); 530 (arid grassland, n = 1), 454 (mallee-

heath, n = 3, 425-482). Leg lengths ((emur-tarsus

for idiosomal length 493, semi-arid shrubland); 1

~ 225, J - 220, LI - 208, 1V - 272, Tibial maximum

heights (for 493); 1- 23, Ue - 2), IL - 18, IV - 17,

Proteronotum With translamella castate across

tnidline but laminar laterally, weakly laminar

lamellae, sublamellae cosiate, merging anteriorly

with lamella. Setac /2 and zi subequal in length,

both refractile and clavate, canspicuously ciliate.

integument weakly foveate around rosirum,

otherwise smooth. Indistinct line near seta /2- No

subrutorium. Sensory seta 22 with globose caput,

covered if) minute cilia.

Hysteranotal setae subequal in length, setose,

ciliate distally. Lenticulus smooth, pale, otherwise

integument foveare. Anterior foramen (#3) as

illustrated (Fig. 7) or may abut onto posterior

margin of Z2 setal base, pasterior foramina (F4, 15,

F6) subequal in size to F3.

Podosternum with circumpedal ridge merging

with discidial ridge ta form a continuous subpedal

ridge weakening anteriorly, similar to C incrustala

(Fig, 2), Coxite setae in ranks J atid 2 similar in size

to eavh other and longer than an GC, incrustatu.

integument with reticulate sculpturing anteriorly.

on coxile 1Y small alveoles,

Opisthosternal setae in file 8 similar in size, setae

on genital and anal shields (/Ze, Za) slightly

smaller. Most of integument with foveale

seulpturing, anterior zone of smaller pits more

extensive (han on C inerustata (Fig. 2), genital

shield smooth. Eggs aval, [88 « 85 (mean of 5

horizontally aligned eggs, 33% of mean female

length), smooth exochorion. Number of eggs in

female (number of females) as follows: none (2),

one (1), two (1), four (1), eleven (1).

Legs medium length (mean femur-tarsus; 46% of

soma), slim (mean maximum ubial height: 31% of

mean length), Femora Land U both with three setae

(0,2/3,0), Cerolegument rarely visible on legs,

Male

As for female except margin af genital orifice well

separated from yentrosejugal apodeme Soma

smaller, idiosomal length 438 (semi-and shrubland,

no = 24, 411-465); 403 {mallee-heath, n = 10,

382-420),

Malerial examined

Holotype: & (N1989194), soil, litter. moss and

other low growth plamts under bladder saltbush

(Atriplex vesicaria) amongst sparse false

sandlewood (Afyoporym platvcurpum), Koonamare

Vegetation Reserve (32°07°S, 139°21 'E), 27.vi.1974.

Paralypes: 3 9 9 (INI989195-N1989199), 1Bo cr

(N1989200-N1989217); 22 9 - BMNH; 299 -

FMNH; 29 9 NZAC; same data as holotype.

Undesignated; 1 & (NI989218), bases of love grass

(Eragrostis eriopuda) tussocks, near Emu (28°41 °S,

132°08'E), 1Lx.1976. 39 9 (NL989219-N1989221),

fOct coe (NI989222-NL989231), sand, litter, under

banksia shrubs (8anksia ornata), Tamboare

Homestead (35°57"S, 140°29'E), 4.vlii.1974,

Distribulion

Australia (Aa), South Australia, Arid tussock

grassland (Great Victoria Desert), West Plateau, | 9

/ 7 of ® « 25em?. Semi-arid low shrubland

(Koonamore Vegetation Reserve), Lake Eyre Basin,

629, 24e¢g¢ ¢4of8 x 25cm. Mallee-heath,

tall open shrubland (Tamboore Homestead, near Mt

Rescue Conservation Park), Murray-Darling Basin,

3199, Woo “Jal 8B x 25cm’,

FIOURES 4 and 5. Right lees, pasierior aspect io femurpretarsus, showing setae Only of femora Land 1. 4, Ceroribatuts

incrustuta sp. nov, legs | - VV. 5, Cerortbarudi rionezygata sp. nov., legs | and I. Notation: d = dorsal, ~ = yeotral.

D. C. LEE & C. M. BIRCHBY

“aou “ds nnsd2zouom nynjnqisosag ‘4 VAou ‘ds vjvsA21g ViNIMGuoOsaD ‘9 “WNJOU [BIOS *, puke 9 S_YNOIA

wirooL

FOVORIBATULINE MITES $]

Remarks

Ceroribatula monozygate is regarded, along with

C. hizvgata, as the most primitive species, haying

the least number of femoral setae, The

cerolcgument is thin and inconspicuous and

because of (he size af the notal setae and form i

looks very similar to CG inerustata without any

inerustatian. The prefix of its name is derived from

the Greek 'nznas’ meaning ‘one’ and, in a similar

manner to the formation of the name of &

bizyeata, il refers 10 the presence of a single

translamella, withaul a second “translamella"

Ceroribatula trirosiraia sp, noy.

Figs 8 and ¥

Female

Dorsal profile of hysterovotum avoid, dark

brown, cerolesument forms continugus notal

(except over lenticulus) and pleural layer, medium

thickness (subequal to 3. diameter of setal base),

including refractile wax granules (where thick, form

irregular White patches) and attached vegetable

detritus, obscuring setae, sculpluring and foramina.

Idiosomal lengih 745 (n=1), Leg lengths (femur-

targus): [| - 368, 1-342, IIL - 352, 1V - 427. Tibial

maximum heights! ]— 33, 1 - 26, 1-21, IV = 21.

Proteronotum with translamella mainly costate

(brief laminar part near seta zl), laminar lamellae,

siblamellae costale (inerging abteriorly with

lamellae). Setae j2 and z) subequal in length,

hyaline, ensiform, weakly ciliate, Short subtutorium,

Caput of seta 22 wilhout cilia. Inregument reticulate

between j2-/2. Rostrum tripartive with two

incisions.

Hystergnotal setae subequal in length, short,

ensiform, without cilia. Lenticulus smooth, pale,

otherwise integument foveate, Anterior foramen

(F3) long and narrow compared with subaval

posterior foramina (#4, 15, FA).

Padosternum with subpedal ridges fragmented

into distinct parts and custodial ridge absent, Coxite

setae in rank 2 of legs 111,11] longer than in rank

1. Midsternal and postpedal apodeme present.

Intezumeni foveate, and patch of finely punctate

sculplunng between setae /I-/1 (not lustrared un

Fig, 9),

QOpisthosternal setac either setose (/Ze1-4, Sz,

Sal) or ensiform (/Zal-2, Su2,. Sa). Integument

foveale. Eyes oval, 237 % 106 (32% of female

length), smooth eXochorion, 14 ezgs in single

fenvale,

Legs long (mean lemur-tarsuis; 50% soma), very

sliro (mean maximum tibial height: 24% oF mean

length). Leg 101 with tong femur, unusual in being

fonger than leg UW. Femur | with four setae (0,2/2,0),

femur I] with three setae (0,2/1,0), Some

cerotegument around basal lez segments.

Mule

As lemale, except hysteronotal foramen #3 about

half length although similarly narrow, and margin

of genital orifice well separated from yentrosejugal

apodeme, Soma smaller, idiosomal length 639 (0

~ 2, 660, 617).

Material examined

Holotype: 2 (N1989232), soil, litter, moss and

ather low growth plants under bladder saltbush

(Atriplex vesicarid) amongst sparse false

sandlewood (Myaporum platyearpum), Koonamore

Vegetation Reserve (32°07 'S, 139°21'E), 27.vi, 974.

Paratypes: Jot ot (1989233, NI989234), same

data as holotype.

Distribusian

Australia (Aa), South Australia. Semi-arid low

shrubland (Koonamore Vegetation Reserve), Lake

Eyre Basin, J 9,2 aor/ 3 of & x 2Sem?.

Remarks

The name of Ceroribaiula trirastrata is from (he

Latin ‘tres’ meaning ‘three’ and il refers (to the

rostrum which i§ broken up by cwo incisions into

three parts. It is similar to © incrustata in having

four setae on lemur 1, but is superficially like C

bizyguia because of its proteronotal ridges and

setae, It is also similar to species of Zygoribatule,

especially those with a long, slim hysteronotal

multiporose foramen F3 such as 2 longiperosa

Hammer, 1953 from Gueensland, Whilst 2.

longiporosa is similar, it has five setae on both

femora Land UW, the integument is smoath with an

inconspicuous cerotegument,

megaloramina-complex

Diagnosis

Ceroribaiula. Hysteronotal setae (longer Lhan

0.5 distance between bases), proleronotal seta 41

(longer than diameter of bothrichal aperrure) and

trochanter 1 seta » (longer (han distance between

setae /1-/2) mediuin length. Translamella absent,

Femur I with seta v2 (0,2/2,0).

Remarks

The megu/oramina-complex is regarded as

derived from the inerusrata-complex in having lout

setae on femur [| and medium-length setae on the

hysteronotum and elsewhere. These character states

and the absence of a translamella make it similar

1 Fovoribatula mesosetasu sp. nov., bul the absence

of posterior setaé on femora | and I indicates that

it belongs to a separate lineage. li includes only the

nominale species, C megaforamina.

D. C. LEE & C. M. BIRCHBY

“WMUTaIsOIp! “7 :wiNjoU *[ “eWOs ajeulay “AOU ‘ds DjDNSOL4) D)NIDGluO1aD “6 PUk Bg SAAMNOIA

WwIyYooL

FOVORIBATULINE MITES 83

Ceroribatula megaforamina sp. nov.

Figs 10 and I

Female

Dorsal profile of hysteronotum subcircular,

colour light brown, cerotegument inconspicuous.

Idiosomal Length: 580 (n = 6, 540-617). Leg

lengths (femur-tarsus for idiosomal length 609): |

— 332, 1 - 311, III - 306, 1V - 386. Tibial maximum

heights (for 609): | - 26, I] - 21, HI - 19, 1V - 18.

Proteronotum with weakly laminar lamellae and

costate sublamellae. Seta /2 slightly longer (more

than 1.1x) than zl, both ciliate and bacilliform.

Integument smooth. Sensory seta z2 clavate, with

#lobose caput and many fine, pointed cilia, smaller

and more numerous than represented (Fig. 10).

Hysteronotal setae mostly subequal in length, but

$1 shorter, with three longitudinal files of cilia.

Lenticulus smooth, pale, surrounding integument

foveate with small, well spaced pits. Multiporose

foramina large, anterior one (F3) largest, oval.

Podosternum with circumpedal ridge merged

with rest of subpedal ridge, extending to weak

custodial ridge fading just anterior to pedotectum

IL. Two adaxial setae on coxite I similar in length

(/1 and /2 subequal). Integument foveate around

midline, smooth peripherally.

Opisthosternum with setae of fairly uniform

length, Sal subequal to Sa@3. Adanal pore Saf nearly

longitudinal, further from anal orifice than its

length. Eggs oval, 223 x 100 (mean of 15

horizontally aligned eggs), 39% of mean female

FIGURE 10. Cerortbarula megaforamina sp. noy., female notum.

84 Bc. LEE & ¢ M. BIRCHAY

length, smeoth or wrinkled exochorion. Number

of eggs in female (number of females) as follaws:

six (2), seven (1), eight (3).

Legs long (mean femur-tarsus: 54% of soma),

shim (mean maximum tibial height: 22% of mean

length). Lee ['V unusually long and slim with spinate

ventral setae on tibia and tarsus (Fie 11), Only four

setae on femur f (0,2/2,0) and three setae on fermur

1 (0,2/1,0),

Male

As female except two specimens Gciasomal

length 486 and 563) with clear, finely punctate

cerolegument covering hysteponotum other chan

over Jenticulus, all specimens with margins of

genital orifice not merging with verirosejugal

apodeme. Soma smaller, idiosomal length: 518 (and

grassland, n = 15, 439-568); 439 (Semi-arid

shrubland, n = tj

Muterial examined

Holotype: 9 (N1989235), bases of lovegrass

(Eraproscis eriopoda) \ussocks, near Emu (28°41 'S,

132"°08'E), 11.x,1974,

Paratypes: 5 9 9 (N1989236-NI989240), 12

oor (NL9R9241-NI989252): | o ~ BMNH; 1 co -

hMNH, 1 o& ~ NZAC; same data as holotype.

Undesignated: 2 o'o (NI989253, NI9R9254)

sume data as holotype. | @ (NL989255), soil, litter,

moss and other low growth plants under bladder

saltbush (Aériplex vesicaria) amongst sparse false

sandlewood (Myoporum platycarpurn), Koonamiore

Vegetation Reserve (32°07 'S, 139°21'B), 27 vi.1974,

Distribution

Australia (Aa), South Australia. Arid tussock

grassland (Great Victoria Desert), West Plateau, 6

29,17 eo/ 4 of 8 & 28cm. Semi-arid low

shrubland (Koonarmore Vegetalion Reserve), Lake

Eyre basin, 1 @¢/ | of 8 & 25em2.

Remarks

The relationships of Ceroribatula megaforaynina

ate considered under the ‘Remarks’ on the

megdforamina-complex. [ts name is based on the

Greek ‘wiega' meaning ‘large’ and the Latin

Joramen’ meaning ‘hole’, referring to the large size

of the multiporose hysteronatal foramina. The

integument is very clean for a species of

Ceroribatula, most specimens being without any

evident cerotegument or attached vegetable detritus.

Even the two males. thal are covered in fine, regular

deep punctata, apparently representing fine canals

through a shallow cerotegument, are without

attached detritus, Besides their punctata, no

differences from other specimens were recognised

for these two males. It is assumed that they belong

to the same species and have an eptiemeral

cepotegument, but (hey are not included in the type

series in case this is contradicted by further evidence.

Genus Foworibatula gen, nov,

Type-species: Fovoribatula breviselosa sp, nov

Diagnosis

Fovoribatiulinae. Hysieronatal setae short or

medium-length, not longer than distance between

their bases. Lenticulus present, associated with mid-

darsal lorward pointing prolruberance of

hysteronotum, Lamellae present, laminar and

complete {between zl-z2). Translamella present

(vostate) or absent. Rim of bothridium (base of seta

22) low, not turret-like. Four pairs of hysteronotal

mulliporase foramina, Discidium present.as costate

ridge. Femora | and WU with four setae, posterior

setae present (0,2/1,1). Pretarsal claws long (central

claw IT more than 03% length of tarsus 11).

Remarks

Foveribatula is saperficially similar to the South

Austrahian genus Ceroribatula gen, nov,, but it is.

regarded as mare closely allied to Decoribatula Lee

& Birchby, 1989. from Singapore, because of the

chaetotaxy on femora [and 11. But it is noted thar

on femur | the ventral seta is positioned as 2 not

vio as on Decoribatula, Other similarities to

Decoribatula are the larger pretarsal claws (not

conspicuously so on Foveribaltula mesosetosa) and

leg IL bemg shorter than leg IM (femur-tarsus), only

known for © ¢rirostrata among the Ceroribatula.

The tame is derived from the Latin ‘fovea’ meaning

‘pit’, refering to the foveate (pitted) integument of

jt8 mernbers, whilst the cerotezument is not

conspicuous as in most members of Cerorihatula.

It includes two species which are dissimilar in their

proteronotal ridges, hysteronotal setae and pretarsi.

Whilst the type-species is unusual in appearance

und is considered as being the more derived, the

other Species (2 mesosefosa) is similar to

Cereribatula megafordmina sp. nov., both

possessing derived character slates, Whilst F

breviselosa has unusually large lateral claws on the

pretarsus approaching the relative size of

Decoribatula pustilata, those on F mesosetasa are

larger than for Ceroribaudla although not obviously

so. Fovoribatula includes. two new species as follows:

£f, hrevisetosa, F. mesosetosa,

Fovoribatula brevisetosa sp. nov.

Figs 12, 14, 15

Female

Dorsal profile of hysteronotum ovoid, light

Drown, cerotezument inconspicuous. tdiosomal

FOVORIBATULINE MITES 85

FIGURES II, 12 and 13. Right legs, posterior aspect to femur-pretarsus showing setae on all segments of leg IV and

femora only of legs | and II. 11, Ceroribatula megaforamina sp. nov., leg IV. 12, Fovoribatula brevisetosa sp. nov.,

leg II. 13, Foveribatula mesosetosa sp. nov., legs | and I. Notation: d = dorsal, y = ventral, p = posterior.

D. C. LEE & C. M. BIRCHBY

“WINUWJaIsOIp! “¢] ‘wnIoU “py “eWOS afeuay “AOU ‘ds nsoJasIaauq DyNIDgIIOKET “ST PUL p| SAANOIA

si vi

FOVORIBATULINE MITES a7

length 375 (n= 1). Leg lengths (feriur-tarsus): 1 - 213,

It — 170, Lif - 193, IV - 213, Tibial maximum

heights: J - 2), EL - 18, Ml - 13, WV - 13,

Proteronotum with translamella castate, lamellae

weakly Jarninar, costate near seta zI, mo sublamellae,

linear subtutorium; Sefae /2 and zi subequal in

length, 2] more rabusr. Caput of seta 72 with minute

cilla. Integument smooth except for transverse

wrinkles on rostrum,

Hysteronotal setae subequal in length, short,

setose, weakly ciliale, Lentitulus smooth, pale,

otherwise integument with weak, sparse foveate

sculpturing. Anterior foramen (3) oval, similar m

size to FS,

Podosiernum with circumpedal ridge merged in

with a continuous subpedal ridge, extending to weak

custodial ridge fading level with seta 73. Two adamial

selge on coxite | similar in length (1 and /2

subequal),

Opisthosternum with setae of fairly uniform

length, adaxial shorter. Adanal pore Saf oblique,

sloping inwards anteriorly, closer to anal orifice

than ils length. Eggs oval, 175 + 69 (mean of 3 eggs

present), 47% of female length, smooth exochorian.

Legs long (mean femur-iarsus: 52% of soma).

slim (mean maximum tibial height: 26% of mean

length). Seta v on trochanter | reaches forward to

level of v2 on Femur I. Claws large, lateral claws

more than half as stout as central claw.

Male

Differs from female in that anterior margin of

hysteronotal shield has tectum extending forward

1o caver posterior half of bothridium to seta 22.

Genital shield smaller, anterior margin to genital

orifice not aburing onto ventrosejugal apodeme,

level with seta #171. Soma smaller, idiosomal length

368 (n=1).

Material exarnined

Holatype: © (N1989256), sand, litter, under

banksia shrubs (Sanksia ornata), Tamboore

Homestead (35°57'S, 140°29'B), 4.viii.1974.

Paratype: | o (IN1989257) same data as holotype.

Distribution

Australia (Aa), South Australia. Mallee-heath,

iall open shrubland (Tamboore Homestead, near Mt

Rescue Conservation Park), Murray-Darling basin,

L 9,1 o/ 2 af 8 X 28cm.

Remarks

Fovoribatula brevisetosa is the type-species of the

genus, The prefix of the nate is derived from the

Latin ‘brevis’ meaning short and this refers to the

length of the hysteronotal setae, It is unusual

amongst the Fovoribatulinae in having short tarst

and the largest pretarsal claws for an Australian

species, approaching the sizé of those in

Decoribatula trom Singapore, aswell as having the

largest known egg. The larger pretarsal claws are

considered derived and an indication ihat

Fovoribaiula is allied to Decoribatula, The

shortness of the dorsal setae is regarded as @

regression, convergent with a similar character state

on the primitive species of Ceroribotula, because

certain setae (sl on prolteronotum and v on

trochanter |) are relatively long and, therefore,

considered derived.

Fovoribatula mesosetosa sp, Nov,

Figs 13, 16, 17

Female

Dorsal profile of hysteronotum oval, colour

mediunr brown, cerotegument shallow, containing

wax granules in white patches anteriorly and

posteriorly on soma and on hysteronotal humeral

region. idiosomal length; 536(n = 2, 519,553). Lew

lengths (femur-tarsus for idiosomal length 519): |

~ 254, 1) - 236, 111 — 244, LV - 303. Tibial maximum

heights (for 519): 1- 26, 11-18. 1) - 18, (V—- 18.

Proteronotum without translamella, lamellae

substantially laminar anteriorly, costate near seta

22, sublamellae costate or more rarely linear and

weak, linear subtutorium, Seta j2 shorter (about

0.85%) than zl, both ciliate and bacilliform, Sensory

seta 22 with fine, pointed cilia on capul. Jntegument

smooth.

Hysteronotal setae mostly subequal in length, but

J6, 26, S1 and 56 shorter, with three longitudinal

files of cilia. Pale lenticulus with sparse, yery

shallow alveolae, surrounding integument clearly

foveate, Multiporase foramina small, subequal,

oval,

Podosternum with circumpedal ridge merging

with subpedal ridge as far anterior as pedotectum

LI. Two adaxial setae on coxite | similar in length

(1) and /2 subequal), peripheral setae, especially

1/73, longer. Integument smooth.

Opisthosternum with setae fairly uniform. in

length, except that Sal is short and Sa2, Sei are

long. Adanal pore Saf nearly parallel io margin of

anal shield. Eggs oval, 16] ~ 77 (mean of ©

horizontally aligned eggs), 30% of mean female

length, smooth exochorion. Number of eges in

female (number of females) as follows: one (1), ten

(1).

Legs long (mean femur-tarsus: 50% of sonia),

slim (mean maximum tibial height: 29% of mean

fength). Claws large, bul lateral claws less than half

as slout as central claw,

Male

As female except that margin of genital oritice

NOL merging with ventrosejugal apodeme, Sema

smaller, idiosomal length: 491 (n = 7, 455-514),

100um

D, C. LEE & C. M. BIRCHBY

FIGURES 16 and 17. Fovoribatula mesosetosa sp. nov., female soma. 16, notum; 17, idiosternum.

FOVORIBATUTLINE MITES ho

Material examined

Holotype: 9 (N1989258), soil, litter, moss and

other law grawth plants under bladder salt bush

(Arriplex vesicaria) amongst sparse false

sandlewaod (Myoperuim platyearpum), Koonamore

Vegetation Reserve (32°07°S, 139°21’B), 27.41.1974

Paralypes: 19 (NJ989259), 4ocn

(N1989260-N1989263), lo BMNH; la PMNH;

lo NZAC; same data as holotype.

Distribution

Australia (Aa), South Australia, Semi-arid low

shrubland (Kaonamore Vegetation Reserve), Lake

Eyre basin, 29, 7a o°/ 3 of 8 x 25cm?.

Remarks

The prefix of the name of Fovarihatula

mesosetosa is derived from the Greek ‘wiesas”

meaning ‘middle’, referring to the medium-length

of the hysteronotal setae. It is easily distinguished

from the only other species in its genus by the larger

hysteronotal setae, absence of a translamella and

relatively slimmer lateral pretarsal claws and shorter

central claws. Central claw Il (for example) is anly

slightly larger than those of Cerorihatula, Wt is

superficially similar to Ceroribulula megaforamine

as commented on in the ‘Remarks’ on Povoribatula.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

We are indebted Lo the Australian Biological Resources

Study for funding the salary of C.M,B, in a grant lo

DC.L., as well as to Dr Henrik Enghoff (Zoological

Museum, Copenhagen) for making two types available,

Thanks are also due to Mrs Kathy Bowshall-Hill for the

notation and presentation of the fgures and Mrs Debbie

Lowery for typing the manuscript.

REFERENCES

AOKI, J. 1966, Epizoie symbiosis) an oribatid mite,

Svmbioribates papuensis, representing a new family,

from cryptogamic plants growing on the backs of

papuan weevils (Acari: Cryptostigmata). Pacif. Insects

&: 281-289.

BALOGH, J. 1970. New onbatids (Acari) from New

Guinea, Hl. Act coel hung. bie 291-344,

BALOGH J. 1972. ‘The Oribatid Genera of the World®

Akademiai Kaidd, Budupest,

BALOGH J, & BALOGH P. 1984. Review of the

Oribatuloidea Thor, 1929 (Acari: Oribatei)., dcr. zaol.

hung. WM 257-313.

BALOGH, | & MAHUNKA, S. 1966. New oribatids

(Acari) fron Australian soils, Folia Ent. Hane, 19:

553-568,

BERLESE, A. 1895, ‘Acari, Myriopoda et Scorpiones

hucusque in Italia reperta’, Vol. 77 (5).

BERLESE, A. 1916. Centuria terza di Acari nuovi. Redia

12; 2RI-AAK.

BRODY, A. R. 1970. Observations on the Fine structure

of the developing cuticle of a soil mite Oppia

coloradensis (Acarina: Cryptosizmata), Acarologia V2:

421-431,

FEIDER, Z., VASILIU, N. & CALUGAR, M. 1970. Trois

espéces nouvelles de la famille des Oribatulidae Thor,

1929 (Oribatei). Rev, Roum, Brol-Zool, S: 213-313.

HAMMER, M. 1953. A new species of oribaticd mite trom

Queensland. Aust. J. Zool bk 236-238.

HAMMER, M. 1967, Investigations on the oribatid fauna

of New Zealand, Pare Ub. Biol. Skr 1S (4): 164, 40 pls,

HAMMER, M, (973, Oribatids [rom Tongatapu and Eua,

the Tonga Islands, and from Upolu, western Samoa.

Biol. Skr. 20 (3): 1-70, 29 pls.

JACOT, J, P. 1925, Phylogeny in the Oribaloidea, Am.

Nat. 59: 272-279.

LEE, TH C, 1981. Sarcoptiformes (Acari) of Soult

Australian soils. |. Nolaioan. 2 Bifemorata and

Pryctima (Cryptostigmala), Ree, S, Aust. Mus. 18:

199-222.

LEE, D. C. 1987. Introductory study of advanced aribate

mites (Acarida; Cryptostigmata: Planolissurae) and a

redescripliun of the only valid species of

Cunsirictohates (Oripodoidea). Rec 8. lust, Mus. 24r

35-42,

LEE, D. ©, & BIRCHBY, C. M, 1989. Decaribarula gen.

nov. from ‘Singapore, with annotations on the allied

Retievlappia (Acanda; Cryptostigmata: Oribatulidae),

Trans, R, Soc, S. Aust. 132): 1-5,

LEE, B.C. & PAJAR, G. A. 1988 Serabates (Acarida:

Cryptostigmata; Secheloribatidae) trom Sourh

Australian soils. Trans. R. Soe, S. Aust 192(2); 21-27.

LEE, D.C, & PAJAK, G. A. {in press), Scheloribures

Berlese and Megaseheloribaies gen, nov. (Avarida:

Cryptostizmata; Oripodoidea) wirh comments on

Scheloribatidac from South-Eastern Australia. Frvere

Tax, 4(2).

LOUW, G. H. & SEELY, M, KK. 1982. ‘Ecology of Desert

Organisms’. Longman Group Ltd, U.K.

NORTON, R. A., 1983. Redefinirion of Mochloribatula

(Acari; Mochlozetidae), With new species,

récombinations, and notes on plant associations.

Acarologia 24 (4): 449-464,

THOR, S, 1929, Uber die Phylogenie und Systematik det

Acurina, mit Beitrdgen zur ersten Entwicklungs

geschichte einzelner Gruppen. Nyvi Mag, Naturv. Osle

67) 145-210,

TRAVE_ J. 1961. Contribution a Vetude des Oribatulidac

(Oribates, Acanens). Mie er Milieu 12: 313-35).

REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS HOLCONIA

THORELL (HETEROPODIDAE: ARANEAE)

D. B. HIRST

Summary

Australian species of the genus Holconia Thorell, 1877 are revised. Holconia hirsuta (L. Koch), H.

immanis (L. Koch), H. insignis (Thorell) type species, and H. nigrigularis (Simon) are valid taxa.

Holconia subdola Thorell is a synonym of H. hirsuta. Isopeda simoni Rainbow is a synonym of H.

nigrigularis. Mygale whitei Bonnet is synonymised with H. immanis. The following new species are

described: H. colberti, H. flindersi, H. murrayensis, H. neglecta and H. westralia.

REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS HOLCONIA

THORELL (HETEROPODIDAE: ARANEAE)

D. B. HIRST

HIRST, B. &. 1991. Revision of Australian species of the genus Aou/conia Thorell (Hetcropodidie:

Araneae), Rec. S. Ausy Mus. 24(2): 91-109,

Australian species of te genus Helconia Thorell, 1877 are revised. Holconia hirsuta (L. Koch),

H. immanis (1. Koch), A, insignis (Thorell) type species, and FH. nigrigulurts (Simon) are valid

java. Molcunia subdola Thorell isa synonym of Ff hirsuta, lsapeda simon Rainbow isa synonym

of Fi, nigriguleris: Mygale whitel Bonnet is synonymised with IZ. immunts, The following new

species ure described: A. colberti, H, flinderst, H. murrayensis, HA. nevlecta and #H. wesiralia,

D. B. Hirst, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, South Australia 5000. Manuscript

received 13 November 1989,

This is the fourth part of u revision af the

Australian Heteropodidae excludiny Heterapode

Latreillc, 1804. Hirst (1990) revalidated the genus

Holcania when outlining the genera and relimiting

Australasian species involved in Lhe genus /sopeda

(sensu Jute) Here, Australian taxa of the genus

Holconia are revised.

Roch (1867) described Defena inmnanis from

Brisbane, al that lime winderstandably selecting that

genus as morphologically similar, Thorell (1870)

erected the venus Moconia, for a new species, i

insignis, Koch (1875) transferred immanis to

Foconia atid described K doalosu. Koch's

understanding of (hat genus is questionable as at

the sane time he described Jsopeda hirsuta, a

species which should have been difficult to separate

from delusa or insignis, the latter wiieh he

redescribed. Finding Focenia preoccupied, Thorell

(1877) replaced (hal name with Holcorne. Three

more species, H. svbdola, H. armillata and H.

beccarli were deseribed by Thorell (i881, 1887,

(892). The latter two, being non-Australian, are not

included in this revision. Hogg (1902) saw no reason

for retaining Holconia, and synonymised it with

Jsopeda. Two further species, J. merigularts and ¢.

woodward were described by Simon (1908), As the

latter name was a homonym of Jsopeda woodwardli

Hogg, Rainbow (1911) replaced (his with simoni.

Little has been produced in the following years

concerning this group of heteropadids regarded here

as Holconia, but Bonnet (19457) proposed the name

Mygale whitei for a species briefly described and

illustrated by J. While (1790) and named only

‘White-jointed spider’, Main (1985; 48) noted ihat

the species was ‘a sparassid (Sparassidae

Heteropodidae)’, The illustrations ure uridoubtedly

of AL immanis and Bonnet probably chose the

genus Mygale solely on the reference Lo that species

as ‘Mygale de White’ by Walckenaer (1837).

MATERIALS AND METHODS

Measurements were made with an eyepiece

graticule on a Wild microscope and are given in

millimetres except cye diameters, interspaces and

MOQ (median ocular quadrangle) dimensions

which are expressed as relative to the diameter of

an AME, Other materials and methods are given

in Hirst (1989), Acronyms are; AM ~ Australian

Museum, Sydney; ANIC - Australian National

Insect Collection, Canberra; BYM - Dr BY. Main,

Zoology Department, University of Western

Australia, Nedlands; MCG - Museo Clyico di

Storia Naturale ‘Giacomo Doria’, Genoa; NHMW

- Naturhistorisches Museum, Wien; NHRM -

Naturhistoriska Riksmuseum, Stockholm; NMV -

Museum of Victoria, Melbourne; NTM — Northerty

Territory Museum, Darwin; QM — Queensland

Museum, Brisbane; SAMA - South Australian

Museum, Adelaide; SMNS - Stadtliches Museun)

fiir Naturkunde, Sturtgart; WAM - Western

Australian Museum, Perth; 2MB - Museum fiir

Naturkunde an der Universitat Humboldt zu Berlin;

ZMH - Zoologisches Museum, Hamburg.

DISCUSSION

The term ‘subembolic apophysis' (Figs 1-7, 15)

was introduced (Hirst 1990) to describe the

apophysis found in species al Afalconie and

distinguishing it from the tegular apophysis found

in several other genera of the Deleninae, Those

structures are probably homologous in function,

With the excepiion of AL nigrigularis whe

subembolic apophysis bridges a ‘zap’ between the

embolic base and the tegulum. Rising prodistally

from the embolic base to a rounded peint or ‘kKnab’,

the subembolic apophysis ts connected to tbe

tegulum on the prodorsal side of the apophysis.

92 DB, HIRST

Halcania nigrigularis differs. in haying the

subembolic apophysis rising more prolalerally on

the embolic base (Fig. J4) adjacent (o its junction

wilh the tegulum, and not being fixed to the

tepgulum_ This state also occurs in one species of

a sister genus (Hirst in prep,) but then is smaller

and accompanied by a reduced tegular apophysis.

A distinctive character of female Malconia species

reqjuired a second term, the ‘epigynal sclerite’ (Fig.

25) in reference to.a lateral convexity in the posterior

hall of the epigynum (Hirst 1990), The epigynal

sclerite is a narrow to broad extension of the lateral

rim oF the eplgynum oyer the posigro-lateral vorner

of the fossa, In Jsopeda and related genera the

lateral rim taros sharply downwards to produce a

coneayily adjacent to the postero-lateral edge of the

fossa. The epigynal sclerite is a useful diagnostic

female character when used with epigynum shape

and number of insemination duct coils.

Hoatconia Thorell

Vocarie Thorell, 1870; 382.

Halconia Thorell, 1877: 485 (nom. nov. for Poconia

Thorell, pre-occupied), Hirst, 1990; 17.

Isopeda: Hogg, 19022 429 (in part).

Diagnosis

Males with subembalic apophysis, Teguliin

prodistally rounded without apophysis, Female

epigynum with convex epigynal selerite extending

over pasienor lateral corner of fossa-

Description

Large spiders, carapace length often 9-15 mm,

6-9 times longer than high, highest posrerior to

ocular area; caput “U" shaped; fovea lang, narrow,

deep. Anterior eye row sliahtly recurved; linc drawn

behind posterior eyes recurved: ALE largest; PLE

often subequal to AME; PME smallest, low-domed,

barely, or not vistble in laleral view; AME closer

to each other than to ALE. Clypeus 1/8 to 1/2

widih of AME, Cheliceral eroave with two

promarginal ceethy four ov five retromaryinal teeth,

distal roath subequal or rather equal to subdistal

tooth except in H. jetrnenis in which it is larger,

l.dbium barely wider than long, apex somewhat

truncate. Sternum longer than wide, truncate

antenorly, broadest mid-lengih between second

coxae, narrowing toa point between fourth coxae.

Leg J, when outstretched alongside leg Il, reaches

to mid-length of metatarsus {1, rarely to near distal

end of meratarsus J! ‘Three pairs of ventral spines

on all tibiae with distal pair adjacent ta articulation

with metatarsi, Scopula on all metatars| and tarsi,

sparse on metatarsi 1V, largely replaced by stout

bristles: Abdomen wsually with pattern of large ill-

defined brown or blackish patches, broadly ovate

in its norrnal condition, Flattened dorso-ventrally,

Male palpal tibial apophysis subequal in length to

palp tibia, relatively strgight, lanceolate, usually

With incurved apex, membranous support on inner

edge of apophysis base forms a somewhat

cantimuous straight line with apophysis. Tegular

apophysis absent. Embolic base with prodistal

knob-like suhembolic apophysis connected to

tegulum, or semicircular and nat connected to

leeulum; embolic base rarely with granulated area,

when present appears as a series of Nine ridging (Fig,

44); area between conductor base and embolus

broad, depressed (Fig. 14). Embolus with 7'\4 to

11\4 coils in distal half of cymbium. Coil stack

almost width of cymbinm: first complete coil

smaller than several subsequent coils, difficult to

see in ventral view without manipulation of

embolus, Tip of embolus constriets and tapers to

a fire point in the last half a turn or less. Female

epizynum large, roughly oblong but broader

posteriorty; selerotised lateral rims often samewhat

parallel in anterior half; in posterior half a convex

extension of thie lateral rim, the eprgynal sclerite,

extends partly over fossa. Fossa smooth, rarely

darkly pigmented, often narrower and semewhal

irunicate posteriorly, posteriar sectian often with

depressed or raised areas. Fossa and sclerotised rim

lack setae. Vulva with paired insemination ducts

coiled 8-11 times; spermattecae with moderately

long, usually curved, spermathecal sacs.

Type species

Vocunia insignis Thorell, 1870,

Remarks

Spermathecal sacs may be widely separated (fig.

10, Hirst 1990) or clase together (Fig, 23), They

appear to be intraspecifically variable and

diagnostically useful only at generic level,

Colourauion of A. immanis and H. nigriguluris 18

distinctive bur other species are uniformly coloured.

Spination and leg lengths are very similar within

the genus. Leg ratios (leg length / carapace length}

are also intraspecifically variable. Lee lengths and

spihation are giver tor the type species, Wolcania

insignis in Hirst (1990)

Four species groups or sister groups are Outlined

wihin the genus, but these are equivocal as

definitions of the groups alter if different character

combinations are used, Holconia nigrigularis lacks

the fixed subembolic apophysis of other species and

las a oiueh fatter carapace which isolate this

Species from others in the genus, On (he other hand,

the presence of four retromaryinal cheliceral teeth

and a broader male palpal tibial apophysis ally this

species with a further group, comprising , ca/herti

and H_. wesvralia, but which has more coils in the

HOLCONIA (HETEROPODI DAE) ei

embolus and insemmation duct as well as a

relatively higher carapace, and in the case ol 4.

colberti, occasionally five retromarginal cheliceral

teeth.

Grouping of remaiting species may be

determined by the degree of coiling of the embolus

or insemination ducts and carapace height. The

largest group comprises H. insignis, H. flindersi,

Hi. murravensis and H. immanis. While 1, immanits.

is easily diagnosed by its distinctive pattern and

larger subembolic apophysis, other species in this

group are difficult to separate. This is further

complicated by the sympatric occurrence In part of

the distributions of insigais/murrayensis and

murrayensis/flindersi (Fig- 36). Grouping by

another character, the distal retromarginal cheliceral

tooth, isolates H. inmanis tram all other Holconia

species in having that tooth the largest.

Holeonia hirsuta and H. neglecta can be grouped

ou their reduced embolic and insemination duct

coiling but may well be iteluded in the previous

group. H. hirsuta differs in the marginally greater

gpacing between the median and subdistal

retromarginal teeth (Fig, 20), in. which it 1s paralleled

by H. wesiralia (Fig. 21), but a similar spacing of

those teeth is occasionally found in H. insignis (Fig.

19).

Key To THE SPECIES OF HOLCONIA

} — Abdomen with ventral pattern....0.---s255. 2

— Abdomen lacks ventral pattern, .-.6...5). 5

2 — Abdomen without strong dorsal pattern, venter

with ill-defined grey-black patch. Carapace very

flat, depressed medially, Clypeus less than ‘4 width

of AME. Embolic base with low rounded

gubembolic apophysis. Epigynum broad and

rounded; epigynal sclerite narrow, short to

moderale length -........¢igrigularis (Simon)

— Abdomen with conspicuous black stripe in anterior

half; venter wilh blackish badge markings, pale

bordered. Distal retramarginal cheticeral Looth

largest. Subembolic apaphysis high, knob-like.

Epigynuar lateral rims slightly diverging; epigynal

sclerife broad, long. imimanis tL. Koeh)

3 — Carapave low, about 7-8 times longer than hinh;

¢lypeus about 4 width of AME, 5 retromarginal

cheliveral teeth... -.. cpu yp eee ee

— Carapace higher, abou! 6 times longer than high,

clypeus “4 width of AME. Usually with 4

retromarginal cheliceral leeth.---.....-.+--- 8

4 — Males with 74: to 8 embalic coils. Females with

a similar number of inseminaiion duct coils...5

— Males with 9 to 10 erbohe coils. Females with a

similar number of insxemisation duct coils... .6

5 — Males with small subembolic apophysis. Female

epizgynum with somewhat parallel laveral rims al

first thea sharply diverging; epigynal selerite small,

short, .-. 5.54 .o.. -e-e- hipsata (L. Koch)

— Males unknown. Females with ¥ insemination duct

voils; epigyauim with gradually diverging lateral

sides, broad posteriorly; epigynal sclenie narrow

al posterior only... 2.0.0... Nevleetd Sp, TIDY.

6 — Males with 9! 10 10 embolic coils, Female with

about [0 insemination duct enils. ... S47

— Males with 9 ta 94, rarely to 9'4 embolic coils.

Female with about & |nseminalion duct coms;

epigynum with anterior half of lateral side slightly

diverging; epigynal sclerite less than /4 length of

epigynM 2.6.02... ee mhurrayensis Sp. Nov,

7 — Male subembolic apophysis broad al apex. Vemale

epigyaum wilh anterior section of lateral side

paralle| over '5 Jength of epizgynum, epigynal

selérite 2/5 length of epigynum....).s JA.

wii ports tgeaeet creepepes cefimdefst Sp. Nay.

— Male subembohe apophysis narrow at apex. Female

epigynum with anterior section of lateral side

apophysis smallish. Female epigynal sclerite long,

MATIOW, 6. psy) eee e-- ~~ + Westralit sp ney,

— Males. With IL to 1124 embolic coils; subembolic

apophiysis broad, Female epigynal sclerite short,

Browmd se fro te oe volberli sp. nav,

The insignis Group

Clypeus width about ‘4 diameter of AME. Male

with 9 to Jd embolus coils; subembalic apophysis

largish, Female epigynum relatively marrow to

broad; lateral rims not diverging greatly to posterior.

H, insignis, 4. flindersi, H. mmurrayensis and H.

immanis are included in this grouping although the

last diflers in having a larger distal retromarginal

cheliceral tooth and possesses a distinctive pattern.

[n other respects A. invmunis is most similar to A,

insignis, The group has an eastern and soulh-easierts

distribution.

Holconia iasignis (Thorell)

(Figs 2, 19, 24, 36)

Voconia insignis Thorell, 1870; 383. Syntypes cr

and @, Queensland, Australia, Pessler, NHRM

(Thorell Coll,), examined,

Halcania insignis: Karsch, 1878; 791. Hirst, L990:

I8, figs 6-10, table 4,

isopeda insignis: Hoge, 1902: 432,

Diagnosis

Male subembolic apophysis rounded, apex curved

slightly to venter; embolus with 944 to LO coils.

Female epizynum broad anteriorly; lateral rims

somewhat parallel or slightly diverging jn anterior

half, broadest posteriorly; epigynal sclente long,

usually greater than half length of fossa.

Insemination ducts with about 10 coils (Fig, 24).

94 D. B. HIRST

FIGURES 1-7, Subembolic apophysis of Holconia males: 1, H. immanis (L. Koch), SAMA NI988515; 2, H. insignis

(Thorell), SAMA N1988522; 3, H. flindersi, holotype; 4, HW. murravensis, holotype; 5, H. hirsuta (L. Koch), OM

312592; 6, H. westralia, holotype; 7, H. colberti, holotype. eb, embolic base; sa, subembolic apophysis; t, tegulum.

Seale line 0.5mm.

NOLCONIA (HETEROPODIDAE!

beriarion

Carapace length of males, 9.68-12,90, mean 11.78

(n=8), 2 With 9'4 embolus cails, 4 with 944 and

2 with almost 10 coils, Carapace length of females,

12.10-15.80, mean 13.44 (n= 7), Usually with 5

retromarvinal cheliceral teeth; distal joorh often

angled more anteriorly, spaced about a tooth width

aparl ad rather equal or subequal to subdistal

toath (Fig. 19).

Distribution

Occurs in Queensland and New South. Wales. in

and west af the Great Dividing Range from near

Rockhampton to south of Sydney. lo Queensland

it Occurs westward to Injune and, in New South

Wales, to Cobar and Lake Cowal (Fir. 36).

Other murerial examined

Ouveensiand; 9, 2 juy., Banana, 24°28'5,

150°08' E, AM KS19737; G, Condamine, 26°56'S,

150°08'E, AM KSi9646; 9, Eidsvold, 25°22'S,

151°07/E, QM S12595; 9, same locality, SAMA

Ni988520; 2 juy., Enfield Station, 27°06'S,

151°02'E, OM; 9, Goondiwindi, 28°33°5,

150°R8’E, OM Si2596; co, 9, Injune, 25°51'S,

148°34"R. OM 14143, juv., Kroombit Tops,

24°26'S, 150°43'E, OM:3 9 9, &juy., Lake Nuga

Nuga, 25°0)'S, 148°42°B, QM 512597, juv,,

Marlaybrook 2675478, 151°36’B, QM, o,

Moombah, cd 27°59'S, 149718" E, QM S$12598; juve.

Mr Archer, Kileay, 26°59°S, 152°38'E, QM; cr,

Ottley, 28°20'S, 149°04'E, QM 14142; 9, St

George, 100 km S of, AM KS19736; @, Theodore,

24°57’S, 150°05'E, QM; co, Wallumbilla, 26°35'S,

H9°I1'E, OM i4l44. New South Wales; 9.

Bathurst, 33°25'S, 149°35°E, AM KSI6701, o,

Bonnet Bay, Sydney, AM KSI9675; 3 juv,,

Brooklana, 30°16’S, 152°53'R, AM KSI9677-8; 9,

Crowther, 34°06'S, 148°30'B, AM KSL965I, oF,

Lake Cowal, 33°36'S, (47°26'E, ANIC, @, Loftus,

34°03'S, 191°O3'E, AM KSIGG693; juv.,

Marrickville, Sydney, AM KS119649; co, Nyngan,

31°34°S, 147°12’E, AM KS16478; o, penult, 9,

Pilliga Serub, 30°40'S, 148°50'°E, SAMA

MIY8RS22-3; penult. 9, Ryde, Sydney, AM

KS13799; Q, Sydney, 33°53'S, 151°13'E, AM

KS16705; @, Woronara, Sydney, AM KSI6695; 9,

Young, 34°19'S, 148°18'E, AM KS1659%.

Holconia flindersi sp, nov,

(Fis 3, 9, 26, 34)

Types

Holotype: or, Wilmington, 32°39'S, 138"06" EB,

South Australia, March 1986, H. Kairl, SAMA

N1989264,

Allolype: @, Warren Gorge, 32°11 8S, 138°00'E,

South Australia, 19. vi. 1988, G. and H. Kairl,

SAMA NI9RR559,

Paratypes: 9, Creekbed Saf Woolshed Flat,

Pichi Richi Pass, 32°28'S, 137°S8'E, South

Australia, 27. iv. 1987, B Hirst, SAMA NID88544;

o, same data, SAMA NI988545; 9, Mambray

Creek, 32°40'S, 138°02'b, South Australia, 24- iv.

1972, P. Martinsan, SAMA NI9SRS46.

Diagnosis

Most similar to /asigris, separated in the male

by the straighter palpal tiial apoptiysis and thicker

more upright subembolic apophysis, and in the

female by the longer parallel sided anterior seetion

of the epizgynum and shorter, narrower cpigynal

‘Selerite.

Holotype male

CL 10.32, CW 10,13. AL 9.80, AW 6.85.

Colour in alcohol: Carapace orange-brown with

brow suffusion; caput darker orange-red. Brown-

black setae form crass-banding posterior to caput;

whitish setae in ocular area. Cheliverae reddish with

yellowish upright setae; proximally with adpressed

white setae, Maxillae and Jabium dark brown

Sternum yellow-brown; long greyish setae. Legs

yellow-brown; blackish suffusion proventrally or

fernur lL; short blackish setae at proximal ends of

anterior femora and tibiae and around spine bases

of femora prolaterally; white setae ventrally on

femora, patellae and medially on tibiae Abdomen

yellowish with brown-black patches of setae

forming transverse banded pattern, anterior band

broken by yellowish streak; verter yellowish with

orangish setae.

Eyes: AME 0.68. AME: ALE: PME; PLE = lL

b16: 0.69 1.15. Interspacess AME-AME (1.37,

AME-ALE 0.38, PME-PME 1.38, PME-PLE 1.59,

AME-PME 0.85, ALE-PLE 1.06. MOQ, aw: pw:

| — 2,37) 2.76: 2.44. Width of clypeus to AME 1.29.

Chehcerae! retromarginal teeth 5, similar ro insignis.

Labium; L 1.92, W 2,i1, Sternum: L.3.53, W 4.59

Leys: anterior leg ratios | ~ 5.6, Uo ~ 6.0.

Palps: Tibial apophysis relatively straighr.

Embalus with 944 voils..

Allotype female (as male except as follows)

CL. 12.45, CW 1,89 AL 14.95, AW ILAO.

Eyes; AME 0.74. AME; ALE: PME: PLE - I:

I.l6: 0.69 116. Interspaces: AME-AME 0.39,

AME-ALE 6.54, PME-PME 1.43, PME-PLE 1.72,

AME-PME 0.91, ALE-PLE 1.22. MOQ, aw: pw:

L = 2.99: 2.81; 2.54. Width of clypeus to AME 0.32

Labium: L 2.11, W 2.66. Slernum: L 6.53, W 5.30.

Legs: anterior leg ratios ] = 4,2, 1 = 5.0.

Epigynum: fateral sides somewhat parallel in

anterior section for more than hall lengih of fossa;

epigynal sclerite moderately large, curved, extendiny

less than \@ length of lossa.

96 D. B, HIRST

FIGURES 8-13. Holconia males, 8-10, left palpal tibial apophysis and proximal portion of tarsus, retrolateral: 8,

Hf, immanis (L. Koch), SAMA NI988515; 9, Hf. flindersi, holotype; 10, H. murrayensis, holotype. 11, left palpal tibial

apophysis and whole tarsus of holotype H. hirsuta (L. Koch). 12-13, left palpal tibial apophysis and proximal portion

of tarsus: 12, H. colberti, holotype; 13, H. wesrralia, holotype. Scale line 0.5mm,

HOMCONIA (HETEROPODIDAE) oy

baria/lor

Carapace length of males, 10,02-13.41, mean

11,43 (n=6). Embolus coils 94 ta 10. Carapace

length of Females, 11.72-14.78, mean 13.14 (n=20).

Retromarginal chelicersl teeth usually 5,

occasionally will 4 on one chelivera, Insemination

duet coils about 9!4 to 10.

Distribution and remarks

Occurs throughout the Flinders Ranges in South

Australia, east to Broken Hill in New South Wales

and Meringur in the north-west corner of Victoria

(Fig. 36). It is Frequently found near ereeks on

Eucalvptus camaldulensis, and alten under

Casuarina bark when away from waterways.

Other material examined

South Australias O, Arcoona Creek, 30°28'S,

138°S8'°E, SAMA NI989265; 9, Giadnina Station,

ca 30°25'S, 139°05'E, SAMA NI988S561, 9,

Hawker, 3153'S, 138°'25'E, SAMA N[98R550; 9,

Holowilena Station, 3153'S, 138°S0°E, SAMA

1990275; 9, Mambray Creek, 32 49'S, 138°05'E,

SAMA NI¥8RS46; 2 oot, penult. 9, Melrose,

32°50/S, 138°11 "B, SAMA N1988541-3; penult. 2,

Muolooloo, 3059'S, 138°35'E, SAMA N1989266,

juv., Mt Serle, 30°30'S, L38°54"E, SAMA

N1989267; 2 9 9, ‘North’ (no exact locality),

SAMA NI1988497; of, Qakbank Statian, 33°03'S,

140°35°E, SAMA NI988563; 9, Orroroo, 32°44'5,

(38°37°E, SAMA N1989268; @, Quori, 32"21'S,

138°02'E, SAMA NI988549> or, 9, Sturt Vale

Station, 33°1S’S, 140°02'E, SAMA N1988564-5;,

% 9, penult, o, Wilpena, 31°30'S, 139°19'E,

SAMA NIQR8552-60; of, G, Wirrealpa, 3L°08'S,

138°58'B, SAMA NI988547-8 G, Yunta Dan,

3237'S, 139¢34' BL SAMA N1988562. New Sauth

Wales: 9, Broken Hill, 31"58’S, 141°27°E, SAMA

NIORRS21; F, same lovality, AM KS5094, &,

Wangumma, 34°09'S, 141°27°E, NMY. Victoria:

of, Meringur, 34°24'S, 141925’ B, NMV.

Holvonia mutrraversis sp. Tov,

(Figs 4. 10, 27-28, 36)

ivpes

Holotype: o, Mhidura, 34¢I1'S, 142°10°R,

Victoria, July 1955, Favalora, NMV K-O0917.

Allotyper 9, Nampoo Stn, Lake Victoria,

3403'S, 141°10'E, SW New South Wales, under

bark of red gum, 26. vi. 1967, R.R. Blackwood,

NMY K-O9L8,

Paralypes. &, Balaklava Gliding Club Airtield,

ca 2km N of Whilwarta, 34°U5'S, 138520" E, South

Australia, 28. 7. 1989, A, Horton, SAMA NI989276;

®@. raliers of shack, few km S af Margan on Rivet

Murray, 34°02'S, (99°40 E, South Ausiralia, 28.

xii, 1978, A. Edwards, SAMA NI988538.

Diagnosis

Fram insignis and flindersi by the male having

a lawer embolic coil number of 9 to less. than 945

and subembalic apophysis with slightly larger apex

Fernale with about 9 insemination duct coils.

Holotype male

CL $4.21, CW 13.92. AL 17.40, AW ILQ2S.

Colour in alcohol: Carapace reddish, lateral and

posterior edges orange-red; caput dark reddish.

Selae brownish medially; whitish adpressed setac

on caput margins and posterior ta ocular area;

posteriar half of caput with yellow-orangish

adpressed setae. Chelicerage dark red-brown 1o

blackish; setae yellow-brown. Maxillae and labium

red-brown. Sternum orange-brawn. Coxae yellow

to orange-brown, Legs orange-red; dense white setac

on femora dorsally, venter of patellae and tibiae.

Abdomen yellowish with brown patches of setac

divided anteriorly by yellow-brown streak, Vertes

yellow.

Eyes; AME 0.82. AME: ALE; PME: PLE ~ L:

1.20: 0.7): 142. Interspaces: AME-AME O41,

AME-ALE 0,51, PME-PME 134, PME-PLE 1,78,

AME-PME 1, ALE-PLE 1.12. MQQ, aw: pwr =

2.4]: 2.76: 2.61, Width of clypeus to AME 00.37.

Chelicerae: retromarginal teeth 5; distal and

subdistal teeth separated by \ tooth width,

Labium: L 2.41, W 2.64. Sternum: L 7.42, W 6.28,

Legs: amerior Jeg ratios 1 = 4.6, IL = 5.5.

Palps; Subembolic apophysis broader distally and

less curved than in imsignis. Erabolus with 9 coils,

Allowpe female (as holotype male except as follows)

CL 14,35, CW 13.89, AL 16,25, AW 12.70.

“ylour in alcohol: Generally darker (han male;

legs reddish from patellae ta metalarsi, Abdomen

with anterior yellow-brown streak.

Eyes: AME 0:81. AME: ALE; PME: PLE =

1.192 0.69: 1.12. Interspaces: AME-AME 0.44,

AME-ALE 01.60, PME-PME |.44, PME-PLE 2.20,

AME-PME 0.83, ALE-PLE 114. MOQ, aw: pw-

| = 2.44) 2.83: 2.48) Width of elypeus to AME 0.43

Labilini: Lb 2.47, W 2.87, Sterntim: L, 7.69, W 6.42.

Legs: anterior Jeg ratios L » 4.1, LL = 4.8.

Epigynum: epigynal selerite begins midway along

lateral side, broad near anterior (Fig. 27).

kariation

Carapace length of males, 11.62-12.49, mean

(2.16 (n=3). Embolic coils 9, but a male [rom Unley

Park has almost 9'4, Carapuce length of females,

{3.08-16.22, mean 14.32 (n =19). Epigynal sclevite

often rather broad anteriorly (Fig, 28), Insemination

ducts with 9 coils. Usually with 5 retromarginal

cheliceral teeth, much as in insignis. Colour

generally darker than in H, flindersi.

98 D. B. HIRST

Y J 20 . 2

FIGURES 14-21. Holconia males. 14-17, H. nigrigularis (Simon): 14, left palpal tibial apophysis and tarsus of syntype

male ZMB 28,740, ventral; 15, embolic apophysis, SAMA NI988485> 16, left palpal tibial apophysis and proximal

portion of tarsus, retrolateral, SAMA N1988498; 17, left retromarginal cheliceral teeth, SAMA N1988485. 18-21, left

retromarginal cheliceral teeth: 18, 1. immanis (L. Koch), SAMA N1988515; 19, H. insignis (Thorell), SAMA N1988522:

20, H. hirsuta (L. Koch), QM 812592; 21, H. westralia, holotype. e, embolus; eb, embolic base; cb, conductor base:

sa, subembolic apophysis. Scale lines 0.5mm, 17-21 to same scale.

HOLCONIA (HET EROPODIDAE) wy

Distribution

Generally occurs along the Murray River and its

tributaries in northern Viutoria, southern New

Sourlhi Wales and South Australia (Fig. 36). Io South

Australia ir is found along the Murray River from

the Viviorian border south to Murray Bridge,

westwards along the River Marne and through the

Barossa Valley to che Adelaide Plains in areas

supporting Eucalyptus cammuldulensis, and is known

as far north as Whitwarta, In New South Wales ir

extends ro Lake Cowal where il is sympatric with

H. insignis. A penultimate specimen from

Wileannia is included in this taxon and indicates

thal the species i$ folind along the Darling River

system northwards to this locality. A female from

Walwa jn north-eastern Victoria is tentatively

included until males from the area become available.

Two populations appear to be isolated from the

Murray River population, The first occurs on the

Noodplains and waterways of Lake Albacutya and

Wyperfeld National Park in nenb-western Victoria

while the second includes the Adelaide Plains and

Barossa Valley west of longitude 139°00',

Other entaterial examined

Victoria; 2 2D, Benalla, 36°33°S, 145°59’E,

AM KSI99SU, AM KS19953; 9, Gunbower,

95°58'S, 144°22'E, NMY; &, Kerang, 35°44'S,

143°55'E, NMV; juvi, Lake Albacutya, ca 35°46'S,

142°03'E, AM KSI9954: &, penult, ov. Merbein,

3440'S, 142°04'E, AM KS)997I-2; O, Walwa,

35°58'S. Id7°44'E, AM KSI99SG, 5 OO, o,

Wyperfeld, 35°32°S, 141°58°B, AM KS19944-7 (co

= KS19945). New South Wales: juv., Balranald,

34°38'S, 14334’ SAMA N1988524; o, Lake

Cowal, 33°36'S, 147426’E, ANIC, @, Lake

Mungo, 33°44'S, 143°02/R, SAMA N1989269;

penull, 9, Wilcanma, 31°34'S, 143°22°E, AM

KS10657. South Austeulias 39 99, Adelaide,

3456'S, 138°36°E, SAMA NID8S525-7: GS, Bagol

Well, 34°19°S, [38°59 ER, SAMA NID88532; 9,

Blancherown, 3421'S, 139°37°8, SAMA

NIV8K536; ©, Chowilla, 34°01"S, 14ussu'E,

SAMA NI988540; penolt. co, same locality, SAMA

NI986405; 2 juv,, Glen Osmond, Adelaide, SAMA

N1989270-I; 9, Henley Beach, Adelaide, SAMA

Nivges28; &, Hoyleton, 34° 02'S, 138° 34'°E,

SAMA Ni988533) 2 G9, Tunetion of River Marne

and River Murray, 34°40'5, 139 19°E, SAMA

NIYRSS34-5; 2, Lake Boney, 34°13°S, 140°27'F,

SAMA NIS5I43; &, Moreon, 34-021'S, 9°40,

SAMA NIJORRS387- same kcal, SAMA

MIYSRS39; oO Murray Bridge, 35 07'S, 139° 16" b,

SAMA NIYR9272, OG, Sundy Creek, 34) 46'S,

138¢49° LE, SAMA NI888531; co, Unley Park,

Adelaide, SAMA NI988529: 9, Virginia, 34°40°S,

138°34'E, SAMA NIGR8S30; Juv, Weeds Flac,

34°12'S, 139°3R°E, SAMA NI989373,

Holconia jmmanis (L. Koch)

(Figs |, 8, 18, 22-23, 35)

Delena immunis L_ Koch, 1867; 208, Syntypes &,

®, Brisbune, Queensland, NHMW_ not located,

presumed lost, One cr an NHMW [1884.1.454 (960)]

with red ‘T’ on label but locality is Rackhampton,

Queensland. Other material in NHMW_ seer

(1882.11.38.) is not marked type’ and does not match

data given by Kovh (1867), ‘Syntypes', Brisbane,

Queensland, ZMH (Mus. Godeffroy Nr 2285), may

not be valid syntypes but material determined laret

hy Koch (1875). One 'xynlype' female examined,

Voconia immartis: L. Koch, 1875: 642, pl. 51, fig. 4.

Holeonia immanis: Karseh, 1878: 792. Hirst, 1990;

18,

Jsapedu inimaniss Hoge, 102: 432,

Mygale whitet Bonnet, 1957- 2994, Determination

of ‘white jointed spider’, illustrated but not named

by White, 1790. New synonymy.

Diugnosts

Abdomen. dorsally with black anterior streak;

venter with blackish badge markings. Chelicerac

with retromarginal distal rooth largest, Male with

relatively large subemboli¢ apophiysis; embolus

usually with between 94 to 1D coils. Female

epizynum relatively smaller than in other species,

narrow anteriorly; Jateral rims im anterior half

usually diverging #radually or somewhat parallel ta

slightly broader posterior, epigynal sclerite large.

Female ZMH 2285

Cl 13.5, CW {39, AL 20.5, AW 17,0).

Colour in alcohol: Carapace red-brown; orange-

brown posterior and Jateral margins. Selae brown-

black medially; adpressed whitish setae around

ocular urea; Jong whitish setae on lateral margins.

Chelicerae dark red-brown to blackish; long yellow-

white setae, Maxillae and labium brown-black,

Sternum dark red-brown; long blackish setae. Legs

dark red-brown; ventér of anterior tibiae with

whitish setae medially, Abdomen yellowish with

brownish sutfusion giving rise to brown-black setac

and forming a pattern dorsally and laterally, verter

with blackish markings contained within 2 pale 'U’

shaped lines.

Byes: AME 0,90, AME: ALE: PME: PLE ~ 3;

Lil: 0.55: U66. Lnterspaces: AME-AME 0.44,

AME-ALE 0.58, PME-PME 1,44, PME-PLE |.75,

AMUE-PME 0.77, ALE-PLE tal, MOQ, aw: pw:

| . 233: 1.44: 2.22. Width ot clypeus to AME U,33,

Chelicerae: revromiargural weth S$; distal Loaili

largest. Sternum: L 7.4, W 6.0. Legs: anterior leg

rayos, | = 44, 11 = 4.9,

Epigynum: (Fig. 22) lateral sides gradually

diverging from relatively nal (ow anterior, posterior

half broader, epigynal sclerite long, broad

100 D. B. HIRST

FIGURES 22-28. Holconia female epigyne. 22-23, H. immanis (1. Koch): 22, syntype ZMH 2285; 23, SAMA N1988510,

spermathecae, 24, H. insignis (Thorell), SAMA N1988520, right insemination duct, dorsal. 25, H. nigrigularis (Simon),

holotype Isopeda simoni Rainbow, 26, H, flindersi, allotype. 27-28, H. murrayensis: 27, allotype; 28, SAMA N1988536,

spermathecae and epigynal sclerites. es, epigynal sclerite. Scale line 0.5mm.

HOLCONIA (HETEROPODIDAE) wl

Male SAMA NJ988515 (as feniale exvept as follows)

CL 10.54, CW 10.32. AL 32.80, AW 9.65-

Byes: AME 0.74. AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 1:

1.03: 0.59: 0.96. Interspacess AME-AME 0,34,

AME-ALE 0.36, PME-PME 1.38, PME-PLE 1.50,

AME-PME 0,72, ALE-PLE 0,81. MOQ, aw: pw:

1 = 2.34: 2.57: 2,27, Width of clypeus to AME 0.46,

Labium; L 1.84, W 2.04, Sternum: L 5.56, W 4.79.

Legs: anterior leg ratios = 5,0, ff = 5,9,

Palps: Subembolic apophysis Jarge, knob-like.

Embolic coils slightly greater than 94.

varialion

Carapace length of males, 10.64-14.21, mean

12,45 (n= 3). Embolic coils af 28 males examined

showed a range greater than one complete coil, most

hack 9% coils (N=16), Others were with 94 (n=5),

Oto 10'4 (n=4) and 9 lo 944 (n=2), Carapace

length of females, 13.38-15,02, mean 14.37 (n=6).

Insemination duct coils 10. Epigynum occasionally

narrow, having somewhat parallel lateral rims in

anierior half. Sternum occasionally dark

reddish-brown.

Distribution

Oveurs along the east coast of Australia from

Thursday Island, Queensland, southwards to Nowa

Nowa, Victoria, It is largely restricted to the eastern

side of the Great Dividing Range (Fig. 35),

Other material exantined

Queensiand: o, Atherton, 17°16'S, 145°29°E,

OM 812604; 9, same localily, AM KS19702; 9,

Boonah, 28°00'S, 152°41°E, OM SI2605; oO,

Brisbane, OM S12606; @, Byfield, 22°51°S,

150°39°E, AM KS19723; 9, Cairns, 16°55'S,

145°46'E, QM $12607; 9, same lovality, AM

KSIS700; O, Calliope, 24°00'S, 151°12'E, OM

512608; >, Cape Hillsborough, 20°54, 1449°D3"E,

QM §12609; 2 cr or, Closeburn, Brisbane, 27°20°S,

152°52'F, OM S$12610-11, 2 9 8, Coolum,

26933'S, 153¢0S'E, NMYV; 9, Cunningharns Gap,

28°03'S, 152°24'E, OM 8126134; 2 9 9, Dunk

Island, 17°57'S, 146°09’ E, SAMA NI988513-4; o,

Fumundi, 26°29'S, 152°S7'E, NMY; o&.

Furambala, Brisbane, QM S12614: cr, Ferny Hills,

Brisbane, OM S\2615; 9, Fitzroy Island, 16°4A'S,

146°D0'E, AM KS19708; 2 9 9, Fraser Island,

25°33°S, 152°59"E, AM RSi9698, AM KS19701,

o, Gin Gin, 25°00'S, ISI°S7"E, OM Si2616, o,

Gumdale, Brisbane, QM S12417, 9, Gynypie,

26°1'S, 152°40'R, QM SIZ6L8; guy., Herberton,

17°23’S, 145°23'B, AM KSI9845; cr, Highvale,

Brisbane, OM 512619; cr, penult. 9, Holloway

Beach, 16°50'S, 45°44’ BE, SAMA NISRSSIS-&: &,

Jimbooniba, 27°50°S, (53°02'E, OM $12620; ¢,

Koongal, 23°23°S, 150°33°E, AM KS!I6630; 9,

Logan River, 2816'S, 15244" E, SAMA NI98R8512;

ao, Marlaybrook, 2654'S, 151°36’E, QM S12621;

©, North Pine River, 27°16°S, 182°55'E, QM

$12622; o, Nundah, Brisbane, 27°25°S, 153°03'E,

QM S$12623; 4 oc, Percy Island, 21°42°S,

150°2W BE, OM $12624; o, Proserpine, 20°24°S,

148°35'E, QM §12625; o, Redbank, 27°36'S,

182°52‘E, QM Si2626; 9, Rockhampton, 23°22’S,

150°32'E, AM KS1665%; |juy., same locality, AM

KS819644; o-, Scarborough, 27°12'S, 153°07'E, QM

§12627; of, Scradhroke Island, ca 27°50'S,

193°25'E, NMY; 2 oc, Thursday Estland, 10°35°S,

142°13E, OM S12628; juy., Warwick, 2813'S,

152°02' EB, AM KS20501. New South Wales; 2 crc’,

juv., Brooklana, 30°16'S, (52"53'E, AM KSI9706,

2 oc, Brunswick Heads, 28932'S, 153°33'E,

SAMA NI988S508-9; 9, Charlestown, 32°58'5,

151°41'E, AM KSI8707, 9, Conarinni, 30°44'S,

(52°52'E, AM KSI7879; 9, Coraki, 2900'S,

(53°17 E, AM KS16535; 2 co or, Cudgen, 2816'S,

(53°33'E, OM Si26!2; o, Engadine, Sydney, AM

K516607; 2, Gladesyille, Sydney, AM KS19655, 9,

Glenhaven, 31°) 'S, 51°58’ E, AM KSL9697; 9,

Goonengerry; 28°37'S, (53°26'E, AM KSISTL7; 9,

Gordon, Sydney, AM KSI9704; juv., Gosford,

33°26/S, 151°20'E, AM KS{9673; 9, Grafton,

29°41'S, 152°56°E, NMY; >, same locality, AM

KSI17183; juv,. Macksville, 30°43'S, 1S2°35°E, AM

KS18271; 9, Mona Vale, Sydney, AM KSI8390; 9,

Mooney Mooney, 33°31'S, 151°12' E, AM KS19674,

penulr, o', Mullumbimby, 28°33'S, 153°30'E, AM

KSI97I6; 9, Mumbuila, ce 36°33'S, 149°52'E,

AM KSI97I5; juv., Nadgee, 37°28 °S, 149758 °K,

AM KSI9705S, 9, Nelligen, 35°39°S, 150°D8'E,,

AM KSI6595; cr, 2 juv., Nowra, 34°S3'S,

19036’ E, SAMA N1988505-7; 9, Pennant Hills,

Sydney, AM KS19672, ©, Stotts Island, Tweed

River, 28°16'S, 153°30'E, QM 512593; juy,, Taree,

31°54'S, 152°29° B, AM KSI6680; 0, Tholoom,

28°37'S, 152°25'E, AM KS16605; 2 juy., samc

locality, AM KSi663l; 9, Turramurra, 31°20°S,

150°59'E, AM KSI9699. Victorias oO, 3 99,

Noorinbee, 37°3L'S, 149°10' BE, AM KS19948, AM

KS!9719-21; ©, Nowa Nowa, 37°44°S, 148°06'B,

AM KSI9718.

The hirsuta Group

Two species, H, Airsura and H. neglecta, differ

from the insignis group only in the lower number

ef coils in the embolus of the male and

spermathecae of the female, the retromarginal

cheliceral teeth being closer to the fang base and

the female epigyaurno relatively broader posteriorly.

The group has a northern distribution.

Holeonia hirsuta (L. Kach)

(Figs §, 11, 20, 29-30, 36)

Isopeda hirsuta L. Koch, 1875; 693, pl, 59, tig. |.

Holotype co, Bowen [20°0)'S, 148"15'E],

102 D. B. HIRST

FIGURES 29-34, Holconia female epigyne, 29-30, H. hirsuta (L. Koch); 29, holotype H. subdola Thorell; 30, SAMA

N1988517, spermathecae. 31, H. neglecta holotype, spermathecae. 32, H. westralia allotype, spermathecae, 33-34,

H., colberti: 32, allotype; 33, paratype NMV K-0922, spermathecac. Seale line 0.5mm.

HOPCONIA (HE PEROPODIDAE) ina

Queensland, ZMH (Mus. Godeffray Nr 11013), left

palp examined (whole specimen in poor condition,

not able to be sent).

Holeonia Airsute; Hirsi, 1990: 18.

Holeania subdola Thorell, (881; 304. Holotype, 2,

Somerset [J0°45'S, 142°35°E], Queensland, 1875,

L.M. D’Albertis. MCG, examined. New synonymy,

Diagnosis

From other species by the male having only 7!

Io 8 ensbolic coils (except A, neelecra in which the

unknown male is also expected to have a similar

coil number), a shorter palpal tibial apaphysis and

small subemboli¢c apephysis, From A, neglecta in

the female by the epigynuni lateral rims being

somewhat parallel in anterior half then diverging

sharply to broad. posterior halt, epigynal sclerite

small and relatively short,

Female (holotype A, subdola Thorell)

Ob 11.8, CW ILL. AL 12,5, AW 9.0.

Colour in alcohol: Carapace and legs dark

reddish-brown: caput and striae darker. Abdomen

yellow-brown with patches of orange sete.

Eyes: AME 0,78. AME: ALE: PME: PLE = |:

1.18: 0.62; 1. Interspaces;s AME-AME 0.44,

AME-ALE 0,51, PME-PME, 1.36, PME-PLE 1.32,

AME-PME 0.74, ALE-PLE 1.10. MOQ, aw: pw:

] = 2,33: 2.56:.2.31. Width of clypeus to AME 0.36.

Chelicerac: retromarginal teeth Sy distal looth

subequal to subdistal tooth. Labium: 1. 1.96, W

2.42. Sternum: L 6,20, W 5.38. Legs: anterior leg

ratios | = 3.7, ll = 45.

Epigynum: (Fig, 29) lateral rims diverging sharply

mid-length to broad posterior, epigynal sclerile

small. relatively short,

Mule QM $12592

Cl 9.32, CW 9.08. AL. 10.65, AW 6.75,

Colour in alcohol; Carapace orange-red, suffused

wilh black; posterior margin yellowish; caput

reddish. Chelicerac mavxillae and labium reddish.

Sternum- and coxae orange, Legs yellow to orange-

red. Abdomen vellowish-brown with faint mottled

pattern and dorsal anterior pale s{reak of brown

and orange selacy verter yellowish with brown

sulfusion.

Eyes: AME 0.66. AME: ALE; PME: PLE = |

).15: 0.69: 1,14. lnrerspaces; AMB-AME 0.27,

AME-ALE 0.30, PME-PME 1,18, PME-PLE 1.41,

AME-PME 0.82, ALE-PLE 0.85, MOQ, aw: pw:

] = 2.27: 2,59: 2.30, Width of clypeus lo AME 0,27,

Labium: L. 1.67, W 1.83. Sternum: L 5.01, W 4.41,

Legs: anterior leg ratios | 4,7, EL not available

(legs missing),

Palps: Embolus with 8 coils. Holotype with 7’

coils (Fig, I).

bariution

Carapace length of male QM $12603, 11.3.

Embolus with 744 coils. Carapace length of females,

11.48-14.50, mean 13,22 (n-9). Vulva of SAMA

NI988517 with 8 insemination ducer coils, Cheliceral

reeth usually with a space subequal lo-a tooth width

between median and subdistal teeth

Distribution

Occurs in north-east Queensland from Cape York

south to Townsville, westwards to Hughenden (Fig.

36), A juvenile from Floraville Station near

Burketown and a female from Burketown ape

tentatively included although the epigynum shape

of the female is not characteristic.

Other material examined

Queensland: G, Burketown, 17°45°S, 139°33'E,

AM KS16643; 9. Cape Pallarenda, J9°11°S,

Idp°d6'E, OM 812599; 9. Chillagoe, 17'09'S,

144°3)/E, GM $12600; @, Davies Creek, 16°55°S,

145°32'E, OM 812601; co, Finch Hatton, 21°09'S,

148'38'EB, OM $2592; penull, o, Hughenden,

20°51 'S, 144°12' E, OM S12602; juw,, Floraville Stn

1814'S, 139°52'E, QM; juv., Mingeta, 19°53°S,

146°38°E, QM; o, 3 2G, 3 juv., Mt Malley,

16°41'S, [45°20° E, QM $]2603; juy,, Townsville,

19°16'S, 146 '49°R, SAMA NI9885E8; ¢, Wenlock

Goldfield, 13°05'S, 142°57'E, SAMA NI988517,

Holcania nevlecta sp. nov

(Figs 31, 36)

Types

Holotype: @, on snappy gum, 50 km SW Wave

Hill, 17°27'S, 130°¢50°E, Northern Territory, 31,

viii, 198), Hi, Parnaby, AM KSI8913,

Paratype: 9, same data as holotype bul 2130

hours, riverside vepetauioan, AM KS19957,.

Diagnosis.

Males unknown. Females diagnosed by the

epigynum with Taleral rims diverging gradually to

broad posterior margin; epigynal selecite broad at

first chen rapidly nurrowing. Vulya with

insemination duets coiled & times.

Holotype female

CL 12.85, CW 12.42. AL 14.50, AW 9.80,

Colour in aleohol: Carapace orange-red; caput

reddish with whie adpressed setae, dense in aculay

area; sparse black-brown setae form transverse band

in region of fovea. Chelicerae dark reddish; yellow-

brown seiac und adpressed white setae. Maxillae and

labiunt red-brown. Slernur orangé-brown, sparse

upright yellow-brown and adpressed white setae,

104 D. B. HIRST

FIGURE 36. Distribution of Holconia insignis (Thorell) ©, H. flindersi @, H. murrayensis A, H. hirsuta (L. Koch)

W@, H. neglecta V, H. colberti & and H. westralia 1.

HOLCONIA (IETEROPODIDAP | ios

Coxae yellow-brown. Lees with yellow-brown

femora, anterior pairs red-brown distally with

blackish suffusion; remaining segments red-brown;

tibiae with blackish suffusion at ends. White setac

ventrally on femora, patellae and medially on tibiae.

Abdomen yellowish with yellow anterior streak;

orange-brown setae forming a spotted paltern;

venter yellow.

Eyes: AME 0.78. AME: ALE: PME: PLE = I:

1.0%: 0.64! 1.10. Interspaves: AME-AME 0,50,

AME-A1LE 0,58, PME-PME 1.68, PME-PLE 1.85,

AME-PME 0.79, ALE-PLE 1,23, MQQ, aw; pw:

1» 2,50:.2,96: 2.33. Width of clypeus to AME 0,32,

Cheliverae: retromarginal teeth 4; distal tooth

curved towards anterior, subequal to subdistal

tooth, Labium: L 2,26, W 2,68. Sternum: Lb 7.12,

W 5.73. Legs: anterior Jeg ratios | = 3,8, 11 = 4,3.

Epigynum: (Fig. 31) lateral sides diverging Lo

posterior, epigynal selerite large, curved, narrowing

posterjorly.

barfation

Carapace leneth af paratype, 12.54.

Distribulion ana remarks

Northern Territory and northern Western

Australia (Fig. 36). A female from Alice Springs 7s

telitatively considered to belong to ibis taxon. A

juvenile trom Mirchell Plateau is probably not

conspecific as it has a reddish-brown stetnum with

blackish sulfusion anteriorly and a yellow-brawu

posterior margin. The abdomen is got as distinctly

marked dorsally while the venter resembles that of

fi, immanis but is orangish with orange-browh

conlained within whitish “LU shaped markings,

Etymology

The specific epithet reflec the paucity of malure

specimens available for study and the cenmsequent

incomplete treatment of this species.

Other material examined

Northern Territury: 9, Alice Springs, 23°42'S,

(33°52’E, SAMA NJ988519; 2 juv., Hooker Creek,

1820'S, 130°38'E, AM KSI8912, AM KS20502-

Western Alistraliar juv., Halls Creek, I8°l4’S,

127°40' B, SAMA N1989274; penult. co, De Grey

River, 20°20'°S, 119°13'E, WAM 88/871; juv.,

Hooley, 21°53°S, 118°13'R, WAM 88/881} juy,,

Lower Carawine Gorge, 2129'S, 121°02'E, WAM

88/1822; penule. co, Millstream), 21°95"S, 117"04'E,

WAM 88/898; juv., Mitctrell Plateau, 14°49'S,

125"50'E, WAM §8/2014; penulr. o, Mi Vernon,

24°9'S, 118"02'E, WAM 88/906,

The colbert( Greup

The two species, H. colbert and HH. westralia,

have tuslightly higher carapace, clypeus width about

half diameter of AME and four retromarginal

cheliceral teeth. The male embolus is coiled between

10 to 113% limes. The group has a southern

distribution.

Holconia colberti sp, nov,

(Figs 7, 12, 33-34. 364)

Types

Holotype: o, sile 59, drift tence pitfall trap, 14.4

km SE Walpeup, 35°11'S, 142° 'B, Victoria, Jan.

1987, A.L. Yen, NMV K-0919.

Allotype: 9, Lake Battah, 34°44°S, 142°21'B,

Mallee, Victonia, Oct, 1915, JE. Dixon, NMV

K-0920,

Paratypes: 9, same dala as allatype, NMY

K-0921, G, Kewell, 36°31'S, 142°21'B, Victoria,

Noy. 1892, JA, Kershaw, NMYV K-0922_

Diagnosis

Carapace hieli but flactish above, Male embolus

with Lh4 to 144 coils; subemtbolic apophysis

broud, Females with relatively short, broad epigynal

sclerite; insemination ducts coiled 11 Gomes.

flalotype male

CL 10,95, CW 10.42, AL 13.50, AW 8,65,

Colour in aleohol; Carapace reddish-brown,

darker suffusion; lateral eye surrounds blackish

mesally. Blackish setae on carapace; some white

setae in Ocular area. Chelicerae dark red-brown to

blackish; long yellowish and shart recumbent setae

Manillae and labium as chelicerae. Sternum orange-

yellow, Coxae yellowish, Legs red-brown; fernora

paler with blackish suffusion at base proventrally>

spine bases darker red-brown; setae blackish; sparse

white recumbent setae on femora, patellae and

tibiae, mostly proveniral. Abdomen dorsally

yellowish with brown markings; anterior median

streak indistinct; venter pale yellow.

Eyes: AME 0.64, AME: ALE: PME: PLE = |:

1.22: 0.75: 1.19. Interspaces: AME-AME 0.56,

AME-ALE 0.38, PME-PME 1.47, PME-PLE 1.75,

AME-PME 1.16, ALE-PLE 1,25. MOQ, aw: pw:

| = 2,56: 2.97: 1.31, Width of clypeus to AME 0,52.

Chelicerae: retromarginal teeth 4, closely spaced;

distal subequal, angled more anteriorly. Labiuim

L 1.78, W 2.14. Sternum: L 5.88, W 4.99, Legs:

anterior leg ratios | = 4.3, IL ~ 4,9.

Palps: Embolic base relatively large; subembolir¢

apophysis broader than in other species (Fig. 7}.

Embolus coiled almost 114% times.

Allatype Jermale (as male exept as (ollows)

CL 12.95, CW 12.65, AL 17.00, AW 12,50.

Colour in alcahot; dark red-brown,

106

Eyes: AME 0.72. AME: ALE: PME: PLE = L

1.28: 0,67: 1.15, Interspaces AME-AME 0,55,

AME-ALE 0.6], PME-PME 1.61, PME-PLE 2.06,

AME-PME 1, ALE-PLE 1,36, MOQ, aw; pw: | =

2,56; 2.94: 2,64, Width of clypeus to AME 0.34.

Labium: L 2.36, W 2.65_ Sternum: L 6.74, W 5.68.

Legs: anterior leg ratios 1 = 4.0, IT = 4,7,

Epigynum: (Fig, 33) nol much broader

posleriorly; epigynal sclerile relatively short.

Variation

Carapace length of males, 10.56-12.65, mean

11,53 (n=3; embolus of 2 specimens coiled Ll 4

times and 1 coiled L1'4 times), Carapace length of

fernales, 11,02-14.89, mean 12.70 (n=16). Vulva of

paratype NMV K-0922 (Fig, 34) with sharply

curved spermathecal sacs and {1 insemination coils.

Two specimens have 5 retramarginal ieeth on either

left or right chelicera and a further two are with

5 on both chelicera, One male has only 3 teeth on

the left chelicera. Leg Il rnay be relatively shorter

than in other species and the anterior legs appear

more robust,

Distribution

Western Victoria from Broughton eastwards to

Elmore, and Hattah Lakes southwards to at least

Marong near Bendigo (Fig. 34). One female from

Melbourne may have been Lransported in with

timber,

Etymology

Named aller the owners of a property SW of

Broughton, Victoria, where J had the opportunity

to collect several specimens,

Other material examined

Victorfa: 2 ovo, 8 29, peoule co, SW

Broughtan, 36°12’S, 1[41°919'E, SAMA

NI1989605-15, juy., sarne locality, SAMA N1989275;

om, 3 99, Charlion, 36°16'S, 143°21'E, AM

KS19949. ©, Blizabeth St, Melbourne. NMY: juv.,

Elmore, 36°30°S, 144°97' 6, SAMA NI990273; >,

Hattah Lakes, 34°44'S, 142°21°FE, AM KS19951;

penult. 9, juy., same data ag allorype, NM; juy.,

Kewell, same data as paratype, NM; penull. o,

juy,, mallee serub, western district, Feb. 1884, NMV;

2 9 9, Marong, 36°44'S, 144°08"E, AM KS19952,

AM KSI9955; juy., Quyen, 35°04'S, 142°14’E,

NMV; &, juv., Warrackmabeal, 36°15'S, 142°24° BE,

NMVY.

Holconia westralia sp. nov-

(Figs fi, 13, 21, 32, 36)

Types

Holotype: of Salmon Gums Pre-Primary

Schoul, 32°S9'S, 121°39’'E, Western Australia, 11.

ii. 1983, N. Contreau, WAM 86/688.

©, B HIRST

Allotype: 9. on log, WL South Camp, Woodline,

31°54’S, 122"24'E, Western Australia, WAM

Goldfields Survey, Aug. 1980, W.E. Humphreys er

al, WAM 88/926.

Paratypes: or, Yellawdine, 31°18'S, 119°39°E,

Western Australia, 6 xi. 1970, W.H, Butler, WAM

86/683; 9. .N of Lake Hope, 32°16'S, 120°16'E,

Western Australia, 26. ix, 1978, Barron and Harold,

WAM 88/890,

Diagnesis

Carapace slighuly convex; chelicena usually with

4 retromarginal teeth, Male embolus with 10 to 1044

cails. Female with long narrow epigynal sclerite.

Halalvpe male

OL 11.82, CW 11.0). AL 11,95, AW 8,25,

Colour in alcohol; Carapace orange-red,

posterior and laterals paler; caput dark red.

Cheliverae dark red-brown; yellow setae; some

adpressed white setae proximally. Maxillae and

labium dark red-brown. Sternum yellow-brown;

brownish and white sétae, Coxae yellowish. Anterior

Jegs orange-red, posterior legs yellow-red; metatarsi

and tarsi reddish. Setae bases dark coloured:

numerous clumps of whitish setae dorsally, Venter

of patellae and tibiae medially with long whitish

setae. Abdomen yellow-brown with darker paiches;

3 indistinct pales of blackish spots; anterior streak

with orange-red selae; yenter yellowish; yellow-

brown selae,

Eyes: AME 0.71. AME: ALE: PME: PLE = i:

124: 0.73: 1.07. Interspaces; AME-AME 0.41,

AME-ALE 0,35, PME-PME 1,15, PME-PLE 1,30,

AME-PME 0.86, ALE-PLE 0,87, MOQ, aw: pw:

1 ~2.41; 2,62: 2.56, Width of clypeus to AME 0.5).

Chelicerae: retromarginal teeth 4 consisting of a

small basal tooth and 3 well-spaced larger teeth of

which the distal is smallest (Fig, 21). Labium: L 1.94,

W 2.24, Sternum: L $.96, W 5,18, Legs: anterior leg

ratios [| ~ 4,5, J) = 5,3,

Palps; Tibial apophysis barely curved inwards at

apes, Subembolic apophysis small, base inclined

(Fig. 4), Embolus with 10 coils.

Allotype female (as holotype except as follows)

CL 11,93, CW 11,18. AL 14,45, AW 11.65.

Eyes: AME 0.71. AME: ALE; PME: PLE - |:

120: 0,69; 1.10, Interspaces:s AME-AME 0.42.

AME-ALE 0,38. PME-PME 1.29, PME-PLE 1.61,

AME-PME 0.92, ALE-PLE 1.01. MGQ, aw: pw:

] = 2.42: 2.68: 2.44. Width of clypeus ta AME 0,45,

Chelicerae: right. chelicera with additional small

basal tooth on retromargin; teeth more closely

spaced, Labium}! L 1.96, W 2.38. Sternum: L 6,09,

W 5.38, Legs: anterior leg rans 1 = 3.9, 11 - 4,5,

Epigynam: (Fig. 31) epigynal sclerite long,

narrow,

HOLCON?4 (HETEROPOBIDAL) 107

variation

Carapace length of males, 9.80-11.65, mean 10.91

(n=7).. Embolus coils 10 to 104). Carapace length

of females, 11.55-13.52, mean 12.53 (n=11), Most

often with 4 retromarginal cheliceral teeth, rarely

with 5 on both chelicera.

Disiribution

Semi-arid and areas of moderate rainfall in south

west Western Australia (Fig. 36),

Other material examined

Western Australia: @, Booanya, 3246'S,

123°26'E, NMY; 2 juv., same locahty, AM

KS19647, AM KS19658, 6 juy., Buninzonia Spring,

ca 31°25"S, 1239394 B, WAM 88/2047-50, WAM

88/2052-3; juv., Cottesloe, Perth, WAM. 12/5132;

2a, 2 99, 3 juv., Darlington, 31°55’S8,

16°04'E, WAM &4/642-4, WAM 88/1833-4,

WAM 88/ 1836-7; juv., Diemals, 29°40'S, 19°18’ B,

WAM 88/872; ©, Fremantle, Perth, WAM 88/1845;

juyv., Glen Forrest, 31°55°S, 116°06°E, WAM

88/1533; 9, Gooseberry Hill, 31°57"S, 116703 °B,

WAM &88/f850, G, Howea, 31°52'S, 116°06'E.

WAM 88/1856; 2 crot, Kalamunda, 31°58'S,

116"03'R, WAM 88/1858-9; of, Kalgoorlie,

30°45'S, 121°28'B, NMV; 2 20, 1 juy.

Katanning, 33°41'S, 117°33‘E, WAM 88/884-6,

juy., Lake Indoon, 29°52°S, 115°09'E, WAM

88/2440; ju, Madura, 3/°53'S, 127°03°E, WAM

88/894) juv., Mahogany Creek, 31°54'S, 16°08" E,

WAM 88/I87L: @, Midland Junction, Perth, WAM

88/897; juv., Mr Pleasant, Perth, WAM 88/1881;

of, Parkerville, 3153'S, 16°08" E, WAM 86/667;

®, Pearce, 31 40°S, 16°01" EB, WAM 88/915; cr,

Perth, 31°57'S, 11S"S1'E, WAM 86/668; 9,

Joodyay, 31°33'S, 116°28'E, WAM 88/916; 2juM,

Walk Walkin, 30°49’S, 117919" BE, WAM 40/1075-6;

juv,, Wanneroo, 31°45’S, 115¢48/ FE, WAM 88/1772:

penult. o, Wellard, 32°96°S, 113°51'E, WAM

RR/1919: ©, Wembley, Perth, WAM 88/1921; 5 juy.,

Woodling, 31°53°S, 1227'27'R, WAM 88/2090,

WAM) 88/2099-100, WAM. 88/2104; juv..

Wundowie, 3146'S, 16°23 E, WAM 88/931; jus,

Yalgoo, 28°21'S, tl6e41'B, WAM 26/AR3.

The nigrigularis Group

This ‘group’ eonsists of only one species, H.

aigrigularis, which has a flatter carapace,

subembolic apophysis of the male not connected

directly to the tegulum, female with broad

epizynum and relatively straight spermathecal sacs,

hy occurs in arid to semi-arid areas.

Holconia aigrigalaris (Simo)

(Pigs 14-17, 25, 35)

lsapoda nigrigularis Simon, (908: 438. Syntype oy

Stat{ion]. 70, Tamala [26°42 5, 113743 6, Western

Australia, ZMB 28.740, examined, Simon (1908)

also lists Northampton, Western Australia, as a

locality record but without giving further details of

any specimen. Whereabouts of thal specimen 15

unknown,

fsoapoda woodwardi Simon. 1908: 437. Holotype

, Statlion]. 93, Kalgoorlie [30°45’S, 121°28°E},

Western Australia, ZMB 28.739, examined,

fsopeda simoni Rainbow, 911: 234. Nom, nay. for

tsopedu woodwardi Simon, 1908, homeanym af

lsopeda woodwardt Hogg, 1902. New syoonymy.

Holeonia nizrigularis: Hirst, 1990: 18,

Didenasis

H. nierigularis is separated from other species by

the flatter carapace. 8-9 times langer than high,

depressed medially. Clypeus width aboul '&

djameter of AME. Abdomen without a distiner

pattern but with grey-black verter. Chelicera usually

with 4 retromarginal teeth, Male embolic base with

‘prodistal low rounded subembolic apaphysis nol

fixed to tegulum) striations near embolus originy

embolus usually with 9 to 944 coils but may have

a half coil more or less. Female epigynum broad,

rounded. Epizynal sclerite narrow; short (o

moderate length. Sperorathecal sacs slraight lo

gently curved,

Holoivpe male

CL 7.7, CW 7.5. AW 9.0, AL 5,5

Colour in alcohol; Carapace reddish-yellaw, sinae

reddish; White and brown-black adpressed setae,

Chelicerae reddish with erect yellow-while setae.

Maxillae and Jabiumt orange-red hrown. Sternum

yellowish medially; margins and anterior portion

yellaw-brown. Palps yellowish; eymbium yellow-

brown. Coxae cream-yellow. Legs orange-yellow.

Abdomen dorsally yellowish with clusters of

reddish-brown or orange setac forming a vague

patterny verter with large ill-defined grey-black

patch.

Eyes: AME 0.54. AME: ALE: PME: PLE « I:

Ld: O05): 1. Interspaces;) AME-AME 0.25,

AME-ALE0,32, PME-PME 1.33, PME-PLE 1,50,

AME-PME 0.74, ALE-PLE 0.97. MOO, aw; pw:

1] = 2.44; 2.50: 2.10. Width of clypeus to AME 0.13,

Chelicerae; retromarginal teeth 4, closely spaced;

distal tooth shorler than subdistal. Labium: L 1.36,

W 1.54. Sternum: L 4.4, W 3.7, Legs! antertor leg

ratios | = 4.7, If = 5,5,

Palps: Embolus coiled 8: times.

Female ZMB 28.739 (halotype /sopoda waodwara)

Simon)

CL 12.0, CW 11.5. AL 16.4, AW 12.7.

Colour in alcohol: cephalothorax and legs darker

than holotype, abdomen without pattern) venter

yellow-brown.

108 0,6, HIRST

Eyes: AME 0.74, AME: ALE: PME: PLE = t-

Lik: 0.54: 0.69 Interspacess AMB-AME 0.38,

AME-ALE 0.53, PME-PME 1,43, PME-PLE 1.35,

AME-PME 0,73, ALE-PLE 1.08. MOQ, aw: pw:

] = 2.35: 2.54: 2.1L Width of glypeus to AME 0,14,

Labium: 1 2.00, W 2,50. Sternum: L 6.70, W 5.40.

Legs: anterior leg ratios £ ~ 3,8, If = 4.5.

Epigynum: (Fig, 25) Anteriar broadly rounded;

lateral rims somewhat parallel, barely diverging, not

much broader posteriorly, Epigynal sclerite narrow,

less than half length of fossa,

kariation

Carapace length of males, 9.58-11,86, meari 10,64

(n=9). Embolie coils 9 ta 944. but one specimen has

Rl as in the holotype while anotter has 944.

Carapace length of females, 10.24-13.67, mean

12.02 (n=21), Insemination duct coils 9, Abdomen

dorsally inay have a pattern consisting of 3 pairs

of large brown-black patches.

Distribution and remarks

Oveurs in arid and semi-arid areas of Austraha

from the west coast of Western Australia through

South Australia and southern Northern Territory

to south-western Queensland, western New South

Wales and north-western Victoria (Fig. 35).

Although a large spider, is often found in areas of

low trees or mallee where it lives in hollows in the

trunk as well as under bark, Hogg (1896) incorrectly

identified (wo female specimens (in NMYV) of this

taxon fro Alice Springs as Foconia dalosa.. The

three male specimens from the same locality have

hot been seen but are probably also H, nierigularis.

Other material examined

Western Ausiralias 9, Buningonia Spring,

31°24°25"S, 123°34'20"E, WAM 88/845; 3 juv.,

same locality, WAM 88/2052-4; juv., Burnabinmah

Station, 28°47°S, 117°22'E, WAM 88/866; 9,

Goongarrie, 29°53'S, 121°10' BR, WAM 88/880; >,

Gullewa, 28°39'S, 116°19'B, WAM 88/1853; 92,

Kalgoorlie, 30°45'S, 121°28°E, NMY¥; 9,

Messengers Patch, 28°41'S, 116°S7'E, WAM

88/896; or, Mc Margaret, 28°48"S, 122"11'°B, WAM

f6/663; 9, Naretha 3100'S, 124°S0'R, WAM

88/1887) 9, North Irwin River, 28°50'S, 114°42’ B,

WAM 88/910; o, Randells (Siding), 30°57'S,

122°15'F, BYM 56/A37: juy, Yundamindra,

29°18 S, 122°25'E, WAM. 88/2127. South

Australia: o, Bookabie, 31°51 'S, 132°42'E, SAMA

N1988496; penult. 9, Cook, 29°49'S, 130°07'E,

SAMA N1L988480; 2 99, Durkin, 30°17'S,

133°44'E, SAMA NI988476-7; o, Fowlers Bay,

32°00'S, 132°27'E, SAMA N1I988486; 9, Gawler

Ranges (without exact locality), SAMA NI98R488;

juy., Lake Acraman, 32°00'S, 135°32’E, SAMA

NI988489; 2 9 , penult. co, Lake Gilles, 32°38'S,

136°53'E, SAMA NI988490-2; 9, Lincaln Gap,

32°36'S, 137°35'E, SAMA NI988495; 9, &,

Locks Well, 30°40'S, 136°03'E, SAMA

NI988482-3; 2 oro, Mabel Creek, 29°10'S,

134+10'E, SAMA N1988484-5; ©, Mt Ives Staton,

32°26'S, 136°04'E, SAMA NI1988487; juv., Mt

Willoughby, 27°58'S, 134°09'E, NMYV; or, ‘North®

(no exact locality), SAMA N1988497; co, 9, juv,,

Renmark, 34°10'S, 140°45'E, SAMA

N1988498-500; juv,, Stuarts Range, ca 29°00’S,

135°00'E, SAMA WN198848]; 2 99, Yardea

Station, 32°23’S, 135°31'E, SAMA N1988493-4;

2 juv., Vokes Hill (no exact locality), SAMA

N1988478-9; 3 9 9, Wynbring Rocks, 30°33’S,

133°32°E, NMV, Northern Territory: @, Alice

Springs, 23°42'S, 133°52'E, NTM A78; 9, same

locality, NMY, juy., Hermannsbure, 23°57°S,

132°46°E, SAMA NI988502; penule. co,

MacDonnell Ranges, cu 23°40'S, 133°00°E, SAMA.

NI988501; or, Mc Gillen, 23°43'S, 133°48'R, NTM

A9S; ©, Todd River (no exact locality), NTM Ald,

Queensland; o, Thargomindah, 28°01'S,

143°48°E, QM S12594, New South Wales: 9°,

Nymagee, 32°04°S, [46°19'E, AM KS16632; 2

9 ©, Springs Creek, 31°43'S, 142°4,'E, SAMA

NI988503-4. Victoria: o, Hattah, 34°41'S,

142-18'E, NMY; or, Meririgur, 34°26'S, 141°26’R,

NMV; juv., same locality but 34°24°S, 141°23'E,

NMYV; co, Millewa, 34°44°S, 141°04'E, NMV; cr,

Walpcup, 35°1L'S, 142°L1’E, NMV,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

1 am enateful to the following for the loan of material

and lypes or for information regarding the location of

types: Dr Giuliano Doria (MCC), Dr M.R. Gray and Ms

C. Horseman (AMI, Dr J. Gruber (NHMW), Dr R,B.

Halliday (ANIC), Dr 'T, Kronestedt (NHRM), Dy BY.

Main (BYM), Dr M. Malipatil (NTM), Ms C. MePhee

and P. Lillywhite (NMV), Dr M. Moritz (ZMB), Br G.

Rack (ZMH), Dr R.R, Rayen (QM), Dr F Renner (SMNS)

and Ms J. Waldovk (WAM). Funding was provided by an

Australian Biological Resources Study (AURS) grant,

HOLCONIA (HETEROPODIDAE) 109

REFERENCES

BONNET, P. 1957. ‘Bibliographia Araneorum’. Vol. 2 (3).

Douladoure, Toulouse.

HIRST, D, 1989, A revision of the genus Pediana Simon

(Heteropodidae: Araneae) in Australia, Rec. S. Aust.

Mus. 23(2): 113-126,

HIRST, D, 1990. A review of the genus /sopeda L. Koch

(Heteropodidae: Araneae) in Australasia with

descriptions of two new genera. Rec. S. Aust. Mus.

24(1); 11-26.

HOGG, H. R. 1896. Araneidae. /n ‘Rep. Horn Expedition

to Central Australia’, Pt 2 Zoology, Dulau and Co,,

London.

HOGG, H. R. 1902. On the Australasian spiders of the

subfamily Sparassinae. Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond. 2:

414-466.

KARSCH, F. 1878. Exotisch-araneologisches. Zeits.

gesam. Naturw, 51: 323-333, 771-826.

KOCH, L. 1867, Beschreibungen never Arachniden und

Myriapodeén. Verh. zool-bot. Ges. Wien, 15: 857-892.

KOCH, L. 1875. ‘Die Arachniden Australiens, nach der

Natur beschrigben und abgebildet’. Bauer and Raspe,

Niirnberg.

LATREILLE, P. A. 1804. Tableau methodique des

Insectes. Nouy, Dict. Hist, Nat, 24; 129-200.

MAIN, B. Y. 1985. Mygalomorphae. Jn D. W. Walton

(Ed.). ‘Zoological Catalogue of Australia’. Vol. 3.

Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra.

RAINBOW, W. J, 1911. A census of Australian Araneidae.

Rec. Aust. Mus. 9: 107-319,

SIMON, E. 1880. Revision de la famille des Sparassidae

(Arachnides). Act. Soc. Linn, Bord. 34: 223-351.

SIMON, E. 1892. ‘Histoire naturelle des Araignées’. Vol,

2 (1). Roret, Paris.

SIMON, E. 1903, ‘Histoire naturelle des Araignées’. Vol.

2 (4). Roret, Paris.

SIMON, E. 1908. Araneae, Premiére partie. /n W.

Michaelsen & R. Hartmeyer (Eds), ‘Die Fauna Sudwest-

Australiens? Vol. | (12). Fischer, Jena.

THORELL, T. 1870. Araneae nonnullae Novae

Hollandiae, descriptae. O/vers. Kong. Vet-Akad. Forh,

27 (4): 367-389.

THORELL, T. 1877. Studi sui ragni malesi e papuani,

I, Ragni di Selebes raccolti nel 1874 dal Dott. O, Beccari.

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova 10; 341-634,

THORELL, T. 1881, Studi sui ragni malesi ¢ papuani, II.

Ragni dell’Austro-Malesia ¢ del Capo York, conservati

nel Museo Civico di Storia Naturale di Genova. Avmn.

Mus. Civ, Stor. Nat. Genova V7: vii-xxvii, 1-720.

THORELL, T. 1887. Viaggio di L. Fea in Birmania e

regioni vicine, II, Primo saggio sul ragni birmani. Ann.

Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova (2) 5: 5-417.

THORELL, T, 1892. Studi sui ragni malesi e papuani,

IV (2). Ann. Mus. Civ, Stor. Nat, Genova 31: 1-490.

WALCKENAER, C. A. 1837. Histoire naturelle des

Insectes. Aptéres, Tome |. Roret, Paris.

WHITE, J. 1790. Sournal of a Voyage to New South

Wales, with sixty-five plates of non-descript animals,

birds, lizards, serpents, curious cones of trees and other

natural productions’, Debrett, London,

ABORIGINAL - ACACIA RELATIONSHIPS IN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

JOHN KEAN

Summary

This paper collates existing information on Aboriginal perceptions and uses of Acacia species in

Central Australia. Aspects of Aboriginal knowledge of the taxonomy, morphology and diversity of

these species are presented, as part of a wider discussion of their economic, social and spiritual

significance to Aboriginal people. The nature and extent of traditional Aboriginal — Acacia

relationships demonstrate a sophisticated level of indigenous knowledge of Acacia and Acacia

dominated ecosystems, that while being unique, is comparable to Western scientific systems.

ABORIGINAL —- ACACIA RELATIONSHIPS IN CENTRAL AUSTRATIA

JOHN KEAN

KEAN, J, 1991, Aboriginal-deaeia relationships in Central Australia. Ree. S. Aust, Mus, 24(2):

(1124,

This paper vollaes existing information on Aboriginal perceptions and uses of Acacia species

in Central Australia. Aspects of Aboriginal knowledge of the taxonomy, morphology and diversity

of these species are presented, as part of a wider discussion of their economic, social and spirirual

signifivance to Aboriginal people, The nature and extent of tnwitional Aboriginal-4Acuciy

relationships demonstrate a sophisticated level of indigenous knowledge of Acacia and lcaci

dominated ecosystems, that while being unique, is comparable to Western scientific systens,

J, Kean, Tandanya Aboriginal Cultural Institute, 253 Grenfell Srreet, Adelaide, South Austeahie

5000, Manuscript received 1S March 1989,

Trees and shrubs of a wide varicty of Acacia

species are dominant in most vegetation formations

in Central Australia, The most notable among these

is Acacia aneura, which gives its popular name

‘mulga’ to vast tracts of country (hroughout the

region. Taken together Acacia shrubs form much

of the living mantle over the Centre's ancient

infertile soils and, as such, are critical to the ecology

of the region. The characteristics and attributes of

the genus were well known to Aborigines whe used

them in a diversity of ways to create secure and

comlortable lives. The significance of the genus to

Aborigines went beyond its economic and dietary

vontribution, lor Acacia was predominant in Lhe

environment in which desert cultures developed.

Accordingly, its importance is reflected in language,

sociality and religious behef,

The firs. part of this paper establishes a broad

overview of the genus Acacia and its distribution

in the vegetation formations of Central Australia.

The second seetlon documents aspects of

Aboriginal knowledge of the taxonomy,

morphology, diversity and distribution of particular

Acacia species, Lt also oulhnes some Aboriginal

perceptions of the genus in relation to its

environmental associations, ecology and

management by fire. The final section examines the

diversity of Acacia use by Aborigines with

particular emphasis on the contribution of Acacia

seeds to (he diet of desert groups. The economy of

seed processing is discussed and recent findings on

the likely benefits to health from eating Acacia seeds

are considered and cases of social and spintual

identification are cited to indicate the complexity

of Aboriginal—Acacia relationships.

Siudyv Area

The area revarded as Central Australia, for the

purposes of this paper, lies between 125°30’ and

140° east and 20° and 29° south. This is the overlap

between the areas defined as Central Australia by

Jessop (1981) and by Hobson (1985). Both are

depicted in Fig. 1, which has been based on a

vegetation map prepared by Beard (1978 in Jessop

1981),

Orthography

Aboriginal statements and explanations will be

used in the text. Where possible, the orthography

used will conform with systems that have been

developed for particular languages by the

collaborative work of linguists, school teachers and

community leaders. Orthographies and language

names are drawn from the map ‘Current

Distribution of Central Australian Languages’

(Hobson 1985) (Pig. 2).

The words Anungu and Yana both mean ‘people’

in Western Desert and War!piri/Kukatja languages

respectively.

BOTANICAL BACKGROUND

The Genus Acacia of the Kamily Mimosaceae

Species of the genus Acacia are indigenous to all

continents exeept Europe and Antarctica, Simmons

(cited in Doran 1983) estimates that there are 1,200

species worldwide. Australia has been the major

centre of proliferauion in the genus, with 729 species

recognised and about 120 species yet to be described

2 1, KEAN

120" 125"

LOW WOGOLANI = WRULLud

MULGA OVER WUMMOCK GHASSLANL?

HUMMOCK GRASSLAND

ey SHRUBLAND

BUNGH GRASSLAND

SUBGULENT STEPPE

SALT LAKE

‘

~ 20"

{ |

| |

\ \

120° 425" 10" 435" 4

‘ , \ £)

145° ya 1ane

— 148

KIGURE | Vewetation of Central Australia (adapted from Beard 1978 in Jessop (981).

(Maslin in Doran 1983). The majorily of these

species occurs in south-west Westerg Australia and

80% of those are endemic to that area (Hopper &

Maslin, cited in Doran 1983).

In Australia, Acacia species are popularly called

‘wattles’ and are dominant in many of the savannah

ecosystems, as they are in various regions around

the world, ‘The Flora of Central Australia’ Jessop

1981) describes 116 species of Acdeva and although

many of these are of economic importance to

Aborigines, only a handful of these will be discussed

in detail in (his paper.

Most Australian Acacia are of the subgenus

Phyllodinue which have their leaves modified to

phyllodes and generally do not have either the

thorns or bipinnate leaves characteristic of the genus

in Other parts of the world (Simmons 1981; 7),

The genus Acacia has several attributes and

specilic adaptations which has made it successful

in Central Australia. dcacia species have been able

to colonise the ancient infertile soils characteristic

of the area through their capacity to fix nitrogen

in specialised root nodules (Doran 1983). Latz

(1982) describes many of the xeromorphic (desert)

adaptations that have enabled Acacia to grow in

conditions of low soil moisture. He puts particular

emphasis on attributes such as enhanced

germination atid vegetative regeneration alter fires

that have recurrently swept the area.

Acacia in the Major Vegetation Formations of

Central Australia

Beard (1981) defined the four major vegetation

formations in Central Australia as buuch grassland,

hummock grassland, low woodland and succulent

steppe. To the north of the Tropic of Capricorn the

two types of grasslands predontinate. South of the

Tropic, where significant rainfall can occur either

in winter or summer, and grading lo the extreme

south where rain is as likely to occur at any time

during the year, hummock grassland is contiguous

with low woodland and succulent steppe. Beard also

indicates that hummock grassland can occur in

response to recurrent liring of areas that would

normally carry low woodland,

In the north the buneh erasslands are conlined

to cracking clays. Hummock grasslands occupy

other substrates including some calcareous soils. In

the south hummock grassland (usually 7rodie spp.)

and low woodland (usually mulga, A. areure) are

found on the acid to neutral soils, while the

ABORIGINAL-4ACAC/A RELATIONSHIPS 113

v0" i Newcastle Waters

GURINDIT

» Halls Creek “Lajamanu

Gas]

| "

WALMATJARRI

ap”

(wage rre7 |

“Belg

WT NAADY DESERT

LARL MACKAY Yuen dum «

ot 'p

\, Aintore “

GIBSON DESERT i Mt, Liebig ” |

PINTUPT/LUMITIA

SOUTHERN LURITIAW ng

NGAATIATIARRAF e ,

Ernabella«

NGAANYATIAREA TIT JANTIATIARA]

SCALE

SCALE _1 : 5 000 000

Tennant Creekt

Lake Maoh’!

re me Ae PK

ous

EASTERN ARRERNTE ater

lice Springs wth n fang

STERN ARRERNTE

FIGURE 2, Current distribution of Central Australian languages (adapted from Hobson 1985).

succulent steppe occupies the alkaline and saline

soils. Beard discusses this basic dualism. He notes

the typical Australian sclerophyllous matrices, such

as Acacia and Triodia communities, occur on poor

leached siliceous soils. A different, more varied,

floral array is associated with the base rich alkaline

and saline soils.

The two most widespread formations are

sclerophyllous in character. They are the hummock

grassland and low woodland, Hummock grasslands,

or ‘spinifex’ communities as they are better known,

cover dunefields and sand plains throughout

Central Australia. They are rarely treeless. Acacia

species are prevalent and scattered throughout these

communities. Most of the Acacia species mentioned

in the text occur in these communities.

The low woodlands are usually dominated by A.

aneura (mulga) and these communities are the

second most extensive in the arid zone. Midgely &

Gunn (1983) state that 1.5 million km? of

Australia’s arid and semi-arid zone are dominated

by mulga communities, often forming dense

monospecific stands. These mulga scrubs are in

themselves extremely variable both morphologically

and because of thé composition of the understorey.

Latz (1982) describes two clearly discernible types

of mulga scrub. ‘Perennial mulga’ has an

understorey of perennial grasses such as Eragrostis

eriopoda (woollybutt grass) while in ‘annual mulga’

an understorey of annual grasses and herbs

predominates, Mulga can also harbour an

occasional eucalypt or contain other Acacia species

such as A. eambuger or A, priinvearpa (Beard

1981), Mulga van also oceur in seatiered stands in

many of the other plant communities of the arid

zone. [ris only in the salt lakes and Milchell grass

communities that it is folally absent (Latz 1982).

The succulent steppe formation is divided int

a number of distinct communities. In the south of

the study area calearcous soils are often dominated

by Mutreana sp. (bluebush) and a number of leacia

have adapted to (hese alkaline conditions, becoming

dominant trees in some areas, 4. culeicola is

significant in the south of the area, while A,

gearginae is common in the east (Larz 1982).

The calcareous byt slightly saline soils are

dominated by 4¢rip/ex (saltbush) communities and

Acacia species are less common, The highly saline

areas ate vegetated principally by Halesarcia sp.

(samphire) and Acacia are absent.

There are many sotaller environmental

assoviations Whose size may belie [heir ecological

signifivance. Acacia shrublands often merge with

low woodland, forming composite mosaics or (as

it happens in the south-east of the study area) Lhey

may stand as distiner entities. There 4. digu/ata and

A. defragenoplhylia form sparse shrublands (Beard

1981). Similarly distinet are some 4, kempeana

(witehetty bush) shrublands which can inhabit the

alluvial soils associated with limestone or dolomite

oulcrops around the central ranges (Latz 1982).

ABORIGINAL CLASSIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION

OF Acacia

Taxonomy

I ix unlikely that there is a single system of plant

classification that will be shared by all Central

Australian language groups. Even within (hese

groups there are inconsistencies. Bach clan may

possess a distinetive linguistic and clussificatory

knowledpe (pers. obs., Walungurru, 1984-5),

However, the following discussion of Aboriginal

plant taxonomy reveals trends that cam be carmpared

J KEAN

with popular European and western scientific

systems,

In Warlpiri, flora classiticarion distinctions are

made on the basis of the following propertics,

woodiness, habitat, growth habit, relative size and

usefulness, including edibility. For example, an

initial assessment is made aecording to whether a

plant is woody or not. Woody plants, such as

Acacia, are watiya, and non-woody plants, such as

grasses, are warna, Ifa plant produces edible parts

it is ivi. I those parts are seed, as is often the case

with Acacia, then itis meurlu, 1f the edible substance

provided by a plant is insect gall or lerp or larvae

itis purma, This catevury also refers to nectar and

honey, which are not utilised trom Acacia,

trom omy research into Central Australian

nomenclature there is no generic terin for lezumes

or lor Acacia. Most nanies lor Acacia are species

specific. Conversely, Aborigines differentiate

between yarielies and subspecies that have not as

yet been recognised by westert) taxonomists. Piele

(1980; 62) refers to the case of A. plychophyllu

which Gugadja [Kakatja] speakers recognise as two

distinct entities, myirrtjalu and tiamunpa. European

taxonomists do nonetheless accept that mulga (4,

aneura) ts & variable species of species complex.

Because of the widespread dominance and

economic importance of mulga (A, eneura) it is not

surprising that there has been a proliferation of

terms to deseribe it in indigenous languages.

Goddard & Kalotas (1988) found that the

Yankunytjatjara ditlerentiate between five -varietees

of mulga (see Table 1), Despite this recognition of

differences the Yankunytjaljara also acknowledue

generic uniformity by using the rermy Aurkuy for all

five varielies,

Knowledge of Species Diversity

Table 1 demonstrates thal (he absence of a written

system for recordiiy plant names did nor inhibir

the development of sophisticaled skills of linguistic

recognition and differenfiation in Aboriginal

TABLE L Five Acacia aneura varieties as recognised by Yaukumy Gar jars speakers (adupted [rom Goddard & Kaloras

1YRR)-

-oOofS pe

Name of Variety Leaf Characteristic

Long, narrow; Phat

Shrubby, blue

Kalpilya

Minyura (deser) mula)

Puyukara Long, narrow, tar

Tiarnalea Long, Narrow, (lal

Winlalyka Common Variable leat Lorry

Most Notable Live

bor making bourmerunes [Kali

Resi) for implemen) manytuctuce and repaic

Seeds nor used ius food

Sevd important food source

ABORIGINAL-ACACIA RELATIONSHIPS 15

culture. But not everybody in the community had

the same level of botanical knowledge (Piele 1980).

The acquisition and retention of such information

would be affected by many factors — regions

traversed, sex, age and even individual spiritual

associations with particular areas of land and

associated totems. Accordingly, knowledge can be

viewed as cither an individual or a

community/cultural attribute.

Latz (1982), in the most systematic study of

ethnobotany of Central Australia, lists 32 Acacia

species as being used for food alone. Nash (n.d.)

lists 37 Acacia as being recognised by Warlpiri,

Warlmanpa, Warumungu and Alyawarre speakers

living in areas to the north of Alice Springs. Twenty-

six Acacia species are described by the Warlpiri

Lexicography Group (1986) and 24 Acacia species

are listed by O’Connell ef al. (1983) in their work

with Alyawarre speakers.

Plant Related Terminology

As well as an extensive knowledge of floral

diversity, speakers of Central Australian languages

can call on a sufficiently specific vocabulary to

allow detailed descriptions of plants and their parts.

In Western Desert languages the same terms are

often used to describe plant parts as those for

human/animal anatomy. Table 2 sets oul some

Yankunytjatjara terms that are relevant to the

description of Acacia.

Acacia Distribution and Soil Associations

Transcriptions of Yapa statements indicate that

they identify the presence of Acacia and other plant

species with particular environmental units and soil

types. In a long explanation of the distribution,

TABLE 2. Yankunytajatjara terms relevant to the description of Acacia. (From Goddard & Kalotas n.d.).

ee ————

Yonkunvtajatjara English Meaning Literal Translation

Term

Unturuntu Flower

Pilyuru Pod (mainly of Acacia and Cassia)

Kalka Seed

You Seed appendage e.g, coloured aril on some Acacia Iris of eye

Kalpi Broad leat Feather

Parka Narrow leaf

[?) Tjanikin Small leaf

Miina Branch, stem Arm

Anangu Tree trunk, main stem Body

Tjarapa Kutjara Tree fork

Wata Base of trunk

Muti Log, stump Knee

Likara Bark

Aturu Lateral root

Tililpa Tap root

Tjilka Prickle, thorn

Taltja Knoi in timber

Murtjul Insect gall Knot, tangle

Unytyunytju Fallen leaves, leat litter

Piliirrpa A dried tree

Wiirwirpa A bare tree

tl6 J KEAN

growth and use of Kanarlarrampi (A. cowlearta) the

following observations were made:

Kirrirdi-kivrirdi yika karri kanarlarrampaj). Wantki,

Kulaka karruwanarlangu kann. karrungkaj Kujaka

kart) kanarlarranpipiyayljala nydnungupiyayijala

Apulaju jintapardukarija. Kala pyampuiu —

nanaiekarraneawurrpa, manjangawulrpa

kanarlarrampaiyt,

‘Lhe Kaarlarrarip( 1s rather tall and wide. It does gor

grow along creeks in white sandy soil, The tee whiel

does wow along sandy creeks and whieh is like the

Aanartarrampi 14 a different one. Whereas the

Kanarlarramp? belongs wo the spinifex country and to

thie mulga serab, (Warlpiri Lexicngraphy Giranp 1986:

10).

While Knowledge of the presence of a plant in

a particular habitat can be linked ro che potential

for its exploitation, the following account of the

exclusion of mulga from a specific soil type points

10 an understanding of Soil as # limiling Factor to

the growth of particular plants:

Muanja kalu pardimi walya yaneka palinyayirnirla

Kujaka larra-larra-parnka. Jarnnga kala karrin

yulyurcpurla manv wantangka, Kulaka yacujumparra

pardimi manjaju Walya maru-mafiirlaju,

The imalya tree grows in very hard firms soil which

onicks. They grow all the year round - it winter and

summen The mulga deesn' grow in the north which

is black soil country. (Warlpiri Lexicography Group

FONG, 21)

Kimber (pers, comm,) has alsu observed that

Aboriginal people distinguish differences im the

‘flavour’ ul some fruits, particularly Kampurarrpa

(bush raisin), when they grow on different sail types.

He notes that both men and women possess a

knowledge of preferred localities for obtaining sweet

Iruits,

Much of the ethnobotanical research conducted

so far has been concerned with the compilation of

species lists, details of plant use, methods of

preparation and ritual associations. The Aboriginal

concepts of soil/plant relationships have been

largely ignored jn (he published lilerature of Central

Ausiraha.

Acacta-Animal Relationships

Aboriginal knowledge of the bush and its animal

resources, though popularly accepted, has often

been mystified, Aboriginal explanations of

Acacia-animal interactions indicate how specitic

knowledge of habitat and feeding relauanships was

used to efficiently exploit loval environments.

Anials are often linked with their habitats and

it is not Surprising that the red kangaroo

(Marerepes rufus) is called ngarrirn’ manjangarna

or ‘mulea dweller’ by the Warlpiri who associate it

with mulga woodlands, Skills of observation and

a detailed Knowledge of feeding relationships are

revealed in the following statement by Mollie

Everard who explains how the presence of birds can

act as an indicator for the availability of edible

honey dew', which forms on the upper branches

of mulga trees when sap sucking seale insects are

present (Latz 1982):

lL. Nyakukaripai. Ka ‘Tjulpu nyara nyawa! Tyulpu

nyara ilura waninyi,’

2. Pika ngurpatja nyakukalipai, pirpipirpira wanani,

1. You spy it-4s youre on the move. ‘Look al the birds

over there! They're all over the place’

. You see — oh, just too much honeydew for words,

glittering along (he branchlets. (Everard, cited (1

Goddard & Kalotas 1948: 41).

The red lav seale if pot collected by Anangu may

be used by honey ants (Camponalus inflatus) which

are alsa associated with mulga woodland. Edimintja

(pers, comim., Ipili Road, 1978) explained how ants

collected the turaija (honey dew) from mulga trees

and carried it viaa tiny hole in the ground to feed

other ants with swollen abdomens in caverns a

metre under the surface, From there the honey ants

could be extracted by humans, after a considerable

eflort (sce also Cleland & Tindale 1959» 134)

Witchetly Grubs (Xyleutes biarpiti) are

Specifically associated with A. kempeuna and in the

recent past formed u crucial part of the diet of many

desert groups. Tindale (1953, 1981) siressed the

importance of this and other species of cossid larvae

in the nutrilion of desert people and in particular

during the weaning of children-

After a visit co the Mt Liebig area in 1992 Cleland

and Johnston reported that witchetty grubs

-; . are much soughi after by rabbit-bandicoats,

Thalacomys lagzetis [now Macrotiy lagotis|. These

scratch ihe soil away trom the roots, but they may be

disturbed or may find the root containing the insects

too difficult for their extraction, The natives, in

searchirin for these grubs, look for places where

marsupials have been burrowing, tf they find the root

has been gnawed through they proceed no further; but

if the root is still intact, then they. wrench jr out and

frequently find the insect (Cleland & Johnstan 1933:

120).

The Ninuw (Macrotis lagotis) is now an

endangered species throughout its range, The

opportumiies for Anangu to exploit the witchetty

erubs excavated by the Nin have largely

disappeared with the animals. On a field trip in

June 1988, the author together with Dr Christopher

Anderson of the South Australian Museum were

travelling with three Pintupt men in the area to

nortlLof the Walangurru Community when similar

ABORIGINAL ACACIA REL ATIONSHTPS

observations were made to (hose of Cleland &

Johnston (1932), As the car passed through sandhill

country there was suddenly an area ol several

hectares dominated by A, Kempeana. Conversation

turned to the animals, We stopped the car and

Within a minute Wilhe Tjungurrayi, who had grown

up traditionally in the desert, located a wilchetly

root thal had been excavated by Ninw. The root was

levered out and (he grub extracted,

Acacia and Land Management by Fire

The most limportant land management tool

available to Aborigines was fire (Hallam 1975; Jones

1969: Kimber 1983; Lalz & Griffin 1978). Late

(1982) indicates that the vegetation of Central

Australia was so adapted co the traditional

Aboriginal fire regime (hat in many ways it was

better able to survive lire than drought, According

to Lata & Griffin (1978) a greal number of food

producing plants respond positively to the incidence

of tire: 50% of the planrs they judge as being most

important lo [he pre-contact econamy inereased in

numbers after burning while only 10% showed a

long term reduction. However, Tire was not used

indiscriminately and the relative tolerance of various

species to burning was taken into acount as specilic

stands of vegetation were burnt for anticipated

results. Latz (1982) described an idealised result of

atypical Central Australian fire regime:

Muximum Acucia seed production will be available

fron? a wiven area Wher burning ty carried oul in such

a Way as to produce a mosaic of plant communities

in different stages of Lire recovery. This includes some

wreas which have been protected from hot summer fires

for considerable periods or have only been subjected

to cooler winter fires (Late 1982: 58).

Latz defines three typical responses of Acacra

species to lire and in so doing indicates the potential

for their management as a food resource:

i) species that are not much affected and

quickly recover, Often producing seed six

months after a lire event (e.g, 4, coriucea),

ii) species in whieh individuals are killed but

seed wermination is enhanced, with seed

production commencing 2-4 years after fire

(ag. 4. diervophlebay,

species killed by fire with significant seed

production eonimiencing only after 5-10

years (e.g, 4, uneurd).

Jt seems that Aboriginal people were alsa aware

af the effect Cire bad on specific plants and plant

assoviations, and that they took these factors into

account in their use of fire, Kimber (1983) conehides

(hat there was 4n understanding of the susceptibility

of mulga (4. anéura) ro fire and a general avoidance

of burning wooded areas, Conversely he uidicates

that spinifes and other graselands were burnt

ini)

routinely in both small patches and on a broad

scale.

European settlement generally suppressed

traditional Aboriginal burning practices. However,

the introduction of land rights, increasing

Aboriginal ownership of vehicles, and the growth

of the outstation movement have been among, (he

factors that have led to the resumption ol

widespread burning, particularly by Pintupi, Luritja

and Warlpini people (Cane & Stanley 1985) (sce Fig.

3).

Adee: ASPECTS OF USE AND SOCIAL

LDENTIELCATION WITH THE GENUS

Acucia: The Diversity of tis Use

Acucia plaats composed much of the living

mantle of the arid zane, Mulga Woodland enveloped

its human inhabitants, giving them shelter and

eo ill

By.

MB Recon! burns

AM Old burns

—— Aned

—

Kielore Mange

A ) of

iil | ll |, at

So ee

‘gt

anne rc i |

FIGURE 3. Mire patierns in the Pintupi homelands, 1981,

1983 (Cane & Stanley 1985).

eile vA

118 J. KEAN

warmth fron firewood that could burn right

through a freecing night. The same trees provided

a habitat for important food animals and timber

for weapans to hunt them. The sced producuen

lrom various Acacia species would have made it

possible for large groups of people to gather lor

ceremonies and be assured of an wbundant supply

of ourritious food (Lutz 1982), A variety of deucta

trees and shrubs provided many of (he medicines

thal Were used lo muiniain health and well-being.

Acacia was thus deeply interwoven with the

economic, social and spiritual lives of Central

Australian people.

Acacia Seeds as Food

The Grinding Process

Smith (1986), in a comprehensive survey of the

archaeological evidence for seed grinding

technology, has demonstrated its vital role in

Shaping ovcupation and patierns of Jand use in

Central Australia, In balancing the forees of

population densily and varrying capavily, seed

grinding may have variously facilitated higher

population densities, extended the rate of toods

available to people, and intensified the use of

resources, This technology remained an integral part

of desert culture until the advent of wheat Pour

with the coming of Europeans. Murika, a Yankuny-

Ljaljara woman, explains the process of dry milling

mulga seeds;

|, Panu ptlungka ijunkupai, Pinungka cunanyi

mun wantiny)

2. Muiiu nyinara yankula nyanganyi. Pilliringany).

3. Wa ‘Ai! Ngayuku mai pilciringu!’ Panya palunya

yalkanilta.

4. Yalkara ka purputukatinyi,

5. Ka nyulkara palunya pungku-pungkula kalkani,

Mure palunya wirangka lunanyi,

6. Munu paluru kanini, kanini palumya Wiraggka

Kanini, Wintalyka palunya.

7 Kanini, muna tjaruwaninyi, mimpungka Gari

warunyi,

K Mutu palunya Walira Kulpanyilta.

9. Munu ngdrangka paluru kativa uokula, ipangks

paunt, mal palunys, ka paluru pilta-pailtatjunanyi.

10. Ka paluru paura, ararangkula, kaniniha. Kanira

kalkani, mai palunya.

IL, Tjiwa urani, manu palunya rumekuni, rungkara

anytjuni.

12, Muu fyaangka, lapalijura palunya mai

rungkani, mai palunya, Ka paluru tapalra

pulaparingu.

13. Ka ngura (jit rutangku nganana pwalkupai.

Nganauia taltuniekupai,

4. Mai paluru pulka, tyamuku Kamiku, mai kubpe.

Neganana mat palula pulkaringu, palawa wivaneka.

|. You put some mulga branches on an old Mat

termite nest and leave them there.

iv)

Then ufter a whilt, ater travelling around « bil,

come back and check if, [ft dries out,

3, SAR! This food of mite has dried out nicely!! Then

you thresh it,

As you thresh il, the pods fal) owt all aver the place.

By rubbing them and lapping chem you get the

seed out, and put if in a dish.

6. Then you yancy [winnow] the mulga seed in the

dish.

7. Once it's yandied, you tip the clean seed into

mimpu bawls,

8. Then load up on your head and return to camp.

9 Having brought i) 16 camp, you parch the seeds

in fotashes, and the hurd seed cases crack open.

10, Afler roasting iL you winnaw and yandy 4 again,

to separate mhe seed inside.

1). ‘Then you get a grindstone, and grind it up, welling

it as you grind

12, You pul 4& collecting vessel beneath the lower

grindstone and it builds in that.

13. We used to cat it as kids. We'd get full.

14. 11'S an important food: a food of our grandfathers

and grandmothers, a strong food. We grew up on

this food, withaut Mour. (Murika, cited in Goddard

& Kalotas 1988; 39-40),

Murika provides a general description of the

process, but seeds may be used in several ways

depending ofi the species. Por instance, larver seeds

are pounded after parching and before grinding.

Other reports indicate that seeds were sprinkled

with water during grinding and the resulting paste

was haked as damper (O'Connell, Latz & Barnett

1983). Seeds o1 some species, such as 4. coriacea,

are collected green [rom the bushes and poasted

briefly on a small fire or burning clumps of spmifex,

Jn this form they have a delicious sulty favour

Seed Processing — &/ficiency and Energy Return

While ‘bush tucker’ is still avidly collected and

usually preferred to canteen’ food by people on the

100 or $0 OUlstanons scattered throughout the

Central and Western Deserts, the abundant seed

resource is now largely neglected (Cane & Stanley

1985). Ready availability of processed white llour

asa direct substitute for ‘bush’ four has prompted

the decline in the use of a wide variety of seed

yielding species (O'Connell, Latz & Barnett 1983).

This is not surprising as although nalive seeds are

more nutritious and (Mavoursome than wheat flour,

they are also very lime consuming to colleer and

Process.

OTonnell, working with Alyawarre women in

1974, recorded the data (presented in ‘Table 3) for

the energy recurh per ubit time taken to collect and

process seed fram (bree Acweva species. Values lor

other desert staples are also included for

comparison,

These data confirm that traditional methods of

collecting and processing Acca secd are inefficient,

especially when compared with energy returns per

ABORIGINALACACIA RELATIONSHIPS 19

TABLE 3. Collecting and processing times and energy returns Jor bush foods (including seed of three species of

Acacia). (Adapled fram O'Connell, Lats & Barnett 1983),

ne UUEEEITEIEEIDEIEIUIEIISI IIE IESSSES SEES SEEDS

Species Collecting Frergy Value Energy return per

and Wale tinte speat

processing collecting and

me processing

(héKy) (K ¢al/Kg) (RK ealéh)

A. aneura 6.50 3778 580

A, coriacea ripe 5.25 355) 676

unripe 0.60 26) 4333

vl, coweleana 6.59 3589 552

Ipomoea coslata ).25 1563 6252

Solanum centrale ().5U 2992 S984

Cossidae grubs LTS 2600 1446

unt! time for other favoured and now more Pupulu Tjupurrula deseribes how (when he was

frequently collected bush foods, such as cossid

grubs (from A. kempeana and a variety of other

plant species), /pamoea costata (wild potato) and

Solanum ventrale (bush raisin),

Acuvia coriacea can be relatively efficiently

collected for it grows as a low tree with 8-12 seeds

in each pod, bul when milled lor use as damper,

the energy return is only slightly greater than Lhat

for A. anevra, Which hus smaller seeds with only

about three seeds per pod. From these data it would

appear (hat the grinding stage of seed processing

is the most time consuming as well as the most

arduous for the Aboriginal women who have

traditionally carried out this task.

When the grinding stage is omitted and the lightly

roasted seeds are ealen al an unripe stage the energy

return is inereased sixfold, In this form the energy

return for A, coriucea is comparable with values for

the other frequently collected staples (see Table 3).

Consequently this species i$ still utilised When the

unripe seeds are available during October and

November (pers. obs., Walangurru, 1984),

Contemporary Implications for the Use of Acacia

Seed as Food

The urge to cseape the drudgery of traditional

food-gathering life and particularly the incessant

seed grinding that was an integral part of i, must

have been a key incentive for the peaple of the

Western Desert to abandon their economic

independence, During mos! of this century ‘sweet

tucker’ in the form of processed flour, sugar and

tea has been provided to Aborigines by the missions

and later govertment settlements fringing the

Western Desert.

a boy) white flour was used by Lutheran

missionaries fo lure his family fram the Walan-

eurru/Mitukatjirri area to a state of economic

dependence in the mission station at Haast’s Bluff:

They [the missionaries] bin makin big home in IIpili

acrodrome, they're sitting dows, Alright, that’s the rume

we lasted lea and flour, Really sweel! Sweet this tucker,

we'll follow this One east. We bin travelling this way

now. Tjina {ou foot] we bin travelling. Right, we saw

Putati [spring sile/ration depot}, Oh! mayi loo much

here — flour, Oh [the missionaries) got'im proper big

box that they pul on the camel. ‘That time our mob

was eating flour. (Kean 1984),

The last ten to fifteen years have seen the

resurgence of an Aboriginal determination for

political and cultural independence, A key

manifestation of this movement hax been the

creation of many small outstations throughoul the

Western and Central Deserts. There are now more

than 2,400 people living on outstations in Central

Australia (see Cane & Stanley 1985). Although these

communities are largely financially dependent on

government subsidies, bush resources in the form

of food, building materials and materials for

artefacts for sale ure also significant in the

outstation economy. Cane & Stanley (1985) have

estimated that in the 53 outstation communities

they surveyed, the equivalent of one meal in four

came from the bush. In financial terms, they

calculated a contribution of $616 per person per

year from bush tucker when the average yearly

income was only $2,500 per person. Given the

development of an appropriate milling technology,

Acacia seed could again be widely used Lo further

120

enhance economic independence of outstation

communities.

Warlpiri and Western Desert women have proved

by their involvement with the seed industry that

there is still an enthusiasm for the collection and

processing of Acacia seed. When Acacia seed has

been in demand by the organisers of local and

overseas re-afforestation programmes, the amount

of seed collected by the women has invariably out-

stripped the market (Baarda 1983; Horner pers.

comm.). Given the demonstrated urge for

independence and the fact that many outstations

are already established on resource rich areas, it is

likely that an efficient milling technology would be

accepted by such communities.

A suitable mill should be robust and virtually

maintenance free to be practical on outstations

where there are few if any substantial buildings. The

availability of appropriate milling technology could

mean the resumption of use of this important

traditional food source where highly developed

skills for seed collecting and winnowing could be

J, KEAN

incorporated without suffering the back-breaking

grinding stage of the process.

As tastes have undoubtedly changed since contact

with European foods, a mixture of Acacia and

wheat flour may now be most palatable to

Aboriginal people. Cherikoff (pers. comm.) suggests

that a mixture with 70 per cent Acacia produces a

good textured damper. It would be Aboriginal

experimentation, however, that finally determined

how and to what extent ground Acacia meal was

used. Resumption of use of the Acacia seed resource

could lead to improvements in the economic and

political independence of remote Aboriginal

communities.

Nutrition and Health

Analyses by Brand & Cherikoff (1985a, 1985b)

demonstrate that Acacia seeds have higher energy,

protein and fat contents than crops such as wheat

and rice. Their results, together with those of other

workers, for the composition of nine Acacia seeds

and one gum exudate are presented in Table 4.

TABLE 4. The composition of Acacia products per 100g edible portion (adapted from Brand & Cherikoff 1985b).

Foods Descrip- Pro- Carbo- Vita.

tion Energy — Wurer fein Fat tivdedte = Albre ASH Na kK Me Ca fe Zu a min

kd # gy g # # z ine ine me my img me me mye

Atacia aneuro and

Acacia kempeona

mulgd and

witchetty husty seeds 2221) 43° 22 30 O55 - yt vy ROS _ ie) - - _ —

Arucia

curiae Dreen seed 627 Sh.K 25.7 33 64 42 6 3 V4. oy 7 did Ib 4 -

dog wood

dry-seed = 1240 4] ua 43 338 2h? 17 4 TR4 170 uty W 3H ifl -

drywed 14911700 RTT RL = 4! “a 3 = eh —- — - _

vue cowleona seed ASH 15.4 22 101 44.6 _ nd Ny MI — W4 = = - -

seed ~ 5.8 ues dR a4 — = -

Aenea

dictvaphleba seed ie 2 Ws 63 49 68 Re 2 — aa = -

Acacia

estraphiolaa

ironwood gum 4p 1h 02 BM ( ib hi 721 v S87 (4) 26 4

Acacia kempeana seed A631 ih 9 3 2 io = Wt H2 2 pas 7 = _ = -

Acuely murntyana

Murray's wactle seed N07 s4 tka i, A 42 4 MAH) 28 PR bo aw (7 —

Acucwy puvhyvhurpe wd SYS tl 22.2 43000 ST _ $a - — — - -

Acacia fenuissnna seed 4GY) 6 20 Bh wer 2Y i (8 VK 144 ha 12 Ld -

seed = 542 45 00 WE 64 33.0 ~ Wl y 372 — Rl) - - -

Leela rectorae

bramble Wattle

AGORIGINAL-ACACTA RELATIONSHIPS Pa

In some Acacia species, such as A. coriacea and

A. tenuissima, most of the oil is in the aril (seed

allachment), The aril is easy to detach and was

traditionally mashed and used as a drink (Brand

& Cherikof? 1985a). The bare seed remains may

then have an oi! content of less than live per cent

(Cherikoff pers, comm).

Cherikoff (pers. comm.) suggests that the

traditional practice of parching the seed before

milling served two Functions — the first being that

they were easier to grind once the hard seed coat

became brilile apd, secondly, that sraall quantities

of enzyme inhibitors are destroyed. resulting ima

food of high nutritional value.

Cherikolf (pers. comm,) also suvgests that one

potentially significant advantage of using Acacia

seed as food is its demonstrated protective role

against Type 2 (non-insulin dependent) diabetes

mellitus. This is a disease of major proportions

among the now sedentary, white Flour and sugar

dependent indigenous people of Australia. Mobbs

(pers, comm.), while acknowledging the extent af

diabetes among Aborigines in the Centre, warns

against regarding rhe eating of Acacia as a panacea

for a disease which she views as also largcly lifestyle

related,

li is interesting lo note that the Kukatja were

aware of the niedicinal qualities of Acacia seeds over

and above their value as food. The following

description is of Mulunturu (4, cariacea):

Mulunturu. Yalpa... good inedigine-. Kalyu -

kurlu - Ju. mix - em - up Gikila - latju wiyala. Mimi

kaniny + tjatva - lu palya mingt ijikieinu - ka palya

~ rin, (juni nguwu- lu mighc be Qarlu- tart

tjikirnu palva - rringu

“eacia seed is good medicine Mix it with Water, Drink

rt anicl ir will make ai etic (of sores and sickness), When

you are sick joternally. Say bad siomach, Perhaps you

might Wave diarrhoea. Drink it and you will hecome

beiper. (Prele nid)

Social and Linguistic Identification with Acacia

The search for an appropriate idiom 4s, in my

experience, as enthusiastically pursued by some

Pintupi and Luritja speakers as it is by the most

imaginative English speakers. The Warlpiri

language also offers colourful expressions. Gne

Acacia-reluted analogy furru-niarntarla, ts used ol

a person who is hard-headed, stubborn, obstinate

and insensitive; literally it means ‘head — AL

pruinocarpa’, a tree which 1s noted for the hardness

ol its Wood (Warlpiri Lexicography Group 1986: 25).

On a broader level Wartpiri recognise the major

vevelation divisioyi that Uns east-wesr across thet

country (al about 22° south} and incorporate it pila

expressions of their identity;

Manijawardingki kurnalu kurticra nyampurla nyjiarn

Panukari kalu oyindmi yalijarra mananukarrarla

Warlpuriyijala,

We ure (he people of the mulyw country who five in

the south here. Grhers live to the north in the spinitex

country. They are Warlpirt also. (Warlpiri lexicography

Group 198G@: 21).

Spiritual and Ritual Links wilh Acacia

Many of the Anangu/ Yapa deseriptions cited in

the previous pages heve their origin in Tiukurmpa

(‘Law* or Dreaming). For the Warlpiri and Western

Desert groups, Tyukurrpa encompasses both events

ol a distant "Creative Era’ and the precedents thar

were established by the ancestral heroes which have

been passed down to the contemporary custodians

af traditianal Aboriginal Law. The activities of

Acdeid ancestors are among the host of human,

animal, plant, celestial and atmospheric

constituents of ihe pre-Eurapean world

commemorated at sites throughout Central

Australia. Individual custodians are spiritually ane

ritually linked 1@ these sites and the particular

ancestors associated with them,

In the following account by Herous & Clark

(1986; 57) of the 4eacia ritual centre Pudlowinnat

in the Simpson Desert, a recurrent link between

ancestral grinds(ones and sites associated with

edible seed hearing Acacia species is established:

There is a song cycle usually referred fo as rhe Grinding

Stone trom Pulawani’ by Mick MeLean who was the

last person wha could chant the verses. The Grinding

Stone referred to is a meuinpe, Matis vot a flat grinding

dish but ou thick lower mill-stone on which rhe seeds

ol stall trees were potnded. The frees were Acerca

ligulata, the sandhill wallle, Aceoia dictyephleba, and

Cassia hemaphila. This song-evele is. a most moving

piece uf lierature It begins with a deseription of

drought, and dry leaves fallin fay the eres. Che next

few verses dre whispered With sharp intensity — let

the dry roats and stumps became green, brighe green.

Then comes a description of shoot wradialls

appearing and roots spreading oor. Then a kult/i a

small round stone is pul under the ee to make ye fruit

with prefuston, The seeds form, they ripen and aye

ground and the dough is cooked, Inthe meanrime tie

ancestral mgamnpa siane disappears, but thy

Pudlowinna people paint up for a ceremony. Ao

Ancestor (Unnamed) finds the stone — i now has a

handle like an axe, He takes it back to the well and

iLwrinds the seed conridally, The song ends with the

ceremonial verses.

A bilingual version of ‘The seed song from

Pulawani’ by Mick MeLean has now been published

(see Hercus 1990). In her introduction to [he

translation Hereus notes that ir. was che main

song used for the increase In mgarre/ jet, That is Naud

seed, such as Acacia and pigtave seed’ (1990: 117).

122 J, KEAN

Widespread association of grindstenes with

particular lcacia plants is further emphasised by

a 1978 painting by Toby Brown Tjampitjinpa. In

this painting (sec Fig, 4) Tjampiljinpa depices the

travels of an anthropomorphic grindstone/woman

through Anmatyarie country. Tjampitjinpa sald

that when the grindstone/woman stopped, mulea

trees grew Out Of her. He explained, that the

prindstone/wornan was a mother and the trees were

children from which mulga seeds could be collected

for food. Jn his painting the rwo largest sets of

concentric cireles represent the Smother’? at her

camps, while the smaller sets of circles emanatiny

from her represent her children, the mulga trees of

the area,

FIGURE 4. Mitlga trees growing oul of a grindstone’

womaa in Anmatyarre country, By Toby Brown

Tiampiqinpa (Papunya Tala Artists),

Clifford Possum Tjapaltjarri, a countryman of

Tiampitjinpa, has also depicted many of the ‘mulga

seed" ritual centres of the dense miuiga woodland

of the western Anmatyarre area. In the tate 1970s

Tjapalyarri complered a series of paintings which

mapped the intersecting paths of many Dreaming

trails over large areas of Anmatyarre country, I)

one of these paintings several sites associaled wilh

mulga seeds were illustrated as surraunded by rhe

symbols-of other significant sites and stories. That

is, the sites are represented as an integral component

of & ‘Totemic Landscape’ (Strchtow 1970),

Tjanypapakanu is an increase centre for mulga

seed and in Tjapaltjarri’s painting (Fig. 5) the site

is represented by the grey concentric circles from

which lines of grey dots appear to he exploding.

This is the site from which mulga erees in this area

are believed to be spread. Established mulga groves

are represented as clusters of grey dors scattered

throughout the painting; the small black

overdatting represents the mulga seeds themselves.

At Rrunyalyitja, to the east of Tjanypapakanu

(see Fig. 6) a seated woman is depicted grind-

ing mulga seed; her top stane is represented as [he

adjacent oval, Tjapaltjarri indicated thar this stone

still survives aS a smooth white rock at Tjany-

papakanu (pers. comim- 1978, 1984), The sections

reproduced in Figs 5 and 6 represent approxirnalely

one quarter of the total area of Lhe painting.

FIGURE 5. A mula seed Increase centre at Tjany

papskanu. Details of a painting by Clifford Possum

Njapaltjarci (collection af the author).

FIGURE 6A woman grinding mulea seed al Rrun-

yalyitja, @ sire to the cast of Tjanypapakanu (above)

Detail of @ painting by Clifford Possunt Tjapaluarri

(collection af (he suthor).

Nash (1984) descnbes traces left in the landscape

by the grinding of 4, feriuissime by an old woman

of the Tjukurepa, The tollowing account illustrates

how distant events are recreated in ceremony by the

contemporary custodrans of this srory:

The northern series af hills adjacent ra ME Liehip ae

believed to have been formed by an olcd woman whe

falat the top of the Mountiuin and wround seeds of

Acovia tenucssiitia incessantly, creating huge piles ot

sends, the Hills The woman's songs anc actions fer

this dreaming vontain many refereinees ty wahyawana.

They simulate many aspecis of gathering and

processive such as Singowing' of sand on darieing

boards Lo represent the wahyawana seeds bein

winnowed in wooden dishes. The dunving bourds

themselves are painicd with wativawana designs

depicting imporrant places and overs in the sequence

of Dreaming events, Yellow dots are painted ro

represent the yellow Adaeva blossoms, (Nust (9B4: 34).

ABORIGINALACACIA RELATIONSHIPS 123

A 1986 painting by Sandra Nampitjinpa of the

Waliyawana story (see Fiz. 7) depicts the same

ceremony as described by Nash. In this small

painting che women are represented as the crescent

shapes, while the adjacent shapes are the dancing

boards in (he performers’ hands. Fighting sticks

topped with cockatoo feathers and decorated with

watiyawana imagery are evoked standing erect at

focal points in (he ceremonial ground, This painting

is in the collection of the South Australian Museum

(AG5163),

FIGURE 7. Watiyawana by Sandra Nampitinpa (adapied

from South Australian Museum A65163)

While each OF (he Aéacia-related Tjukurrpa

documented bere are unique and of signilicarice to

particular Aboriginal groups, they are al the same

time representative of general trends in the belief

systems of Central Australia. Some of the recurrent

themes of the ceremonies, songs and paintings

described invlude the importance of the grinding

technology in the use of Acacia seed as food, the

traditional involvement of women with seed

processing and the expansion of Aegeja species fram

ritual centres scattered widely around Central

Australia. That these ancient themes and precedents

are sull of considerable importance is supported by

their continucd ceremonial celebration, That they

are now also depiered in the contemporary puintings

of the area adds to their significance.

CONCLUSION

Central Australian Aborigines have developed a

specific and substantial knowledge of Acacia and

the ecology of Acacia dominated ecosystems. This

knowledge has been the basis for the rational

exploitation of these ecosystems and for their

Thanagentent by fire. There are still many Aboriginal

experts who are Lhe contemporary custodians of this

cumulative body of knowledge.

Acacia trees and shrubs and the habitats that they

formed were used by Aborigines in a diversily of

ways tO create secure and comfortable lives. But

Acacia was importam for reasons other than direet

economic benefit. Species of the genus permeated

the lives of Central Australian people and their

languages and belief systenrs reflect this importance,

Many traditional economic and social aspects of

Aboriginal-Acacia relationships are still relevant.

The resumption of use of Acacia seed as food is

one important area for investigation and

development, If accepted by Aboriginal

communities, the use of Acacia seed could lead 10

significant improvernents in their health and

economic independence.

There is currently widespread concern over the

ecological change and environmental deterioration

that has occurred in Central Australia during the

last century. The lack of regeneration of long-lived

Acacia species, particularly in the southern area of

the study zone, is pronounced This has been largely

due to the combined over-grazing by rabbits and

cattle. If this trend is not reversed it may lead to

the virtual extinction of mulga and other tree

species in Some areas.

For Aborigines to be assured of a susiainable Maw

of benefits from Acacia species, the health and

diversity of rhe Central Australian environment

must be maintained. Although the ecology of the

region has been disturbed by external factors for

which (here are no traditional prescriptions, il is

only the Aborigines who have a history of rational

and sustainable use of the area.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This paper was inilially prepared as a postgraduate

project at Roseworthy Agricultoral College in 1986.1 am

grateful to Megun Lewis, Feter Sutton and Dick Kimber,

who as my supervisors pave considerable support and

invaluable advice. [tis rhe artists ar Papunya, Walangurru

and Kiwirrkura who eave the bane information and

inspiration for the project. Arpad Kalotas first introduced

me to ethnobotanical concepts, while Daphne Nash, David

Nash, Anthony Pele, Mary Laughren, Vie-Cherikoff and

Mike List provided the unpublished information that gives

substance to the paper Final thanks go to Rod Lucas who

Nias painstakingly edited and updated the original

manitiscript.

124 J, KEAN

REFERENCES

BAARDA, F, J. 1983. Seed business paying off, . . at last.

Aunga Vir AGG). 17-18,

BEARD, J. 5. 1981. Vegetation of Central Australia. /n

J, Jessop (Ed.), ‘Plora of Central Australia’, Australian

Systematic Botany Society und Reed, Sydney,

BRAND, J. C. & CHERIKOFF, V. 19854. Australian

Aboriginal bushfoods: the nutritional composition of

plants Irom arid and semi-arid areas. Aust, Ab, Studies

2: 39-45,

RRAND, J, C. & CHERIKOFF, V. 1985b. The nutriional

composition of Australian Aboriginal food plants of

the desert regions. /# ‘Plants for Arid Lands’. Royal

Botanic Gardens, Kew.

in Desert Homelands’. Australian National University,

North Australia Research Unit, Darwin.

CLELAND, J, B. & JOHNSTON, T, H, 1933, The ecology

of the Aborigines of Central Australia; botanical notes.

Trans, R. Soe S. Aust. 57: 113-124,

CLELAND, |, B. & TINDALE, N, B. 1959, The native

fames ancl uses of planix at Haasts Bluff, Central

Australia, Jrans, RK, Soe, S. lst. 82: 123-140.

DORAN, J. C. 1983. ‘Handbook on Seeds of Dry Zone

Acacias! Division of Forest Research, CSIRO,

Canberra.

GODDARD, C, & KALOTAS, A, (Eds). 1988. ‘Punur

Yankunyljatjara Plant Use’. Angus and Robertson,

North Ryde, New South Wales.

GODDARD, C, & KALOTAS, A. nd. ‘Plant and Plant

Related Terms’, Unpublished manuscript.

HALLAM, S. S. 1975. ire and Hearth’, Australian

Institute of Aboriginal Studies, Canberra.

HERCUS, L, A, 1990. Some Wangkangurru songs. in

Kk. M. W. Dixon & M. Duwell (Eds). ‘The Honey-Ant

Men's Love Song and Other Aboriginal Song, Poems’.

Oueensland University Press, St Lucia.

HERCUS, L. & CLARK, P. 1986. Nine Simpson Desert

wells. Archaeol, Oveania 21(1): 51-62.

HOBSON, J. 1985. ‘Current Distribution of Central

Austrilian Languages’. [Map| |AD Printing, Alice

Springs.

JESSOP, J. (Ed.) WY8h ‘Flora of Central Australia’.

Australian Systemacic Botany Society and Reed,

Sydney.

JONES, R. 1969, Fire stick farming. tas Nat List, 16(7):

224-228.

KEAN, J. 1984. Unpublished manuseript,

KIMBER, R. 1983, Black lightning: Aborigines and fire

in Central Australia and the Western Desert. Archaeol,

Oceania Bz 38-45,

LATZ, P. K. 1982. ‘Bushfires and Bushtucker: Aborigines

and Plants in Central Australia’. Unpublished Ph.D.

thesis, University of New England, Armidale.

LATZ, P. K. & GRIFFIN, G, E. 1978, Changes \f

Aboriginal land management in relation to fire and to

food plants in Central Australia, / B.S,B, Hetzel & HJ.

Frith (Eds), ‘The Nutrition of Aborigines in Relation

lo the Ecosystem of Central Australia’. CSIRO,

Melbourne.

MIDGELY, 5. J. & GUNN, B. U. 1983. ‘Seed Collection

for International Provenance Trials Of Acacia aneura’.

Manuscript, Division of Forest Research, CSIRO,

Canberra,

NASH, 0. nd. ‘Flora Terms’. Manuscript.

NASH, D. 1984. ‘An ethnobotanical study of women’s

plant use at Mt Liebig') Unpublished Lint. B. thesis,

Australian Navional University, Canberra.

O'CONNELL, J. F, LATZ, PK. & BARNETT, P. 1983.

Traditional and modern plant use among the Alyawara

of Central Australia, Eeonomie Botany 37; 80-109.

PEILLE, A. R. 1980. Preliminary notes on the ethnobotary

of the Gudadja Aborigines al Balyo, Western Australia.

W. Aust. Herb, Ree. 3: 59-64.

PEILE, A. R. nd. ‘Body and Soul — An Aboriginal

View. Manuseript.

SIMMONS, M. 1941, ‘Acacias of Australia’, Nelson,

Melbourne,

SMITH, M. A. 1986. The antiquity of seedgrinding in arid

Australia, Archueol. Oceania 21(1): 29-39.

STREHLOW, T. G. H. 1970. Geouraphy and the Totemic

Landscape in Central Australia: a functional study, /a

R. M. Berndt (Ed.), ‘Australian Aboriginal

Anthropology’. Australian Institute of Aboriginal

Studies, Canberra.

TINDALE, N. B, 1953. On some Australian Cossidae

including the moth of the Witjuti (Witchetty) Grub,

Trans, R. Sac. 5. Aust, 76) 56-65,

TINDALE, N. B. 1981, Desert Aborigines and the

southern coastal peoples: some comparisons. /n A,

Keast (Ed.). ‘Ecological Biography of Australia’, Junk,

The Hague.

WARL PIRI LEXICOGRAPHY GROUP, 1986. ‘Warlpiri

— English Dictionary: Flora Section’. Centre for

Cognitive Science, Massachusetts trstitute of

Technology, Cambridge.

LOWER MURRAY SHIELDS : AN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE

S. J. HEMMING

Summary

This paper traces the history of one element in the material culture of the Aboriginal people of the

Lower Murray River region — the shield (Fig. 1). The types of shields used in this area at the time of

British colonisation are identified and the techniques used in their construction and the variations in

their use are analysed. The engraved, and to a lesser extent the painted, designs on nineteenth

century Lower Murray River shields are considered as providing the clearest identifiable examples

of the art style of the region. The impact of British colonisation on the production and function of

shields is examined and the survival of certain elements of this ‘tradition’ is discussed. A few

shields are being made in the region today and the significance of this phenomenon is considered.

LOWER MURRAY SHIELDS: AN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE

8, J, HEMMING

HEMMING, S.J. 1991. Lower Murray shields; an historical perspective, Ree. §. luse Mus. 24(2);

(25-138,

This paper traces the history of one element in (he material culture of the Aboriginal people

of the ower Murray River region - the shield (Fig. 1).! The types of shields used in this urea

al the line of Brinsh colonisation are identified and the techniques used in their construction

and the variations in their usevare analysed, The engraved, and lo a lesser extent the painted,

designs on nineteenth century Lower Murray River shields are considered as providing the clearest

identifiable exaniples of the art style of the region. The impaet of British colonisation om tte

production and function of shields is examined and (he survival of certain clements of this

yaditiow ts discussed. A few shields are being made in the region today and the significance

of this phenomenon is considered.

S.J. Hemming, Division of Anthropology, South Australian Museum, Narth lerrace, Adelaide,

South Australia 5000, Manaseript received 21 June 1989,

British colonisation of the Lower Murray River

region started in 1836 with the establishment of the

colony of South Australa. At the Lime this area,

like so much of temperate soulh-eastern Australia,

did not have the elaborate painting traditions thal

charadterised the north of the continent. What it

did have, however, was a rich tradition ol! wood

engraving, Today, the nineteenth century art of

south-eastern Australia is best represented by

weapons und ocher artefaets that the Aboriginal

people engraved and painted in a variety of highly

localised designs. The early interests of museums

and other collectars were focused upon items

associared with warfare, As a consequence, objects

such as shields, spears and of course boomerangs,

were mainly collected and have survived to the

present day;

For the Lower Murray River region it is the shield

which provides the most spectacular examples of

the local art style. The engraved designs are the most

complex element in the decoration and these were

often highlighted with colours. The British artists

George French Angas and William Cawthorne

carefully recorded the distinctive forms and colours

of Lower Murray shields in their watercolours of

the 18405 (Angas 1846, Cawthorne 1844-64).

Without these artists’ records, knowledge of (he

ephemeral painted designs of this particular

tradition would be very thin indeed.

When the British first arrived in South Australia,

the peoples of the Lower Murray region were

identified by a large number of local clan and

janguage-group designalions (Tindale 1974, Berndt

& Berndt in press)? Today the majority of the

Aboriginal people [rom this area, excluding the

Adelaide metropolitan area, identify themselves as

Nearrindjeri people (Hemming, ones with Clarke

1989), The Nearrindjeri community numbers

several thousand people, spread throughout the

Lower Murray region. It if mainly members of this

community who sdll produce wooden artefacts thal

can be traced back to the pre-European tradition

of the region. However, the principal decorative

elements of the ‘Old People’s’ material culture, the

engraving and painting, traditions, have not

survived.’ In contrast, some of the basketry styles

of this region have virtually survived intact. They

were encouraged by missionaries as a civilised

means of generating money for the missions and

the Aboriginal people themselves. New forms of art

are heing developed in the community, combining

new iniedia With old skills and Aboriginal

philosophies, Some Aborigifal people are also

trying to revive the art of making old-slyle artefacts

like shields, using information obtained from the

South Australian Museum and early records.

SHretos As Part OF THE “OLD PEOPLES’

CULIURE

Perhaps the earliest evidence of the existence of

shields in the material cullure of the Lower Murray

region appears in a rock painting near Macclesfield

in the Adelaide Hills (Mounttord 1960; 468), 11

depicts human figures with various material

possessions and al least one of the figures (A)

appears to be carrying a shield (Fig. 2), Although

tere have been no dates obtained for the antiquity

of this pock art, itis assumed by archaeologists that

126 5. J. HEMMING

Moorunde_}*>.

f TE er nes y

‘@ Murray Bridge |... °

an a 3S, . saadh ot

Victor Harbor

he. OF eee # TH OS

Ee Nc ea Seg

GD Nw fi Meningie

[ie Bea

FIGURE 1. Lower Murray River region.

LOWER MURRAY SHIELDS 127

FIGURE 2 Figures from cave paintings in the Mount

Lofty Ranwes. (aller Mounttord 1960).

it dates from a period lang before British

colonisation, This suggests thar some elements in

the material culture of this area were constant over

a long, period, However, it does not provide any

evidenve for a lengthy tradition of one particular

style of art. There are certainly no apparent

similarities between the style of decoration scen on

the extant nineteenth century Shields and the

painting style found in (his rock arr.

In 1836 the Abonginal people af the Lower

Murray region were utilising three types of shields.

These were the wooden parrying shield used in close

combat and the wooden and bark spear-shields used

to deflect spears and other weapons thrown from

a distance, One of these, the bark spear-shield, was

distinctive to the region, The combat in which these

shields were used was highly ritualised and

organised to seitle disputes, which were mast often

between individuals and families. It bore fittle

resemblance to warfare in the European sense, not

Invalying heavy loss of life and usually stopping

when a Severe wound was inflicted upon one of the

combatants (Fig. 3) (Stephens 1889: 477).

The bark spear-shield was decorated with

predominantly painted designs and made from the

bark of smooth barked eucalypts (Fig. 4), Angas’

watercolour of South Australian Aboriginal men

depiets two warriors with spear-shields (Pig, 5)

(Angas 1844) AA8/10/8), The one in the top right-

hand corner of the painting, a warrior from Mt

Barker in South Australia, is holding a bark $pear-

shield. This variety of shield was often preferred

jn spear-fights to the wooden spear-shield, since it

had the advantage that it was less likely 10 break

when struck directly by a spear, The bark spear-

shield is described in the following early account

as only lasting for a very short time;

The Wocalice [bark spear-shicld| ts mace and lasts boul

for a light - for the bark suon loses its moisrurs, whe

sun warps it dnd so renders il unfit for use (Cawthorne

1926: 6).

Perhaps for this reason very few examples of these

shields have survived. Their rarity may also be due

to the vigour with which the early European

authorilies prevented spear fights in and around

Adelaide and then seized and destroyed all the

weapons (Cawtharne 1842-46: CY Reel 363,

623-625).

The other type of spear-shield used in the region

was made from sap wood, the first layer of wood

under the bark (Fig. 6). [1 was less likely to warp

than a bark shield and of course it lasted longer.

However, it was prone to breaking during fights,

as the hardwood from which it was constructed was

very brittle. Intricate engraving cavered the laces

of these shields and pigments were added to

highlight the designs. Ip other parts of south-eastern

Australia wooden Spéar-shields were most often

used.

It appears that all groups in south-eastern

Australia used the solid wooden parrying shield for

defence against clubs and other weapons, during

close fighting (Fig. 7) (Cooper ef af, 1981; 32), In

the Lower Murray region they were triangular m

cross section and cul out of a solid pieve of

hardwood, Like the wooden spear-smelds thair taces

were decorated with detailed engraved and painted

designs (Fig. 8).

The best accounts of shield construction

techniques describe the making of the bark shields

of the Adelaide Plains area. In the early days. of

the colony Aboriginal groups’ from throughout ihe

region travelled to Adelaide for a range of reasons

including the distribution of ralions and the

availability of new articles brought in by the British

(Foster 1989), This provided an opportunity for

meetings between groups and at these meetings old

disputes were settled and sometimes new conflicts

arose and fights took place, As a result there were

muny opportunities for early observers, like Edward

128 S. J. HEMMING

FIGURE 3. Fending off spears with a shield, Adelaide area, ca 1844, Watercolour by William A. Cawthorne. Mitchell

Library, Sydney (Cawthorne ca 1855, ML Z PXA 1490),

Stephens, to document the shield-making process.

According to Stephens, the bark shields were made

from eucalypt bark and were only obtainable during

the ‘spring of the year when the sap was flowing

freely in the trees, and the bark could be readily

taken off.’ (Stephens 1889: 486). A handle was

attached from the back and consisted of green

pieces of wood pushed through holes in the centre

of the shield. As the pieces dried they became very

tight and formed a strong handle. The face of the

shield was smoothed with stones and hardened with

hot ashes. Once cool, it was covered with pipe-clay

or lime, providing a smooth white surface on which

red bands were usually painted.

By combining information on the shields of

closely related areas in south-eastern Australia, we

can assemble further detail about the techniques of

manufacture and decoration of the two other types

of shield used in the Lower Murray region. Baldwin

Spencer, in his 1922 catalogue of the collections of

the National Museum of Victoria, describes the

method of manufacture of the wooden spear-shield

of the Victorian region, which is made from the

outer wood of the gum tree:

. .. itis said that a mound of earth some 3 feet in length

and about the same width as the shield is made; hot

ashes are placed on the mound, and the slab of green

wood on top of them; then sods of grass and stones

are piled above it, and by the time that the ashes are

cold the shield has assumed the curve of the mound

(Spencer 1922: 17),

The parrying shields of the Lower Murray region

were made from hardwoods and stone tools were

needed for their initial shaping. Erhard Eylmann

records the use of the Australian cherry (Exocarpos

cupressiformis), at Point McLeay Mission in 1900.4

George Taplin, the missionary who established

Point McLeay in 1859, described this tree as

possessing special powers in the eyes of the local

Aborigines. They believed that if Australian cherry

wood was burned then all the fish would leave the

Coorong inlet (Taplin 1874: 90, Howitt 1904:

763-4). Perhaps they also believed that the inherent

LOWER MURRAY SHIELDS 129

FIGURE 4. Bark spear-shield, Point Malcolm, South

Australia, ca 1840. South Australian Museum A2210

(66 x 48 cm).

powers of this wood strengthened the effectiveness

of a shield.

In 1881 Dawson described the method of carving

designs onto the faces of the wooden shields in

western Victoria and stated that pieces of flint and

volcanic glass were the carving tools (Dawson 1881:

25). Smyth describes another method of carving

which involved the use of possum-tooth engravers

(Smyth 1878, 1: 349). A possum jaw with a tooth

still embedded was used to create designs on

wooden surfaces. From an examination of the oldest

shields from the Lower Murray region, this appears

to be the primary engraving technique used in this

region at the time of British settlement (Fig. 9).

According to Cooper designs were often marked out

first in straight sharp lines and then deeply engraved

with the tooth engravers (Cooper 1975: 59).

The decoration of the bark shield was less

involved than the decoration of the wooden shield.

The majority of bark shields were painted with

relatively simple designs and this was probably due

to their ephemeral nature. The wooden ones, on the

other hand, were intricately engraved and colours

were also added (Fig. 10). The Aborigines obtained

pipe-clay from the salt pans of the Lower Murray

area to be used as white pigment. The red colours

were created by using at least two materials, the

ochres from the available mines in the area and a

FIGURE 5. An Adelaide warrior with a wooden spear-shield [left] and a Mount Barker warrior with a bark spear-

shield, ca 1844. Watercolour by George French Angas. South Australian Museum Anthropology Archives, AA8/10/8.

130 S. J. HEMMING

FIGURE 6. Wooden spear-shield, Mannum, South

Australia, ca 1855. South Australian Museum, A2283

(84 » 24.5 cm).

ted dye obtained from a particular root (Stephens

1889: 487).° The bark shields were decorated with

a complete cover of white pigment and then a

variety of combinations of curved red bands. These

shields were seldom engraved, but George French

Angas, in one of his 1844 watercolours, provides

an interesting example of one with engravings on

its painted surface (Fig. 11). It has what appear to

be kangaroo tracks, carved with quartz into the

surface between the usual red bands.

Strangely enough the painted designs in this

region bear no resemblance to the engraved ones.

Curved bands are the most common element in the

painted decoration, whereas angular lines

predominate in the carving (Fig. 12), The painted

designs seem to act as a visual deflector, focusing

the eye of the attacker away from the centre of the

shield. This would have been a useful quality for

these shields in spear fights, Herring-bone, crass-

hatching, zig-zag, chevron, lozenge, diamond,

interlocking diamond and rhombic forms are the

main design elements in the engraved decoration

(Fig. 13). The wooden spear-shield in Fig. 14 is a

classic example of the zig-zag design. The shield

from Mannum (Fig. 6) provides a fine example of

the use of the lozenge. There are few figurative

motifs in the designs on the early shields, although

this seems to have changed with the influence of

contact with Europeans. Cooper writes:

The gradual substitution of a complete range of new

motifs for the old was an attempt by Aborigines - now

[late 1800s] virtually dependant on European foods and

other goods — to win an economic market for their

wares. This trend towards naturalism and an increased

figurative content has been observed as relatively

common in the changing arts of ‘conquered’ peoples

(Cooper ef al. 1981: 38).

From an examination of the designs on the South

Australian Museum’s collection of Lower Murray

spearthrowers, the majority of the motifs appear

FIGURE 7. Men fighting with clubs and parrying shields,

near Point McLeay, South Australia, ca 1905, South

Australian Museum Anthropology Archives, Chester

Schultz collection.

LOWER MURRAY SHIELDS 131

FIGURE 8, Parrying shields, Lower Murray River, South

Australia, ca 1880. South Australian Museum [left] A2300

(front and back; 96 x 13 em), A2290 (85 x ¥.5 cm).

a hi

(orn WA

WAY

« f\ NY

aw \

FIGURE 9. Detail of a parrying shield showing engraved

designs that appear to have been made with a possum-

tooth engraver, Lower Murray River, South Australia, ca

1880. South Australian Museum A2298.

to be figurative (Fig. 15). These examples may have

all been influenced by European contact. However,

for this region there is not enough evidence to reach

any conclusions on this issue.

Like other ‘traditional’ Aboriginal art, the

painting and carving of this region most certainly

had a personal and social link with the maker. Even

though the meanings of the designs of the Lower

Murray region have been lost for several

generations, the fact that they had a specific

meaning and that they belonged to particular

groups is still recognised. Henry Rankine, the 1990

Chairperson of Point McLeay Community Council,

made this point very strongly in a meeting with

South Australian Museum staff in 1987. He was

FIGURE 10. Spear-shields, wood [left 2] and bark, Lower Murray Region, South Australia, ca 1844, Watercolour

by George French Angas. South Australian Museum Anthropology Archives, AA8/10/2.

132 8. J. HEMMING

FIGURE IL. Bark spear-shield decorated with painted and

engraved designs, Watercolour by George French Angas,

ca 1844. South Australian Museum Anthropology

Archives, AA8/10/16.

FIGURE 12. Examples of designs on bark spear-shields,

Adelaide area, ca 1840, (After Stephens 1889).

3 FIGURE 14. Wooden spear-shield, Moorunde, South

FIGURE 13. Common designs on weapons, south-eastern Australia, ca 1850. South Australian Museum, A42736

Australia, mid 1800s. (After Brough Smyth 1878). (94 x 27 cm),

LOWER MURRAY SHIELDS 133

commenting on his grandfather Clarence Long’s

shield, which was made in the 1930s for Norman

B. Tindale, curator at the South Australian Museum

(Fig. 16). Henry Rankine knows the area from

which his grandfather originated and he argued that

the designs on the shield must relate to this place.

Some evidence to assist with the interpretation

of the meanings of the designs on the shields from

this area can be obtained by comparing information

available relating to similar designs in other parts

of south-eastern Australia. A mortuary carving

made as a memorial for an important Aboriginal

man from the Yarra area of Victoria, was capable

of interpretation by other members of his group and

illustrates something of the meaning of the artwork

(Barwick & Barwick 1984: 9-11). It is interesting to

note that the designs on one of the spearthrowers

in Fig. 15 includes very similar human-like forms

to the shapes on this mortuary carving from

Victoria. Much the same as the art of the northern

Australian bark painting and the Western Desert

acrylic, the designs on Lower Murray region shields

probably related to the artist’s important ‘Dreaming’

sites,

SuRVIVAL OF THE SHIELD-MAKING TRADITION

UNTIL THE 1930S AND 1940s

The shield-making tradition of the Lower Murray

region continued in a modified form until the 1930s

FIGURE 15. Designs on spearthrowers, Lower Murray

Region, South Australia, mid to late 1880s. South

Australian Museum, [left] A54461, A3998, A3999, A15355.

FIGURE 16. Bark spear-shield, Clarence Long, Coorong,

South Australia, 1932. South Australian Museum, A17537

(67 x 26 cm).

and 1940s. Of the designs used to decorate the

shields, the painted designs used on the bark spear-

shields appear to have survived the longest. Clarence

Long’s South Australian Museum examples are

probably the last to have been made (Fig. 16).’ He

also made a parrying shield in the early 1930s which

was obtained by the Museum in 1979 (Fig. 17). It

is not decorated and gives a good indication of the

period when carved designs were no longer used.

Clarence Long was an initiated man, one of the last

for the area, and if the intricate engraved designs

used on the wooden shields had not been forgotten

by the 1930s, then men like Clarence Long had

made the decision that they could no longer be

used, perhaps due to their ‘sacred’ nature. Lindsay

Wilson, a Ngarrindjeri man, remembers as a child

helping Clarence Long with artefact making at

Point McLeay. He remembers Clarence Long

burning the design of an owl onto shields that he

sold to tourists brought to Point McLeay on paddle-

steamers. In Tindale’s 1937 film on basket making

the owl is identified as being Clarence Long’s

134 S. 1. HEMMING

FIGURE 17. Clarence Long [lett] holding a partying shield

and Gollan Seymour, Point McLeay, South Australia, c@

1933, South Australian Museum Anthropology Archives,

AA3I26.

ngaatji or totem (Tindale 1937), An engraved

boomerang (A66883) in the South Australian

Museum's collection, made in the early 19305 by

another Point McLeay man, Gollan Seymour, is

decorated with motifs carved in low relief which

were common in that period and are based on the

style of designs on the coins of the time (Tonkin

1933-4). They depict the hunting of different

animals. Aboriginal people in this period made

boomerangs for sale and for use in demonstrations

of their famous ability to return when thrown.*

To some extent the shield-making tradition

survived for as long as it did because of the interest

shown by tourists, curio hunters and museums,

Bellchambers was a South Australian naturalist who

regularly visited the Lower Murray area through the

late 1800s and early 1900s. He said the following

about the history of weapon making in the area:

This [the double-pointed lishing spear) was the last of

(he native weapons to disappear [rom general use,

although it lingered well into the eighties of last century.

About that time | saw young fellows training in the use

of both light and heavy bunting spears; but, like the

longbow of (he British, these weapons were now looked

upon more as 4 Means Of sport, The manufacture of

weapons is still carried on in a desultory manner by

the survivors Jew 1910], more tor the purpose of sale

to relic hunters (Bellchambers 1931: 21-22),

Lindsay Wilson says that before his time (prior

to the 1920s) Point McLeay had a sportsday when

spearthrowing and other old skills were tested. This

event took place near the old jetty on the shore of

Lake Alexandrina. Shields may well have been used

during these sporting occasions.

Many of the earliest shields in the South

Australian Museum's collection come from the

Point McLeay Mission and were most likely being

made specifically for sale. Some date back to the

period of the first missionary, George Taplin, who

founded the mission in 1859 (SA Museum

Anthropology Register). This link between the

Museum and the region was continued and several

parrying shields were obtained for the collection in

the late nineteenth century. The unique collection

made by Erhard Eylmann in 1900, now a part of

the holdings of the Ubersee-Museum in Bremen,

provides a clear indication of the styles existing in

the area at the time (Eylmann 1900). From an

examination of this collection it is clear that men

FIGURE 18. Bark spear-shield [left], Joseph Koolmatrie,

Point McLeay, South Australia, 1914. Sourh Australian

Museum, AlO01 (74 x 43 cm),

FIGURE 19. Recent bark spear-shield, Paul Kropinyeri,

Mount Barker, South Australia, 1987. South Australian

Museum, A65245 (91 » 24 em),

LOWER MURRAY SHIELDS 135

at Point McLeay were using metal tools fo make

thet shields (Hemming 1986). They decorated them

wilh new, simplified geometric designs and

highlighted them with introduced colours like blue,

tv 1914 the South Australian Museum acquired

one of its few examples of a bark spear-shield, IL

was made by Joseph Koolmatric a! Point McLeay

(Fig. 18), It appears Irom a letter that he wrate to

Edward Stirling, the Museum's Director, that he

made it specifically 10 sell 10 the Museum (Luebbers

1984: AIOOI). In the 19305 Tindale acquired twa

similar shields from Clafence Long (see Fig. 16).

These were probably among the last spear-shields

to be made in rhe area until the 1980s. Tindale was

anxious to collect examples of the material culture

of the Lower Murray area and in ihe 1930s he

worked wiih several Aboriginal peaple who were

keen fo preserve a record of their pre-European

culture (Pretty & Tindale L978: 9). Clarenve Long

was Tindale’s nain informant and he oiade many

items far the Museum's collection, based on his

experiences in his younger years.

Ay the late nineteenth cenvury shields had little

practical value ta Aboriginal people in the Lower

Murray region. The traditions that required the use

of shields had been destroyed by the impact of

Britsh colonsation, A small demand for these

objects cume (rom private collectors aid museums.

However, once the knowledge of the significance

of the designs on the objects like shields was lost,

and innovations were attempted, this limited market

lost interest, With collectars and museums-sharing

the view thal these objects Were no loner “authentic”

Aboriginal artefacts.

RevivAL OF THE SHIFLD-MAKING TRADTTION

During the 1980s there have been seversl

Aboriginal people making shields in the Lower

Murray region. However, this is nat a direct

canunuation of the shield tradition of this ares.

These artists are all descended from Lower Murray

people, bul their Knowledge of shield-making has

almost entirely come from European records of

Aboriginal culture or from actually looking at

objects in the South Australian Museum. In fact,

the vollection policy of Museum anthropologists

like Tindale has proven ta be very useful for people

interested in reviving-a lost tradition. These wood-

varvers bring with them a knowledge of the suitable

local woods in ther own areas and of wood-carving

techniques in general. Clubs far hunting rabbits,

and boomerangs usually made for sale, have

pecasionally been made in rhe region ap to the

present day.

John Lindsay, a wood-carver [rom Gerard

Aboriginal Community jin South Australia’s

Riverland, makes small-scale sets af weapons thal

include shields. He says thar he saw one of ihe old

peaple making these when he was younger and with

information he abtained (rom the South Australian

Muscum, he devided to sry to replicate these sels,

In 1983, Colin Cook (the Chairperson of Gerard

Aboriginal Coramunity) and John Lindsay

vontacted the South Australian Museum and asked

for information about the material cullure oF the

people who occupied the Gerard urea at the time

of European contact. They explained rhat most of

the people living at Gerard have no traditional’ links

with the area and chat knowledge of (he local

material culture had almost completely disappeared.

They wanted, however, to start making objects that

were distinctive lu |he region. The Museum supplicd

information gathered by explorers and ather early

observers and the carvers used it as a guide for

making sets oF weapons based on the pre-European

material culture of the region.’ Although Lindsay

and Cook did not have an undersianding of the

carved and painted designs on the objects that they

Were artempting to copy, they still considered that

ilrese designs were the property of their original

inakers. For this reason the arlefacis produced

during this project were not decorated and it was

therefore felt by the carvers chat an offence under

Aboriginal law had not been commutted.

Both Lindsay and Cook had prior experience

with making boomerangs and clubs. The techniques

thar they knew were a combination of the

woodcarying skills of theie angestors, the river

Aboriginal people and Aberivinal people from the

West Coast and north-western regions of Sourh

Australia. These different groups were brought!

together partly as a consequence of the

Government, if the early 1950s, moving people

from the Qoldea area to the newly forrned Gerard

Mission. Many of the people who had been living

at Swan Reach Mission further down the River

Murray had already been moved to Gerard when

the former was closed in the late 1940s,

To some extent Lindsay and Cook's idea io

praduce replicas of pre-Europesn material culture

from the Ravertand Was an attempt ro establish a

culiural link wilh the area. They told me that they

were often asked abou! Riverland Aboriginal culture

by tourists and other vistlers and that they felt a

sense of mnmadequacy in not being able (o answer

their questions. Making che weapons gave them

something tangible camnected with Riverland

cullure to show visitors and members of their-own

commumty. However, i{ also gave them a personal

link with the culture of the Riverland Aboriginal

people, the prior owners of the land on whieh

Gerard Community ts silwated.

Paul Kropinveri, who indentifies as a

Nearringjeri, is another craftspersan who nyakes

136 S J TLEMMING

and sells wooden artefacts, He produces decorated

boomerangs and other weapons and hus an interest

in making replicas of ‘tradinonal’ weapons. Mis

particular speciality is the bark spear-shield of the

Lower Murray region (Pig. 19), Many of his wood-

carving skills were learar through watching old

people when he was young. He has also undertaken

considerable research into the old styles and has

inspected the South Australian Museum's collection

of Lower Murray shields. 45 a descendant of the

people of this region, he bas an interest in recreating

its Weapons and art style. He devorates his bark

spear-shields with painted desigas based on the

classic style, He has also experimented with making

purrying shields and wooden spear-shields which

are decorated with engraved geometric designs,

The South Australian Museum shop is ane of

Pau! Kropinyeri's main outlets and the principal

clientele are overseas and interstate visitars, His

shields have also been useful io the Education

Department and the Museum's cducation and

information sections have purchased examples for

teaching purposes. The Ngarnindjeri community al

Meningie, on the shores of Lake Albert. has

obtained several of his shields as a cultural resource

to be used in discussions about the Aboriginal

culture of the area. This community is actively

involved jn educating their younger people and the

general community about Ngarrindjeri culture and

history, They run a cultural camp called ‘Camp

Coorong’ which bias its own museuni and they work

in schools and with local community groups.

Negarrindjeri community leaders in Meningie, like

George Trevorrow, see shields and other artefacts

as being valuable teaching resourves and unportane

symbols of Ngarrindjert culture.

The revival of Lower Murray art and eratt has

generally been supported by the local Aboriginal

communities and thee has been a growing yense

of pnde in these traditions. This alfitude bas not

always been present, Jn the sauthern areas of South

Australia, trom tre [950s to the 1970s, there was

4 movement al people away from the former

missions and rural areas, and inte Adetaide (Gale

1973). Economie opportunities and government

policies encouraged Aboriginal peaple to move into

the major cities, The pressures that many

missionaries had placed on Aboriginal people to

give up their owe culture were, in fact, being

continued ina different Form. During this period

oF ‘assimilation’, the practice of encouraging the

younger generation to be ashamed of Aboriginal

culture was continued by the authorities and one

result was that few took an interesr in che old arts

and crafts. Since the 1967 Australian Constitutional

Referendum, Aboriginal people have had increased

conteol over (heir own aflairs and throwgh mew

employment opportunities in State und

Commeanwealth public services, their views have

had a direct effect on government policy, There hay

been uw correspunding growth in the understanding

and appreciation of Aboriginal culture in the wider

community: Albert Namarjira’s central Australian

landscapes, Arnhem Land bark paintings and

Western Desert urt have created an interest in

Aboriginal art and this has provided ~ al least since

the 1980s --a growing marker for the arc and eraft

of the Lower Murray region. Innovation, however,

is sdll something upon which the majority af

potential buyers frown, although, with the 1989

Opening in Adelaide of the Aboriginal Cultural

Institute (Tandanya), there bas been increased

aeveprance of contemporary urban Aboriginal art

aud the strength af innovation,

This new interest has been promoted, for

example, by exhibitions tike Bluey Roberts’ (a

Nearrindjeri artist) “River Spiri) Dreaming: The Art

of Bluey Roberts’ (Aboriginal Cultural Institute

1990). As part of this fnajer exhibition he produced

a large-scale piece of artwork featured on the

foolpath in front of the Tandanya Centre, He js

both a paiirer and a carver and Ins work most often

involves interpretations of his relationship with the

environment and the Dreaming, One of his

Specialifies is large boomerangs decorated with

incised and burnt designs (Suton et a/ TORR: 189),

Jo his arr he ts very conscious of the value of

continuing traditions. Thisis well illustrated by his

interpretation ofa carved walking sock that he seld

to the South Australian Museum in 1985S, The

handle is a human hand “hanging on to the

culture, , -, hanging on to jt as much as can’, The

shaft of the walking slick is a snake, decorated with

pamied animals, the snake and the animals

representing the culrure. However, unlike the revival-

based avlivity of making shields, which has ouly

a minor role in present day Aboriginal culture,

Roberts‘ art is a functioning part of contemporary

Aboriginal culture, It combines the past with the

present and presents a new urban Aboriginal

philosophy of life,

CONCLUSION

In a period when Ihe strengthening al Aboriginal

identity is 4 central convern in south-eastern

Aboriginal commuoities, the revival and

development of local arts and crafts js provid

one of ihe tov in this process, This phenomenon

has: followed severul decades in which wooden

works by Aboriginal people of this region were

largely restricted to hunting clubs, which they used

themselves, and retiring boomerangs, which they

sold on the curio marker. The wood-carving

Iradition in the Lower Murray River region had beer

LOWER MURRAY SHIELDS 137

almost totally destroyed by the effects of British

volonisation. In particular, the region’s. style of

engraved and pained designs - the ‘arl” [radition

~ did not survive, even ina changed form, much

past the Second World War, Discontinued first were

the intrivately GecoraleU objects. Their place was

in the religious ceremonies and in ritual warfare.

It was these cultural activities that were Lhe most

affected by the impact of British colonisation,

Consequently, little is Known among contemporary

groups of che ceremonial body painting style of this

area, the decoration of ceremonial objects, or the

meaning of the designs on the weapons such as

shields,

In 1990, however, there is a growing number of

Aboriginal artists working in the Lower Murray

River region, Some like Bluey Roberts are gaining

Australia-wide recognition, It is in the area of

contemporary urban art, rather than in the

production of ‘traditional’ artefacts like shields,

where the most significant impact on Lower Murtay

culture is ocourring, In the ‘new’ art tradition

important contemporary issues are being explored

such as urban Aboriginal identity. Artists who make

shields do so mainly for a restricted educational

market and for museum and cultural centre

collections.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Much of the information gathered for this paper

resulted from research and fieldwork associated with Lhe

development of ihe South Australian Museun’s

Neucunderi exhibition, During this periad of several years

I have been taught aboui Lower Murray Aboriginal cullure

by muny Aboriginal people, Lwish if particular to thank

Henry and Jean Ranking, George, Tom and Ellen

Trevorrow, Ron Bonney and Lola Cameron-Bonney of

Kingston, Lindsay Wilson, Bluey Roberts, and Doreen

Karlinyeri who works with fe at the South Australian

Museum. John Lindsay, Colin Cook and Paul Kropinyeri,

the contemporary artists mentioned in this paper, have

also been very helpful.

Philip Clarke has been working with me on Lower

Murray Aboriginal eulrure for several years and his

expertise in (he area of ethnobiolopy has been particularly

valuable, [am grateful for comments on various dratts

on this paper made by Philip Clarke, Robert Faster, Chris

Anderson, Peter Sutton, Leonn Satterrhwait and John

Stanton.

The photowraphs of specimens were taken by Michael

Kluvanek.

ENDNOTES

1. This paper is an expanded version of a section of

Survival, Regeneration, and Impact (Chapter 4) in

‘Dreamings: The Art of Aboriginal Australia’ edited by

Dr Petér Sutton.

2. Professor R.M. Berndt and Dr N,B, Tindale have both

carried Gut detailed research with the people tram this

region. They venerally agree on rhe names ol (he groups

of people occupying (his area al The Ume of contact, ic

Tangane, Yaralde ctc.

3, | borrow the label ‘Old People’ from Nygarrindjen

people today who use jt ina number of ways. Sometimes

as aterm for today's older Ngarrindjeri people, bur alsa,

very often, for the peaple who lived according lo the

traditions of the pre-conlact Aboriginal culture.

4, This information is included on a label for a shield in

ihe Eylmann collection held in the Ubersee Museum in

Bremen, West Germany.

5. Perhaps (he most important mine jn the region was ut

Ochre Cove, near Port Noarlunga. The root mentioned

by Stephens has been tentatively identified in a recent

article as Drosera whitakeri (Clarke 1987: 67).

6. Dr Norman Tiridale worked at the Museum until his

retirement in 1965, He gathered extensive information

about (he culture of rhe people of che Lower Murray area

fn South Australia. Much of this information will be

presented in a book he is working on aboul the Aborigines

of southern South Australia and it features the life of

Clarence Lane, his main Aboriginal informant.

7. Clarence Long made two bark spear-shields for the

Soullt Australian Museum's collection, Al7537 and

AI7538.

8. In the late 1930s and early 1940s Professor Ronald

Berndt worked with Albert Karloan, an initiated man of

the Yaralde people of the Lower Murray region. In

eonversations with Berndt he describes Karloan's shame

al having 6 give boomerang throwing demonstrations tw

tourists as a means of making a living. UW is ironic that

many Nearrindjeri people today remember Albert Karloan

for his skills al throwin the returning boomerang, not

for his great knowledge of the Aburiginal culture of the

Lower Murray area, This will no doubt change with the

publication, jointly with Karloun, of Berndt’s book on

Yaralde culture (Hemming, personal correspondence).

9. Provision of the information sought by Jolin Lindsay

and Colin Cook was organized at (he South Australian

Museum by Greme Preity, Curator of Archacology.

138 SJ. HEMMING

REFERENCES

ABORIGINAL CULTURAL INSTITUTE INC. 1990.

‘River Spirit Dreaming: ‘The Art of Blney Roberts’.

Adelaide.

ANGAS, G. F. 1844, Angas Collection. (AA&). Sourh

Australian Museum Anthropology Archives,

ANGAS, G. F. 1846, ‘South Australia Mlustrated’. Thomas

McLean, London.

BARWICK, R. E.& BARWICK, D. E. 1984, A memorial

for Thomas Bungeleen, 1874-1865. Aboriginal History

8; 9-11,

BELLCHAMBERS, T. P. 1931. ‘The Nature-lover’s

Notebook’. Adelaide.

BERNDT R. M. & BERNDT, C. H. in press, ‘The World

that was: the Yaraldi of the Murray River and the Lakes,

South Australia’.

CAWTHORNE, W. A. 1842-46, Literarium Diarium.

(ML CY Al03-CY AILOS, CY 214, 363). Mitchell

Library, Sydney.

CAWTHORNE, W. A. 1844-64, Drawings of Australian

Aborigines. (MLZ PX*D 70). Mitchell Library, Sydney.

CAWTHORNE, W. A, ca 1855 Album. (ML 2 PXA

1490), Mitehell Library, Sydney,

CAWTHORNE, W, A. 1926. Rough notes on the manners

and customs of the natives. R. Geog. Soc. Aust. S.A.

Branch Proc, 27; 44-77.

CLARKE, P. A. 1987. Aboriginal use of sublerranean

plant parts in southern South Australia. Ree. S. Aust.

Mus, 22(1): 73-86,

COOPER, C. 1975. ‘The Beechworth Collection of

Aboriginal Artefacts’. Unpublished B.A.(Hons) thesis,

Department of Prehistory and Anthropology,

Australian National University, Canberra,

COOPER, C., MORPHY, H., MULVANEY, | &

PETERSON, N. 1981. ‘Aboriginal Australia’. Art

Gallery Directors Council, Sydney,

DAWSON, J. 1881. “Australian Aborigines’. George

Robertson, Melbourne.

EYLMANN, E, 1900, Eylmann Ethnographic Collection.

Ubersee-Museum, Bremen, West Germany.

POSTER, R. 1989, Feasts of the full-moon. The

distribution of rations to Aborigines in South Australia,

1836-61. Aboriginal History 13(1,2); 63-77.

GALE, F. 1972. Urban Aborigines’, Australian National

University Press, Canberra.

HEMMING, 8. 4. 1986. Overseas (rip - research notes.

Unpublished,

HEMMING, 8. 1, JONES, P. G. wilh CLARKE, P. A,

1989. ‘Neurunderi. Ai) Aboriginal Dreaming’, South

Australian Museum, Adelaide.

HOWITT, A. W. 1904, ‘The Native Tribes of South-East

Australia’. Macmillan, London.

LUEBBERS, R. A. 1984, ‘Catalogue of Ethnographic

Artifacts from S.E. South Australia, Vol. [V, Shields’.

South Australian Department of Environment and

Planning, Adelaide.

MOUNTVORD, C. P. 1960, Cave paintings in the Mount

Lofty Ranges, South Australia. Rec, S. Aust Mus,

13(4): 467-470.

PRETTY, G. L. & TINDALE, N. B. 1978. Excursion

guide; the Aboriginal cultural landscape of the Lower

Murray Valley, /# ‘The Role of Museums in the

Preservation of Indigenous Cultures’. UNESCO

Regional Seminar; Adelaide, 1978. South Australian

Museum, Adelaide,

SMYTH, R. B, 1878. ‘The Aborigines of Victoria’, John

Ferres, London.

SPENCER, W. B, 1922, ‘Guide to jhe Australian

Ethnological Collection exhibited in the National

Museum of Victoria’, Trustees of the Public Library,

Museums and National Gallery of Victoria, Melbourne.

STEPHENS, E. 1889. The Aborigines of Australia, /

Proc. R, Soc. N.S.W 23: 476-503.

SUTTON, P., JONES, P. & HEMMING, 5. J. (988.

Survival, Regeneration, and Impact. /n P, Sutton (Ed.).

‘Dreamings; The Art of Aboriginal Australia’, Penguin,

Victoria,

TAPLIN, G. 1874, ‘The Narritiyeri’. South Australian

Government Printer, Adelaide.

TINDALE, N. B. 1937, ‘Basket Making. Coorong, South

Australia’. (AA338) Anthropology Archives, South

Australian Museum, Adelaide.

TINDALE, N. B. 1974, ‘Aboriginal Tribes of Australia’,

Australian National University Press, Canberra.

TONKIN, J. M. 1933-4, Tonkin Collection, (AA321)

Anthropology Archives, South Australian Museum,

LOCATING ABORIGINAL SITES : A NOTE ON J. G. REUTHER AND THE

HILLIER MAP OF 1904

L. A. HERCUS & V. POTEZNY

Summary

This paper provides a critique of the detailed map of Aboriginal sites in the eastern Lake Eyre

region which was prepared by H. J. Hillier at Killalpaninna Mission in 1904. Research has shown

that while most of the 2468 named sites can be connected with recorded mythological events, the

map cannot be used satisfactorily as a topographic guide to these sites unless supplemented by

Aboriginal traditions. This principle is illustrated by specific examples drawn from fieldwork

undertaken by the authors.

LOCATING ABORIGINAL SITES: A NOTE ON J. G. REUTHER AND THE HILLIER MAP OF 1904

L. A. HERCUS & V, POTEZNY

HERCUS, L. A. & POTEZNY, V, 1991. Locating Aboriginal sites: a note an J. G Reuther and

the Hillier map af 1904, Rec, S, Aust. Mus, 24(2): 139-151,

This paper provides a-critique of the detailed map of Aboriginal siles in (he eastern Lake Eyre

region which was prepared by H. J. Hillier al Killalpaninna Mission in 1904. Research has shown

that while most of (he 2468 named sites can be connected with recorded mythological events,

the hap cannot be used satisfactorily as a topographic guide to these sites unless supplemented

by Aboriginal traditions. This principle is illustrated by specific examples drawn from fieldwork

undertaken by the authors,

L. AJ Hereus, Asian Studies Department, Australian National University, G.P.O, Box 4, Canberra,

Australian Capital ‘Territory 2601; V. Potezny, Aboriginal Heritage Unil, Department of

Environment and Planning, 55 Grenfell Street, Adelaide, Souih Australia 5(MK), Manuscript received

7 September 1989.

The Lutheran missionaries on the Lower Coaper

Creek, South Australia, made a major contribution

to the Knowledge und understanding of Aboriginal

mytholozy and sites in the Lake Eyre basin. The

best known work emanating from Nillalpaninna is

the vast mamiuseripe written by Pastor Johann Gi.

Reuther around the (urn of the century, now

available in the translation by Scherer in microfiche

edition (Reather 1981). Practically all the thirteen

volumes, even the dictionary, have references to

place-names and to sites. Particularly important

from this point of view are Volume X which deals

with mythology and the two volumes GNM and XITL)

on the famous fous or so-called ‘direction posts’

(Jones & Sutton (986). The bulk of the information

on place-names is to be found in Volume VIT, which

containg 2468 cniries.

Nearly all the 2468 place-names listed by Reuther

in Volume VIL were added to the then current

1: 500 000 map by Henry J, Hillier who arrived at

Kilkalpaninna in 1894 and subsequently became the

mission schoolteacher. Hillier and Reuther had the

wren advantage that in their day Aboriginal

geographical knowledye of the north-east of South

Australia Was intaet! older people whoa had come

to Killalpaninna from different parts of rhe region

all knew their respective ‘country’ im minute detail

They were obviously willing to give information..

R. B. Reuther described to Tindale (Jones & Sutton

(986: 52) how his father, Pastor Reulher, only had

to go out to the nearest sandhill and call ‘Cooee’

and ‘half an hour afterward you'd see all these ald

fathers come in’, and ‘they would be talking about

one word for a ternble long time. So with

accamplisited speakers who contributed all the

informacion for the work, Reulher (in collaboration

New Testament into Diyari (Reuther & Strrehlow

1897), he produced grammars and a voluminous

Diyari dictionary, as well as an annotated hist of

personal names, the two volumes of descriprions

of /oas, and comments on the places to which these

objects refer. Hillier produced the map which is now

held in the South Australian Museum

Anthropology Archives (AA263) (Fig. 1). It looks

as if we could simply go out and follow the map,

use the information from the volumes and locate

all the important Aboriginal sites in the north-east

of South Australia. This would be a remarkable step

forward, in terms of knowledge and conservation

of sites. Future maps of the region would have a

significant Aboriginal content. Unfortunately this

is. too pood to be true.

The aim of the present paper is to show that

matters are not so easy for the following reasans:

1. There are internal inconsistencies and

inevitable inadequacies in the yarious volumes

of the Reuther manuscript. Specialised

knowledge, found only in Aboriginal traditions,

js necessary lor [heir successiul interpretation.

2. There are practical difficulties which in most

cases make il impossible 10 locate sites [rom the

map.

INTERNAL, INCONSISTENCIES

The place-namnes volume is of quite a differem

order to the volume on mythology, Volume VII

ives explanations of the place-names usually based

on the day to day activities of minor ancestors —

where they saw particular plants growing or hunted

for various animals, notived tracks or made sundry

comments. Volume & however, deals with major

myths or sections of myths, and there is very litile

L. A. HERCUS & VY. POTEZNY

140

f- \ - € five ‘ <

\ aA

{ 4A ' a aie 2), \

\ ¥ 3 a? aa ope ls, ranked ie faa

\ \ \ ex gegedere yy

\ ) erry mae co

\ 1 ) % , eo? eds gy “te Raper een Foe p

> { i 4 f

weed Ye aa senate

eqartqraye 2 4

bathe Ve / av : \ wee ee we yew re ray ce.

shes fi t oY 1 rt adh eee” aS ete tal tia

s sarberncber my WN RQ \a \ 1 ceyaoskwate sr RQ

$ ‘i : ANG a mnie! \ : is ze hye

septa’ ; ‘\ TEP LE eouthy

weretoce nat i\ \ BS ’ Cet ra as a Aa o~

Swis : Wap D preyru '

Wiese says EAT ST WL p

wee ee - " ~

vainly 9 SEY OATS

owen Mas Cy cr aeryy \ weary Pk wigan lepea

e OW ce etyenn,

MERELY ae eG UES, 2

arty cet

waaGpeeeny TT on ~-.

ioe tha aes fad aga tern

versed \

a dyaakei ae lo esapon Ego HEH i Q,

edysocetypemse ye | iis, RR Js,

“EMTS \ : {8 a yttgeergeeny , 4 ‘ a "| ,

f ~. \

vaeeLemeye Poexns teeny rsp N \ \ ‘

= vO Tay

» we AY YA

eye teenle yt ¥ iv t \ i ad

PEEP N 4

(See veqanind \ ae

yee sent Penyg { ; \ 4 \

weg ale? ‘ ‘

= -_ bs ‘chink x \

aol Fd the edarly eH i ‘ 4!

¥ ryenge dire \ 5 s

Tyee, A \ x

axeretemce FAVE \ \ \

eT ee \ \ ‘

agers funds yy 5 5 yy \

‘\

veed \ r \ ‘

Seana ve it \ \ \ y

ie \ \ \

EYER pIE HK Voiyn \

PK f ‘ ways ‘

he EN, _, wef Be ee es es He

AS ied PAMPER bpwrce est YE y ea wS “Ty,

J e) \ ‘

° sire Fee tn EOAEVH MH ‘

| (xoma defies) ‘

enn LAS PG,

FIGURE J. Detail from H. J. Hillier’s 1904 map of Aboriginal place-names in the eastern Lake Eyre region. Underlining

indicates thal the site has been located, as identified in Fig. 2. S.A. Museum AA266.

I41

LOCATING ABORIGINAL SITES

PANE

aye

yee =

Ph hea a it ep Pep sb , mq yee \

a Seta bet

; wf rol ate vewecrenprp denny f iafgreem ng l

i sds td vy

\ ’ ct ( Sse AT fa naazeny a. npanecrealage

ra vackeifamnwauety é

ay ; Pa See Per myon ere YL wifh soutien

bee yl ‘y EMITS raat Frese,

ye dere bit \i ! ae nm a “mK

, 4 poate) ' Naas aa

‘

\/ ere ho ed afqeedutgntty aqntyr ere

eadsoy’ yeast | Vane EEN \

tex ‘heros j ate i \. Bain meee try nant:

uf 7 iv, nth os Sg wares Ee

wr epee header ere? tex

qe HIER

is #3 “ Ry =~ Vert’ Tee \ =

tem wawaatea wiyreat aren ee \ loge

: z b : wdepeey

ree Heony 7 wa Te alaereena 3 a, (SH

7 al

. WY Lrg So 9 f° = “ee vette amvienesrdyete,t ~ESE wy yore tog hee

Fs ete eh beh ee ba singe weeineirry aw eee a .

sae A vaaegneraly mal} at eae yin aCe SAL ei : rote a ipsa

% tae ee veenyelry yarkeat wasdeeeeeare, bei rye ace Sayre enn 6

L~ a ty owas ! nee hxyerdyra ane

coe, ny edt 2 Ree pase axpet feted syste oyna andl Oe

> 9 V wananer de FTL , fuartey,,

epee : .

a Sse epee GR cemungepibeen -yepenrecspeny eqn wipeseaeers _ rene

4s, 7 ingot tet LER LE ETRE aiyrangegaitz Fh ith tee fos Denies. Lad

red : cer

ofa aR tht vepet fe ryperys xe -wawda aedey errors jf ert CaMn depen Py ae y

R wenquyntd eee ys

‘ageene L Qrrx xe

ay SOpY Rn pm, . yyraeeedcs

VeRO PAL jaf wyegqeae?

rence te sete PR veredercasy

Se a ‘ager’ Zi Mepis a

woking epwebenrg

Cw. merged ata SEeyee rT

see 3 -- naa Shard

wpe 4 | ut shes aly an Rad

pe re Pd eatfed

les _~ s mS +e eset VL

yearelyergeend = sa ue go ba an dure see, Plein anes aL opus Land mere

: Pe oo ~

Taam ate astas a tai Bot es tibet

bee ernest Va Set : Ba rsel we S ™ a e

: 2

‘rennet he a" a unger) , Rem tyx eee pret Om

“Wary =

> oe tomab? & wavdesapasry, Z nye EPR ” rs menaniaree wR

y FINE H / U-- ap Pa eRe ipe Pert ie Saal Or al

is Pe ‘ an cing anh Y joweqntyenn eet, ir

eridete yp

+ vtyee Peery i: t us a's vai 7% / esac a ;

¥ SWPP Ky ¢ 4 te x ye a epeemtlyy D

I j a 7o- 1

a eee eS / ae #3 a 7 . “ 1 '

N ee A Ce fa - a &

z maelesenye a Pa Fd gf. 4 4 i A

ae na’ SPS Cg be f

i ~ Sf sw a A - + / op

( ~ o inte % gt hax _ ms

~~ =, - @ngqzartyag gw

L. A. HERCUS & V, POTEZNY

142

| ow eT we

PA \ |

1 ty

/ \ fl juid-nunu

(e6unw) J \

\__(eapyjewigea) (G-es2UEONI

\ (Iuyihuem) %

\ welimuney Sean \

\ (owgnd-eeured) & er al \

IIH ‘auelemoojn Vv njnyed-epueg 4

UIGWIM J puntind-eyeyw nm \ jueypewu-(hueBN \

\ | eating iupuehuely \

\ Aeyed-eipey

neal Y i" BAYAED|

SJ ydunuy-ui I’,

(eyueliwinut) \ \ Vi

(puew Pa \ \ pace

-ede6N) (nuind-fuey)

i weuni) IH @diimooi0o) DHURRUEM Ve

ndwey-ipseyGuny tL

ss lun) \ eyULIEMIny) eyueyunyjeey DZ

IH fen 1 -pued- Pag)

& / nt eres Vv pued si PUINY ra Y

weyeyMAL st he vig

edwel} eyeyy * ae p (eAededueBN)

(nfynas eked) EINMIIdld

(quihued-nuey) # (nynd-nunuy)

IIH eBuoO}Way Jey HEU LENA \

iH May V7 IH DEPOT WweyGuridustg) 9 3 no

IUNYUR || /

(iwejexOunyny) I nny-nny

‘ Tunplen aia \

ueimen yt

1)?

Iheynuem-ejeyoueyy | !

ATIUASCHIE

ndwod-eAeg e

BUUNEMNCLe)

eusebu- euebu-nyeg @

— @ CILLINW

(yemejueyy) ®

ijuilj-njnd-eupel)

BIIAIJEY ‘

iflu-Liny-uny ‘

/EYUEY)-epseM) ’

edwnun ®@

IUBPURAINW @

(u1dey-e| DIN)

----

(nynupny) \

ean

eyulAededebny-edly °

mm co eo ec ee eee pe fe ees

ckets

ct locations by Hercus and Potezny. Bra

in corre

ig. 1), as fixed

FIGURE 2. Aboriginal sites from Hillier’s map (I

. V. Potezny, 1989.

indicate sites referred to in this paper.

143

LOCATING ABORIGINAL SITES

WH eajjaedy Vv

iIIH alueupooy Y CAA | m=

ihejeBung

yose IW — MY, j

~ /

7. ey

(eyediiin))

WH epindenli Vv

/ y

if Ss

(eyununtuny) / {

nyyey-eyJIdueM,

(uewany-l\ny), 5

UDI a

\.aAt N

SN done V7 IllH

(eyndeyind) @y euuideyeiny

\ NL iunnaBie

(i r

‘) BUNY)-LWId\e

53 Wny}-WuIdey

(eyujny- abu y IIH ald v

(ueedueg) @ Pes i

.--- te /

fg” “gle ee L

| Sof — foo

PIU EHEXEN - ey (efupuey)

7~ 7

Sa = oa /

PY ae

x 7 7 ay 7] 3

aa w 1. / >"

or ad ~ [*

7 ad /

-_ 7"

J . as /

7 ig SS /

144 L.A. HERCUS & VL POTEZNY

conneclion between the two volumes. This

disjunction ean best be Hlustrated by wo examples,

+ The story of the Erotic Green Snake

One of the stories told in detail by Reuther in the

mythology volume is that of a Soake Ancestor

whom he calls ‘Marikilla’, (Volume %: 114-123).

This is equivalent to wiarrakila, the Diyari word lor

‘green snake”, Pseudechis australis (Johnston 1943:

290). Reuther also gives this Ancestor the itames

‘N#allimpara’, and ‘Neurapata’ There is very little

in his text that gives us an idea ot location; only

four places are named;

1, ‘Ngamara’, ‘a tall and stour tree, which is sard

to be far away lo the north.

2. ‘Burinapalkitutu’, ‘first to lie down and then

to gO on’, Where he left his mob behind,

3. ‘Mudlakubmari'

4. ‘Warankirpamatlini’ or ‘Warangijiribamatina’.

Of these four only two appear in the place-narnes

volume. The lirst is "Ngamara’:

No, 1443 'Ngamara’ Judlajudlanja.

Meaning ‘thick bush, scrub"

This is the name of a district, It is mainly

overgrown with trees and shrubbery, wherefore

it has acquired the above name. This area is the

Province of the Kankuwulana,

The translator (Scherer) has added a comment on

‘Kankuwulana’ ‘this is Reuther’s first reference lo

this tribe’.

‘Kankuwulana' however is not the name of a (tribe;

itis a Divari word, (kanku-wurlanha in Po Austin

transcription, Austin (981) and it means ‘the two

boys")

The second Green Snake site to appear in the

place-name volume is 'Mudlakubmari’. This name

means ‘nose-blood’ in a mixture of Wangkangurri

and either Diyari or Ngamini: Aulamarrt is

Wangkangurru for ‘blood’, but mivdia nose’ is

Diyari and Ngamini. There are two entries for this.

No, 1069 is said to be [rom Wangkangurrw and

refers to the Ancestor ‘Palungipina’ beating his twa

sons ta death. ‘Paluneupina’ belangs to the Simpson

Desert and ro Pirlukaya Well in partivular The eniry

seems to have no locational rclevance 10 the story

of Marakilla. There is also no, 914 which is said to

be in Diyari country and again has no evident

connection, It refers to (he Ancestor Darana’s dog

having a bloody nose from digging a hole

The combined evidence of Reuther’s volume on

myths and the list af place-names therefore leaves

us With no proper location, Even with the combined

evidence of Volumes Vil and X and the Hillier map

we remain guile unable lo relale the story of

Marikilla to the landscape.

There seemed oo bape of learning more. The

story belonged to Ngamini people, aad Dinta, the

last traditionally knowledgeable Ngamini, had died

in Marree in 1964, shortly before L- Hercus’s First

visit, Fortunately however three Wangkangurru

people knew the myth of what they called Kurkari,

the ancestral Green Snake Avrkar? is simply the

Wangkaneurcu name for the species of snake that

was called ‘marrikilla’ by Reuther’s Diyari

informants, Mick McLean, a senior Wangkangurru.

man, had heard the myth from Dinta and from

anothet old Ngamini man called Pinmili, while

Linda and Prank Crombie had learnt it long ago

from old people at Pandie Pandie Station. Their

story clearly belonged to the same tradition as (he

story of Marikilla written down by Reuther ar the

beginning of the century. There are however three

major differences, In the first plate, the

Wangkangurru speakers evidently did not know

those northern tradilions thai form the beginning

of Reuther's version. Secondly, their recitation was

much more lively than Reuther’s version, and lastly,

in contrast wo Reurher’s version it relates the story

directly to the landscape.

Mick MeLean and Linda Crombie at an interval

of 18 years, told the same story almost verbatiny.

Both spoke in Wangkangurru, and direct speech was

kept in Neamini. In translation the Wangkangurru

version ty as follows:

Kurkert the Green Snake and a companion (who

left him afier a while) came from far away Lo the

nacth, trom near the Toko Ranve, where they had

been initiated, Kurkarc travelled south yia

Annandale and followed the Georvina dawn to

Sroyder’s Lazoon. He went ou to the area near Twa

Wells Ausuranha. This was the country of the

Gounha people The biz Old Man Goanna was

resting in Wampirka katy ‘Goanna Shelter, also

known as ‘Slippery Swamp’, while the main camp

was by the small watercourse that comes in fren

‘Two Wells. Awrhari lay dawn to rest in a sheltered

place with a few coolibah trees, a site which Mick

MeLean called TheRumani, U is an unusual little

grove, being right alongside a sandhill whieh Linda

calls Kuti-Kubmart ‘Swan Blood’. Two bays fram

the camp played around on this sandhill throwing

boomerangs, pieking (hem up again and then

throwing then? again, One of (heron (threw his

boomerang into the litte grove and just hil

Kurkari § tose as he tay there: green snakes still have

a peculiarlooking snub nose. As the boys came Lo

pivk up their boomerang they saw Aurkeri there

with bis strange face and huge long hairy — said to

be at lease four metres long — holding thelr

buomerang in his hand. Territied, they ran away,

He called our to them in Neamini:

Kanku-kulj, Kanku-kuli kanji

Boys-twa, bovs-1Wwo I

Wata parnda-ny neana!

Not alfaid-BRG he!

Karna!

man!

LOCATING ABORIGINAL SITES 1d

‘Eh you two boys, eh! | am a man! Don't be

frightened of me!’

They ran and ran, and he came runmoy after them,

still calling out and still holding their boomerang.

The bays didn’t look back und when they got home

they told everybody that a strange-logking ereature

had arrived, nhuyu, nus churn!

Kurkari slowed down, sill following them. He

came to the top of a sandhill, and looked down on

the Goanna camp. In the evening the Goanna

people had a big ceremony with beautiful girls

dancing. Kurkuri became infatuated with two af the

girls. As he sat (here on the sandhill he swallowed

his spiule and his eyes went white (a standard

deseription of extreme lust) as he watched them

dancing, This was at Two Wells, Awtjurunha.

Kurkari called oul to the two xirls in their language,

Neamini:

Neanjt rhankarea kapukupu ngalthimpara

1 girl secking bachelor

warriiha-ngundu nganjt nhuwa kapukapu

alar- from i wile seeking

wapa-rna wara yi.

come-participle auxiliary.

‘L have come from afar, as a bachelor seeking

a wife’

Nobody took any notice of him, so he called out

to the two boys that he had seen before:

Kardi-mari-pit

Brother in law-pair-emphatic!

‘Eh, my two brothers in law!!

They answered:

Wibma nualkt-lha!

Corroboree dance-lul!

‘We are having a corroborec!’

They were asking him to come and watch the

corrohoree, He answered:

AA! nganyt kuthari-vil

AblL I being Lired-present

‘Lam too tired!’

Kuthari-yi — nganji wap-rna wurayl

Tired-present | come-participle auxiliary

mankarra kapukapu avalthimpara

girls seeking bachelor.

‘Lam tired, | have come fram afar, a bachelor

looking for girls!’

Nobody else paid the slightest attention ta him.

They all went on with their ceremony. Aurkari knew

the women would have to go down to a small

waterhole to gel water the next day, so overnight

he started to dis a tunnel beneath the track leading

there, and he lay hidden there, The next day people

from the camp all came to ger waren They came

and Went, they made many trips. He walched them

and he watched the sun. The two girls he fancied

were the last, they came on their tinal (rip rear sun-

down, He crawled out of the tunnel and as they

came he grabbed them. He tied then up with his

lony, hair and carried one on his head and one on

his back. He pul a spell on ther to lull them to

sleep, and varried them off to Milkipalanha Swamp

(Lake Milkapurda),

The spell made the older girl go to sleep

altogether; she died, leaving just Kurkar/ and the

younger girl, bur she too died at the Swamp,

suffocated by his long hair. Betore the two girls died

Kurkuari had a (rernendous time. It was too much

for him and he collapsed', All chree are still there

asa set of rocks in the Mi/kipulanha swamp.

Acvording to Linda Crombie one large red rock,

which represents the Erotic Green Snake, looks like

aman lying dawn with one knee bent upwards. His

long black bair is also visible as black soil among

the rocks.. Anyone sulfering from baldness can go

there and rub himself with same of the sail and it

is said that he will grow Jugurious hair like

Kurkari's, The girls are there, in one version as rocks

and in anether as prickly ngamo-ngama busties.

AKurkari ulimacely revived. He left the swamp and

ended up as a rock on the west bank of the

Diamantina at Makupulkini, atter he bad ‘lost all

his front part’ on account of his activities.

This myth was one of the most populad among

the people on the eastern side of Lake Eyre. P,

Austin recorded a brief outline of ii fram Leshe

Russell, a Wangkangurru man who also spoke

Diyari, in 1974, The songs that originally belonged

to the myth have been lost, except for the five lines

transcribed by Reuther in his version of ihe story:

There was however, at the turn of the century, at

old man at (he Killalpaninna Mission who was in

spirit transported to important places ir the Lake

Eyre Basin and was ‘given’ songs about them. He

in turn passed the songs on to Leslie Russell and

his brother Jimmy who sany them int the 1960s, One

of the verses belongs to the Green Snake. tt contains

the Diyari word kapirri ‘goanna’ aud the phrase

minha thutju (what serpent is this’), identical in

Diyari and Nyamini, ullered by the terrified

Ngamini Goanna-boys,

Kapirrereé

Amminhinga thutjangera

Minhdngera Ifiijungera

Kapingere nginée

Minhangera thuljungera

Kapingere ringerée

Minhangera thutjungera

Kapirr , , -

Goannas (yay)

Whar serpent is this’!

Whar serpent is this?

Goannas indeed

Whal serpent is this?

Goannas indeed

What serpent is this?

Goanna —.

1h L.A. HERCUS & V, POTEZNY

Reuther’s version of the myth and that told to

L. Hereus by Wangkangurru people sixty years later

corroborate and elucidate each other in many Ways.

For exaniple, the allernative names given by Reuther

to the Green Snake become meaningful in che

context Of the Wangkungurru story. Ngurapata’,

Which means “Camp in wet sand” jn both

Wangkangurru and Ngarnini, derives from the fact

thal Aurkuri lay in an underground tunnel near the

waterhole. The alternative name “Ngalltimpara’ also

becomes clear. The ordinary common noun

‘ngalthimpara’, ‘a young unmarried man in search

of a bide’ — which is whal Aurkari says about

himself over and over again — was evidently

interpreted by Reuther as a proper name. This

process is very commnion if (he Reuther manuscript:

many olf his names for Anceslors are either nouns

describing them or nicknames derived from what

they say. The expression ngaji naalthimpara’, ‘lam

a bachelor’, is the exclamation miost associated wilh

Aurkari. The Ancestor ‘Ngaltimpara’ is linked by

Reviher with Lake Milkapurda* There are even

rwo toas (105 and 178) belonging ta ‘Ngallimpara™.

These toas lead us to places, “Karlatierkini’ and

‘Dakungarangarannhi’, both of which appear on

Hillier'’s map a short distance north of ‘Kutjuru’,

ic, Two Wells: ‘Dakutgaranyara’ (Dukw-ngaru-

nara, ‘sandhill heart’), ‘the heart-shaped sandhill

named by Ngaltimparana’ is noted a shor distance

north-west of Karlaterkini. Bath are in the Two

Wells area and conlirm the location of the myth

as told by Wangkangurru people.

Some of Reurher’s comments in the place-names

volume intermesh with the traditions recorded front

Mick McLean and the Crombies. Thus Reuther’s

‘Judlajudlanja” tribe could immediately be

identified once we learnt from Mick MeLean that

Kurkari came from near the Toko Range. This. is

the country of the northern group of Wangkanmudla

people, Who, as Shown by Breen (J97t: 7) are

referred to as Llaolinja, Ulla-lalinya and

Yoolalnanya by Roth (1897), Curr (1886-87), W, G.

Field (1898) and R, HL, Mathews (1898) respeetively.

Tindale (1974) calls them Julaolinja, ‘Iudlajudlanja'

isa German spelling for the sume name, with the

prestopped / (Le. the pronunciation /) which a

Wangkangurru or Diyari speaker would have used:

‘The mysterious comurient by Retrther that the area

from where the Green Snake came was ‘the Province

of the Kunkuwalana’ (Divail Aarikusvurta-nha, the

Two Boys’) makes sense in the light of the

Wangkangurru traditions recorded aver the last lew

deeades. The long myth of “he Two Boys rom

Dalhousie’ goes through Sandringham and

Glenormiston. There are major Two Boys sites on

Sandringham, and the main ritual centn was

Thapuka, Ethabucea Spring, abou! 66 km porth-

west of Sandringham.

The elucidation is nol all one way. The srery-as

fold by Reuther bas a much more elaboraic

beginning: it relates the myth of the Green Snake

to Central Australian creation mythology and gives

ah added perspective al depth.

i The story of ‘Minalajerkinal the Aacesior who

nade bags

Reuther’s place-name entry na 1932 reads as

follows:

Tirpakurl, Naan.

Tirpa in D. = kajirt = ‘creek, watercourse’ kurli

inD. | mtandru = wo". Meaning: two creeks”

Marumakapurinté discavered two ereeks here

beiween tlre hills. He therefore named the place

accordingly.

There is no mention of any major myth in

connecion with this place.

In Volume X there appears the story of the

Ancestor ‘Minalajerkina’ We are told (p, 57):

Together with his wile he emerged out of the

earth al a place called Narani t— to chase away).

The place mentioned is situared on the Salt

Creek near the present waterhole af Ngapabulu,

Further down the page we read ‘he devaled humsell

to his inain and favourite occupation, making dilis

| bays).

There is no obvious connection between the iwo

entries, and On Keuther’s evidence we would have

little hope of finding the places imentioned.

Tirpakurl is shown, bul Narari does not seem to

appear on the Hillier map. The name ‘Ngapapulu’

is given ina location just north of Jarpawarili, Le

the Yelpawaralinna Warerhole south-east of Clilton

Hills, sonie considerable distance away,

Aboriginal |radirions can however belp us out of

this dilemma. In 1969 the late Mi¢k MeLean took

Graham and Luise Hercus to a double watertiole

in GoyderS Lavoon. He named the place Thirpe-

Avi} and te Showed us fhe ruins of the Old Lagovn

Homestead close by, [fe ioak us ro anerher channel,

not tar away to the east, to a waterhole whieh he

called Nharrani, ‘Severs Mile’ This was a place of

special significance to him, beesuse i was there that

lic had taken part in the big Mudlungua ceremony

in 1901 (Hercis }980), The descriptive detail given

by Reuther is tmSleading: there ave no Hills anywhere

in the yieinily. Thurpa-kul? is right in Geyder's

Lugoun and there is ouly sume slightly raised

ground between the channels.

In 1987, long after Mick McLean's dearh, Frank

abd Linda Crombie direcjed Viad Potezny, Luise

Hereus and Plyilip Jones to the same siles, to

Thieme-kili and jo Nharrani, Linda is of part

Worluyandi descent aid she koows the Yarlayandi

Swan History, In this story and song-cycle tle Swan

Woman gave presents of flour and meat to a man

LOCATING ABORIGINAL SITES \47

from Thirpu-kuli, He in turn gave her numerous

bags that he had made. She did not realise that they

contained lizards and potsanous snakes; she pul

them over her shoulder. The small child she was

carryim peered into one of the bags and was

immedialely bitten bya snake ‘Why is my baby so

quiet?’ she asked hersel! after a while — only to

find that the child was dead. She cursed the man

from Thirpa-kili. The Swan History fits in pertevtly

wilh Reuther’s myth of ‘Minnalajerkina’, the

Ancestor who made bags. Only Reuther’s mentian

of the wWaterhole called “Ngapa-pulu’, mear

Niurrani, remained unexplained. itis tempting to

Suggest that Reurher learned the mythand got the

place-names from eastern Wangkangurru people

who ised the transtation Ngapo-pula wo waters’

for Phirpa-kult.

The quality of Reuther’s informatian in other

volumes of fis great work leaves po doubt rhat he

was at_exceedingly careful writer. He painstakingly

recorded what he was told, knowing that much of

the raditional knowledge he put down would soon

disappear, Wf anything, he lacked imagination: he

did not improvise, As shown previously in

connection with sovs (Hercus 1987), there are

inconsistenvies between the volumes rather than

staieh! coarradictions. The meonsistencies with

repard ta place-names and myrioloey are so pret

tht they legve us with only cme explanation.

Routher wrote with the kind of dedication and

endurance that one Would assoqute with someone

who spends 18 years of his life in isolation from

the ourside world, iu che heat and discomfort and

often misery that was Killalpaninga, because he felt

(hal his wae his duty 10 God. He went painstakingly

ahead. He presumably asked his old advisers —

whom he never names (sec Jones & Sulton 1986;

52) — and simply wrote dawn whar they told him

wbour one myth. When they Mnished he did norask

for explanations or inmplications nor for exact

reference to places. He asked for another myth, and

then another. He numbered the sone verses and pul

them into a separate book in sequence. Though this

bouk Of verses is flow lost, information obtained

by 1. Hereus (rom the late Mick Mclean makes

it clear (iat Tese Verses were numbered in the

sequerice they were supe — a malter very impurtant

in Abotiginal recilation, and they were highly

accurately (ranseribed, but with major amissions.

Reuther ‘ploughed ihrough® tbe material he was

given. This is bow he wrote the volume on

mythology. When he wrote the place-ames volume

he presumubly asked tor names in certain areas —

the sequerive makes jl likely that he would get hold

of different xroups of people every evening for

weeks and Weeks and ask them about places in theit

aiea, and expece the answer ta conform to {he

formule ot tis entty:

a. What was che meaning of a place-name? Il

it was not in Diyari, what would be the Diyari

equivalent?

b. Why was it so called?

c&. Who pamed 1?

Aboriginal mythology js not an inventory of site-

related facts, it daes not explain every feature, it

highlighis importance features, IL creates @ vision:

chis has been brilliantly deseribed by T. G, A.

Strehlow for Akarlntjota in Lower Southern

Aranda country (Strehlow 1970: 134). In the same

way, looking at the rocky lulls near Mt Gason,

tradinonal people with their mind’s eye could sce

that these were the storm people from Coober Pedy

arriving from the south. They could look across lo

Two Wells and see the hills that are the Goanna

Girls, they could glance over to the sandhill near

the old bore and see the weeping Swan Woman, lost,

and carrying ler dead baby, There was more than

a vision, there was also music: as traditional people

looked at the landscape they could hear rhe songs

thal belonged there, Back in 1900 those old mer

had been summoned with a ‘cooee' and sal anid

unfamiliar surroundings in the study of Lhe

meticulous Reuther. Even with all their nostalgia

for {heir own sites they could not have conveyed to

him any concept of the vision or the music. He must

have gone on asking his three basic questions about

place after place: Notwithstanding the fact that he

was at Killalpaninna in the first place to stamp out

the rituals belonging to (he ‘heathens’, Reuther

showed extraordinary esteem and understanding lor

Aboriginal traditions. Under the clreumsrances he

could riot possibly have been expected to discover

which places were important for rituals; he could

not have been expecred to ask for instance whether

Prikiei (a waterhole on the Diamantina with a

Neamini name) was a major ritual centre where

ereal ceremonies had been taking place. He simply

asked what the name meant, and (hey cold him, IF

one is making a vast inventory, such as he was, lt

is equally dilfieult to discern which things are

relatively unimportant. A place need not have a

special significance, it peed Nol be connected with

any Ancestor, in other words not every named

Jocution was 4 Cotemic site, Places could simply have

names and even ifa greal Ancestor visited them the

name need nat have any relevance to him, Those

old men were obviously asked about the many

places that are not on the direct line of travel al

any Ancestor, but were in the general anca where

such an Ancestor had been. To the question ‘Wha

named ir?*, there was only one lagical wpe of

answer: ‘It must have been the Goanna mab‘, or

'Mirilirana’s mob’ and so forth. tt was. all detail;

the highlighting, the vision and the music hac gone,

as had we lively humour of the mythology, Ty is

important however, to remember that if it had not

148° 1_ A. HERCUS & V. POTEZNY

been for Reuther’s careful ad accurate

investigations much knowledge would have been

entirely lest,

PRACTICAL, DIFFICULTIES

The most obvious practical difficulty in finding

places by means of the Hillier map is that with the

exception of hills and lakes che names are wrilten

on the map, bul no actual location point is given.

We therefore cannot know what is bemg named,

whether il isa waterhole, a.small claypan, a sandhill,

oraswamp, The list of place-names does not always

help us here, and can in fact be misleading (Hercus

1987; 43), Sometimes a plave-name is shown twice

in an unmediately adjacent location, In the case of

‘Munkirra’ for example, one listing represents the

Moongara (Munkira) waterhole and another is the

site of the Moongara swamp, This fact can only be

learnt on the ground: there is sothing on the Hillier

map to indicate which is what, or why indeed the

name appears twice Moreover, since there is Wo dot

to show the precise point, we cannol know whether

the place is lo be found near the centre, near the

beginning, or at the end of the written name This

makes quite.a difference when one is dealing with

a 1: 500 000 map; as R, 8S, Wilson has pointed our

in his thests (I98T> 6), a name van be spread over

15 Kilometres. If is therefore inevitable that a -small

site or a buried) prjkiri well ip the Simpson Desert

would he qearty imposmble ta lind by means of the

data on the map

The seeond problein is chat i the area which was

known best ta Reuther and Hillier, namely the

Lower Cooper and (6 a lesser extent the

Diainantina, the writing is so crowded thar the exact

location of & plave bevares most uncertain,

alchough if is precisely mi thease areas that the imap

is reasenably accurate. The further one goes into

desert county and whe further one goes from

Killalpaninna rhe wiore inaccurate the locations,

The Simpson Deéserr was largely unexplored by

Europeans al the beginning of the century and i

ty not surprising thac Hillier Simply gave up here.

He has writren ina long column of names which

afe tol in any geographical sequence Recent work

in the Simpsan Desert makes this clear (Hercus &

lark 1987). Even those names which are not in the

hig column appear ta be random in this areas for

instance Mud/alumba, ®Karlalumba’, which is the

northernmost well in South Avetialia, is shawn

about (50 km south-west of its carrer lacurion.

Some places are given twice, both in che column

and in the more dispersed listing: “lgdalnea’ and

‘Jatalnga’ ( Yotalknge, the Gounna totemic cefire

of the western Simpson Desert), IL would have been

physically impossible to put these names accurately

on a map Where even the big salt-lakes were as yel

not marked, The lower Macumba, the Kallakoopah

and the lower Diamantina were also not well known

to surveyors. For these reasons it is not surprising

rhat the great Fish and Crane toremic centre al

Payanta, ‘Pajanta’, appears on the Kallakoopah

instead of the Diamantina, and Pultjaru, ‘Buldjala’,

is Wrillen some 60 kn cast of where it should be.

Sometimes, though rarely, in Aboriginal traditions

two places have the same name, but this could

hardly be an explanation tor all these highly

inaccurate logations. The inaccuracy was inevitable

because of the slate of non-Aboriginal geoyraphical

Knowledge at the curn of the century,

The far south-western corner of the Hillier map,

where mare geographical features were known (ao

Europeans at the lime, was 4 considerable distance

frottt Killalpaninna. Nol even the creeks are marked

here and we would have oo hope af Sinding any of

the places if, for instance, we did not know from

the late Mick McLean, Arthur McLean and Brian

Marks that Mar/ipara, ‘Warlijera’ was the Stuart

Creek Station walerhole, that Peparla ‘Head’ was

a walerhole immediately to the south-west and that

Thidnapirri, ‘Tidnapiri' (‘Toenail’) shown.as some

10 to 15 km away to the north-east was a small

walerhole close by; the body parts refer ro the story

of the Dead Woman from Stuart Creek. We could

guess that “Walkararana’, ‘She is sorry’, refers.to the

Walcarina Spring, but nothing other than the

surviving traditions could tell us that Urkardw.

Kurdi-parraparra ‘Ulatukadiparapara’ (‘Long frit

of the wild melon creeper’) was the name of Pound

Creek, nor that ‘hudnangamba’, ‘Guts’, was a spring

by the North Creek near Curdimurka (Hereus

1976),

In order fo demenstrate the difficulties of the

Willer map we willvake just a small area which was

reasonably well know by Europeans at the ture

of the cenrury, iamely Andrewilla, south of

Hinisville on the Diamantina River. We have

compiled a map of sires in this area (Pig. 2) on the

inlornativn ayallable to us up to date in order to

compare it with the Hillier map (Fig. 1). Ou

information comes from Linda Crombie and the

late Frank Crombie who have spent their lives in

this country and know it intimately. le was in Us

general lovation that tle Hiller map was

particularly perplexing.

I| has been assumed thac Hillier based his map

On ai existi pastoral map, as these were the

arliese map) produced of the far north of South

Australia lo show the distribution of pastoral leases,

For this reason a slightly more recent pastoral map

of the same scale was shown as the base of a

coliiparalive map to show the location of sites

documented by Hercus and Potezny Prominenm

hills or high spots (indicated by small triangles on

LOCATING ABORIGINAL SITES Wav

both maps) are in near identical positions on both

maps. Prominent hills were accurately located by

explorers and surveyors fronm the earliest days uf

Evropean colonisation, The most conspicuaus

difference between the ovo maps is the outline of

drainage indicaled on the Hillier map,

The Lower Diamantina in South Australia

consists of a Main channel with numerous minor

channels in a yery broad foedplain, The man

cWaniel eventually divides hefore emptying intra

Goyder's Lagoon, an extensive lignum swamp,

Further to the west the channels of whar is locally

called rhe ‘Georgina’ (the lower Mulligan River of

rhe maps) empty into the same Floadplain. Access

to sites within che floodplain has over recent years

been difficult with unseasonal rains and subsequent

high water levels, Then, in the dry, access has alsa

been hampered by extensive crabhole' country and

deeply scoured channels. Ar the turn af the century

travel by Europeans in this area would bave been

4 daunting task Indeed, Journeys that now rake days

would have taken many months with attendant

logistical problears. We can therelore take it for

ranted that neither Hillier wor Rearher could have

trad the time or means.té visit the majority of places

around Andrewilla {hat are listed on the Hiller

map.

The Crombies pointed out and named numerous

plices from a distance, Qn account of their

uncertain location, these places have nol been

meluded of our map, I order ro establish a sohed

basis for companson only sites whose position Is

accurately Known are listed. Because of difficulties

of avcess the only portion of the Diamantina that

has been mapped in any great detail is che weslern

side of the main channel for Some 15 km-sourh from

the junedon of the Andrewilla channel. This has

produced virtually a name for each bend of the

river, and most af the prominem dunes and water-

holes on minor channels, From information ou sites

which have not had their exact locations verified,

it appears Thal a corresponding density of place-

ames will occur lor the remainder af [the

Noodpiain, This would correspond to the density

of s{tes listed on the Hillier map.

Practical considerations lead ws to think thar

there were four categories of sites on rhe Hillier

may

1, Places within teasonable reach ot

Killalpavinna Mission, along the old

Kolamuriria track and the souctern portion of

the Birdsville Track which Reuther and ‘or Hiller

are likely 1o have been able to visit personality.

2 Places with Aboriginal names that were

shown on the pastoral map: these are mainly the

prominent features mentioned above, such as

hills and lakes.as well as same very conspicuous

waterholes such as “Cipaminka’ and ‘Kandiniie,

3, Places tor which Aboriginal people were able

to supply series al names in lines of travel or

following watercourses in areas where European

geographical knowledge was adequate for

reasonably accurate posilioning on maps:

4, Places for which Aboriginal people were —

as always — able io supply series of names in

sequence, but where European knowledge was

so inadequate that the names simply appear as

lists or are just put ii & general location.

Sites of (he categories 2 and 4 are to be found in

the section of the Hillier map centred on the

Andrewilla region.

On Hillier’s map the Georgina channels look as

if they had no sites on them, There are, however,

four colurmns. of names runing parallel to jhe

floodplain of the Diamantina, The westernmost

column contains near the toy some sites that arc

on the Diamantina channel. such as the Neape-

neandaka waterhole. Aunti-purru, “Kandiburu'

(Waddy haying’) js the name of a sandhill which

(with some interruptions) peaches from a few

kilometres east of the Georgia [o the Eleanor

channel of the Diamantina; the Black Snake

ancestor travelled alang this sandhill carrying a

waddy, All the sites listed below ‘Randiburu’ betong

not to he Diamantina, but to the various Georgina

channels, Linda Crombie recognised every single

name in the column and said ‘Thatjs all Georgina

country”. The few ames that do appear on modern

maps canfirm her view. The people Who gave the

original information obviously imagined themselves

travelling along the Georgina and named the places

accordingly. The list includes different channels:

‘Kudnuku' for inslance is a waterhole on a separate

outlying western channel of the Georgina and is the

Koonakao waterhole on modern maps, while

‘Karavi’, the Karachie waterhole of modern maps,

ison an quilying eastern channel. This westernmost

list includes the mayor Aboriginal habitation sites

for the Georgia west and soult af the Auari-purry

sandhill, le is absolutely Aborivinal-oriented and

does nol ilelude the warerhole at Old Alton Dawns

on the Georgia which had the rather common

name Dikirr, ‘Canegrass’; another Bixieri, the one

on the western braneh of the Diamantina, appears

roughly in its right location, Similarly the second

colurnn which contains names of places on the

Eleanor channel of the Diamantina does not

mention the large Karathunka watertiole

Karathinka was well known to Europeans and hid

been [he site of a polive camp since the mid-1880s,

it seems almost as if, in the case of Old Alton

Downs, Aboriginal people had purposely ignored

European habitations. The location of the Georgura

sires in a column, away [Tom the channels where

they should be, clearly indicates thal these were sites

of the fourth category: European eecographical

150) L, A, HERCUS & V. POTEZNY

knowledge was as yet inadequate lor their accurate

location.

The main Diamantina channel looks as if it had

no sites onit, ough some of the names in the third

column belong ta i, The situation with all the

Diamantina sites is perplexing. Some of the sites

are in he position where we would expect to find

them. These are largely sites of calegory no. 2,

which correspond to prominent features, like Lake

Etamunbanie (Hillier’s ‘idalimanpa’), Ovher sites

are in the position relative to each other where we

would expect to find them, but not in a geographic-

ally accurate position. Examples are:

Negapa-manha, ‘Bad Water’, the Appamurna

walerhole of modern maps, Located on the edge

of Lake Etamunbanie, this was the site of ihe

old Minnie Downs station (Jones in prep.). Ou

the Hillier map it appears far to the south of

its location us docs the nearby Kuniwardunha,

Kuniwatatana sandhill. They are exactly where

we would expect to find [her in-position relative

jo each other:

Thadna-pulu-thintjini, “Tanabulutindi’, and

Yabmatkira, ‘Jamakirta® (the Old Clilton Hills

Station). These sites are shown at about the right

distance and direction from each other in the

second and third column, but far to the south

of their true location.

A humber of other sites area long way from where

we would expect them. This applies for instance to

Thirithayinha Tititjina (‘Dog-swallowing"

waterhole — a reference to an incident jn the story

of the Rainbow Snake) which, according fo the

evidence of the Crombies, isin fact close to Pandie

Pandie, and immediately south of Payva-wut/u,

‘Pajawutw’ (‘Blind Bird’), though nat as yet mapped

by us. Neantji-karint is even further misplaced far

to the east of Goyder’s Lagoon, though there is of

course always a Chance (hal it may refer to another

site of the same name.

All these are examples of sites of category 4,

where both the Aboriginal informants and Hillier

made a valiant effort ta position the sites, but

European geographical knowledge was simply not

detailed and accurate enough, This can take nothing

away from the fact that the map remains a unique

and brilliant piece of Work; Hilherand Reuther have

come close to achieving the near impossible of

showing so many siles In Such near-aceurate general

Jocations despite the impossibility of visidug them.

We must be reconciled however to the situation that

without additional information from archival

sources or from knowledgeable Aboriginal people

the niap can not be used to locate otherwise

unknown Aboriginal sites on fhe ground,

Notes on Orthography

In this paper a practical orthography has been

used for Aboriginal words as recorded, and writien

in italies.

Plasive consonants other than the rétroflex

plosive have been written as unvoiced (k, p. ih, t,

but prestoppéd consonants have been written with

voiced plosives as this corresponds nitost closely with

the pronunciation, hence hm, dn, dnh, dnj, dl, dlh.

Retroflexes have been written as7 + Consonant,

hence: r/is retroflex /, rn is retroflex a, rd is retroflex

Interdentals have been written as consonant 4 fi,

hence nh, th, IA.

Palatals have been written as Consonant + /

hence 4, nf, [j, and ng has been used for velar rn.

The three r-sounds have been transcribed as

follows: y = the alveolar flap, rr ~ the trilled 1,

R « retroflex r,

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

We aie indebled to P. Austin for his advice and for

correcting the translation of the Neamini sentences.

ENDNOTES

|. The old men apparently did not like telling Reuther

about this, and he says in his version (Volume X; 122) Why

Marikilla died the legend does not say’.

2. Reuther (Volume VIL: 1001) says thar the name

‘Milkipata’ is Wangkangurru and that it comes from milks

‘cVe’ and pose ‘clay, dict’, and suys alyo- that it was (he name

both of the place and of an Ancestor, who smeared the

clay on his face in order to approach some waterbirds to

within throwing distanee, ‘When Ngeltimpura met up here

with Milkipata, he said to him: Prrnervlai fidni milkipata

“Oh venerable old man, your eyes are still dirty”. That

gave rise to the maming of this place.” The words muki

‘eve’ and para “wet soil’ are shared by Neamini and

Wangkungurru, The place is certainty not in

Wangkangurru country, and ihe Ancestor was talking, in

Neamini,

LOCATING ABORIGINAL SITES 151

REFERENCES

AUSTIN, P. 1981. ‘A Grammar of Diyari, South Australia’.

University of Cambridge Press, Cambridge.

BREEN, J. G, 1971. Aboriginal languages of Western

Queensland. Linguistic Communications no. 5.

Monash University, Melbourne.

CURR, E. M. 1886-87. ‘The Australian Race: Its Origin,

Languages, Customs, Place of Landing in Australia,

and the Routes by which it Spread Itself over that

Continent’, 4 vols. Government Printer, Melbourne.

FIELD, W. G, 1898. U-la-linya Tribe, Sandringham

Station, yocabulary. Science of Man 1(3): 60.

HERCUS, L. A. 1976. ‘The Story of Gudnangamba’. The

Author, Adelaide.

HERCUS, L. A. 1980, How we danced the Mudlungga.

Memories of 1901 and 1902. Aboriginal History 4(\):

5-31.

HERCUS, L, A, 1987. Just one Toa. Rec. S. Aust. Mus,

20: 59-69.

HERCUS, L. A. & CLARK, P. 1987. Nine Simpson Desert

Wells. Archaeol, Oceania (Papers presented to John

Mulvaney) 21: 51-60.

JONES, P. G. in prep. Ngapamanha: A case-study in the

population history of north-east South Australia,

JONES, P. G. & SUTTON, P. S. 1986. ‘Art and Land.

Aboriginal Sculptures of the Lake Eyre Region’. South

Australian Museum, Adelaide.

JOHNSTON, T. H. 1943. Aboriginal names and utilisation

of the fauna in the Eyrean Region. Trans. Soc. S. Aust,

67; 244-311.

MATHEWS, R. H. 1898. Divisions of Queensland

Aborigines. Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. 37: 327-336.

REUTHER, J. G. 1981. ‘The Diari’. Vols. 1-13. Translated

by the Reverend P. A. Scherer. Vol. 5 trans, T.

Schwarzchild & L. A. Hercus, ed. L. A. Hercus &

J.C. Breen; notes by P. Austin. AIAS microfiche no.

2. Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, Canberra.

REUTHER, J. G. & Strehlow, C. 1897. ‘Testamenta

Marra’. [New Testament, in Diyari]. Auricht, Tanunda.

ROTH, W. E. 1897, ‘Ethnological Studies among the

North-West Central Queensland Aborigines’.

Government Printer, Brisbane.

STREHLOW, T, G. H. 1970, Geography and the tolemic

landscape in Central Australia, a functional study. Jn

R. M. Berndt (Ed.). ‘Australian Aboriginal

Anthropology’. University of Western Australia Press

(for Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies), Perth,

TINDALE, N. B. 1974. ‘Aboriginal Tribes of Australia’.

University of California Press, Berkeley and Los

Angeles.

WILSON, R. S. 1981. Geography and the totemic

landscape — the Dieri case: A study of Dieri social

organisation including territorial organisation. B.A,

Hons thesis, University of Queensland, St Lucia.

THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM’S NITRATE NEGATIVE COPYING

PROJECT

P. G. JONES

Summary

The photographic collections of the South Australian Museum’s Anthropology Archive have

accumulated over the course of a century. As well as documenting the activities of staff on various

expeditions, these collections in two main regions, the islands of the western Pacific and within

Australia itself. The Australian photographic collections are by far the largest component of the

Archive: over 60, 000 of the approximately 70, 000 images dating mainly from the 1880s are from

this country.

THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUMS NITRATE NEGATIVE COPYING PROJECT

The photographic callections of the South

Australian Museum’s Anthropology Archive have

aveumulated over the course of a century. As well

as documenting the activities of staff on various

expeditions, these collections reflect the diversity

of the Museum's anthropolegy collections in twa

main regions, the islands of the western Pacific and

within Australia itsell.. The Austrilian photographic

collections are by far the largest component of the

Archive: over 6(),000 of the approximately 70,000

images daling mainly from the [880s are [rom this

country.

Sinee being assembled as a single archival

collection during the 1970s, the photographs have

been subject to two main organisational and

cataloguing operations. The first occurred during

1979-80, when an archivist was employed to

organise the Anthropology Archives according to

prolessional archival principles. This project

resulted in the successful cataloguing of the bulk

of all atchival manuscripts, sound tape, cine film,

works on paper, and phorographs reveived up until

that time, Aseriesof ‘AA? (Anthropology Archive}

numbers was applied (0 the individual collections,

and material was catalogued and shelved according

10 this numbering system. Filing cabiners were used

10 store fhe extensive collections of loose prints and

negatives, comprising original material and capies.

A programme td generate copy pegatives and prints

from the latge series of glass negatives was largely

completed during, the deeade following the initial

project.

A second phase of organisation began during

1989 and will continue al least until {he mid-1990s.

This involves the separation of negatives from prints

in & new storage system ol archivally-sound

photograph albums, developed in consultation with

the Stale Conservalion Centre The accessibility of

the photographic collection to researchers and stalf

has already been tremendously improved through

tis project. It has alsa enabled much preater

Opportunities for evaluating the present

conservation status of the collection and its

ilividual parts,

Il was while undertaking this second phase that

an extremely large proportion of celtujose-mitrate

based negatives was identified, dispersed

throughout the photographic collection. Advice

from the State Conservation Centre confirmed that

(hese neparives Would eventually degrade,

(threatening the resi of the collection with toxic

fumes and posing the threat ol possitle seit

izninion. As overseas examples have shown, a fire

involving nitrate stock can he potentially disastrous,

as the burning material generates ifs own oxygen

wid cannor be extinguished by convennional means,

The necessity for immediate action to deal with

this dilemma was apparenm. The Museum Board

provided funds in the First instance, ro emplay a

person to isolate all nitrate negatives fram the

archive collections and to interleave (he individual

negalives with acid-Iree Ussue paper This was

successfully achieved with a number of smaller

collectians toralling some 12,000 images, while a

separale Sinule collection (the W.D. Walker

collectian) comprising about 8,000 nitrate images

was carefully inspected.

Given the potential stare of degradation of nivate

negatives, (he collections were found to be still in

exiremely good condition, with very few exceptions.

OV the possible seven or cighl stages ol

decomposition, the great majoriiy have reached

only the stage of discolouration or silvering on the

emulsion surface, Nevertheless, bearing in mind that

(he decornposition process can accelerare and is still

unpredictable, it was decided to apply to the Federal

Department of Aboriginal Affairs (now

reconstituted as the Aboriginal and Torres Serail

Islander Cammissian) for a grant to enable the most

significant images to be copied onta safety film. We

were extremely fortunale in beiny awarded a gran|

of $20,000 from the Department in April 1989. An

equivalent sum was also awarded by the Department

for the Museum's programme of consultations

about secret-sacred malerial with Central Australial

Aboriginal communities.

With this grant the Museum was able to employ

a qualified photographer, Scott Bradley, for six

months on the project. Scott worked under the

direction of the Museum's photographer, Trevoy

Peters, who had undertaken research on the problem

and had devised the most effective and cost-efficient

method of transferring the images. This valved

re-photographing the newatives onto Agfa safety-

base film, archivally processed fo Amerigan

National Standards Jostitute specifications (ANSH)

to produce positive 2.25 sy. inch transparencies.

These Were then cul into strips of three and stored

within polypropylene Sleeves in custom-made

albums, for eventual vertical storage mm filing

cabinets. Once these copied images have been

calalogued and incorporated within the

Anthropology Arehives, they will be available for

stall aod external use

The copying project has heen a myjor success.

The initial estimate of about 50 processed images

per dav was eXceeded by 50%, and a final total of

almost 10,000 images has been copied. This has left

4 balance of a similar number requiring the same

treatment, bur we are oplitnistic about oblaming

the ncvessary support ter chis, following the success

of the initial projeec.

154 P. G. JONES

A variety of photographers and their collections

have been represented in the work so far completed.

Examples include:

— George Aiston Collection. Photographs from the

Birdsville Track region, taken during the 1920s and

1930s, depicting traditional Aboriginal activities as

well as themes of station life, transport and the

landscape.

— Cecil Hackett Collection, Hackett mastered the

use of the pocket Kodak and his 1920s and 1930s

photographs document several anthropological

expeditions to Central and Western Australia.

— Aborigines’ Friends’ Association. This collection

includes the photographs taken by Ernest Kramer,

a non-denominational evangelist who travelled into

the heart of Pintupi and Loritja country to the

north-west of Alice Springs during the 1920s and

1930s.

= Edgar Waite Collection. Waite was Director of

the South Australian Museum from 1914-29. His

photographs cover a series of Museum expeditions

during the period, including the 1916 expedition by

camel to the north-east of South Australia.

— Norman B. Tindale Collection. Part of a larger

collection, these nitrate negatives were produced by

Tindale during the course of several Central

Australian expeditions,

— Rex Battarbee Collection, This recently acquired

collection includes some beautifully composed

images of Central Australian landscapes and much

important documentation of the Hermannsburg

Mission.

— William D. Walker Collection. This huge

collection of over 8,000 images contains a large

component documenting Walker’s 1927-28 journey

through Central Australia, travelling in his Model

Ford. The collection is supplemented by his own

and his wife's detailed diaries.

Until quite recently it has been accepted practice

for archives to destroy their original nitrate

Negatives once the images have been safely

transferred to copies. Research indicates that if a

collection of nitrate stock is in a stable condition,

and is undisturbed by variations in temperature or

humidity, it may well last satisfactorily for many

more years, In the case of the South Australian

Museum's collection, which still appears to be in

excellent condition despite it dating to more than

fifty years ago, there is every reason (o atlempl lo

preserve it in the same state. A positive image

obtained from the original negative will always be

superior in every way to that obtained from a

second-generation copy. The intention, therefore,

is to store the nitrate collection in a secure, off-site

location with confrolled conditions of temperature

and humidity.

The importance of preserving this unique series

of photographie collections in its original form will

be apparent to a large public audience in 1991, A

selection of images from five of the nitrate

collections — photographs by S. A. White, G.

Aiston, W. D. Walker, E. Kramer and R. Battarbec

- will be included in a major photographic

exhibition at the South Australian Museum, titled

‘Images of the Interior’,

P. G. JONES, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, South Australia S000, Ree

S. Aust. Mus, 24(2): 153-154, 1990,